Home

NEC nd-20292 User's Manual

Contents

1. t lelt 51 Ixixixixixixixixixi R N e t mlel 21211 11111 300 30 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 ITEL Selects station to be programmed F W Forward Increments station number ENTER Enters assignment to each station Backward Decrements the station number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED 2 18 2 1 levels See Step 5 NOTES PKR ine 06 5 81 2 181 86 1 During step 4 the display shows the current assignment of the station 1 9 2 DIGIT CODE FEATURE 1 Prime Line 2 Ringing Line 3 AE 4 SLT CO Prime Line F2 Fa 3 For 6 and ETE 6D Multiline Terminal LK 1 6 should be used For SLTsLK 1 should be used Pd Md LJ Ed INTE 4 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to increment to the next station number 5 Ringing line preference takes priority over prime line when both are assigned E E El E F E GLE E E E E E 6 SLT CO Prime
2. 5 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 6 Repeatsteps 4and 5 for all VMI ports to be assigned to the Voice Mail Hunt Group See Note 3 7 Depress key to go back on line 800 110 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED PROGRAMMED 283 24 TO PROGRAMMED ________ 283 284 421 284 4C1 24 CPU levels NOTES 1 After step 3 the display will show any previous assignment 2 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to increment to the next extension number p 3 maximum of 4 VMI port extension numbers programmed into the voice mail hunt Lu n 4 GENERAL INFORMATION VOICE MAIL HUNT GROUP ASSIGNMENT i 1 i This area of the memory block is used to assign VMI port extension numbers to the Voice Mail Hunt Group i Lf no VMI E ETU is installed memory block 4C1 should be programmed BEFORE 2C4 i i i i i 4 300 111 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2C5 DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F2 then F8 3 Depress F15 4 Enter the t
3. 1151 9 JA c c Jolr Jolrieli vis 112 2 Depress F3 then F7 4 Enter number of digits for the Forced Account Codes Example 12 See Note 2 5 Depress ENTER key F A c c See Note 3 101 1511 61111151 112 6 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 144 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE SPKR ON OFF Line TEL Select number of Forced Account Code digits ENTER Enters each assignment GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE PROGRAMMED 107 or higher NOTES _ HAAA Ds 21 02 x e i55 es is C Gar see moo ex Cel wj 1 During step 3 any previous value already set is displayed 2 Forced Account Code digit count assignment is 1to 13digits Default assignment is 10 digits Ce 3 Fl Boe 3 cm HEB 2 3 A change in the number of digits cannot be made unless all the previous Forced Account Code entries are cleared first at an Attendant position E E EI E E I e E i GENERAL INFORMATION FORCED ACCOUNT CODE DIGIT ASSIGNMEN
4. 0 2 elxiri1 alo 6 m o oe 2 Depress F2 then F7 3 Depress F14 4 Enter the trunk number to be assigned 01 40 Example Trunk 2 See Note 1 5 Enter the extension or station hunting number to be assigned to the chosen trunk Example Extension 140 See Note 3 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 7 Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for each DIT trunk required or depress TEL to assign a specific trunk 8 Depressing LK16 alternates the display between DAY and NIGHT modes m o ole elx Tix x x x 9 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 90 0 20292 SEPTEMBER 1988 D A Decrements trunk number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING IMEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED 283 NOTION po D 65 Bie 2 2 M wr sz s sa iss CPU EB2 or higher NOTES 1 There is no default assignment but any previous extension number that was set will be displayed we Gee 2 Depressing the ENTER key will increment the
5. NIVIN NN3W AJIGOW 01 NIV 321 OL RN AdIGOW 3515390 34925380 339253 30 lt NIVW 821 OLNUNLIY Sv 31891 31891 31871 Agon 0149253 349253 9381534 123135 53 123135 231000 NIVIN 21 3200 NaN said pine Wis Sui 133135 01 123135 uaamyaq gt e3eQ nN3W NIV 3214 ale OL 1220 Tuvi 4 paido 8 123135 OENMII 3H steed 014 12101 3 321091 NIWW 821 34955330 31220 peido si 31871 4 ovol 9301534 4 QvO1NAOG 5 3313 OLNYNLJY INVu9VIO MOT 4 1V33N39 9861 HOW VW LULdviHo 26205 Examples are provided below 1 Selecting a function from the LCR Main Menu e With the LCR Main Menu displayed Depress 4 then CR RETURN key The program for Modify is loaded from the floppy disk and the display shown is provided At this time any table to be down loaded can be chosen NOTE Only one table can be loaded into the computer at a time This applies to all functions 2 Selecting a table from a function menu With the Modify Menu displayed
6. 2441 uorstazadns aut 941 NOILdINOS3G 6 1 9313730 38 OLSLIDIG 30 0238 SYJLIWVYVYd 5NITVNDIS ANY ANY 7 71 30 532018 SNOILINULSNI 2345 SOF 318 008 sur oti n ES wo our e eur eu Ww Wa 5 1 OL avis NNOLVIG 38 OLSLIDIG SLIDIC 40 LINVISIG aLVIGANWI QNOOSS dnoud INSWNDISSV 165 1 1840 4 LIDIA amp SINOL IVIG 3INITITL 2 39 INGANDISSV 3d AL INITIL Su313WVWuVd 9NITVNDIS ANY 7 71 20 12018 AHOIW3IN SINSWGWONI GNOOSS NISQNOO3S 85 2 gt SGNOO3S 82 2 54 092856 1 SLNSINHHONI NOOS3S I NISQNOOSS F1 Do GNOOS 1 SINSWGINONIUSUIQ0 SU 0029 0 SLN3ASHONI 5106 Su 097 Suge n SLNSIWSSHONI I NLISQNOOSS C 1 2 SLNSGHONI 7881 009 NI SINOO3IS 2 0 SANOIS 51 0 GINSWSHONI 88306 580408 0 061 850281 0 AVTA 304 LUVLS SLNAWSYONI 5906 Su 0281 0 SLNSASHONI 554061 St 028 0 XSLNSINHONI GNOO3S I Ni ZL Z SLNSWSHONISU 009 NI SaNOO3SS 5 0 SINOO3S 0 SLNAWAYONI 591009 Su 0002
7. Depress F4 then F10 E 2 4 111421 Depress F14 Dial the number of the Trunk Group 1 8 to be 2 1 assigned Example Trunk Group 1 See Note 1 eiRjolulpei1 Depress L1 L16tosetthe required timingpa rameters to the selected Trunk Group See Note 2 Depress ENTER key See Note 3 tli Tz ETAT TT Repeat steps 4 thru 7 for all Trunk Groups associated with TLI E to be programmed Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 222 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE B W Decrements Trunk Group number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE BE PROGRAMMEO 2c1 4 1 4 2 4 3 4 5 4 6 4 1 CPU EB or higher NOTES 1 After a trunk group has been selected L1 L16 will show the previous assignments CJ 2 Timing Parameters Ds Pre Pause time 1 Pause time 500 5 x 2 E rm EXE m 4 Pd L4 Cw gt
8. 1 LI 12101 11 gt E 01515121 __ 01515 6 lt ixixix T e R M mjojol js Ljo T iciui sia 2 112101 cjojuiN T 300 244 ore ENTER Enters the clear command B W Decrements port device number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED CPU EB3 or higher NOTES 1 During step 3 the terminal error count device is displayed as xxx on the bottom row of the LCD Up to 255 errors be displayed 2 After depressing the CLEAR key and then the ENTER key the number of terminal errors are cleared GENERAL INFORMATION TERMINAL CHECK i This area of the memory block is used to record erroneous PRW s of port devices including ESI EA and ESI EB ETUs i This information check
9. jespueu 371103 3194 st yeg Jury 10 2 310A 5 BIG euoj 195 20 euo Asng 2 uorsuajxe dag YO st peyeroosse 394 SSA 941 Sursse1dop uauM ALON 181 03 251 e y 18 910 Burs 10 9 28 560 e SUT NW 16 sr 9884 3910A Buu 6509 10 peurure1301d Sga ayy 889 48 e 9uo 94192910 YT e Kay eui 5594490 e 1917 18151 11910 19191 o iren p 5 11 18151 144910 19191 10 alisi 191 13 1 SNOILVOIGNI 1 Lger A Inr Vy HELdVHO 56205 0 SxurA qH 99948 Li 00 PION exuta 1371 99948 20 39144 5832494 e 20 821deq e 51 1371 98228 1 1189 on 78 8 1 aut eurgad Aq peyard o3 1182 10
10. 4 Enterthe device number 1 6 ofthe DSS BLF to clo 5 6 be assigned as a CO Add On Module 1915 15141 clo 00 2 Example DSS BLF 4 See Notes 1 amp 4 5 Enter the CO Add On Module device number 1 4 5 6 to be assigned to the selected DSS BLF Example CO Add On Module 2 See Note 5 01515141 Icio 1 0121 a p M o p u t e 6 10 52 11 111 7 RepeatSteps 4 thru 6 for all DSS BLFs to be assigned as CO Add On Modules 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 8 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 22 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO SE PROGRAMMED KR maara 81 21 C CPU EB or higher 115 NOTES 1 If TEL key is depressed any time after step 1 4 the program is returned to step 3 2 Depressing the ENTER key will return you to 3 The flexible function keys will not operate DSS BLF unit assigned as a CO Add On EZ 4 55 to Attendant Assignment 1 1 must vacant before assigning the EDE 30 1 as a 4 Add On module 5 T
11. 945 yya 9 07 2318 119 938p dn 1893 ysnw 5399 8 qof uorjejreysur 813101 sayy seruo uurnoo jo qof 381g Bunoeousejqnon pasn 4 18 8143 59522 94105 pue sppe 03 peau oym 931AJ98 0 81 4 28 10048 ew posn 81 4018 388 dno18 sty jo 58 pue 89214128 2 812945 541028 10 10 syaays dno13 puoaos ayy 9194 218 19403512 Aq 58 2214195 jo ssej 54013213594 Surperp se se 8418 554 pue aunn 40 87090181558 uojjnq eur 101846 pasn 839948 Jo 4018 ayy 91415600 se 58 Surururea804d uie1s s 0 sxoo q 991 Jo 1821801 ut 218 53 6 989 jo so dureg sjeeus st 10stA19dns
12. sqq pue 1 5908 sny 81481 12918 axa Buyse 8 1 SNV SNOILVOIGNI 14 8 41 Poy uo 182 8013110 94 4 65913014 ut 991 401559249 A LON 0 1771 e SNY 8892420 e 19 5 74 e Surgseg WA Kay auty 1 559449 e 84123129 A enuejy z Tele 01117901 1 fm SNOLLVOIGNI 1881 56505 21 00 305208 qq aunor 51481 qq 18 yo 5208 197 Apeays 53481 1711 8 axa 91 oun 3481 447 8 ysa JIL 5208 53481 12913 L SNOLLVOIGNI 14 8 sr 91013 82 suopueqe 4 12430 55928044 eur ur 129 787511 Aq
13. 51 Mau pue pasee a st uorj2euuoo eq 81 Aay TT VOY 559442 e uorsuajxa uo 55948044 aur org st 9103 eur 91 pesee a1 sr uorj2auuoo eu 51 82 uaym Ady 59242 e ALL 1558 fex uo 55948044 ur ar yey 4 5 207524 8014 ut ar uo UIT 19 PET ETT err eri 111 ou sq 961 56202 007 st 1189 play aq 211 uo STE ALON seut 4 21810392 20 95044 se aures 98941 10 suorje1edo 104836 4 8003 210399 st Wr 1311 49218 auo suopueqe 12440 63481 AIT 1 3 9891801d up at JVI 189 74 SNOILVOIGNI
14. erp paads wayshs Kj119A pue 8 juepuayje uy 4 123546 Sururure18044 SNOLLVOIGNI GOT WTIdWVS SNOILVOIGNI 3TdWVS 1861 AINE 1 26202 00 18161 8191 1011 Yo 5208 147 ano e SNV ATOH 3924 pu s1aginq paads jo squequoo uau M 559499 e 94 552442 e 66 02 1equinu paeds ulaysAs e ano Sseidog e OL E yo 5208 141 859293 e erp 1 SN V ssaJdop A eArynoasuoo 19jjnq paads jo squoquoo au 11 1 10 0 01 1616 91119 166 02 1equinu 18151 0146 erp 15 81 e SNOILVOIGNI GOT Id WVS SNOILVOIGNI QT 3 IdWVS 1861 4 6505 00 702 fex 660 3594424 6 1 ALON 225 7 Kex 8 1 6 yuo 8 02 amp ex ssq ssa1daq 7 019 Sung 9 02 Kex 550 889 490 6 1395
15. 4118 Depress ri E 4 Enter the station number to be programmed icit 5 5 91 1 5 ele Example Station 104 See NOTE 1 T T 5 Depress if required Override of LCR Associated LED OFF Not override of LCR Associated LED ON See NOTE 2 6 Depress See NOTE 3 5 0161 5 cle Tle TT TT 7 After irren programmed as required Lu decree I je e s jofe r 02 1 11 NOTE 1 After the station number is entered the LCD will show all previous assignments to the station NOTE 2 is required proceed to step 7 3 Depression of ANS causes the LCD to increment to the next station number MEMORY BLOCK 285 LCR 1 Plus Dialing OPERATION DISPLAY 1 Gooffline Depress LK 16 and dial 1 o 1 2 Depress r2 then ris E 1 4 3 Depress if required 1 Dialing Associated LED ON Not 1 Dialing Associated LED OFF See NOTE 4 4 Depress 3 OTT 5 Depress to go on line 1 191 14151 1916111 12181 NOTE 4 Ifno programming change is required go to Step 5 700 9 ND 20292 CHAPTER MARCH 1988 MEMORY B
16. Ploy aArsnjoxo uou MOU SI 82 2 19 5U 1 01 9 05102 55 9 3 uo amp ex 550 859 490 55948044 ut 1189 GOLF SNOILVOIGNI GOT 1961 56 02 0 111 00 s nunuos ssa 3 02 sanumuoo pas 4 00 ssa squta 431 39928 4 00 8 st 8 02 q37 ssa SNOILVOIGNI Gal 31dWVs 4184 3105105 479 584 943 uo ay 859449 e 910 94 479 580 eu uo JUL 55 9 e euo 88 46 10 auos Buu 9ArSn oxo uou uo 9 ur uorsua3xa 03 3105402 J TQ SS 93 uo SSC ssaidaq e 38692014 UT 62 uo dweg sieg 2 JOJyUM aBed 0 usv ds 10 9101 xoeq Sut apow GNA uorsua xo 83 03 3185 941 uo 66 5 yr e 51180 yeuaaquy 1 9 02 ZI 006 88 4 o 1 981 e 18 4 auoz
17. 8 YUM 51148184 0121 600 SNOILVOIGNI 5 00 30 0350197 ano pue axa espueu sr INO 118981 peas 311 qq 943 10 82u849juo2 Joyy 3joseo qq SNV 118991 538 1571 8 9 10 e SNOLLVOIGNI GOT TIdWVs SNOILVOIGNI Gat J IdWVs 1861 vUZLAVHD 75 007 aBed o 25 e 182 10 8 vjep 5 Suied auoz Joy 3491181858 2007 883998 9581 Jo auo 10 peuruasio4d 660 58914890 59107 pgg 8907 ggg 6907 604 12407 198 099 st opoo 689228 0 3181 15271 8 0110 se Senpea 559508 e espueujm e SUBH 0 1609 ssaidoq e OF 1 9u07 8 6 02 SNOLLVOIGNI GOT TIdWVSs SNOLLVOIGNI TIdWVS 1861 7 5602 4 812 eien
18. e 44018511 ION OG 26 08b SNOILVOIGNI GOT 5 SNOLLVOIGNI 5 56505 FOTO ST 011 jara SNOILVOIGNI GOT 1 5 1861 2620 23 007 s4431 uea18 axa Kreuraq yo 5208 971 axa squsi 92948 axa SNOILVOIGNI 5 apo 559228 5143 10 peurure1801d 55 10 zp 5 ON Asng Ie 1189 LIV 26 810 e espueu jr e Kay uorsuajxa e AJA OL 4 Kex SSC uo 18 044 Jaquinu SLLON dn Jugy pue 1 9 e 1 ano 01 1189 Jaquinu 18 e 859228 stu 10 650 10 Zp Jamsuy oN Asng Ie 180 319832 epo sse e etq e gespueu yr e kay uorsua3xe 552442 e oJ 8 PINOS 160 86 0 89 00 uorsuojxe je e 558028 143 10
19. 8 45 94 Surssaudoq 0 3jtus 82 2884 aaron ayy uo 9899 aym Aay e Surzras ALON 11 0 50 SNIT 44O ut Jou yed enp e 5 007 pesdeja seu IUI 6291 IYI 19378 13JSULI payerirut oym aq jo K1eurrd ayy 9291 1182 pa119Jsue1 ALON riTarap T2 9 o 18151 elent EH LL Tall yo 5208 41 8 15151 st 182 0 85944 yaspuey 8 151511 s1431 00 2107591 sr aeuo j 2uauM 5208 431 SNV suamsue s 7 9101521 K2 4 0 _ ssa1dop 51 ouo Jequinu uorsuejxo BIG e euoj SNY Kpeajs 11 sr 1471 49928 XH d OO 55843014 1189 Kay T 9700 SNOILVOIGNI GOT 3 IdWVS SNOLLVOIGNI FId WVS 1861 bUALdVHO 6202 18 191
20. A u0 AJA SAIQUINU 5 uorjeurjsep a24nos Aq 859228 10 8155 05 8 aq SSA 10 5908 axa dn pue uorjeuriuo2 1 594 e qeurue eurn uoneurjsep 993 Jo uorsuejxe erq e SNOILVOIGNI WIdWVS 09 00 yo 8 dn Suey e 9 1aquinu 22105 BIG e 8559208 143 pourure1204d 664 sseadap 20 gp N Asng Lb HBO 59228 e yaspuey YIT e EE 63431 qq 99948 Purua eurn uorjeurjsap uo Ady uorsuojxa sse1deq e SNOILVOIGNI GOT 8 SNOLLVOIGNI 2961 2620 SNOILVOIGNI 4 IdWVS 18el A inr 6505 19 007 461 00 saquinu 1jjnq erp paads erq Kex 59242 58207 eig Surs Ze Kex AND 5594424 e go 5208 197 1 eq auoyda ay e kay SSC e 5592499 e AAT 560 usn
21. 26205 78 007 5348 19918 ua sso1doq e seysely 1a LG sesseudap 41 84 15 St 97 12213 85918024 182 45 Iar 24816 a 9 5343 8 perpe 2181 9101 NO seuro eq FLA 34182 peusis YLA s4431 1a Lq sessaadop 812 11 0 sr 197 92228 568024 ut PIM amsuy 440 88815 8148 4371 8 955 24 peas sr qr 95928 xa ssoagoud ur orjeurojny 84815 BLA SNOILVOIGNI FIdNVS SNOLLVOIGNI 8371 FIdWVS 1881 A INS 6205 LI TENE AAA 1812 T SNOILVOIGNI TIdWVS 1861 56205 8 00 uo 90815 YLA squat 1111 18 ua 8481 559199 e 14 51 1171 8 axa e Asng ALC PONLO AAO 1
22. 26202 12 007 8 L sr 1equinu 16 ayy 30835000 p 9 1 02 68 61 6 1 3jnduy jo 2 69 x 62 2 06 q 08 1 01 99 921 OF 1 Gp 95 001 ndug 8961 68 997 60130401 uonoenqng uonippy enuruoo zou op uoryejno eo 3uunp q27 9 uo Surgyou j ALON 85918044 OT 993 jo 103304 uorne no e 1861 ATAP 6860 186 6505 52 007 0 945 Burssaidap Aq ued 10448 uy 10118 13 82 Aq pasneo aq 10119 HOUNA 8 8 ay 10113 ue 2882 ayy suonipuoj 619 987 82997 EZI 040 st 3581 941 Aay 40 58814901 go 3ursn 18 X x 6 X X ynduy 58 104
23. LL itt te 111 1111111 elals e 110151 51 1 o sis c Injo 5 1 1 6 1110151 Fiwio injo alnis 1 1012 m e 3 0 51 51 300 124 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING meMony BLOCK THAT MEMORY 22222777 MUST PROGRAMMED HAVE TO 8E PROGRAMMED ELE 27 81181 1 551 AGPO eves Gee Noto 95 NOTES 5 1 During step 4 the display shows the current count of the timer chosen 3 1 1 KEY TIMER nEFAULT 29 L1 Call Park Recall 3 min Ce L3 Delay Announce Auto Release x m CPU EB3 or higher 10 min 5 L4 Starttime SMDR 20 sec C L5 DSS BLF camp on recall Att 51 recall 50sec L6 Ex Hold Transfer Camp On recall 50 sec Cz L7 Autocallback Trunk Queuing cancel 20 sec Ca L8 forward no answer 20 sec L9 Exclusive hold recall 1 C D L10 External page access 5 min 111 Internal page access 1 min 113 Valid call timer SMDR 40 sec L14 Modem Reserve Timer CPU EB2
24. 5908 10 9 948 91941 JT ALON Yo 5208 97 1x 910500 478 554 9 3 uo LN 69442 e amp AAT ee a epourjuSru e LN 4 30508 137 Arung dnsueupue JALIY e 1 y 1929 5 Bo 5808 qT 1 34811 203 gg 3 neja opoo 58228 e S NOLLVOIGNI 3 IdWVS 18151 aroo 191 Jolt PY TTT Prete tt SNOILVOIGNI GOT 5 1861 A In n 14 6508 LIL 007 pagay st auo 20 2103 Aq 0 35214 euo 20119 st uo dureo Kex uorsue xo eq 5131 182 y eq uo aq 81 182 uo padurg v ALON dn 3uet IAY e uaeJ8 ejosuoa jo ut 53481 437 Xad OO J IH SSG 291 uo JUL 88 20 e pagay st auo Asnq 43184 pajeg e l Ploy 147 39218 uo 4199 9 ejosuoo J18 SSd 9 3 50 582292 e 15 1 qI Ypa ss
25. 06 092 09 NO LLAGHSNd HOVE 40 IVNDIS A331 TTVOSIM Sw 001 0021 006 HSV14 HOOH 00 40 6668 0001 668 001 NOLLVAS H38W 1N NOISNALXS I OLGOSLOSNNOOSI NOLLVIS FINGON 8 1 OLGSNDISSV SI NOILV LS LOTS 1 OL GANDISSV SI TANNVHO 41 HLVd 10 LNWANDISSV NOLLdO 4 JO LNAWNDISSV NOLLIGNOO DNILOS LAG Gut 001 0 0 STHO43H HSV l4 MOOH H3LAV AWIL GQUSdV I Gur 001 371 SI 0022 LUV LS HSV T4 SNOHdWTA ANTI ATONIS AWIL 871INDOO3 SI HSV14 MOOH SNOHdTT41 gui 09 008 001 ANTI FT NIS AWIL WOWININ AULNSI NOLLdIN2Sud WALI 6 ANY 8 9 532018 AYOWIN 5 11 345 path and data in MEMORY BLOCK 4B 4 GROUP INITIALIZED VALUES NOTE Only channels 1 and 3 assigned for both dual voice one ESI EB card Channels 2 and 4 must then be set for single voice only SLOT 1 8 DEFAULT NEW m ESI EB DATA AND SECOND VOICE PATH ASSIGNMENT SLI COMMON VALUES memory BLOCK 48 3 MEMORY BLOCK 48 8 VMI INITIALIZE 1 HOOK FLASH START TIME HOOK FLASH END TIME BOUNCE PROTECT TIME 216 006
26. AND teens t r NTe TOT 22122 2 4112 DISPLAY 2 Depress 5 then F7 3 Depress 12 1 Case of Error 5 e R o s 2111 TTT Flashing 2 Case of No Error is Yis 1111 4 Depress L1 L5 to display the program error Y s 6 t Example 12 12 See Note 2 5 Ifthecounter value is not to be cleared proceed to Step 8 6 Depress CLEAR key 5 YIs c H E folalrial 2 7 3 5 5 1 1 1 11 1 8 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 240 SUU ND 20292 SEPTEMBER 1988 KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE Increments program number B W Decrements program number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED CPU EB3 or higher NOTES 1 During step
27. N04 SNOLLVIS USHNN Ad NOISNALLX ASVIWINd 4 DNIAVH SNOLLVIS OL 5 AA NVO 6668 0001 668 001 NOISNALXY GANDISSVNN SLNSINNDISSV MIN NOISNALXA IVALUIA 1 AULNG NOLLdINOS3 1N3IANDISSY NOISN31X3 01 22 32018 NOILVOHID3dS MEMORY BLOCK 2 10 VIRTUAL EXTENSION ASSIGNMENT STATIONS ASSIGNED SEE MB1A LK ASSIGNMENT STATIONS ASSIGNED SEE MB1A LK ASSIGNMENT STATIONS gt 25 us 88 5 a2 lt STATIONS ASSIGNED SEE MB1A LK ASSIGNMENT 300 293 765 008 SARIL TIVO AIYA 66 1 1 1 1 1 6 GuNLvad H VA JO LV 3SVH GaridILINW 61 1 HOVE YOA G381053 ONINIL SLNAWNDISSV 3SV8 IN31SAS 22 71 2 32018 03 SNOILINULSNI gt 2345 YAWIL 123 02610 18 06 83 134 NOISN31X3 130 OD LYVLS 1VIQ LYVLS LUVAS 1 1 ________________ 11 23 323
28. PN Polarity normal DH Data hard ware controlled DS Data soft ware controlled 1 7 do not affect operation Figure 260 5 DTA E Installation Table 260 1 shows the assignments of these switches E After assigning the switches locate the fifteen pin connector labeled DTE as seen through the 117 ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 access view of the Multiline Terminal housing insert the fifteen pin connector from the DTA E unit as shown in Figure 260 4 F Replace the access panel OR Continue to install the ADA E unit DPA E unit or unit 260 7 DTA E INSTALLATION DTA E Installation For installation refer to section 260 6 of this manual NOTE Display Multiline Terminals with DTA E units installed must be supported by an ESI EB and CPU EB ETU If required both DTA E and DPA E units can be installed in a display Multiline Terminal connected to channel 1 or 3 of an ESI EB ETU This arrangement is not possible when a Multiline Terminal is connected to channel 2 or 4 of B Fig 260 6 Connection of DTE DTA E Unit 200 39 ND 20292 CHAPTER2 JULY 1987 the same ESI EB ETU that has either a DTA E or a DPA E ETU installed B Data Terminal Equipment Installation Data terminal equipment DTE connected to the DTA E units must be equipped with RS 232C interface
29. 1 STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING 1 LEAST COST ROUTING 1 6 LINE MULTILINE TERMINAL 78 6 LINE MULTILINE TERMINAL with DISPLAY 78 16 LINE MULTILINE TERMINAL with DISPLAY SEE NOTE 30 80 16 LINE MULTILINE TERMINAL with DIRECTORY Display 30 30 BUTTON DIRECT STATION SELECTION BUSY LAMP FIELD CONSOLE 6 CO ADD ON MODULE 4 HANDSFREE UNIT 80 DUAL PATH ADAPTOR 80 ANCILLARY DEVICE ADAPTOR 80 WALL MOUNT UNIT 80 DATA TERMINAL ADAPTOR Add On Module and DSS BLF Refer to description of DPA E and DTA E 100 22 170 1 General Information One set of Job Specifications ND 20234 and a wall mounting template are included with the ESE 32B 1 CCU optional equipment such as external amplifier MOH source BGM source external speaker etc must be locally provided 170 2 Equipment Description 1 ESE 32B 1 CCU This CCU is the basic Central Control Unit This steel cabinet is designed to accommodate other expansion CCUs PSE AD 1 or PSE DD 1 power supply is required to provide service It also requires a CPU E or CPU EB and a TSW E ETU The ESE 32B 1 CCU provides 8 slots in the interface card section that can support 4 ports each The ETUs that can be installed in these 8 slots COI E TLI E ESI EA ESI EB SLI EA SLI EB CNF E MFR EA ECR E and VMI E ETUs In addition there are 3 slots in the common control optional common card section 2 of these 3 slots are occupied by the CPU EB and
30. 11 st 8 axa 386928024 ut WIM 64815 1 74 2 ayy Aq st uorjg1ed ALON 83481 0811 8 La 03 Aay 63164 sausep 8 1a kay Lq 59149 e 5 51 131 49918 axa 56928044 NO 948165 1 88449341 06027 SNOILVOIGNI AIG WVS SNOILVOIGNI 5 1861 A TOL 56505 18121 e 1 212 1 i falsas T TT 5 gaius 8121 S o t Lieni T TT SNOILVOIGNI 3 IdWVS L86r A InP 56505 08 007 s3431 qq 8 fay s ss adap 4 seusep 1371 uoo18 Eg kay Lq sseidaq e Apeays 51 91 42928 axa 55918024 ut 189 ezed 5 6 q 84916 41079 8 8 8 1a 59410994 JLA pereo 84815 YLA 5210994 Sure woaz 84815 3481 1a 14 ssedeq e
31. BUSTS YSd 193 V euo Sut 9A19291 NO SAWO JLA feuis YLA 493 V IPON 92814 e hay La sse1deq e 88918014 ut 182 00 euU ut 30u ST 3843 t ALA 440 189815 UL 9 1 uon94edo 1 815 wapow 167029 LT ETT Err TT ey TET 18151 8151 olt Py T falas SNOLLVOIGNI 401 3 IdWVS 1861 PualdvHuo 56 08 0 96 007 yo 5208 197 SNv 84 00 saysey 1471 18 s3431 siut 51 197 29228 wBugguee 5208 3481 197 pue suu 8 soysey qu 18 11 st 051 49248 SNOILVOIGNI 14 8 NO 5 jeusirs ysa 59102 reusrs apo 8 ut 2d 92814 e NO 59 02 BUSTS Jojeorput Bury euo sse1doq e 58818014 ut j 2 00 9 ur30u 94 18816 YLA e 993 55 pu
32. mjojoje 515 118 1 ET pao t 7 7 7 1 1 1 1 11 61 2 7 1 T 1 0 4 11215 1212121 6 deside 300 60 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 IN KR EL Select station number to exchange Forward LEAR Enter each number exchange W Backward GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST PROGRAMMED HAVE BE PROGRAMMED 012 All CPU levels r2 NOTES 1 Depressing the ENTER key will cause the display to return for additional station entries 2 DSS BLF button assignment does not change when station number is exchanged DSS BLF button assignment stays with the original station 4 2 Gl El E H El E 8 E B E BE EI E x GENERAL INFORMATION TELEPHONE NUMBER EXCHANGE i This area of the memory block is used to exchange the station number between two terminal
33. 1381 Aq eAnsagieug 21815 5208 JLA peusis YLA Yo 5908 JLA LG sse1doq e 8888014 pue esea ay 7 Loosing Signal When Originating Data Call With voice call in progress Depress DT key DTR signal from calling DTE goes off Depress DT key 8 Reserving Data Path to Originate Data Call To set Depress DT key To cancel from idle condition while in reservation mode Depress DT key To cancel from a busy condition with voice call in progress Depress DT key SAMPLE LED INDICATIONS ExT green LED is lit steady pr green LED flashes pr red LED flutters LED goes off green LED winks intermittently pr green LED winks intermittently LED goes off EXT green LED is lit steady green LED winks intermittently green LED flashes 400 92 ND 20292 CHAPTER 4 JULY 1987 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS ITI TT LT 111307 ijo 415 1281 FRI toi atoj fals 2 NOTE Bold letters in display indicate flashing letters b 2 Signal OFF called DTE signal rendered ineffective by the system
34. 6505 SNOILVOIGNT GOT 71899074 6505 5 51 00 go 5908 AAT 83 8 1411 18 NOLLVOIGNI WIdWVS PHBA 1136 61 3nox2o 101838 0 10144 uorjejs JNO pox2o uo SerAnoy 400320 10 peurure1804d E 03 94 A UO UB xoeqi 92 oSussoui 35 82 eotAJes Jo sse Aq s uonejs OL St 20 Jo 1equinu y 0000000000 St 9poo Jo dn euo 310320 Mau VIG apos 3nospoo 69 3n9jaq epoo ssaidaq 8 SNOLLVOIGNI GOT WIdNWVS 1861 Aine 6202 92 007 aBessaul 34211391 0 uas 943 1071 941 UMOYS 81 Z UAM 89 8 surojs s 92104
35. st peo 1 pe1eroosse 0 39quinu aur ei AULNG 1 NOLLdINOSud 38 40 3144 40 34A1 nouveno wariu 341238 5 4 0 3313 Vd 8 3 3 39 532018 304 SNOILINYLSNI 12345 80f 00000 00000 INITIALIZED VALUES RECEIVER DIAL TYPE OP MF DPAMF ae 2 r c2zx 2 5 DEFAULT 300 319 02 10 HO LNI 6668 0001 668 001 SHUVALAOS HUVAGHUVH 025 006 18409186 IVIG INHOJINO 304 dNOYD 651907 ANNUAL V 510813465 3409 55322 1 10 Wid WHOdINN TVId WNHOJIND V 61041546 922 32018 AJOW3IN 55 SI TIVOWMH IVIG ANIT ALL IVNHSLENI SNDISSV 110 3300 31189 SINNI 311 NO NOHLV3340 A33 ANNUAL HOV OL GANDISSV LNNH WAANVL 8 1 40089 W3ONYL SLOW THS sea mow on SLUOd AUVNIDVAI OL G3NDISSV 54104 S LUOd 154 DNIISIXS OL GANDISSV AUV 1304 SUVMGUVH 5 14054 SNDISSV 1NOd WN3GNVL V OL LNNH
36. 559499 e apr119A0 01 61 84 01 3184 POI 58228 514 10 paurureJso1d Kex SSA ssaidap 04 3 08 9 669228 911 e auo SurjreA 19091 uod p seus OL T 81057 25 00 418 0 os e 3 aded 40 s208 sny 10 SButs f 2rjeurojne 0013235 e s4431 99948 LXA 3j uorsuajxe 20 SNY 59249 e apt 0 835 SNv p paje s3u uorsuo3xo 4 e 5908 LX3 dn auo e apoo 859228 514 10 pourure1804d Aay 550 ssa1dap 1 3 neJe gt 852228 11 st 12819 1182 snq Zurjte 99S OLI YPVQ TBD 61 00 SNOILVOIGNI GOT A IdWVS SNOILVOIGNI 3 IdAVS eset 26502 0 141901 Je RT o tj SNOILVOIGNI 4 IdWVS 1861
37. E E De Dx Px ee FF 16181 11 T 300 172 ALL CPU levels NOTES 1 After step 3 the display will show the previous region assignment 2 The following is a description of each area MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED 1 HAVE TO PROGRAMMED number that can be entered REGION NUMBER DIALING TYPE D Direct Dial 1 Dial 2 Independent Telephone Co 3 Puerto Rico Type Dialing ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 029 D Gs P 9 2 es e 4 us t mn mo 0 m Em 2513 zu Fal ca Boe LJ fd La Cow E E EI GENERAL INFORMATION REGIONAL DIALING ASSIGNMENT This area of the mernory block is used to designate the type of dialing area where the system is installed 4 t i This information is important when applying code restrictions to stations i 1 4 4 V 4 300 173 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 3E2 1 DIALING ASSIGNMENT OPERATION 1 Go offline 2 Depress F3 then F10 3 Depress F12 p T T lt AND DISPLAY J Je J
38. pu auo erp Peu uo 22814 o3 3 nejaq 65922 BIC 1861 euo erp 01 4861 400H e 55948049 Sungursu 1180 S 10x04g 151 0 51 uorjejs ay dn 88 reujo3ur 41464 puooas uou 5 48189 01 4581 ooy 1 dn puooas 105102 e puooes e ploy uo 5908 4 15 e 558 3034 ut 40 1 Ap oerpeurum 10116165 ayy 5 00 40 5908 uorje3 nsuoo uorjgjs UIYM 1180 8 9 024 10 92u939ju02 jo 559024 Surinp 3noqe ploy uoryej nsuoo jo 511815 Y 180 5 0170 LET 00 5 124308 0 1187 pex1eg Joyous poy uo 82 iso qmd 10 182 1180 era uro1s s IY ur 50013835 19410 dn aq 9294 stu 182 943
39. E El El FI E El 2 Make sure that all battery switches on the ETU s are turned on before performing a second initialization Failure to do so may result in program loss Cd Ed Ed Cd Ed Ed L4 Pd Lal i GENERAL INFORMATION SECOND INITIALIZATION This area of the memory block is used to reinitialize all system hardware system software and user i programming is retained after the second initialization 1 ND 30291 CHAPTERS SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 313 SLOT INITIALIZATION 1 Depress SPKR key to go back on line OPERATION im AND DISPLAY Go off line Depress F3 then F9 5 1 151 1 iin i zE EJ Depress F13 s tlo v 1 2 15110111 Dial module number 1 4 of the slot to be 51510111 1 2 initialized Example Modulel See Note 1 1915 131 15101121 1 Dial slot number 1 8 to be initialized 51510111 2 TE Example 51055 See Note 1 1 51 101 151 Depress ENTER key 15150111 13184 icc 0 001 21 11814011141 1 en initialized 2 When not initialized 111 z E zleo 300 168 ND 20292 CHAPT
40. eo ura 14 us CPU EB3 or higher NOTES 1 Thexxxxdisplay at the bottom row ofthe LCDis Ca the software terminal assignment type and yyyy the hardware port installed terminal type 2 When a terminal is not installed or assigned at EU Ene the corresponding port NON is displayed 9 uae 1 72 a 58 1 3 Ifthe hardware terminal type is different from E 4 the software one the terminal does not work ie Software terminal Type the type which mainsotware recognizes cl Hardware terminal type the type which is presently installed If you want to change the software terminal type you can reassign it by system programming 1E 2 Terminal Add Port GENERAL INFORMATION SOFTWARE HARDWARE TERMINAL STATUS i This area of the memory block is used to display information of software hardware terminal type ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 5C1 SYSTEM DATA LAST CHANGE OPERATION lt AND y DISPLAY L TOT 121 mlolole 1 2 Depress F5 and F8 2222 1111 3 Depress 11 See Note 5 cIHlAINIGIE 1217 2 2 TA 0 4 4 Depress SPKR key to go back on li
41. is Y s T e u Epp 2 2 2 2 Depress F4 then F6 3 DepressF12 See Note 1 4 Ifnochange in the system status is required go to step 6 5 Depress ENTER key to Busy Out the system 6 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 194 ND 20292 CHAPTER SEPTEMBER 1988 K NCIIONIG N ON OFF Line TEL Ew o oo O 2222 22 24 ICLEAR __ _______________ ENTER To busy out GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY SLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST 86 PROGRAMMED HAVE TO PROGRAMMED All CPU levels 5 6 7 8 15 es 15 NOTES x 1 During step 3 the status of line key 11 indicates if the system is busied out 11 ON System busied out OFF System not busied out B B E E 4 Cow i GENERAL INFORMATION SYSTEM ALL BUSY OUT ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to busy out system During a Busy Out condition the system does not provide any call processing 300 195 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 4B1 COI I INITIALIZED VALUES 10 Depress F4 then F7 Depress F11 See Note 1 Dial CCU module number 1 4 where COI port OPERATION AND
42. us us 551 ze Cm pe LJ 3 Ed LJ Ed Lal CPU levels NOTES 1 In step 5 if a station number which is already assigned is dialed the system will not allow it to be entered 2 Depressing the ENTER key will cause the display to return to for additional station entries 3 A programming station cannot change its own number E El E F E H E h h Q E B Bj GENERAL INFORMATION TELEPHONE NUMBER CHANGE This area of the memory block is used to reassign a station number to terminal The new number chosen cannot already be assigned elsewhere ND 20292 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 241 PROGRAMMING TERMINAL OPERATION AND gt DISPLAY 1 Gooffline NJE C x x x dP iMjojo E 11 2 DepressF2 15 1 151 1 1111111111 qp 21215101 101 1 15 115 1 3 Depress F6 4 Depress F11 See Note D nia 2 2 2 5 Dialstation number to be assigned le Rlo ciR A MiM Tiel Example Station 104 Note 2 12121211 6 7 Depress SPKR key to
43. 10 959442 e 137 8 Use 8 0 1 5 sr 20 Buruoou SNOLLVOIGNI Gal SNOILVOIGNI GOT 1861 PWAXIdVHO 26202 6 007 anas usey s qan pue 1xa 431 qur 93928 xaa oo 481 anas SNOLLVOIGNI 1 sseidap Jo 19294 8 10 our 559242 e 8 10 BUTY 4 00 PUOL euo Jury yay 5 9 19221 JOU eut rytn 943 2ursn 55218024 ur 51 82 uorje1edo 304 rm 40 eq ue 2029 PUB 102 uorjog n 81 AAT OIW 283 Xe ALON way 318 9819AU0 peadg 10 5 889 4 8 euoj Aay 1446 59349 e Kex 4 0 20 ue 5591090 e 1 4104 SaprAo4d syn
44. e 834811 12918 xaxa 59442 e 3u8iu 3ueseJd 8 160 3 8 911057 SNOLLVOIGNI GOT WIdWVS SNOILVOIGNI 1861 PFHSLdVHO 36505 SNOILVOIGNI 4IdNVS eset AINE Fr H31dVHO 26205 17 007 101529 Jequinu uorsue3xe 8 e sus uoa18 BIP 0 141 e 559249 e IUIN 3018013120 19218 01 COT 40 SLIS 78 195 aq 401 IUHNMH 8 38 195 94 ueo 6 sjsenbo1 4289189 ALON 5208 1471 8 axa dn pue euo 859908 143 10 8044 SSA 10 3 neja T apo 559528 etg e E uorsuejxe ue Josue 51 uos 011 8 jsonbay 9T 02F SNOILVOIGNI 8 87 007 1eodde yeqe e 1 091 uo 01 6 yo 5208 18 axa jespugu 403594 3
45. 1 06 089 OSI 009 1 2 3384 SULMOYS 59 1328 ou 31943 2324 moys 127194126 ALON 9894 2884 NOLLOSS NOILVOO MOYS 943 Ady YIA Jo uotssa1dop ZI 5 2884 Jo euo Burmoys AYM g ALON 11 33ed moys 401 sayeu YI Jo z 1 NOLLOSS NOLLVOO I Surmoys 21 ALON 69894 NOLLOAS NOLLVOOT fax ssq 889 49 e aded 8864 NOLLOSS NOLLVOO I S ous 9818 YI sso1doq e eded 38 1 993 suorqgorput BIC paadg 13 15 5 smoys Kejdstp uonoejeg 2200 SNOLLVOIGNI 3IdWVS SNOILVOIGNI WIdWVS 1961 ATAF vUALd VHO 2620 SNOILVOIQNI GOT 1 5 1861 191 007 ure1804d 6601 sse1daq 0 888 480 4 06 9884 522129 OF paedg uoreg 8 3014 097 SNOLLVOIGNI WT FIdWVS SNOLLVOIGNI GOT 3IdWVS 1861 ator HALA VHO 681 007 SNOILVOIGNI 31 5
46. 3103207 181 paadg uoneig 8014 189 Krug qunoooy 2 OFF 200 020 60 ST Orr 1 00 pepnjour speutuzay BUILTIN 993 03 9 q9 I8A9 500481940 aq puo IUN ayy Jo 54950 10 QZF 001235 5 1011296 quo 8910443133 03 510191940 U01435 10013296 5143 ut pepn our 5101391240 A uo 05 UOS BUTT NY 03 reae 5001381940 pe Zp 5 1861 PHRIdVHO 56505 IANH 06 euoudoja a surg Op uore1edo uorje1edo 057 y 19348 Jo 51011296 400 eu uorje1edo jo 31104 18 9113937 10 611838 1071 qq 9u1 uorje1ed ayy apind o1n329j dais 4 1 pe re3ep aptaoad paprarp qns 19311 YIB 8 128 014836 8132913 944 01 ra 28 SNOILVOIGNI G07 dIdWVS vine SNOLLVOIGNI AJT A IdWVvs 00 shay eurp
47. Mio p E 518151 1 2 1 T 2111111 11 11 11 titel TA s a N LTE Ett Pee ee 4 Set L1 as required to receive Tie Line dial tone or extension dial tone See Note 1 LED off Extension dial tone Default LEDon Tie line dial tone 5 Depress ENTER key 6 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 102 20292 CHAPTERS SEPTEMBER 1988 ENTER Enter each assignment GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED CPU EB2 or higher NOTE 1 Stations that access Tie lines via dial access are affected by extension dial tone Direct access of Tie lines is not affected by extension dial tone CH Gee se Ge 281 pee 3 Fal Fal ana Ta Pd Pd CAG 5 i GENERAL INFORMATION RECALL KEY OPERATION FOR TIE LINES 1 i This area of the memory block used to assign system wide the type of dial tone that will be returned i when the RECALL key on a multibutton set is depressed while using a Tie Line If DID trunks are in use i the system should be programmed for extension dial tone 1 300 103 ND 30392 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2C1 TRUNK TO TRUNK GROUP ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F2 then F8 3 Depress 11 4 Dialthetrunk
48. een e LLL asas echan 211155 51 ee ol vico rap 43 qe pouce ww Loro wee SERVICE 222 d MEMORY BLOCK SHOULD ALREADY BE ASSIGNED ENTER TABLE NUMBERS TRUNK RESTRICTIONS TRUNK QROUPS ec e 3 4 LON 41 AI OLSI TIVO IVNHGSNI ONINOONI 4I MNV1d AAVAT ALVALLOV 1004 OLSI TIVI DNIWOONI TSISIHOSMd JI MOTIV A GFIVANI G3WSGISNOO 38 GAVE ATIVA OLSIIVNDIS YLA Al 9155 LON 41 GANDISSV 41 GANDISSV LON JI GANDISSV JI 6668 0001 20 668 001 NOISN3ILX I AULNG 9155 321835 VLVG z a 32018 AYOWIWN 082 006 8 1 NOILVOIGNI 21 TIVO VLVG TVNUGLNI DNINOONI NV DNIAISOSM G IIHA
49. 1 After a device number has been entered line keys L1 L5 will display the previous ring assignment of the selected row 2 Depressing the ENTER key will cause the display to increment to the next row of the selected device i This area of the memory block is used to assign Day Mode Ringing to CO trunk appearances on the CO Add On Modules CI Gee C C C mm Fa Ea E 3 3 23 Fe a 1 GENERAL INFORMATION ADD ON MODULE DAY RING ASSIGNMENT ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 ND 20293 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 1C8 CO ADD ON MODULE NIGHT RING ASSIGNMENT OPERATION am AND DISPLAY 1 Go offline ofr Tr NTE C X x XD 2 Depress F1 then F8 015151 Exp TIE 3 DepressF18 alolm olo clol aloivole 1 4 Enter the device number 1 4 of the Add On G H T 1 131 Module to be programmed CO Add On 11 Module 3 See Note 1 5 Depress line keys L1 L5 to assign the desired 6 RIN e lAIpIMIo DIS ringing pattern 11 Green LEDON Ring CPU EB or higher RedLEDON Delayed Ring CPU EB3 higher LEDOFF No Ring or higher 6 De
50. 51129 ALON eouaJejuoo 07 9101594 e 8 LIT 4 4 812 s PECCO 1111 SNOILVOIGNI A91 3 IdWVS 1861 1 6205 15 007 1 51 197 49928 85918014 ur A31ed skay eur 4 yo 5908 081 SNV 8 2 Apea 348 31 gaed ystqeysa pue JNO 0 41404 pajre 8 8 e 3481 081 SNV sny seusey 087 erp puooos 0 Kay JNJ 889 4 55918044 e2ua19juoo Aed 8 yM Apea HI 197 our BUG Burs 8 Apeays 51 1371 99948 1 euo 81181 72 3105208 197 SNY SN s4431 usrqejse Aay sse1deq e SNOLLVOIGNI 14 5 SNOLLVOIGNI GOT 3IdWVS 85 007 1948U9 0 10 82 96018110 e SNv E seusep 1971 181 puooes 34139341 01 NO Sse1deq e peas AFT ont Kpeajs 11 6 14
51. Duc 551 sme 251 581 Ld F3 L4 Pd Lal dE E FI E EL BL BI ELE LINE KEY ASSIGNMENT This area of memory is used to assign line key appearances of the Multiline Terminals the system Each i line key appearance on each Multiline Terminal can be designated as one of the following Other than PE i CO line only one appearance of a particular number per terminal Extension only one appearance of a particular number per terminal Data Transmit only one appearance per terminal Data Receive only one appearance per terminal Save and Repeat No limitation 80 S amp R maximum DND Position only one per terminal VACANT per system 1 1 1 Pooled Line only one appearance of a particular number per terminal i 4 1 t L ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 1B RINGING ASSIGNMENT 10 ofr LT C x TX XD dr r Depress F1 117 Lcd rq 3 Depress PT T M o p e Dial station number being assigned OPERATION AND y DISPLAY ry M o p s 4 PT Pry yt Example Station 104 Each line position L1 to L15 should be selected to assign the desired ringing feature for the s
52. auo 1 55922 BIA 8 92198 01 403 V yuna 128 OL Sumenb yuna 51 007 pesdeja seu 19710 243 1641 51 jespueu 2101591 51 2101 4284 ula e 1 BY 2291 183 uo pedureo pa1aAsueu snq uo padurea aq 0 Jaquinu 51182 9110 ploy uo 62 54881 HOOP uo 85918014 ut pe3e duroo 51 9403501 Ayed uouM e 3ejsuwa 6 0 1861 PHAXIdVHO 2620 1 00r 55948044 ut 4 33147 AA 210152 e Aye 200472 Suruopugqy e2ua19juo2 aq Aq e2ua19juo2 ploy uo 4 182 Sutustiqeise Aq passaysuesy aq 2011 ALON 8143 65818014 ur st 1 uSuM ALON
53. ele Taoro 1617 o 1 9 SNOILLVOIGNI GOT TIdWVS 1861 A Tor bUALAVHO 6502 CIN paysed 10 118982 Y 10 pos red pax red pjou 2 a2ua19juo2 V 10 2 00 189 ur 5001335 19410 Aq dn payaid aq 8141 947 peyaed uorjejs 94 jo 1 Burysey pue 141 8 1xa 943 uo 18222 pourureas04d uey 19840 10 UT Ya BY y 0 j 2 293 Jo 6 0 FIG e h NEJA PIG e 3 axa 5208 147 1 5208 37 8 2101594 9uoj 9AI9294 6 0 uorjeao 16 e poo 859228 514 10 peurure1do1d Kay acq ssa1dop 10 y 3 9 552228 e 5148 euo soysey 051 JUJ 559449 e
54. soe AULNG NOILdINOSsud WALI 53 1 32 109 Z GNV 12018 AYOWIWN 403 SNOILINYLSNI 5 gof MEMORY BLOCKS 4B 1 AND 2 COI INITIALIZED VALUES MEMORY BLOCK 10 PPS ITEM INTER DIGITAL PAUSE TIME 5 2 z 8 2 a ian SIGNAL PPS DTMF 10 ITEM ID SCONNECT RECOGN TIME mS E 5 ET 5 ET 5 5 DTMF 300 309 OTE 006 gut 09 092 09 NOLLNGHSNd HOV3 40 NOLLVund Sut 002 0058 009 ANIL LOANNOOSIC Sur 009 0004 0 AWIL 5 4 IVKI 15545 01 091 AWIL ONI IVIG IVAWALNI LIDIGUSLNI Gut 09 00 0 NOLLOGLOUd LIH Sur 001 0051 0 ANWIL NOLLINDOOSMW LOANNOOSIC 00 Sut 009 0002 0 ANIL 5 TVIG 45 01 081 ANIL DNI IVIG TVAUSLNI LIDIGUALNI 84402 8001 0501 LNAS SASTNd 40 GaadS i 09 40 5 DNITVIG 40 X8d 02 INIT AO ON 5 02 WOUJ IVNDIS LOSNNOOSIG
55. 348 32218 5908 051 1a 218 sqq 99958 2 SNOILVOIGNI TIdWYVS Yo 5208 pq 82 YLA urede Kex 14 5592449 e 10 559149 e 889 30 4 ut 1190 ALC 440 20 NO 18 8 5 14 sse1dop saop 189 6380 Buying 9 5594434 e 5208 82 84315 YLA 5208 pare 89818 YLA 8 88014 82 878P 5908 pere 8315 4 1 0 ssedeg e 5208 QLA Bute 60315 YLA 8 8308 411 ute 80916 848 5 SNOLLVOIGNI GOT 3 IdWVS 1861 56505 06 007 5908 1471 s4431 1871 1a seusy 14 peass St 451 49918 axa 5208 81481 Apes st 49928 SNOILVOIGNI 5 pete 5903 JLA 84182 peusis kay 559449 Kex yq pore 65944894 33598024 92104 ALA 20 440 NO
56. 40 440 04S NO 0386 NUALLYd 15314 NUILLVd LSY 1 8 AWLNG CHE WALI IN3IANDISSV ONILNNH NOILVLS ANY X341N32 8 3 9 6 7 71 86 532018 AYOWIW 303 SNOILINYLSNI NOILVOI4ID3dS JOB SPECIFICATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR 2 5 6 7 amp 8 RINGING AND STATION HUNTING ASSIGNMENT MEMORY BLOCKS 3B 1 a 5 22 54000 LIDId AA S3XOH 34 104 JHL 40 HOVA NI6 t ANNAL HOVE INO ANO D AULNG 015141534 W31SAS OL c xe 708 008 8 46 32018 ANOWSW SHOV Id3H S3000 1510 LIDIG LH IA 1 96 AHOWSW NI GALOTTAS SI OJIN 01215104 NAHM 9 41 432018 NI SLNAWN ISSV 9 NOILOINLSAY FHL NI Cauda 9909 AHL HOLVW LON OG LVHL Ga TVId SLIDIG 40 MOTTY 40 GW IVIG LIDIA SUI JO SNITIVO TIOL CASN SGOHLEN NTIVIA 11 40 NOLLdI Osaa 303 5 NOILVOHID3dS gor LNIANDISSV 3009 Tv12349 01 346 ANONIM 532018 906 006 831039 ANNYL 1 dNOY9 JNNYL
57. 5 2 Ljeic e TTT TTT TIT TT T T cJo p e 11 012 12171111 __ cjo p e 1181 1118 1 hobbi 11 6 Depress ENTER key See Notes 2 and 4 Jolcic clolole 2 1 TT T Repeatsteps 5 and 6 for second code to be entered at the chosen table See Note 3 T T T T T 2 2 TT T T T TT 2 Depress F3 then F10 3 DepressF18 4 Dial table number to be set 01 32 Example Table number 14 See Note 1 5 Diallast three digits of OCC code to be entered Example 233 8 Depress TEL key and repeat Steps 4 to 7 for all additional tables required 9 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 186 ovu 109 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 K NCTIQN1O N B W Decrements table number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT PROGRAMMED MUST 86 PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED CPU levels NOTES er D C 81 e ez es 16 co 1 During step 4 the display may show a previous OCC code set to code 1 of the table chosen Luc 2 Depressing the ENTER ke
58. 5 e pu e 10 saquinu e eArnoesuo GL OL 8 6 epo 852228 e 5 e 03 pue e 358 40 BIG Sugerg e LIP IIT e Sungursiao 1 1 4 Xad O2 1891 1180 X8d OO 191 eur 218116 OFF 1861 56502 851 007 dn Suey aArsn oxa uo ooejd 03 59228 e 9003 03 458 HOOH 85918010 epo 852228 Aq 9A314794 10 89 9 0 8 39614 YTI e I 92 2 1861 4 56202 espu gu 91035 e 180 ssa oe play 03 1 a ejd 0 YIT e 40 ploy uo 82 993 22914 0
59. 5 00 shox 550 pauBIsse aq 05 6 ALON uoisuajxa pa e2 YIM xd Sue ssa 943 2 01 peurure1o4d Aay gga 889449 e 3 8 euo eIp 0 J SPULY VT e uaaa e pr 689449 e ssa Busy 4 14011615 ay 10 JBM 38 491182 8001 10 8 14 51 8 5 euo 0 03 10 19 82 9210A 10 81 uorjejs pareo ALON UOISUS X9 89 Jaquinu uorsuojxo e 8uo 94122810 jospu u YT e 89431 4471 49928 fex eur 868 49 e enuen 3 0 T 8160 602 SNOLLVOIGNI GOT 3 IdWVS 1861 91 007 K19391288 30 5808 03 182 22814 pasn aq Kex SSC 5143 uorsue3xo Aq 0 8 11 9 10 peurure1804d st SSA 8 660 Burs
60. 53 8 QHT ssa 8105002 4718 55 91 uo Kay SSqsseJdeq Jespueujr e 2107 L O b SNOILVOIGNI Got TIdWVS SNOILVOIGNI IdWVs 1861 VualdvHo 26202 1861 Anr 56205 008 s1431 ssa 884 e auoz peururg1SoJd ejosuoo 718 535 943 uo fex 550 8892490 e qespueujr e 9107 9 OEF 007 SSA 01 54419 2105102 4 18 580 943 51493 SSA 8 941 uj epour Bessou ayy ozur 3nd 51 52050 0M 9 jo auo Aquo 08 58105402 4104 sejosuo2 J TH SS 51 uay M HALON po DSW 55 943 NSW 559 49 e Yo 93 5 4 18 ejosuoo ssa ATA SSC 941 s amp ex 66 9 4 e swat osm ATEVSSC 1 Kay NSW 859249 e 19218 OF 2 aa poa 78 53 243 Kay NSW 594480 e 3 559 301 8 141 49948 JABI 03 JUBA nO gt J IH SSG 24
61. pus 19 3 18 24 gt 882208 91 e jueuruSirsse aotasas jo 5382 Aq 51 j rqedeo ynoyso 101615 e OL 8 31031201 S31Sip Jo 3aquinu 0000000000 51 3nox2o jo anjea 3 nejeq S LON OLS jaspueu pue auo uorjeurmjuoo e jospueu 2201521 euo uorjEuLipuoo 9 e 3 0320 Mau BI pu 19 epo ssa oe eu e apoo 3103201 3ua11na 69 UNEJ ssa22e JLI e aud VIP e euo pu 3aspueu 3j e 39g 1n03207 31032077 22707 1861 P HARLdVHO 7 007 jespueu e Suruopugqy uorjearpur sp99ue2 1988559 St ou aq 84993 59582 euros ur e10jo1eu dure edessour 805 989559 V OSV UBD eurn ALON 549410 0013975 uo 8 55 8 30 5 91545 22104 ALON eSesseure 10 0915171 e noA pu
62. 28 10 3snui Surururea804d ALON aui 20 eur OD ayy 2 0 4 18 yun paudisse eu 5 051 pue uorsuojxo Keurtad ayy uo 81 82 10 I OD 841419991 e SutSury 10 aur eurtaq 79 uorjeorpur 047 PIou ploy uo 199 8013120 692614 88913014 go seo3 051 sv ut SNV Jo s4431 19928 4 00 1 03 e 889449 e 4 yo 5208 qa1 SNV s4431 2928 4 00 83 e use 8141 4 00 Xgd OO 89249 e eur 3urjoejeg Ajjenueyy 2 ST erp Zurpasaad ut 045 s1equinu jo 311p 9891 eu ssa un 100 590 aouanbas peads uorjejs 19 0 8 20 548 340110 Jequinu erp paads Aq 0 Suisn souenbas paads 5 A SNOILVOIGNI 5 a s e s ot 1
63. 559228 sty 10 peurure1doad Kay 650 5224 9 IPO SSI Yr e eunuaa euni Jo o prue 5594994 e ue Surata 61 011616 dnsptg 1 qe SNOLLVOIGNI GOT 3 IdWVS SNOLLVOIGNI 1861 AINE FHSL1dVHO 0 SNOLLVOIGNI GOT 14 8 189 56505 37 007 4 18 8 paudisse 011816 S 89 4 dn pexord eq 01 sie 1011816 801189 oym 61184 0 e 859228 Sty 40 18044 gga 889 4 10 9 epo 589208 ay gespueu gr e dnqoid 1189 993 eururo eurn jy aul 559249 e s1431 99948 Surwoout 61 1013818 dnoan 60 SNOILLVOIGNI 4 IdWVSs 9b 009 dn payaid aq o3 5 92 Sure 0 418 03 aspuey 251 e epoo 858228 614 10 80 4 SSA ssaidap Jo 09 3 ngja SSII e
64. 65 1 151 10111 11161 Repeat steps 5 8 for all subsequent stations or go to step 3 to restrict a specific station Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 40 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 a EL Select station to be programmed Increment table station number NTER Enter assignment to each station Backward Decrement table station number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE BE PROGRAMMED 365 3E6 3E9 3E4 3E7 All CPU levels NOTES 1 During step 4 L1 to L16 will display which of the restriction tables 1 to 16 have been 22 1 assigned to the station chosen 11 to 16 correspond to tables 1 to 16 or 17 to 32 CI CI C 2 When display shows table 1 to 16 depressing 1 the ENTER key causes the display to increment to tables 17 to 32 If the ENTER key is depressed once again the display now 4 increments to the next station number 2 3 In Memory Block 107 Class of Service JKL Assignment line key L5 must be 6 Operator Restriction Assigned 5 4 5 2 13 Pi 5 31101181 J EI El E E E E EL E El E GENERAL INFORMATION CODE RESTRICTION TABLE ACCESS 1 a
65. 8 4 Kay 554 88944 10 gy oN Asng Lb EO neag apo 558228 perq e e 51481 497 32918 axa 1 eurninyy uorjeunsop uo aul uorsuejxo 559149 e eurn uoreunseq 5208 e euo 889228 5141 10 peurure804d 23 650 ssaudop 10 1 ON sng 17 TRO 3Inejeq 59227 81 51481 8 Krew 7 e eui uorsuejxe 559449 e 2 0 5208 197 axa Suey pue 3urjjos re SNOILVOIGNI GOT TIdWVS SNOILVOIGNI 3idWVs 1861 1 5620 ap 8 sir oTt amia SNOILVOIGNI GOT 1861 AINE vUaILdVHD 2650 63 007 903 dn Sueu pu 8113195 192 Jaquinu uorsuajxo 18 e epoo 859208 5144 10j 18 Kex 560 sseadap gp oN Asng Lp M92 552228 81 e e eurpnnjyg uoneunsep s4431 8 uo Kay uorsuojxa 559499 e
66. Automatic Callback Set Flexible Trunk Queuing 100 21 ND 20292 CHAPTER 1 JULY 1987 DESIGNATION ESE 32B 1 CCU ESE 32E 1 CCU PSE AD 1 PSU PSE DD 1 PSU RSG E RAA E TSW E TLI E ESI EA ESI EB SLI EA SLI EB MFR EA ETU CNF E ETU ECR E ETU VMI E ETU SMDR E ETU LCR E ETU ETE 6 1TEL ETE 6D 1 TEL ETE 16D 1 TEL ETE 16K 1TEL EDE 30 1 DSS BLF EDE 30 1 HFU E DPA E ADA E WMU E DTA E NOTE No more than 10 ETE 16D 1 Multiline Terminals with BLF function assigned can be connected to each ESE 32B 1 and ESE 32E 1 CCU installed The EDE 30 1 system maximum is six units when used as BLF SECTION 170 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION MAXIMUM DESCRIPTION PER SYSTEM BASIC CENTRAL CONTROL UNIT 1 EXPANSION CENTRAL CONTROL UNIT 2 AC DC POWER SUPPLY UNIT 3 DC DC POWER SUPPLY UNIT 3 RINGING SUPPLY GENERATOR 3 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION ADAPTOR 1 CENTRAL PROCESSING UNIT replaces CPU E 1 MODULE MEMORY AND CONTROLLER 2 TIME DIVISION SWITCH 1 CENTRAL OFFICE LINE INTERFACE 10 E amp M Tie LINE and DID LINE INTERFACE 20 ELECTRONIC STATION INTERFACE 20 ELECTRONIC STATION INTERFACE with OFF HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCEMENT and DATA 20 SINGLE LINE INTERFACE 20 SINGLE LINE INTERFACE with MESSAGE WAITING and POWER FAILURE TRANSFER 20 DUAL TONE MULTI FREQUENCY RECEIVER 4 CONFERENCE CIRCUIT 4 EXTERNAL CONTROL RELAYS 1 VOICE
67. HSIdVHO 56502 S 000 818 10 8 10 aur eur 182 1013835 Jad 81284189 orjeurojne JO UVI uorjejs AUY ALON yo 5208 GAT 1 J0js9H Jequinu uorsuejxe 993 BIPSY e 0 e 53481 Gay 99358 axa OL 7 1 79 007 Suruure180ad eq p nous 10 5319 Jo Jaquinu 304 apoo 3181 Jo y LON 0 08 epo junoooe e Aq oy YL JO ex SSA 943 88 Aqua 20 peurure1301d st Kox 85 pue YL 569149 e 34 81 1971 2228 09 ss 1801d 0z zr SNOLLVOIGNI GOT SNOILVOIGNI 3 1dWVS 1861 PHAIdVHO 56505 SNOILVOIGNI GOT T IdWVs 1 1 56205 56 00 aq pasn 5 una ay uni ue 5
68. When the prefix 1 is needed in front of the number to be dialed dialed regardless of the office code dialed then YES should be programmed When prefix 1 is not required NO should be programmed If whether or not the prefix 1 is to be added depends on the office code dialed then CHK should be programmed This will perform a check of this specified office code table and either add the prefix 1 or not depending on the information provided for the office code which was dialed NOTE When the system resides in a 1 Dialing area prefix ADD CHECK must be set to add as LCR ALWAYS STRIPS THE 1 WHEN IT IS DIALED BY THE USER d 5 Serice Area Check SVC AREA CHK If service on the selected route is available for all office codes then NO should be programmed and NO Service Area Check will be performed When CHK is programmed the specified office code table will be checked for information on whether or not service to the office code dialed is provided by the selected route If service is provided the call will be completed If service is m ND 20292 CHAPTER MARCH 1988 not provided then the next route table in the Route Advance Table will be selected EXTRA CODE TABLES ETR CODE TBL Sixteen 16 Extra Code Tables 00 15 are provided Each Extra Code Table can contain a maximum of 24 digits When EXTRA CODE ADD is programmed for CHK within a Route Table the specified Extra Code Table will be referenced and
69. sSur 2011196 013935 BUT jespueu 5 e dn Suey pue euo uorjeuriuoo e Jequinu uorsuajxe e epo 552228 e 9403 pu YIT e Suroe d auo Asnq 01 eo uod 6 398 peuojn y 81 L861 A Ine 56505 007 Sutururv18o4d 1245 oq PInous apos 118 erp pue useg yoo e Jo 19quinu pasaqua ued 7131p pI Jo y ALON 8 ut 4 0 2 0 08 e e 61 0 1861 110 56505 007 jespueu 9103821 ouo uorjeuLiuoo BATIIOY e e 2107821 auo Jaquinu 8 5 221105 911 e gr Jomsuy on Asng L 180 66228 e amsuy oN Asng 18D 2108 1 epo 569228 e euo BIP YIT e 2003 e 122489 91 4
70. 39151 usua 1equinu 159 paudisse Ady SSA ssoidap 3131 1541 e 58 saut 4 0 uo 0 pausisse 51 JI 810 e euoj BIP J SpULY YVI e 57481 xad 00 Kex 5300 X8d OO 40 e 1 4 4 09 1597 2 e aul e 0518 sr paztos jt 83481 1971 4 00 ALON Burs st 6 6 0 8 e31n9jeq epo 8552228 erp 0 YI e usos 1 559149 e 55922 BIG 74 5 9 0 e 9uo xoeq 3413991 Jaquinu E e 131 18 ER Kex 4 1 ssedog e Sujeig enuey 8180 PISINO 00 togt 8 02 SNOILVOIGNI GOT 1861 1 26202 007 4 uo Jurje saquinu erp peads 0 erp paads 10 pauStsse ggd 85
71. AERE Een H Seusep AHT 8 UNE Mc erum ea of s 01 S1431 9928 LXa Ady uorsuojxo 01559 49 parje uo sr 189 88815 SNOLLVOIGNI GOT TIdWVS SNOLLVOIGNI ATANVS 1861 AINE p 1 111 Cep 1 1 Teri DET peu rg ASSI 1 111 yay ay Tele 18 9 1011 CE 1111 SNOILVOIGNI GOT 88 00 s4431 1371 19918 ua s4431 ua s4431 ua st qA 43928 axa 99948 s ysey q ua 31 51 g 19228 sxa SNOILVOIGNI QI FIdWVS pare 84816 YLA kay 889 490 e sauro2eq 848 5 YLA Kex LA 3198 889180Jd ut 182 440 184816 UL 74 889 490 55948024 ut 1 msuy 184315 ULC 78 2 1861
72. PSL OOF CHT JNO 5 924 4 4 0 9 peqriosop se 122195 48410 01 76 Spuo2es OT 10 uMOUS Tp paads uorje3s josjuejuoo Kex ssaidaq e 0gr 011295 ut se aged 122126 e AJA A OL Jequinu auoydayay 10 aq ue 91 jo y eureu 10 aq 53181 7 jo ALON y pue 3 3 days pue days jaye p days drys 5 aq 03 joquinu auoydayay pue apo 852228 uayM 2 ALON SNOLLVOIGNI GAT FIdWVS 991 007 sdajs drys 1equinu aures ay euoude e apoo 559228 1uasaJd Kex 5594494 15 sseidaq peajsut ssedop eureu aures utega 25819 sse1deq 5601 ssaidaq 2 SNOILVOIGNI 3 IdWNVS SNOLLVOIGNI 3 IdWVS 4861 A Inr 6505 951 00 euij uo 105008 3224 08 8 fay ssa1doq 8 4935 8 01 4 16 Aay 440 03 4284 o3 98 4 uo 121p paads uorjejs 0
73. to be programmed 300 224 300 224 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 SPKR ON OFF Line EL Enters new Trunk Group number Increments Trunk Group number ENTER Enters each assignment B W Decrements Trunk Group number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY IPROGRAMMED MUST PROGRAMMED HAVE TO PROGRAMMED 4 44 6 CPU EB or higher NOTES 1 After a trunk group has been selected L1 L16 will show the previous assignments Ej Co Dux uu 5 53 Ca Em 2 Timing Parameters 787 9 LALELE TN 0 o DEFAULTS Incoming Detection Time Wink Start 130 mS x M Default 520 mS Delay Dialing 30 mS x M Default 120 mS Loop Off Guard 0 12 secs Default 2 secs Length of Wink Signal 30 mS x M 30 mS Defauit 180 mS Length of Delay Signal 300mS x Default 300 mS i GENERAL INFORMATION INITIALIZE VALUES i This area of the memory block is used to assign various timing parameters listed above to each Trunk Group associated with TLI E ETUs 300 225 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 4E6 TLI INITIALIZED VALUES OPERATION AND DISPLAY IUE Te FTFT TE T
74. 02 494 sga sse1deq 801610 8419195 7 s1233np ayi ano pue JNO 889 480 1 95 8 9861 Anp Aquo eurn n 19 repua 2 320 2 811195 2 2 91708 SNOILVOIGNI 1 SNOILVOIGNI 3T FTA WVS 1861 A INL 56505 SNOILVOIGNI GOT 8 Leet 1 26002 901 007 Aq yas aq dea yaam Jo deat 241 2 NON 438 Is INNI 834 a 54398 10 64 00 85 00 21 TILON 996 3105208 559443 11 E 1 995 9 8 121d Bulag 1993 OT SNOILVOIGNI 14 8 PHSIdVHO 6500 CIN 921 00 4 01 02 aX 55 sse1dap 9115 SI aud 20149 st 40 44 26 930 epour 01 991 JO 01
75. 3112219 YAW 1189 9935 51180 18449101 uotsuayxg 8160 4 00 euougdeje 18 15 1 3 4201 45 054 9 6 PIBMIO 3003207 013935 4oogr jo dure 191548 1 3uSIN esessop SutSeg 2107 4 37132013110 2107 8 811 0 16449341 1 301320181210 Asng PNO YAW pu xunar OD 159 xuna 00 9 PPV 00 Sursn 51180 11 99 00 LVOFF 9rorv 96 007 6 007 9 00 2 00 69 007 6077 89 00 80 19 00 Lott 19 007 Soott 13 007 Ort 9 007 44 00 OFF 73 007 24 00 16 00 03 007 OT OEP LY 007 ST OEP 97 007 OEP 007 EL OEP 57 007 51057 17 007 11087 88 007 01 06 98 007 6067 00 55 007 106 56 00 906 55 007 goer 12 00 voter 61 00 v1 007 06 01 00 057 8 00 5 00 Toer 1 00 NOILVUAdO NOILVLS FHHLdVHO 8180 9910A 3103207 01816 e
76. 660 peursepsse1do p e 4 SNOILVOIGNI GOT 4 IdWVS 1861 A Inf 19 007 08 sqq 72818 ena 559449 jo 8203 197 INO x INO e 1 22104 aud e Cw 1 440 NO AGM ANNI 5 0181 942318 parisep 559442 s193np 4941 INO 559249 esie 8 9 33147 au JO paurure1801d aq eurn ji 4294 49511 62928 SNOILVOIGNI AJI FIdANVS 89 00 011816 19 8 ou srorsnur 18 4084 184 aans aye e 5908 axa dn Suey e WO 19 67 852026 8148 8 THE eui uorsua xe 89 49 e 92480 oJ 7 4013835 19 81 8 e yo 5208 1 axa dn 3uey e 640 1 19quinw 110 20 6p apo 88999 eq qespueujr e S1431 qq 99243 Arsuta Aay sseido p e 425 OL 1 INW 92702 SNOILVOIGN
77. MAECEN ed 2 13 D 51 Gel 2 5 09 421 15 46 DEFAULTS Pre Pause Time 3 sec Pause Time 1 sec CO Answer Detect 520 msec CO Release Detect 520 msec i GENERAL INFORMATION I INITIALIZE VALUES i This area of the memory block is used to assign various timing parameters listed above to each Trunk Group associated with TLI E ETUs 2 300 223 ND 20292 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 4E5 TLI II INITIALIZED VALUES OPERATION 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F4 then F10 3 Depress 15 4 Dial the number of the Trunk Group 1 8 to be assigned Example Trunk Group 1 See Note 1 5 Depress L1 L16 to set the required timing para meters to the selected trunk group See Note 2 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 3 8 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line AND DISPLAY 21 2 2 2 21 2 1 12 21 2 111 Repeat steps 4 thru 7 for all trunk groups associated with TLI E
78. Sur erp Luvas e erp 07 YT e sus qr eq adUanbas 9 PUL UOISUd Xd 10 st queuru amp irsse uau A sty Jo 022 5 ut 51 055 21481 995 50193484 8014593 CAT ATA 104 quo SUTIN 94 uo 5191 4718 UUME Aquo 1 091 1 4 9 48 18 8 st 2 11382 610 Sox ssq 3utpuodsa1102 10 1 9 Asnq 88 94195 SLIN SSA 94 0 SAAT 944 Surpuodse1102 sey 3941 Kex SSA Surssedap Aq suorsua3xof ALON SNOILVOIGNI 4 IdAVS SNOILVOIGNI 1961 26502 100141 1 SNOILVOIGNI 3IdWVS 1861 4 91 00 5908 4131 SNV s4431 sey sqan SNY axa AAT 8 axa qan ssa 5348 1 8 SNOLLVOIGNI 01 as e Surysey 552242 e Surjoejeg e
79. display to the next trunk C D 3 Extension numbers available 100 899 1000 8999 1 F3 F4 F3 Fa 3 Gl 4 DIT trunks and the terminals where they terminated should be assigned to the same tenant 5 DIT trunks do not have to be assigned to line keys LK1 LK15 unless the trunk is also being used for outgoing calis 6 DIT and ANA can be assigned to primary secondary or virtual extensions however they cannot be assigned to a uniform dialing number E El E El El b H h __ E E E E B E BJ E F E i GENERAL INFORMATION DIT ANA ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to independently assign day mode and night mode ANA extension terminations to incoming trunk calls trunk can terminate at one extension only but several trunks can be terminated at the same extension ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2B5 LCR 1 DIALING ASSIGNMENT QPERATION 1 Go offline 2 Depress F2 then F7 3 Depress F15 See Note 1 4 Depress L1 to assign whether not 1 dialing is used LILEDON LCR1 Dialing is used L1 LED OFF LCR 1 Dialing is not used 5 Depress the ENTER key 6 Depressthe SPKR key to go back on line 300 92 AND M DISPLAY jojr jr f isiv s 2 211111111
80. uos1edso es fq 88 19104512 993 jo uot3eq e3sur 9 3 en3guoo 4123821208 01 84129102 10 K1esso2ou 839945 qof 193548 jo 828835 ayy san pA 014 urojs s 18 urejuoo yno 18 3 5 5 10782412946 ajdures jo 53816000 U01998 SLGGHS NOLLVOMINddS 8861 14 8 56202 ON 025 008 GANDISSV LON I nj LNAWNDISSV NOISNSLXS GaNDISSV I 6 OLNV 1004 ANIT ONIHJHDIN 2 18 LHDIN V DNIA AVG 14 Q3AV TSO HLOS IN LHDIN 1 AVA XNV IG SAV a HLOH N ONIN LHDIN AVG TINSWNOISSV ONIONTH 410 LINSNVUL VLVG 5 LON OG 085 105 9 FAVS 6668 0001 40 668 001 NOISNALXA 84 14 100d 0FL 101 ANIT OO MNNUL 5 NOLLVLS 40 490 9 1 91 691 414 LNns vvs 9 0 49 44 NOLLVIS 990 Ux9r aLs 19 dO Hd AL NON WISVO NOLLVIS Q3LVIQOSSV 6668 0001 20 NOILVLS 668 001 NOISNALXA G3N
81. 4131p 1841 SB 590 X8d OQ uo pe etp eq 8024 st J ALON e aul ospe 51 YUNI paztas jr 83421 GAT X8d OO ALON 166 00 19quinu erp peads q VI 147 18 axa Guo un e Kay 4 00 40 559242 e 556 4 0 erp 15 Aq rerp peads peusitsse Aay ggd ssa1dop 3121 1541 se SOUT X d OQ uo 1 o 18024 st ALON 61 00 zaquinu erp paads 15 Aq 81 erp paeds peutureJ80Jd Kay 5 5524424 e Suo 07 YVI 84431 u9913 4 00 84 02 20 apt uong e SNOLLVOIGNI ATd AVS SNOLLVOIGNI TIdWVS 1861 6202 00 uorjoung a2uonbos 5 a8quinu erp paeds Aq Sutsn e
82. H uIN T als lt migkl lep TTT TTT noje A s T IRIKI 16121 lA s a N 612 1 1 Hl uini T 2 m 6 T RepeatSteps 5 and 6 to assign all Trunk Groups required or depress TEL to assign a specific trunk group 8 Depress key to go back on line 300 234 300 234 ND 20292 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE ON OFF Line EL Enters Trunk Group number F W Increments Trunk Group number Enters each assignment B W Decrements Trunk Group number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED CPU EB2 or higher NOTES pe p par 5 6 9 8 181 E 333 us 56 Cee 55 e Cm Cel 3 al 3 29 1 By default all trunk groups 1 8 are assigned to Tandem Hunt Group 1 2 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to increment to the next Trunk Group HEB E EI E EI El P F E E El i GENERAL INFORMATION TRUNK GROUP TA
83. NUMBER STORED 16 CHARACTERS MAXIMUM MEMORY BLOCKS 2 2 amp 3 SPEED DIAL TENANT AND OVERRIDE ASSIGNMENT 785 006 6668 0001 40 668 001 3210A SNDISSV 201 uo 51 9 22 x ojg uowayy 310N 1N3INNDISSY 4 8 I AAS 8 1 5409 YNNUL OL GANDISSV 38000 WALI 1 1 1 OL GANDISSV LINDUIO 8 ANNUAL ANNAL OL G3NDISSV LINDUIO SLIDIG 01 4 00 N3HKN LINDY SSVdAHOLA HO ISSVdAH 55400 SNDISSY 3002 _ 3009 6668 0001 668 001 NOISNsSLX I VVU 140415 DNINDISSV 53254 55323 SLIDIQ 211 3000 400 GINO AO HLONS I SNDISSY SSVdAH OL A 55 OL LAS OLA 1 LON SI 1 41 H2TSSVdAS OLLA OLA GIA W31SAS 421304 DNTIVIG 113 ANGOLA SOhPHSAO SONVH MOTIVOLA SMOTTV 6 0 511014 TIONIS ALVUVdaS Z 3909 DNIODLAO Xdd SNDISSV SLIDIC 1 15 3000 40 HLONG SNDISSY MOTIVOLA SNOLLVLS SQQ IONI OL MOTIV OLA NOKLVASOANI 00 DNIWOONI 40 MOTIV OLA DNITVIG 09 SV 4 MOTIV OLA DNITVIG YOA 151 9 AGIAONd MOTIV OLA NI d
84. Repeat steps 4 thru 8 for all trunks associated with TLI EB ETUs to be programmed Depress the key to go back on line 300 230 ne GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED CPU EB2 or higher NOTES 1 During step 7 the status of L1 L12 indicates the previous parameters set to the Tie line chosen Li L4 DTMF Interdigit Time 10 ms 40 mS x M Mz 0 14 Default 70 msec DTMF Duration Time 50 ms 60 mS x M M 0 14 Default 110 msec L5 L8 TMF as LINE BUTTONS FUNCTION ERN ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 2 5 56 071 48 x iss ez s 558 Ce 551 e E ex Gel Ed Ei LJ Pd Lal TRANSMIT E El E El F E E E kl E E E E ps 0 1 2 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to increment to the next Tie Line channel 300 231 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 4E9 TANDEM PORT TO HUNT GROUP ASSIGNMENT OPERATION
85. T 21111111 111 7 JA c c olu N T coloj 1 TT TT TT c o o e T TT T T T1 300 78 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMM NG MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY 8LOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED All CPU levels NOTES N ON IO A 2 Gs Os 2 8 15 8 c 05 ess es 1 During step 3 any previous value already set is displayed Default value is 10 digits Duc Cee occ Ca 251 m E3 LJ Ed 2 HE E FL ELE E E i GENERAL INFORMATION ACCOUNT CODE DIGIT This area of the memory block is used to define the maximum number of digits for account codes This value can be set from 1 to 14 digits in length ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2A9 PBX OUTGOING CODE 1 OPERATION DISPLAY Go off line Depress F2 then F6 Depress F19 See Note 1 Enter PBX outgoing code Example Digit 9 Depress ENTER key See Notes 2 and 3 lotr Lt ext xrx y jP RJO G R A MI mjojoje 151151 21111111 1 1111 11 0 0111 10111 6
86. ULC 2ryeurojne ALON 91 5208 081 1a ex ssexdaq e 5208 a 4 00 st eur 4 00 819940 1a 440 8908 8935 ULO uan 40 apo BUIULIAT Jo 2391 e s4431 440 8908 64815 st 197 8 1d 197 4 00 35694024 ut aun 18120 1162 1 71 4 SNOILVOIGNI Gol 4IdWVS SNOILVOIGNI 31d VS apising 1861 26205 IN 001 00 5208 141 kay LA 5592434 e Apeays 81 poa 1a you st 3d 14 St qqr1 98828 4 00 NO 01 JLA 9481 YLA 10 ure A ALG 848 5 YLA 40 JunreM 71 8 e 5522044 cg 1192 v 03 559 4 oj jou 1 Aq paudisse UL pue 4104 ALON 5908 197 889448 00 st 0 sonny qst
87. VV XX Total SPD dial buffer area assigned 22 SPD dial buffer area to override toll restrictions 2 When the last buffer number to override is dialed the display will increment to the next tenant BE 72 23 ce COAG GENERAL INFORMATION SPEED DIAL OVERRIDE ASSIGNMENT This area of the memory block is used to assign certain areas of the system speed dial memory which will i override any code restrictions already programmed for each tenant ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2A4 INCOMING PRIME LINE PICKUP OPERATION AND 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F2 then F6 3 DepressF14 4 Depress line key L1 to set feature as required See Note 1 5 Depress ENTER key 6 Depress SPKR key to go back on line DISPLAY Jole J Jt fi CIx x xD 15 151 T ie eR me 4 T Ex spe 121 25412 efri mE T 300 70 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 2 9 2 5 8 9 2 61 es ENTER Enter option GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY 8LOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK
88. ure18o0Jg 8 peedg uonsjs 4 1 paedg 6 jequinN 1 7 Bury 1 1296 5504 sapoo 559593 4 011816 1 1 0 pourure18o1d aq uea shay 550 5992 peedg 5 8 F202 SNOILVOIGNI LT TT 91115 bivi 0145 SNOILVOIGNI GOT 1 8 1861 A Inr FHAXIdVHO 2620 29 00 aq 61 00 1equinu jerp peads et qan 559 e 18582 0 841811 gq Spuosas 01 ut ewou 54 1392 A eorjeurojne GIT 941 027 243 jo 5 aq 01 6601 ssoude q e 550 Burs 001 peuruuze eurn jy Aqu 53181 91 943 Jo euo se sjunoo uorsse1dap 9225 Kex 93 sseudep ayy Jo y sr asned 66 02 Jaquinu erp 5 Jo 22918 ut SNY 852028 yuna erp paads aq 0 spaeu Jaquinu
89. 02 aqualajaig eur 3urdury uon orput uo 18120 622814 sso1804d ut SN y Jo 401559449 ALON uu 5908 GAT 6 syst 141 19218 O2 19 1 aut ALON OO puodsau o3 s e Usey 5 447 SNV 243 d11 X8d OO 841488 ay SN y ssaidag e Ady 74 5208 197 SNv s4311 8 e 991 d1L X8d OO Buyse uo ppy 5594420 e eur 489 8 081 SNY pue 09 SutioAsuy SNOLLVOIGNI Gal 1 8121 0 t LIT 8121 18 91 1011 e 1019 18121 10 1 Li TTT TTT TN fit SNOILVOIGNI GOT 3IdWVS 18et A inre 1 26202 01 00 a NPOW 20 Burua eurn 943 uo 2 5 ew J 44811 41 12218 1X3 8141 20 OPP
90. 03 8982 993 pe 99u82 aq anang 71 11014859185 anang xyuni 72 SNOLLVOIGNI GOT 3 IdWVS 1861 ATO PHUSLdVHO 26205 01 00 81431 Bi SNOLLVOIGNI FTAWVS 01 ugo 6 paeds 1587 9 out e os e sr pozros 83430 our ALON 4284 1equinu 81 01 8 a n jeq epo e 01 YI Kex uorsuejxo o pr 569449 e uorsuajx4 UQ 86822 61 uorsuaejxe 9849AU07 e 9103 8q 18201 Jaquinu 9uo erp 9410281 0 e OUT eH 8 0 ssaidaq e Bured enue saury 11 CIC seurg 2702 Ts 0 1 oor T 19159 9 1819 SNOILVOIGNI GOT 3 IdAVS Lgev Ainr UAXLdVHO 26 05 12 yo 5208 SNV Sur qq 92248
91. 1 4 1 1111 A s e N 1 4 5 A s e N r e t a 1 1 1 151 1 5 1 6 Repeat steps 6 to 8 for all code numbers in the table required See Notes 4 and 5 10 Depress TEL key and repeat steps 4 to 8 11 for all tables required Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 5 T T T T mime 11 1 300 188 vvu 100 gt 4 key is used to enter three s in the area ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 NOTION N B W Decrements table number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED 3E7 8 CPU levels NOTES 1 During step 4 the display shows any current area and office code assigned to the code number and table chosen x 223 333 ca Cas CI ex Em 89 3 Ed Fal Pd 4 Ed 4 2 Each table can have a maximum of 8 code numbers entries 3 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to increment to the next code number in the table and or office code positions These three s represent any digits dialed from 1 0 and
92. 5 925 PLS 153 0 2 0 2 Jury 3Q3IN 8 8 00 2 55 00 9 queuiudissy 09 01 550 9 auoydajay 0 1 3894 478 5 uorpung 1 uonejg pue anyway 01 418 654 uoyng 550 01 jyuawuusissy Suiduiny 8r yeaday 3rursug3 8180 eur 00 our 09 30018 LNSANDISSV 8861 H3HWA2Id48 3uoundissy od oury I 8 114 ZIE 8 1016 IWA INA 1999 Burururea8044 1409 3 65 2210 pu eed 93 153 ore Sen eA 115 52919019284 Suturure1801q yung 1100 808 13024 yuna 1109
93. 6668 0001 10 668 001 LNNH 6668 0001 40 668 001 NOISN3LX3I IWA 075 005 6668 0001 20 668 001 NOISNGLX NOISNALXA LNVGNGLLV GLVIOOSSV AULNG 1 0 303 403 S1N3WNDISSV N 215 006 G INOSHS0 V3 SNOLL H NOILONNA dO LNSW NDISSV 53801 24 SYIENNN NOISNaLX3 SNOLLNA SSA 40 LNAWND ISSY GaNDISSV LNVANALLV daLvioossy NOLLdIN Suq 01108 55 2129 18 2NVIN311V 934412055 WALI 42018 JOWIN SNOILONULSNI NOI1V2I4I23dS gor MEMORY BLOCKS 1 1 3 8 4 DSS BUTTON ASSIGNMENTS FOR EDE 30 1 DSS BLF 5 DSS BLF 2 ASSOCIATED ATTENDANT STATION z 9 lt amp 5 a z lt a E 5 9 9 ASSOCIATED ATTENDANT STATION FLEXIBLE FUNCTION 715 008 Jad 01 peubisse 91n3e3j 118 BY 06 310 6668 0001 379 19 IVNIWHSL SNIIILIQN 91 14 668 001 NOISN4 LXW HOVd dO 5 1 NOILVLS 1 ANANS WALI 9155 4 1 1 OL 34n1V34 418 T L 32018 AYOWIN uod SNOILINUYLSNI 45 315 006 7022 339 01 WNWIXVW STVNIIAH3 L 06 1933 SIHL G3NDISSV NYD 51 INITILINW
94. SNOILVOIGNI GOT 1861 56202 8 75 007 170 203 uo padureo 82 3 eui3140 JUL 5 40 93 8 4 00 9403521 auo e 3305908 441 SNv 51 1 sr juaura2unouue 10 e Jequinu MU Sai SNv BE ssa 9 3 1189 03 peurure33o1d 5601 589249 e st 1811 32228 4 00 8014 ut 55 NOILVOIGNI L961 AINE 14 2650 35 007 5481 1871 ANO 1 848 89 01 AND A11ed pa 62 9519AU07 01 pej e rem uorsuajxe e seuseg ANI 409 JUL 5691490 e ss31301d ur uore1edo 941 Sutsn aq ued s E2 26 ALON 51 200 10119 8 61 Lay Jo 55948044
95. SOUT 94 09 uo aq peurure1804d st J LON 9519AU07 e 61 00 erp paads 013815 Aq 0 10 terp paads 109 8 5 ssaidaq e auo BIP 03 J SpULY IJTI e e hnpoy OD 941 PPY 991 197 843 uo fex 55142 e SNOILVOIGNI 4 IdWVS maa ee 5 o t olor 1 T 8 alvi 0 1121816 91218 6 8121 11111 maa 415101 0 LL LL 01511111 SNOLLVOIGNI G07 FIdWVS 1861 A Ine 1 56202 SOT 007 81081 4 9 3 900311 228 SN OLLVOIGNI 3IdWVS 51 erp paads Surpeoead eu ur sJoquinu jo 8 358 ssepun uorjoung 104 eouanbes paeds 01818 Jeujoue 10 5 JaquInU erp paeds Aq Butsn aouanbas uorj2unj jou aouanbas Sur erp erp Aq aouanbas 101 846 uaq A a ST er
96. asnu spun 4 4 speuruue eurniny e syun 4 paddinba euni 1 91 414 1 091 414 1 49 1 03 9 q9 re v 0 9 3 89 wed 2 03 SEUTULA 204 22 ALON 1189 8 1189 used penp Aj1ed 11 ALON e 44318 soysey 051 SNV uo uorsuo xo 4 4 q371 1 paddinba jeurura yyy paddinba SUNN K Sursn St 0971 9948 ue 12430 Kax aut e uo 85818014 182 180 384 tend 9 0 SNOILVOIGNI 801 SNOILVOIGNI dal AIdWVS LBET ATAC 4 56202 1861 ATAF 1 06202 0 22 OOF 84 8 0 41 aures au Sur 5144 9403 you saop PUMN pere yng 2403 4284 Sur 04 aed aroa
97. c es CPU EB or higher NOTES 1 After step 4 the display will show the line type Ed previously assigned to the selected trunk 9 group 2 Numbers 1 4dialed in Step 5 correspond to the Ca following line types 1 Second Dial Tone 9 Ld Ed Ed 2 Immediate Start 3 Delay Dial 4 Wink Start When assigning this parameter for E amp M Tie Lines type 1 4 are available With DID trunks only types 2 4 will apply By default the Second Dial Tone type is assigned 3 Depressing the ANS key will automatically return you to Step 3 8 B BI E E B B i GENERAL INFORMATION TLI LINE TYPE ASSIGNMENT i i This area of the memory block is used to assign the method of loop supervision to be used for each of the Trunk Groups which associated with TLI E ETUs 300 217 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 4E2 DIAL TONE ASSIGNMENT Dialthe number of the Trunk Group 1 8 to be Depress ENTER key See Note 3 OPERATION AND DISPLAY Gooffline fu te INTE C XD moje 2 SES pe ESSET ESOS Depress F12 olia als 6 6 rolne 16121 51 111
98. 09 1 2471 24 09 1940 1 1 0 3 1 yuaudinby jo Pu 6668 0001 19 668 001 494319 193 9 asn 10 8 104 z th m 1 12012 1000 3 99 6 TIWA 5 3 5 1075 SIHL NI G3TTVISNI 015 SIHL NI YALNA 88418 6 va TIS NOLLVIYHOANI ri HLVhidONddV T AIT A FL 30 F YAWS LOTS NOLIdO 841021944002 93153 10 159 INA SWSGOR TIS YOLVUANTD ONIN SV HONS LOIS SOVAHWSANT HO 3 401 5 HOV NIGS TIVISNI NLA FHL 210168 ATddNS WSLNS SSXOH 5 NI 1N3WNDISSV 1015 4 31 1 32018 303 5 45 90 515 008 QOI ZXun t 2 a N N H e 55 1015 1 27 120718 PIE 006 0 3121 0 dures 10 6 0 Popp 07 3131 Jo joquin N e Paap 01 1131 W 3 4 jj pue 15 auo eur Jo puo
99. L SNOILVOIGNI A IdWVS 1861 1 26205 9 00 s1431 8 syurm qyq 8 4 0 jo 5208 051 SNV 51 8 181 8 99228 0 Usep 5 081 sny pue axa Apeays 81 197 1928 147 49248 syu 42928 St 197 32228 XHd OO SNOLLVOIGNI 1 10 AVY SS91do q e uo ploy eA snjoxe uou 10 SN V 5594494 e 1180 8 19 10 9214 ABH 889 49 e ploy eArsnjoxo uou 10 20 39443 1180 Sururoou oN 2 6 eut eurrid uo dn pexord aq 81189 10 8 ALON 18151 T2 o o eo T T 18121 S1 T eT een 11 SNOILVOIGNI GOT 1861 6505 12 00 euo mau 328 jou usepxoou 8 aprAo1d Kex 993 YIT 3utsn mM euo 198
100. NOTE Before undertaking this procedure the installer should be familiar with the Genesis Genie Technical reference manual and Chapter 8 of the Electra Installation Service Manual 2 PARTS REQUIRED 21 An MFR EA ETU and an RSG E unit associated with the CCU in which the VMI E ETU is installed are also required 22 Genesis GenieVoice Mail System Including the Technical Reference Manual and the System Managers Guide 2 3 serial computer terminal The NEC PC8201A PC8300 portable computers are recommended 24 RS232C Null Modem cable Pins 2 and 3 reversed 25 Modular Line Cords 2 RJ11C W connectors and cable 3 OPERATION After installation and programming are completed users of the Electra will be able to access the Genie system from any internal extension either by Hunt Group Access Default Code 63 or by dialing one of the VMI extensions directly Once a call is placed into the Genie system the user is directed by the audible menu prompts of the Genie on how to access the various features available For a complete explanation of the features available with the Genesis Genie Voice Mail System refer to the Genie System User s Guide and System Manager s Guide 4 PROCEDURE 41 Connection 4 1 1 Install the VMI E ETU in an available interface slot in a CCU which is supported by an RSG E unit 1013 4 1 2 The Genie Voice Mail System provides two ports AIUs for Voice
101. SRV AREA CHK 22 S TABLE MODIFY TABLENO 120 TRKACSSCODE 01 AREACODEDEL ETR CODE ADD PFX ADD CHK SRVAREACHK 2 ROUTE TABLE MODIFY TABLENO 120 TRKACSSCODE 01 AREA CODE DEL CODE ADD ADD CHK SRVAREACHK dr a TABLE MODIFY 01 PFX ADO CHK SRV AREA ROUTE TABLE MODIFY TABLENO 2 120 TRKACSSCODE 01 AREA CODE DEL ETR CODE ADD PFX ADD CHK SRV AREA CHK ADO ETR CODE TBL HK OFC CODE TBL tt DEL CODE TBL 02 EL ABO ETR CODE TBL 02 EL ADD CODE TBL 02 DD ADD ETR CODE TBL Ree ND 20292 CHAPTER7 MARCH 1988 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS When the CHK option is selected it is necessary to ROUTE TABLE MODIFY also assign an office table number in which the LCR E 3 can check for a flag Available table numbers are 01 000 127 Once the table number is assigned the as ETR CODE TBL 02 cursor position automatically drops to the next line If PFX ADD CHK HK OFC CODE TBL 001 NO or ADD is selected it is necessary to use the SRV AREA CHK cursor down key to move to the next line Service area check is an option used when the line to which the call is being routed is using an OCC and it is necessary to check for OCC service to a specific area based on the office code This option allows the ADD ETR CODE TBL 02 programmer to tell the
102. geadas 4 21 51 1aquinu 1811 etj 3ue3suo li ue suy 9 86 5 011068 3104 ou 52 007 3843 3ut or 0j 19 Je noryred aaquny 0 Aq q Aq 3 uorje nopeo 10 3do2xo s318tp spaaoxa uis 6 e jo anjeA equ INDO 540135 1861 1 26205 00 895908 qT Suey pueeuo 0121111409 181 19 559228 e e 5 dn Suey euo e 5908 GAT axa 110320 e 119 882208 e 3espueu jr 53481 137 8 eut uorsuajxe 559449 e 3104207 1876 85 05 SNOILVOIGNI GOT 4 IdWVS SNOLLVOIGNI 1861 71
103. peddinba 1180 007 SNOLLVOIGNI GOT 14 1861 PHA3LdVHO 6202 CIN 05 007 08 5 141 anas pue xaq oo Wi 81031 8 st 31 8 4 00 52908 0511 SNV sw anas 51481 8 axa SNOLLVOIGNI 31dWVSs Mau 383 saop use pxoou e Ady 899 pasn st YIT LIJM ALON pagaq 51 IP paseo a1 S 8291 e 1189 941 pua ay 559442 e eray Bursa 4 UMdS 39442 e Busy 8 5743 Jo g 202 pue E 1 00 401296 225 PIOH YITM Poy uo 92614 85943044 ut GN V Jo 01689 49 711810047 2841 UMS 59242 e 15 007 uorsua3xo 1 uey 19010 uo au Sursn 55948049 8 p nous ujed penp YIM speuturJa g PUPIN e you 9384 92104 10 8 qued penp e 15 6 ysnui queuruditsse yed eng e ONLA 93 159
104. 12 9 01 gg Jaquinu YAW IP 49 55902 e 1891 25 OFF 007 104 onanb ayy 8 ananb 4104 run 100 8223 401 19p10 a1 1 51 5143 8 656 qey Aue Aq ALON peurureJ804d aad Jou 81014616 BY 03 68394 aq anand 1015 e apo 55922 Aue QUO erp anand 92482 e 1861 AINE 26502 Liq euo 3419991 8 8 3LL XSd OO 196 yory 40135 aq 98 ananb yuna ayy o3 xuna eu 68 uoos sy yunay Zupy 10158 659 4804 40048 yey ut 34014 ay jo je
105. 131 1 1 11111111 1 1 111 1 191111111 n a If a second PBX outgoing code desired repeat steps 4 and 5 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 80 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 Increment PBX outgoing code number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED e p 411151 Bs 2 D E 34 us CPU levels NOTES 1 During step 3 any current PBX outgoing code Ls set for code 1 is displayed 2 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display 2 to increment to code 2 C 3 During step 5 any current outgoing code set for code 2 is displayed gt E Fl E El FI El El E F Fl i GENERAL INFORMATION PBX OUTGOING CODE i This area of the memory block is used to assign up to two single digit PBX outgoing codes These digits are dialed by station user on PBX line to access dial tone ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2A10 TIE LINE DIGIT RESTRICTION ASSIGNMENT OPERATION DISPLAY 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F2 then F6 3 Depress F20 4 Enter station to be assigned Example Stat
106. 4 fred 1511 01 uorjejinsuoo uo puooes aed urede SN V 559442 e maa 8121 449101 s 11318 ep 11111 8121 Js Te 011 6 ashla 1861 A TINE vUILdVHD 26202 00P 3 3 300 5905 3103583 5208 191 5208 031 LX Ed 9419291 311p euo 407 311 XHd OO Aq 1 820 x red 182 03 days mag pe Burysey 1 11 94 00 3IJ XHd OO euo 4808 Asng st Jequin yN uorje2o7 418d 949 JT 9401 6 0 uoreao 1190 1814 apoo 889028 8143 40 peururg801d gga sse1dap 10 sse oy 1160 18 1 8 uo paoujd st 82 auos Surysey 12928 axa 101 SIL X8d OO 181p 211383 aaraa 859299 92928 axa 10 4 0 85948024 ut 183 1808 31840171 180 51087 SNOLLVOIGNI
107. ALON 193545 8 855911 10 uojsr e 103208 1341 03 peas Qa e 8171 pas SNV axa SNY qq fex aul uorsuejxe 69149 e 5 Aq ou e 93104 10 9 3 859208 2 e 518 e S1421 4371 559443 e 3Sungursiuo 199 9210 A 62702 SNOLLVOIGNI Q3 1 s 011 Als Te SNOILVOIGNI 14 5 1861 26502 LL 00 pe oouso st 1 22104 BIC e U1938 S IDOA 107 94 NUN 11914 989559 asuva eq 048 24 st 943 92083501 194 988559 8 22 SuLINp g utt 24 uo
108. Calling DTE With voice call in progess EXT green LED is lit steady Depress DT key green LED flashes Called party depresses DR key pr red LED lights Depress DT key DT LED goes off Called party depresses DR key NOTE Called party can depress DR key twice in succession instead 6 Failed Data Call Attempt Called Party s Data Path Busy With voice call in progress EXT green LED is lit steady Depress DT key red LED flutters Depress DT key again LED goes off 400 91 ND 20293 CHAPTER 4 JULY 1987 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS 11111 1 0 4 51 jojc T 1218 F RT 11111 LT J 1 1 3 7 ITI T Rak i1 o 415 j2 s 11101 14151 Jo CiT 12481 1111 1 iP Alr u 11 11 151 101 415 0 1 12 81 1819 011 5137494 841458 Av dstp ut 619939 Plog ALON SNOILVOIGNI GOT J IdWVS 1961 1 26205 58 00 go 5208 19918 St 457 8 axa yo 5208 1971 1a 1a 83481
109. This area of the memory block is used to assign up to 32 system code restriction tables to each station as needed Referto section 360 of this manual for a discussion of the system code tables i 1 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 107 CLASS OF SERVICE ASSIGNMENT OPERATION lt AND 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F1 then F9 3 Depress F17 4 Enter the station number to be programmed Example Station 104 See Note 1 DISPLAY tofe e J E C X TXTXD 6 mojo 5 Joje 151 vi icjL s Jole s vicl 110141 5 15 eli 16 5 Depress appropriate line keys to allow or disallow station features as required See Note 2 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 3 51 w 1 o sT 5 15 7 Repeatsteps 5 and 6 for all subsequent stations or go to step 3 to assign a specific station 8 Depressthe SPKR key to go back on line 300 42 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING x 065 D 21 2 x 6 i s MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT
110. ULA 5955924 q urede Kax 1 1 ssoudoq e pq 889442 e 155918014 9310 A ALA paleo pue Bunea yoq 40 JJO 184815 YLA 2 Iviuvia CECL Je ETT TI JOINT TIVA 812 8 TOIND TEE T TT 1 11 3 5 SNOILVOIGNI GOT 7 5 6 00 s4431 Kex 5955 24 u saysey 141 12913 kay Lq 894494 e BIP 03 YT s4434 LX JON 43484 pae 8 ur Bupu L 03 180 eyeg 8 OT 5208 197 1a 43 xa Apeays st 18 axa urede fay La 559199 La 582493 e 86948014 PUNIMI 5380 Suneupitio 6 SNOILVOIGNI 1861 6506 8 9 Jal SNOILVOIGNI GOT Id AVS 186 ATO 4 2650 76 007
111. a system wide basis whether or not local calls will override bypass LCR This memory block is also used to assign whether or not the dialing pattern i XXXX is routed through LCR in a 1 dial area 1 1 E i i i i i i i i i i ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2B7 MODEM POOL ASSIGNMENTS Depress ENTER key See Notes 2 and 3 OPERATION lt AND DISPLAY Gooffline _ Lt NTE T jPjRJo s R A MI T is v s 211 11111 1 11 11 Depress F2 then F7 Depress F17 IP olo L A s e N TT T T Enterthe device number of the modem to be iM o p E MI 2 5 lein assigned 1 4 Example MODEM 2 See Note 015 T 2 2 2 2 5 0 DialtheSingle Line Telephone station number associated with an SLI port to be assigned to this modem for modem pooling Example Station 150 Dialthe Multiline Terminal station number 2 51511161 1 equipped with DTA E unit and associated with an ESI EB ETU to be assigned to this modem for modem pooling Example Station 110
112. i 1 1 1 sequence of single digits ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 3E4 SYSTEM ALLOW DENY ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND gt DISPLAY 1 Gooffline i jo F UL I NE XTXD 06 010 is Y s Tr A t ESSET REESE SIS 51 151 1 N v 2 2 Depress F3 then F10 3 Depress F14 See Note 1 4 Depress L1 to Allow or Deny 5 Depress ENTER key 6 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 178 ND 20292 CHAPTERS SEPTEMBER 1988 9 2 C 05 6 271181 xs 1 61 1151 ess CPU levels NOTES 1 During step 3 the indication on line key L1 shows the previous assignment Li On Allow Eg mx ew 1 Fa Ra 3 Ed Fd Ed LJ Ed Cow i GENERAL INFORMATION SYSTEM ALLOW DENY ASSIGNMENT 1 i i This area of the memory block used to decide system wide whether code restricted stations are allowed or i denied to dial numbers that do not match the codes entered in the assigned code tables i 4 300 179 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 3E5 TABLE ALLOW DENY OPERATION AND 1 Gooffline 2 D
113. te Mjolpje 3 Depress 16 4 Dialthe number of the Trunk Group 1 8 to be assigned Example Trunk Group 4 See Note 1 5 Depress L1 L8 and L13 116 to set the required timing parameters to the selected Trunk Group See Note 2 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 3 T Repeat steps 4 thru 7 for all Trunk Groups associated with TLI E ETUS to be programmed 8 Depress the key to go back on line 300 226 300 226 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 02 9 05 6 011 8 9 52 es MEMORY 8LOCK BEING MEMORY THAT PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED 201 CPU EB or higher NOTES 1 After a trunk group has been selected L1 L8 and 113 116 will show the previous assignments L9 L12 may be lit and can be changed in status TE however they perform no function at this time 2 Timing Parameters 1 1 LINE BUTTONS FUNCTION 4 Tandem Restriction LCR 114 115 L16 Controt Timer ng Guara Ti Cx EN 12 2 at htt 251 e o Cd Pd pro 281 0011 11 45 4 __5 15110 6 12 3 Depressing the ENTER key will automatically 7 14 return you to step 3 5 4 Outgoing Gu
114. 016 151151 ris EEGs 1 Go off line 2 Depress F3 then F9 ttt 515 eli x e v 3 Depress F11 4 Depress L1 L3 L5 L7 L9 1 11 113 and 115 pt 2 1 8 1 8 51511 5 Depress the ENTER See Notes 1 amp 2 NOTE Briefly the display all stations will go blank then INITIALIZE will be displayed momentarily before returning to the default values of time and date E ij 7 300 164 ND 20292 CHAPTER SEPTEMBER 1988 K NCTION O o GUIDE FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY OGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED ALL CPU levels 11 2 NOTES 1 Depressing the ENTER key causes the system to reset and initialize current system and user Cmc programming is lost and the system data is returned to default The programming station automatically returns to the ON LINE mode Cw 2 The initialization process causes all traffic in the system to be cut off 4 E Fd 1 MN 22 G3 Bs D 2 2
115. 1 Depress F4 then F10 assigned Example Trunk Group 2 See Note 1 Depress L1 and or L2 to set desired paramenters See Notes 2 amp 4 oli 51 1 6 T R u NIK 7 j Repeat Steps 4 thru 6 for all Trunk Groups associated with TLI E ETU s to be programmed Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 218 T ND 20292 5 SEPTEMBER 1988 ON EL Enters new Trunk Group number Increments Trunk Group number ICLEAR ENTER Enters each assignment B W Decrements Trunk Group number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING IMEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED CPU EB or higher 92 NOTES par D 5 Gs 7 8 1 After a Trunk Group has been selected L1 and L2 will show the previous assignment Cu 2 When the Trunk Group being programmed is Co 1 EA 2 m comprised of DID trunks do not send dial tone to either side 4 m 1 3 Depressing the ANSWER key will automatically Cx 1 bring you to Step 3 541 wx CU 4 Distant End LED 1 Send Cz Cee Dial Send m System End LED 2 Tone Dial Tone i rx TE i GENERAL INFORMATION TLI DIALTONE ASSIGNMENT i This
116. 1 Replace MFR EA andtest Does Intercom dial tone trouble persist i THEN 2 Replace SLI E hart Goto Flowchart 1 Goto Flow chart A1 Leave 1 SLI 1 ESI and 1 MFR Installed Check Memory Block 1D 5 for sta restriction 2 Check Memory Blocks 2C 1 2 amp 3 for CO assignment Test for CO dial tone with a test set and check the CO wiring CO Dial Tone lines are ground start check conduit and frame ground to system Have Telco check lines Replace COI E and test if trouble persists HEN Replace and test If trouble persists THEN Replace TSW E and test If trouble persists HEN Perform Second initilization If trouble persists THEN Replace CPU EB 500 11 ND 20292 CHAPTERS SEPTEMBER 1987 C4 CO Signaling Problem Check lines with a test set to see if they are DTMF or Rotary Check Memory 8lock 4B 1 amp 6 Lines programmed for DTMF or DP Rotary SLT Problem Only Rotary or DTMF Line Type Program Check lines with atestsetto see if they are OTMF or Rotary Check lines with test set to see if they are OTMF or Rotary Check Memory Block 48 1 to ensure line s are programmed for rotary DP Rotary or Rotary or DTMF Rotary or DTMF Program Reprogram lines f
117. 11111111 NI LL IL pL GALL LOaLIG TOULNOD IVNOIS 493140 5 e z apucoes 6 1 rsu 0029 0 8 5 9 A spuoses 21 01 0281 0 035 21 0 0002 0 asnvd 9018 2 9 S p 3p 532018 816 006 10 194 19 5031044504 40 418701 8322125 49 10 qq 418301 5153196 09 SU 09 SUSIP PUN Jo 8 081 318 3 4 eur 8 0 aur at Surinp 0 ped gp 8 0 Suorjoeuuoo MII 9419221 WRA 03 anyea ped 8 0 Suorj auuoo aur 91 eu rajut 3102412 31151843 01 peuStss ped gp 8 0 Suorjoeuuoo eur 9419294 WW 29 01 pouTtsse ped gp 2 1 SUVI er 56 114 941 uo 112419 8 1 St peo 711 20868 1016 1199
118. 29 epo 889228 VIG e 8 99228 axa reunad Kay uorsuajxo K1euridsseide e epoo 3noxoo 3 06 9 4 yo 5208 141 2818 Susy pue aq 03 st 3no 320 013816 Jo Jaquinu uorsua xe 81 29 3n9jeq 9po 559298 YTI s4431 91 19918 axa Aay 559442 e 31032071 4013815 Jo 8 SNOILVOIGNI GOT 3 IdWVS SNOILVOIGNI Gal ATANVS 51 087 1861 6505 051 00 0 5908 GHT dn Juey pue 1071 e Jequinu uorsuajxo a2Jnos e GP Jamsuy on Asng Ph 129 559229 e e 18 137 8 888 49 e Yo 5908 1471 u2918 1 dn pue ouo uorjeuuuoo e 218 uorsuajxe erq e are 51182 Jaquinu uorsuojxo INOS Jamsuy on Asng PP SSII ew e e 51434 091 axa
119. 3481 8441 42918 axa yo 5308 GAT 1a usi 5147 92218 SNOLLVOIGNI FTA WVS Lg ssedeq e uo seuroo GLC Surgeo 188818 YLA 5908 4101 Sure 90916 YLA kay sessaadap e 5598024 ut pue suopueqe 24 ew 4 82 5908 41 84 5308 8101 Sure 94815 YLA Kex La 559443 e 55928044 1102 YUM suopuege pq e1eq 3uruopueqy 4 ola SNOILVOIGNI GOT 4 IdWVS 1861 26205 88 007 5208 La 78191111 AAT 51484 147 uses 1d jo 5208 1511 La 1 51481 q 47 49918 5008 1411 pas sisi qan a 3 sq 19918 xa SNOILVOIGNI AJT 31dWVS sse1deg e sessa1dop 4 85818019 182 733849 suopuege 61 64 pajeg wayskg 24815 YLG 64 Kay sessaadep 11ed Iq 889449 e 55918014 182
120. 5 The key is used to enter blanks in the office and area code position areas Blanks are shown in the corresponding positions E E El E kl E E b EEE ELE E ELI E E 6 Any time an area code is programmed blanks must not be left in the office code position i GENERAL INFORMATION RESTRICTION TABLE CODE ASSIGNMENT i i i This area of the memory block is used to program area and office codes into the system code restriction tables There are 32 code tables available and each table can hold up to 8 area and office codes i i 300 189 ND 20292 CHAPTER SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 3E10 SPECIAL CODE ASSIGNMENT OPERATION lt AND 1 Go offline 2 Depress F3 then F10 3 Depress 220 See Note 1 4 Dialcode number to be set Example Code number 144 5 Depress ENTER key See Notes 2 and 3 DISPLAY Ox TX XDY Le 81016 Aim jMio p e 5 121122 21 1 _5 Tc TA s e N cjiolo e _ 5 A s e N icjoio e 14 1 T Tj js P e c r A A c icjo o ei2 2 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each subsequent special code required 7 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 190 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988
121. 5111 poads uorjejs Je9 2 03 8 2 days yeaday 74 4215 Jo pua 0 5308 IUIN AYL INQ 85884490 8 SNOLLVOIGNI 3 IdWVS SNOLLVOIGNI 8 1861 P H4LdVHO 6606 QN ND 20292 CHAPTER4 JULY 1987 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS SAMPLE LED INDICATIONS 450 4 Originating Calls Depressan idle extension or CO PBX line 4 52 CO PBX green LE key Lift handset Select page as described in Section 450 2 If page selection is not necessary skip this operation Depress desired DSS key Converse with called party when answered LCD goes back to show page lin 10 seconds after depression of the DSS key NOTE When originating calls in sequence the Page Selection step can be inter changed with the Seizing an idle line step 400 157 5 ND 20292 SEPTEMBER 1987 CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 510 GENERAL SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE 510 GENERAL 500 1 520 OPERATIONAL CURRENT AND VOLTAGE CHECK 500 1 530 OPERATIONAL TEST PROCEDURES 530 1 General 500 2 530 2 Before Initialization 500 2 530 3 System Initialization 500 2 530 4 After Initialization 500 2 540 TROUBLESHOOTING FLOW CHARTS 540 1 Problem Solving 500 3 This Chapter is to be used as a guide for troubleshooting the system during and after
122. 5208 197 2 1a SNOLLVOIGNI urede Kex 589449 La 88944394 e jeq e BIP 0 Aay aul 559449 e 43384 3 SNOILVOIGNI 5 1861 vudLdVHO 56202 96 007 5343 441 33828 yo 5908 1471 5 3481 50871 051 09918 1a 1 sr 4471 18 0 SNOILVOIGNI 7 10 a qe Ieaw 51 JLA 943 03 3195 51 90815 siu Apeay 195 5 E 10 51 FLA 993 yuasaid s Bugis 5144 6360 ULA 20 pasn 212 s1a3utd 4 2405424 03 819794 quauidmb euruua eye ALA ALON st Od 81 ALC 9pdurexs NO 164815 ULA 74 440194 YALNA 943 88844 uay 9843 asn sa 9 104 e NO 52109
123. 80815 YSC 40 Bure A 848165 ygd Sure 2 9 SNOLLVOIGNI GOT 1 5 1861 AINE 56502 201 00 5208 JAT Surquta 51 qg 19948 5908 1 sing qa 1a 3 11 51 141 8 08 50371 SNOILVOIGNI 831 FTG AVS urede fax 14 559299 e 8594434 ood sajenur ujed e 01 LA y Surssoadop 8 182 00 ALON 180 3120 urede Lq 88594490 sseudeq e 15594804 ut OD snq p 440 8908 GLC Woy 20815 YLA 10 eurur1a Jo MO SNOLLVOIGNI GOT WIdWVS L961 ATOL Y H31dVHO 26502 201 00 2519440 e 8 eut Sursn saquinu 358 10 paudisse SSA sso1dop SUT 11 84 uo pe erp aq pausisse SI JI 811 euo erp 0 jj e en po npo 241 uo Aay 00 993 uo 32923 31I XSd OO 10
124. 9105 soSussoui azruBo2o1 uo 4071 001816 8 uo 9A99 30 548 92104 eSessour UIST e nog 69 3 n9jeq 552298 Aq 45 92104 89 5148 3 L e oat 1xa q Kay uotsuayxe 559199 e u19js s preur smoys 9 3 1 8111 SNOLILVOIGNI JIdWYS SNOLLVOIGNI GOT 5 1861 1 56505 5 82 007 8 197 used Apeays 51 117 99918 axa Yo 8908 1471 8 axa Apeays st 147 19228 axa NOLLVOIGNI re 2941048 32910 03 fox 559443 e Boay q 103594 6 007 53481 12928 FLA 29430 80818 ALA T T s4431 La 0 Aay sessaidap 59184 1 souse seu1o2eq 84815 YLA 39248 LA chet Cr venu uim 1 859149 maa 82
125. E E EL B ELE B i GENERAL INFORMATION FIRST INITIALIZATION M i This area of the memory block is used to reinitialize the system software and hardware The system program returned to default and all calls in progress are dropped 300 165 ND 20292 CHAPTERS SEPTEMBER i988 MEMORY BLOCK 302 SECOND INITIALIZATION OPERATION lt AND gt DISPLAY _ Lt CIXT X XD 3 jP Rjo s RJA M 51 51 2 Eo 2208 1 Gooffline 2 F3 then F9 3 DepressF12 12 T 4 Depress ENTER key See Notes 1 and 2 LL T T tiini 615 NOTE Briefly the display on all stations will go blank then INITIALIZE will be displayed momentarily before returning to time and date Ere up 222 Li teint iri fate ET olal 115 INjo v 2151 it ule 300 166 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 2 8 05 D 9 8 x 3 55 E Cw Dee eee 1 Ce me EJ 3 F3 Pal ca Cx Ps xj ALL CPU levels NOTES 1 Depressing the ENTER key causes the system hardware to reset Any traffic occuring at this time is released
126. V SNDISSV 6 3 35018 AHOW3IN NOLLdINOSSud WALI 9 22 01 82 532018 01 39 6 3 542018 AHOW3IN SNOILJNYLSNI gt 2345 8 106 006 20 181 3 311 NO 40 A33 T1v23u 01 92 LN3AINDISSV 3NOL TWIG NOISN31X3 YO JIL 8 1 dnou5 W3GNVL 01 39 LN3AINDISSV WIGNVL 01 31089 ANNYL 8 7 40089 3002 02 10 56322 XNNYL TvIG WYOJINN 9 20 9155 6 35 IN3NNDISSV OL 55322V ANNYL NOILVH3dO NOILVLS udldVH2 071 009 00 007 651 007 651 007 007 LET 007 961 00 961 00 SET 007 007 1 00 51 007 007 00 661 007 L6l 00 701 00 291 007 021 OOF 611 00 811 007 411 007 SII 00 PIT 007 007 2011 0077 TII 00t 011 00 601 00 801 007 101 00 01 00 L8er A InP 660 auo uo dweg jsanbay dnytd HEO 348IN dnyotg 90 quepuary 404 0 1 2 8 49 401g uon ejjnsuo guide auoz Surgeg 9007 Luau pastasadnsu 92uo19Ju0 18594
127. uasi apop wysig u8tssy oseg 198155 seg 1 usitssy oseg wasi queurusiissy 8 Aey 8 aur 9481 dnour gt yung 0 BIg dnoar IWA 4 a y 1 5 d 8 L 9 L4 32018 4 155 8861 3HW3 Ld38 26202 4 892 006 SLN4INOO 40 SL33HS NOLILVOLIIO3dS 349008158 4 4 oze jung 01 3104 Sane pezi eryu 114 815 pezipenu AL TT 1 11 senjeA 111 916 8 3912 11314 TTL quawusissy auoL 1811 TIL WOM LINS3WNDOISSV 8861 14 2620 692 006 20700 19quin N 42035 Aq peurejqo 94 591805 86202 0 39998 uorjeorjroeds qof jo Kdoo paddiys NALA 3 nd9 5 9 035 SutorA1es oq ut 1dox ose pinoys 4002 545 99 uaym
128. yo 08 5 431 axo pue 3 34 51 GAT 5 01 sas e es SNOILVOIGNI GOT WIdANVS SNOILVOIGNI 3 IdWVS 85918014 1189 92ua19ju00 e Suiuopueqy 4 1861 4 6002 0N 18161 o 1 9r SNOILVOIGNI GOT 14861 AIL yualdvHo 25 00 pensa sr 84 SNY 10 Seusep qu SNv ssaadaq our uotsuayxa saayiny qq 8 343 St eururia e 98359 st 19 402 ue aurs sayy 63 3 qJ 19213 axa 1 01 e 051 ano 94 889 4 syura qr x eurpuorsuejxe Play y 889 49 eq 01 z 11 dn 19430 squta qq uaa48 axa ye 25 kay Apeays st Qa dul 55918044 ut 581184 kpeays 31 st qq 8 om
129. 1 15 2 Example HUNT GROUP No 2 is 1 16 Dial an EXT NO to be assigend ber of this STATION HUNT GROUP o lo 1 1 11 Example EXT 100 See Notes 1 5 6 2 D ENTER key See Notes 2 press 87 ON o 2 e x rl e N s r o N 2 2 Repeat Steps 3 to 5 forthe HUNTGROUPStobe 5 T A T 1 o N uju N TI e assigned 300 150 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED 387 388 CPU EB3 or higher NOTES 5 81 027 88 x 55 i cs 05 esa 2 Ce C Ce pm OA cs ana 77 4 Ce GS 1 Only VEs and telephone numbers can be programmed as members of a HUNT GROUP 16 max Pilot numbers or uniform numbers are not accecpted The same extension can be programmed to appear on more than one HUNT GROUP The same extension can be programmed to appear more than once on a HUNT GROUP 2 Depressing the ENTER key advances this program to the next extension entry within the same hunt group E E E
130. 101486 IYI 03 18291 4 10 180 ut Ie 189 Luy pjeau aq IM auo 81 104220 41g 180 ue A Surejsrur 5 aq 243 6 0 Jequinu e 5952 e WoO 180 d 1593 1861 vHALAVHO 26202 euo uorjeuiJijuoo 9419291 1 9 uorjeoo e2 e pr ue 0 Zur pe2 4916 os Asnq st pererp 8207 30 9u Jt euo 1 0 ojdurexq 6 0 129 00138207 180 VI e sseooy uo paved st 122 puo2es YOOH 88818034 ut 10 YIM 89 70013235 943 aq 6 au 01 s e2 uonejs st pejeroosse eu j Sururure4804d 6 uodn
131. 11411642 1 ACT Lr o aaa n ll All CPU levels NOTES 1 During step 5 the status of L1 to L16 indicates the type of card assigned to the slot chosen See figure below zc 551 zu So Ga Ed Dm 281 c 3 EJ c Hoe EE ar 3 Lj EH Cw LED Assigned OFF Not assigned 2 Depressing the ENTER key will cause the display to increment to the next slot E E E E ET E E B B El 3 ESI assignment cannot be removed or changed to a different type of card when ETE 16D has BLF assignments ATTENDANT Multiline Terminal is assigned Programming Multiline Terminal is assigned 300 213 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 4C2 INTERFACE SLOT BUSY OUT ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F4 then F8 3 Depress F12 4 Dial module number 1 4 of the slot to be set Example Module 1 5 Dial slot number 1 8 to be set Example Slot 4 See Note 1 jojr f Je ji jP Rjo s R A M eee 5 1 121 Joli 1 5 leli
132. 819338 ur 5193431 ALON dad 8908 64815 YLA od 10 eururia 10 NO SNOILVOIGNI GOT 4IdWVS SNOLLVOIGNI 3 idWVS 1861 56205 1 111 Fre D T T 10151 11 SNOLLVOIGNI GOT 14 8 186147112 5650 101 007 suh qA sa Surysey st qq 92218 14 81 197 92248 4 00 yo 08 5041 SNY pue Apes st 197 SNY amp pseis su sr pe Apeays 81 1371 32923 4 00 08 50371 sny pue 12 suf 8 51 qg 39228 Ld Kpeajs st 197 99248 4 00 SNOILVOIGNI PIdNVS Kex sse1deq NO 03 64816 4601 40 BuNTEM 84816 YSC 10 2 4 kay 5892494 e apoji Buwa uj jou 10 St INO 03 QLA 84816 YLA 10 3unre M ALG YLA UMEM 71 4 uauA 440 8908 peusts YLA od un JO IPO Jo 100 PHBL e Kex 14 989449 e NO
133. 941039 sdnowo vdnowo 1 41039 3NOHd3131 1N3QN3d3QNI 9 ANNAL ME ANNAL vg n 5 32018 32018 AHOW3IN 32018 136 32018 AUOW3IN A1N3IANDISSY 3802 112345 01 36 32018 AHOW3IN SNOILOIHIS3H W31SAS 01 t E 7 L 3 532018 906 005 9L6XXX NI SV 558402 TIV 304 584009 391430 LIOIG 8 SLIDIC 9 40 NOLLV NIHWOO V SLIDIG 54409 A INO SLIDIG 54000 1T 7 A INO HO LAS NVO ANAA 10767 S3000 IOIG98O MOTIVO4SS000 XIS OL dN SLINYAd 5 34 T 94909 LIDIA NOWWOO H3HLO ONITVIG 85 00 AER N TIAYL 40 45 15 3562538 HOV3 OL GANDISSV I IHVTIVAV LHOIS 3iO Hn04 OL dn 8 1 NNNYL SdIMING Sa TGV SHINSG a E sae ANSG MOTIV UO SMOTTV NOILONNA 719 118 1 380 2 E 26 SLNWVANDISSV 404 AULNG 58 4 WALI SNOILDIYLSIY IN31SAS
134. Enter channel number 1 to 4 to select a specific circuit of an interface card Example 4 Selects the 4th circuit on the selected card slot in step 5 Depress the line key associated with the device type to be assigned to the port See Note 1 Depress ENTER key See Notes 3 4 amp 5 Depress TEL key and repeat steps 4 to 8 for all additional port assignments See Note 2 10 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line DISPLAY 8151116 Ee 14 22 12 s Japlo Te Jol 11 Miolo 5 T E R M A p p Te foRr 151 0 7 clu T 1 1 3 clai EJRIMI JA o o eTo 111 5 clus 1511 113 icia 11 Te Joja 1 4 T T 0 7 lolt iciui 300 52 ND 20292 CHAPTER SEPTEMBER 1988 SPER ine EL Selects port to be assigned F W Forward Increments channel number CLEAR 1 ENTER Enters each port assignment B W Backward Decrements channel number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMED
135. GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING IMEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY SLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED ON iQ N e 2 ee 05 881 2 4 xs 1 us 86 AIL CPU levels NOTES 1 During step 3 the display shows any current Special Code entry the first code location 2 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to increment to the next code location Up to 8 Dm mm Ce 3 Special Codes can be entered 3 When the Puerto Rico Special Code is m assigned in the area assignment code table 32 78 becomes the Special Code table s 1 Sa F4 XD 1 i GENERAL INFORMATION SPECIAL CODE ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to enter Special Codes into a table This table is used only when the system area is programmed for the Puerto Rico area in memory block 3 1 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 4A1 SYSTEM ALL BUSY RESTORE ASSIGNMENT 1 OPERATION AND Go off line Depress F4 Depress F6 Depress F11 See Note 1 DISPLAY 01 1 1 1 1 181 TOIX TX XD If no chan
136. HOVdS 149594491 45 ALON 19470 4915 71 0 84 SN V 5 po32o as st auo sy 53131 Aq 1914 SNOLLVOIGNI GOT TIdWVS t861 A Ine vUaALdVHD 5660 91 00 8 9335 days 84915 drys Aquo 301348 TALON 3 ano 0 0 4284 08 01 Ady JN 559249 8 days days Badau 8 Kex Aq 0 4284 08 aed SSA NUI pawwesZ01d aq st erp peads 0013835 Surururmga8oJd 146 8 days 8 2 days s1eodo1 4 4915 jo puo 5208 eurure J euni 943 usus SSA out paurure1304d sey 4 011636 4equinu 559228 qun 29909 03 Ady 889 49 8 24035 aq Jaquinu euoude a pus 52228 jet 7 aq 4 euoude o 559228 yuns 8 ay 9 SNOILVOIGNI W IdWVSs a ipa 1111 NIv O T SNOILVOIGNI GOT 5 1861 2 6505
137. INCREMENTS Heises eas Tine tnem ose sms mone Bounce Protection Time BP mamme Interdigit Internal Time DTMF Digit Duration 9 ADMINISTRATION ADAPTOR RAA E INSTALLATION AND PROGRAMMING PROCEDURES 1988 9 ADMINISTRATION ADAPTOR TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE 910 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION 910 1 Remote Administration Adaptor Unit With Host Disk 910 2 PC 8300 Personal Computer 910 3 PC 8231A Micro Floppy Disk Drive 910 4 PC 8295A 01 RS232C Cable Normal 910 5 PC 8295A 02 RS232C Cable Reversed 910 6 Modems 920 RAA E and MODEM INSTALLATION 920 1 RAA E Unit Switch Settings 920 2 Wall Mounting the RAA E Unit 920 3 Connecting the RAA E to the Electra 920 4 Connecting the RAA E to the Modem 920 5 Connecting the Modem to a Line 920 6 Grounding the RAA E and Modem 920 7 Modem to Modem Connection 930 PC 8300 and PC 8231A INSTALLATION 930 1 PC 8300 Power Supply Options 930 2 Backup Power 930 3 Turning the Power On 930 4 Turning the Power Off 930 5 Automatic Shut Off 930 6 Low Battery LED 930 7 PC 8231A Micro Disk Unit Connection 930 8 Operating the PC 8231A Micro Disk Unit 930 9 Initialization Procedure for PC8300 940 PROGRAMMING 940 1 General 940 2 Program Boot Procedure 940 3 Programming via the PC
138. System allow allow user free dialing b System deny disconnect station 300 258 360 3 Direct dial area refer to Table 360 3 Step 1 First digit dialed a Digit 0 disconnect station b Digit 1 go to step 3 c Any digit 2 to 9 if digit is not a rejection code allow user to dial second digit next step Step 2 Second digit dialed Digit 1 0 allow next digit to be dialed step b Any digit 2to 9 allow next digit to be dialed go to step 6 Step 3 Second digit dialed Digit 0 See OCC discussion b Digit 1 disconnect station c Any digit 2 to 9 next step Step 4 Check memory block 3E1 area assignment a System not assigned ITC disconnect station b System assigned ITC allow 3rd digit next step Step 5 Third digit dialed Digit 1 or 0 allow next digit go to step 7 b Any digit 2 to 9 allow next digit to be dialed next step Step 6 Check last 3 digits dialed Lowest possible table assigned to station which contains the three digit number as an office code is found 1 Table is allow allow user free dialing 2 Table is deny disconnect station b Notable is found Check Memory Block 4 1 System allow allow user free dialing 2 System deny disconnect station Step 7 Check last 3 digits dialed a Lowest possible table assigned to station which contains the last three digits dialed as an area code item is found 1 Table is allow Matched item in
139. TEL keys and going to the step where the desired information is provided Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 56 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 SPER ine Select device to be checked F W Forward Increment device number CLEAR ENTER 1 1 B W Backward Decrement device number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE BE PROGRAMMED All CPU levels NOTES er 03 1 51 81 oss 1 158 is 1 When entering memory block 1E4 the display 1 will default to station number information Du 2 After entering device number by port or 01 1 station number if any DSS BLF is associated D with this terminal the DSS BLF will be displayed to the right of the station number The 3rd DSS number extreme right on ij display indicates the CO Add On module console number 3 display step 6 shows the port and the associated station for the DSS device entered TUV 4 The display in step 8 shows the station number and the associated DSS BLF if any related to the port enter ed Fd 4 El El El E h r GENERAL INFORMATION TELEPHONE INFORMATION 1 1 i i This area of the memory block is used to displa
140. The system will therefore allow Station 104 to dial 3 more digits If 753 has not been dialed it no longer sees the match in Table 01 system will therefore only see the match in Table 14 where an office code has not been specified If 753 had been dialed the match would still be seen in Table 01 This example shows a way to restrict a station from dialing all but one office code in a particular area code Trunk Group Parameter Each table can be assigned a maximum of four trunk groups When a code restricted station dials out on a particular trunk group the system will only look at those tables which are assigned to the station and to the trunk group the station is dialing out on This allows different restrictions to be set on a station on the trunk group that is accessed 300 257 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 OCC Other Common Carrier Flag Parameter Each table has an OCC Flag Parameter which can be set or not When a station user dials a second common carrier it is necessary to first dial 10 XXX XXX identifies the carrier service to be used before the actual telephone number To allow deny a toll restricted station to dial beyond 10 the OCC Flag Parameter must be set in at least one table assigned to the station OCC Other Common Carrier Code Parameter If a station is assigned a table with the OCC Flag set the system will allow the station to dial 10 and receive equal access To allow the station
141. Third Attendant assigned OFF Third Attendant not assigned L4 LEDON OFF Fourth Attendant asssigned Fourth Attendant not assigned L1 and L2 LEDs show ON to indicate attendants 1 and 2 are assigned 2 When assigned these attendants are automatically assigned to TENANT 1 3 3rd and 4th Attendant positions can not be removed when Any stations are assigned to it for dial 0 1D8 When any DSS BLF console is assigned to it 1C1 4 3rd and 4th Attendant Assignments must be assigned on the first ESI ETU ports 3 and 4 respectively NDANT 3rd amp 4th ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to allow a 3rd and 4th Attendant to be assigned to the system ATTENDANT Multiline Terminal must be an ETE 16D GENERAL INFORMATION ATTE 2 0 4 Gs 31 9 2 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 21 c4 us us 02 Dm em LJ Pal Pa Ed Ed Pd Ed Ed L4 Pd La d El El EI E E E E E 4 i t i i i i i 300 135 ND 20292 CHAPTERS SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK ATTENDANT OVERFLOW ASSIGNMENT OPERATION lt AND gt DISPLAY 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F3 then F6 3 DepressF13 4 Enter attendant number 1 4 to set Example Attendant 2 See Note 1 5 Enter
142. amp iuQ 404 SSA euni 888090 SNOLLVOIGNI 8 1111111111 1444 1 1 01415 11111111111 ow aat T 101915 TTT ttt tt 1418 alas 2189074 56505 99 00 5908 131 Kex INO e Buty 18191295 5508 Jequnu q 0 90 1814 19quin 358 801914 9 omae uorjoung 1078189 0 Pde 201611 SnorigA 10 SurAo 0j at jo suo 811 559249 e Kex sga e 1933 p e 8 Aquo 4o SSC peururae T mpm suopoung 5208 QAT Kex JNO 582242 552449 e SSC 59242 e SNOILVOIGNI GOT 2961 ANG 56505 99 007 Yo 5908 qur SNOLLVOIGNI 3XidWVS JNO sso1do 89442 e 660 5592449 e INO Sse1de q e Spuooes 01 2048 ewou 03 5011494 031941 191 uo 650 941 5097000 42249
143. e2uo19juoo usipqejse 03 usepjxoor e 9101594 e 314 e Ploy 1 10 889226 18 e pou uorje3 nsuoo 5908 2 HOCH uorjej nsuoo uo 5208 182 8018110 458 e ssaidoad ur YUM 55948044 ut 3uroe q g INUL 1 Aq 6 82 004 CALON 4 2 0013835 I seut 4 2 84011938 2 Aj1ed 8 46169 03 Ser YOOH e 540835 Z XAd OD 5901835 6 saamsue 5 e 4 0 ON 50013835 6 ON 50013835 0 SB 918 59209291102 91415504 1910 03 83 1138 UB uo 11184 pro uorjejnsuoo uo 8208 eutso ysey xooH 60 1861 AINE 56505 e ayy 8 11911991 193 V 92u9J9juo Suruopugqy 119091 Jamsue
144. juepuejje sayjour pojnou aq 03 51182 Asnq sr pejeroosse y uauM ALON 1861 PHALIdVHO 56202 007 910 104 01817 21 0 651 007 Aquo 4 dn ey sie HALON t e 09 559228 e e 1 8 182 4 0 duxotd i92 1431 uorsuejxo S E 4 00 dn perd aq ued 1843 51182 dnoi8 dnyoid aq 013235 sppe Bururoout dn yord OF ALON YIM 9 3 neja 859208 PN e euo pu YI e 1861 ATAF 56505 1189 51 011015 194104 e dnoay dnyatg 72 paded poH 81182 61189 4 00 5 SB dn aq sje Suruioou YM 549
145. number of the desired function and press CR 7 SYSTEM DATA CLEAR RETURN key 9 10 SYSTEM CONTROL ENTER MENU NO 750 8 1 General Explanation of LCR Main Menu Options 1 Down Load The Down Load option is used to transfer data from the floppy disk to the LCR E ETU It should not be confused with normal loading which is from the floppy disk to the computer This option is generally used after data has been changed on the floppy disk No change to the actual working memory on the LCR E occurs until this procedure is completed 2 Up Load The Up Load option is used to transfer data from the LCR E to the floppy disk This option is generally used to retrieve the actual programmed data presently in the LCR E ETU This might be done to check the actual contents of the LCR E 3 Verify The Verify option is used to compare the contents of the LCR E ETU to the contents of the floppy disk This option is used after a down load or up load to verify that the transfer of data just completed was completed properly and no problem was encountered that was not caught by the computer Also this option can be used to check that a floppy disk contains the latest program presently in the LCR E ETU 4 Modify The Modify option is used to change the data in the floppy disk This option is the main function used by the programmer customizing the LCR program It should be noted that this option changes only the data in the floppy
146. o pr e 4 1881 e jequinu paursap e 9403 01 j9spue puey yr ejnpoW 00 941 00 197 59948 AIL XAd OO uo Aay ue 889 49 e enue Surnguidug 1 uo PPV eu 560 PISINO AIL XAd OD 106 uongaodo 3uepuos OFF SNOLLVOIGNI WIdWVS ere s gt 0 1 LL T T FTT SNOLLVOIGNI GOT 3N IdWVSs 1861 ATAC vUaLd VHD 6505 007 ALL Xadd 00 uo 1equinu erp Aq perp paeds 8 1558 ssq sse1dop ysay 68 saut uo aq 0 peurureg304d st 4 J ALON 9519410 e 66 02 Ptp paads 15 Aq e INPO PPV 941 uo 8 311 X8d 0O euoj BIP 0 jospueu 31 e e npoj 00 943 uo Kay aut 89249 peedg 1 seul 31I X8d OO uo Jaquinu erp uorjejs pue terp 10 paudisse Kex 660 ssaudop 152
147. saop 1asn ay suaddey 5193 182 eu Jo apis uo 89 Jou 1u3tur 182934 943 jo uorssa1dap sunu 31815 doo 04 81 HUW 810915 4 9 3 uo Butpusdag 81 euo erp pue aul 3nq 81 189 XHd OO 9 sureure1 1571 59948 00 ayy y 559442 e ey 841661 4 yo 5908 141 8 4 00 e 51 197 18 4 0 78 Suruopueqy 99 03 CAT LX3 SNY 241 200147 eu 55944 esde 83081 qr 42918 Ady aur 9 SNV uo Suroejd purua UUNIN ALON GAT 12228 PIH SNOILVOIGNI 8 00F 88194U0 puodsa1 yoeq Jun euo PIP 51449 4 2419994 Kay LEXA zy 40 Suwsegsse oq
148. 0 993 Jequinu 99 amp 9 559298 81 e euo YVI 82 ue uorjejs 194304 y papaq 180 OFT 009 3equinu Jaye apoo 35929 2 LON dn 910 e 559298 e 9104694 e 1182 uorsue3xo ue 3equinu uoisuajxo e ou 10 auo Asnq uod y euo EIP pu YI e 398 OL 5 988559 1890 61706 1861 6205 QN 8293024 8 ploy uo uo padureo 99819 p 559228 erp pu GE gt 52228 Aq 1182 play 15 aAar13a1 03 uo pedureo 01 3aspueu uo padure YVI euo dn 8
149. 3 A s s r e N sie 1 1 121 1 1 RepeatSteps 5through 7 for modems to be assigned for modem pooling depress TEL to assign a specific modem Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 96 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 ine GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY SLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE BE PROGRAMMED 1A 102 281 2271 484 CPU EB or higher NOTES 5 p B Gs Ge 9 8 x C Cel em 3 5 4 9 76 fad 4 d l After Step 4 the display will show any previous assignments 2 The assignments made cannot be entered unless both an SLT station number and a TERM station number have been assigned 3 Depressing the ENTER key will increment the display to the next Modem Device number 4 Depressing the CLEAR key clears the SLT and TERM assignment and returns the program to step 4 AEE GENERAL INFORMATION MODEM POOL ASSIGNMENT This area the memory block used to assign SLI or port and Multiline Terminal equipped with DTA E unit and associated with an ESI EB to be used by
150. 3ueurudissy JN A 03 175 8 004 NVALIG 885 LI 055 sauri 91 40 401181990 ssed g SPHI9AQ 1180 18207 YIT 3 Zue 1 1 785 2 985 uononusey eur xgd 31814 Junony 189 1902994 Sururo up YANS 11814 00 785 282 05 818 082 az 812 MOOTd aDvd SINALNOO 40 WISVIL 5 NOLLVOLIIO3dS 995 008 dnyotg eur Sururoouj euoqudo a Suruure1804q peedg quowuaissy 3usua 910 1 24193 Hod euruno uoynig 82214235 BA 8 dnoar dnyorg 189 jueurudissy 9uo7 Suideg 8 8 5 0 921195 JO 55810 91481 1011311524 81108310 u0norsey Suruio2u dnoar ure18o1q 195 quowusissy ewig 0110 5 I ve ar ar 300g XNSKNOISSV AHONWSMN 016
151. 7 Sec Outgoing Guard Sec TLI IV Initialized Values 2dB loss to each path Pause Time 1 Sec Pre pause Time 3 CO Answer 520 mS CO Release 520 mS Wink Detect 520 mS Delay Detect 120 mS Loop Off Guard 2 Sec Wink 180 mS 4 8 Initialized Values DP Receive and Send Interdigit Interval Time 70mS duration 11005 Tandem Port to Hunt Group Not Assigned Assignment 4E10 Trunk Group to Tandem Hunt All trunk groups assigned to Tandem Hunt Group 1 Group Assignment 300 7 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK FUNCTION T _ Snore __ ma Terminal Check Software Hardware Terminal Not applicable Status 5 1 System Data Last Change Not applicable s2 Data Dump Not applicable DEFAULT VALUES 300 8 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 SECTION 340 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING DATA SHEETS MEMORY BLOCK LINE KEY ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND 1 Gooffline 2 D F1 9 ina T e 5 142213 12119 7 7 7 111111111 1 5 1 0 4 is th inje DISPLAY 3 Depress F6 4 Dial station n
152. 91 313 AINO 310 15 9155 41141 OL 319 2 5 52018 DNIH LHDIN 9 G3A V T3G 9L 008 18 LHDIN ONIY 19 IN LHDIN Q3AY 130 ON 9 DONIN HLOH N DNIH LH IN 0 LNSNNOISSV 07 10 51 10800 ANTI AO LNAWNDISSY OO V SV LINN 9 DSu38ADN 32IA3G LINO 1 06 10 LNANDISSV GOSNOISSV NOISNALXA gt LNVONGLLV G3 LVIOOSSY AULNG WILI 8 3 L 9 S DL_ 542018 AYOWIN SNOILINYLSNI 45 MEMORY BLOCKS 1 5 6 7 amp 8 CO ADD ON MODULE ASSIGNMENTS FOR EDE 30 1 z e E 25 92 28 z T ag lt 95 97 nN lt m 5 2 gt fa 5 ADD ON MODULE 1 ASSOCIATED ATTENDANT STATION EDE 30 1 DEVICE NUMBER COLUMN COLUMN ADD ON MODULE ASSOCIATED ATTENDANT STATION 30 1 DEVICE NUMBER CO ADD ON MODULE 4 ASSOCIATED ATTENDANT STATION EDE 30 1 DEVICE NUMBER COLUMN COLUMN aLvnidoudav 41 A aNanNoisSv 822 008 oLairuay 1 i NOISN
153. AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline fore Fr NET mojo 2 Depress F4 then F10 3 Depress F19 4 Enter the extensi ber to be assigned to th Tander Port 300 See TIA 6 Notes 2 6 amp 7 1 1 1617 5 Enterthe Tandem Port Hunt Group number to iT A NIpTE M Jol t JAISIGINI be assigned to the chosen port 1 8 Example Hunt Group 2 1 01411 6121 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 8 7 RepeatSteps 4 and 5 to assign all Tandem Ports required 8 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 232 9UU 252 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 K NCIION TEL Enters extension number B W Decrements extension number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY SLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST 8E PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED m CPU EB2 or higher NOTES 1 Tandem switching uses software ports assigned as ETE 16D stations These ports require no suppporting hardware to function but they must be assigned as follows Assign an ESI card to an unused slot 4C1 The corresponding port numbers are automatically assigned by the system Program these slots as ETE 16D phantom terminals 1E2 2 Ports associated with any type of in
154. EL i GENERAL INFORMATION STATION TO HUNT GROUP ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to assign extension numbers to the various Hunt groups 1 8 300 151 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 3B7 STATION HUNT TYPE ASSIGNMENT OPERATION e AND L 11 2 Depress F3 then F7 LETELELELELL LLLI 16121 1 s ela n ce u DISPLAY 3 Depress F17 4 Dial the HUNT GROUP NO 1 8 for which the search method is to be assigned Example HUNT GROUP 21 5 Assign thes search method 151 LED OFF LINEAR Default Wluinit 6 1 LEDON CIRCULAR 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 1 15 2 7 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 152 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 PKR ON OFF Line TEL Selects a new Hunt Group number F W_ Increments Hunt Group number LEAR ENTER Enters each assignement B W Decrements Hunt Group number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST 8 PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED
155. KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE B W Decrements Hunt Group number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMED MUST PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED ims 3B7 388 CPU EB3 or higher NOTES ______________________ Gel 7 8 9 5 1 Depressing the ENTER key shifts the assignment HUNT GROUP to the next group Ce number moo 58 1 Fal Fal Cd Cd fed E E E E El E E minim PENNE 4 i GENERAL INFORMATION STATION TO HUNT GROUP PILOT NUMBER i i ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to assign the Pilot No to the Hunt Group No 1 8 2 2 2 2 2 2 4 4 0 2 4 300 149 0 20992 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 3B6 STATION TO HUNT GROUP ASSIGNMENT Depress key to go back on line OPERATION lt AND DISPLAY Gooffline 101 1 11111 1 6 Depress then is vis 2 1 T Depress F16 5 o N 16 T leh T T T T T LLLA Dialtherequired STATION HUNT GROUP is rlA r 1 oIN e 2 NO 1 8
156. Kex eur uorsuejxe 85944941 e 195 01 SNOLLVOIQNI GOT 3IdWVS SNOLLVOIGNI Q31 1861 PHAX1IdVHO 6505 18151 1819 1111 SNOILVOIGNI GOT W IdWVS 1861 14 56205 121 007 5208 141 18 s4431 99228 axa Kreurad dn Suey euo e e aquinu uotsuajxe INOS BI e gp ON Asng 310839 epo 889929 e espueu gr e eur 589249 e 01 6 351 00 ano AND OL yo 5908 1311 Kex 52443 e 484 SNV Sutsseadop 1 etp paeds 545 erp erp paads 1 3545 Suruiurea804d uou M peurure8o4d Jaquinu 291 49119 01 SN V 5 e 493u2 03 nof euoudo a3 Aq ssaooe xung jer e 66 02 jequinu erp paads 5 5 e e AAT INQ ssaadaq e 8 44 OF 1 Buruure3o4d 548 ouop 9415 jueuo 0 519 4 erp 191545 Jo
157. LED restricted LED off unrestricted 2 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to increment to the next station number i GENERAL INFORMATION TRUNK GROUP OUTGOING RESTRICTION This area of the memory block is used to restrict stations from making outgoing calls on a trunk group i basis The outgoing restriction applies to both direct and dial access to trunk groups ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 TETEA 81 2 881 15 i 25 es s me Ed 73 Ed 4 Cw El bl El El H E E H kl E E E E BI B ND 20292 CHAPTERS SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 1D6 CODE RESTRICTION TABLE ACCESS 10 OPERATION AND DISPLAY Gooffline Jojr ft Ir T TCIX X XD 1 Depress F1 then F9 rjEjR M N A L TF E A T Jufre ATTI 15 2 1 Depress 16 Ina e s r R r c T o N Dial station number to be assigned 8 5111 1 1 0 4 Example Station 104 See Note 1 10114151461 Depress L1 1 16 to assign system code tables 1 to 16 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 icjojo E 5 1 11171 13121 Depress 14 L 16 to assign system code tables 17 32 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 0 10
158. NOTES 1 During step 5 the error count is displayed as xxx on the bottom row of the LCD Up to 255 Ce errors can be displayed LJ 2 After depressing the CLEAR key and then the Cx 3 ENTER key the number of interface errors CAG aac 5 Ce LIED GENERAL INFORMATION INTERFACE SLOT CHECK i This area of the memory block is used to record erroneous PRWs An erroneous PRW will also register when the ETU busy out switch is turned off Every time an ETU is busy out the particular error counter is i incremented 1 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 5B4 TERMINAL CHECK AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F5 then F7 3 Depress F14 See Note 1 4 Todetermine Telephone Port Number assignment dial station number to be referenced Example Station 120 See Note 2 5 Todetermine DSS Port assignment depress L14 6 Enter DSS device number 1 6 Example 6 7 Todetermine device type associated with a particular port depress 1 15 8 Enter module slot and channel number Example Module 1 Slot 3 Channel 2 9 Ifthecounter value is not to be cleared proceed to Step 12 10 Depress CLEAR key 11 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 12 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 10 12 Ox _
159. Recheck SLT features operation section to verify procedure for feature 500 18 test again bridged on the CO line ahead of Move suspected bad line to a good COI E port and move a good line to the original COI E port F1 Low Volume Problems All stations Is anything the system db level test should be run on lines with 1KHZ test tone No less than 8db at MDF is required Does problem stay with port or line Check line with db meter and contact Telco 500 19 ND 20292 CHAPTER 5 SEPTEMBER 1987 Replace Multiline Terminal ND 20292 CHAPTERS SEPTEMBER 1987 G1 Amplifier Provided Amplifier is Needed Yes 2 or more zones of Ext Pages Is ECR E installed ECR E ETU is needed for multizone paging Place Test Set on output of paging TSW E with all external wiring removed External amplifier OF wiring 15 defective 15 Ext Page audible on test set Check Memory Block 2 1 for correct access code for paging external not internal Retest using Replace TSW E correct code CPU EB in order Access code correct 500 20 ND 20292 CHAPTER Eni SEPTEMBER 1987 H1 SMDR Output Problems No Call Accounting System s problem with Yes incoming call eports only Check M
160. St 197 19818 axa 8014 ur 440 184815 YLO s4431 1411 La kay 859442 e 51 97 8 8 1182 NO 160916 ULC 2 XIdWVS 18 00 s4431 qA 92228 kay sassa1dap 3194 saysey 1371 uas 1d fex 14 sseudeq e euo 1182 uai uoreua xe BI e 2003 81 2A199341 0 s1431 42918 LL LT HTJXISD p 11 8 1189 53484 porre uo 1808 ULA 9 83431 4147 19948 La NO QLA 84815 YLA 3431 Kex sassaidap 1471 39228 La Kex La ssexdaq e Jequinu 010 Y 81 01 53484 48848 alojo 1 1 Asng fred ALA PALO 440 84315 ULA JLA NO 139815 ULA 7 SNOILVOIGNI GOT 4 58 SNOILVOIGNI 1 5 1861 vUILdVHO 26202 28 00 24 oyp
161. ete 4bit one chip microprocessor f Multiline Terminal 4 bit one chip microcomputer g DSS BLF Console 4 bitone chip microcomputer h Directory Multiline Terminal 4 bit one chip microcomputer Remote Administration Adaptor 8 bit microcomputer 2 Transmission a Data length From Multiline Terminal to ESI E 32 bits From ESI E to Multiline Terminal 32 bits b Data transmission rates Between ESI E and Multiline Terminal 256k bits sec c Data transmission pairs To Multiline Terminals and EDE 30 1 2 pair data d Scanning time for each Multiline Terminal 32 mS 3 Network TDM switching TDM clock 2 048 MHz TDM slot period 488 28 nS TDM data bus 8 bit TDM timeframe 125 pS 4 Telephones a Multiline Terminal and DSS BLF console Voltage 11 26 VDC Max current 200 200 200 Acoustic characteristics meet Electronic Industry Association EIA standard proposal SP 1286 and standard EIA RS 470 b Single line telephone Standard 2500 set 500 network Nominal current 35 mA Ring signal 65 VAC RMS 20 Hz Dterm II Nominalcurrent 20mA Ring signal 50V AC RMS 16Hz Lamp signal 53 88VDC 220 17 VISUAL AND AUDIBLE INDICATIONS 1 Visual Indications LED indications on a Multiline Terminal and CO Add On module shown in Table 220 10 2 Audible Indications Audible indications from a Terminal shown in Table 220 11 3 EDE 30 1 Visual Indications LED
162. vvw iu cold start initializes clears the RAM areas so any files you may have had there will be erased A cold Start is used to start the 8300 for the first time after a long period of non use and also to reset if locked up When turning on the Backup Power Switch it is necessary to initialize all of the RAM by performing a cold start Also when you want to clear the RAM of allthe files perform a cold start 930 9 2 Initializing the PC 8300 with a Cold Start 1 Insert the 3 5 inch floppy disk with the ADMI DO software stored Refer to Section 930 8 2 of this manual Turn on the power switch of the Micro Disk Unit 2 Turn on the Backup Power switch of the PC 8300 3 Turn the PC 8300 power switch to the ON position 4 If in the MENU mode hold CTRL and SHIFT keys down 5 Press and release the RESET switch on the back of the PC 8300 6 Release CTRL and SHIFT keys The screen is erased for an instant after a cold Start and then the MENU appears on the screen Since the RAM has been completely erased and initialized the MENU displays no file names other than the three primary files BASIC TEXT and TELCOM since they ROM 1983 01 01 00 00 00 C Micrasoft 1 BASIC TELCOM Load Save List 25717 NOTES 1 If the PC 8300 MENU screen does not appear repeat the cold start setting procedure 2 Before performing a cold start be sure that important files hav
163. 0 916 006 G3 Vig N33ALLS8 LIDIG 15314 AHL DNI TVIG YALAY O3HSI IHVIS3 SI AHL 380438 ANIL WOWIXVN 3HL 180d N30NV V ONIS NAHM YALAY SLVNIODIO LON TIM JHL 30 0 i NOLLOTHAISSH W30NY4 5 V 40441 ANTI 391440 IVHINSO 3HLHOLINON W31SAS SHLLVHLI SGQNOOSS NI AWIL JO 7 5 ONIOD LNG LNVISIC OL GN3S TVNDIS AO 1 1 8 INVISIC FHL OL QN3S IVNDIS 40 HLON31 2 85 153 SI HLVd 30104 V 330438 NOILVLS YALAY AWIL Q3ISd 9 IVNOIS HO AV T4G V OO JHL NOLLIGNOD 400H 440 NY DNIZINDOO3H 3HO43H NOILVYNG ANIL 9 OO FHL KOYA LOZNNOOSIG S3ZINDOO3M 930338 YALAY INIL NANNININ LUVLS NOILVSH3ANOO 3HOJ38 5 ALUYd GWTIVO 1 TVAYALNI INIL 300H 440 5400 INVISIQ YALAY 00 OLSLIDIG qasind ONIGNGS 3HOJ3G INIL 2 N33ALS3H JO 1 NOLLdINOS34G WALI SANTVA Q3ZITVILINI 9 S v 3 532018 AHOW3W SNOILDNYLSNI 123145 1 006 EX
164. 1 Itisrecommended that 4B6 be programmed prior to 4B1 since 4B6 programming overrides all 4B1 programming already done for all the trunks in the group During step 6 the status of L1 to L12 LEDs indicate the current parameters set to the COI channel chosen See figure below L1 10 20 PPS for rotary dialing Default 10 PPS Rotary or DTMF dialing Default DTMF CO or PBX line interface Default CO Disconnect Signal from CO YES NO Default NO CPU EB2 or higher L5 to L8 DTMF digit duration 50 mS x M 60 mS Default 110 mS L9 to 112 Hookflash time 100 mS x M 300 mS Default 1500 mS L2 L3 L4 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to increment to the next channel or the first channel of the next slot with a COI E ETU LED OFF means upper parameter 5 t uw 15 Ep ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 zx iss s Ge 551 Ep ex Cel Es m 9 39 ca INR 4 E E EL EL B E E DTMF DURATION 300 197 ND 20293 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 4B2 INITIALIZED VALUES 10 OPERATION AND Gooffline Depress F4 then 27 Depress F12 Dial module number 1 4 of COI port to be assigned Example Module 1 Dial slot number 1 8 of COI
165. 1 8 and port 1 4 numbers Example Module 1 Slot 8 Port 1 10 Depress ENTER key See Notes 3 amp 4 11 To access DSS BLF area depress L14 N o u r 5 01011 015151 T T T T T 13 Depress L1 to change the status of the selected DSS BLF See Note 2 14 Depress ENTER key See Notes 3 amp 4 15 To access modem area depress 1 12 015 CPU EB or higher MlololeM gt 1111 1114 16 Enter modem number 1 4 to change its Busy Out R M u s status Example MODEM 1 1 17 Depress L1 to change the status of the selected modem See Note 2 18 Depress ENTER key See Notes 3 amp 4 12 Enter DSS BLF number 1 6 to change its busy out status Example DSS BLF 2 19 Depress TEL key and repeat steps 4 thru 18 as required to access a specific port or device to check and or change its Busy Out status 20 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 0 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 KR ON O ine TEL Selects port device to be assigned LEAR Enters each port device assignment B W Backward Decrements port device number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING IMEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMO
166. 11 9uo 8291 ananb 195 Seusep AI 1013816 sauro2aq 198 sem 913 03 eu JUNIJ 8 xa iey uni SutAT929 espusuoa1ojsog 9UO0 UOT BULILJUOO Te 8 4 18 re nory1ed 3893 ur sun aq Jo Je 9101 aur UorSU9 X9 UB 589298 BIP BIA ALL 20 qun 4 00 81 197 18 sayy 9115 6495 e SNOLLVOIGNI GOT 3 IdWVS SNOILVOIGNI 3 T1dWVS 1861 vudld VHD 56505 NOILVOIGNI 14 8 1861 P HARIdVHO 56505 6 00 SNOLLVOIGQNI 031 14 5 a pt 541 ananb at 198 0011816 IYI run 1n220 30U 293 auos 618143 peustese 8183 101915 Aq aq ZuINaNy S3 LON anand eu 125 4013838 ayy Aq uotsuaqxa 859299 81 BIA ALL 10 XHd OO fu 589226 01 34019438 Kue aq anand xunap eurn peutrure1804d aJd jou 51
167. 2 if the memory has been expanded to include extra banks The data within this bank is then protected from 1055 RESET switch The RESET switch is used to perform a cold start or as part of process to free the computer when hung up This switch should be used as a last resort since the contents of the memory of the PC 8300 may be erased e port Connect the Micro Disk Unit PC 8231A here using the modular jack cable included in the PC 8231A A protective cap has been fitted on these connectors Before Connecting a peripheral remove the cap save it and put it back Over the connector when the peripheral is disconnected Figure 750 4 Rear Side 700 14 Imm CMT port Connect a data recorder to the PC 8300 here using the PC 8493A data recorder connection cable included in the PC 8300 box PRINTER port Connect parallel centronics interface printers to the PC 8300 here with the PC 84944 parallel printer cable 8 RS 232C Connect a serial printer an external modem or a cable to directly Connect to another computer here BCR port Connect a Bar Code Reader to the PC 8300 here PHONE port With the branched Phone Cable inctuded in the optional Modem Card box the PC 8300 is connected to your telephone system View of the PC 8300 2 Warm Start Use
168. 203 Time Base Assignment tt See Job Spec 208 this chapter 28 System Access Code Assignment See memory block this chapter Attendant 3rd and 4th Assignment Not assigned Attendant Overflow Assignment Not assigned 300 5 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK FUNCTION DEFAULT VALUES 4 Attendant to Tenant Assignment Attendants 1 amp 2are assigned to tenant 1 Attendant 1 assignment is fixed First Ring Pattern Assignment Normal CO ringing 2 secs ON 4 secs OFF 382 Centrex Ringing Assignment Normal CO ringing 2 secs ON 4 secs OFF 383 Forced Account Code Digit 10 digits Assignment 385 Station Hunting Pilot Number Assignment 386 Station to Hunt Group Assignment 3B8 Station Hunt group Asssignment 389 Trunk group to Line Pool Group None Assignment 3B10 Line Pool Group Auto Extension Pool auto extension is only assigned for primary Assignment extension 3 1 Telephone Name Assignment Not assigned 3 2 Trunk Group Name Assignment 302 Second Initialization 303 Slot Initialization 304 Terminal TEL DSS Initialization Regional Dialing Assignment 3E3 Rejection Code Assignment No rejection code is assigned to code 1 4 3E6 Trunk Group to Code Table No trunk group is assigned to any code table Assignment w 29 5 E B5 8 8 a e 3 gt 5 lt 8 8 5 HE Q 18
169. 218 Zila 9 gp 3 8 8 3 7 Table OCC Flag Assignment 3E8 Table OCC Code Assignment 300 6 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 FUNCTION System All Busy Restore System not busied out Assignment System Busy Out Assignment System not busied out COI I Initialized Values DTMF CO No disconnect signal from CO DTMF duration 110 mS Hookflash 1 5 seconds COI II Initialized Values SLI Common Values HFS 300 mS 1 BP 300 mS ESI EB Data and Second Voice Path All ESI EB paths are assigned Dual Path Assignment 1 Initialized Values DTMF CO No disconnect signal from CO DTMF duration 110 mS Hookflash 1 5 seconds MEMORY BLOCK DEFAULT VALUES Hit Protection Time 350 mS Disconnect Recognition Time 300 mS Pause 1 sec Interdigit time 2 70 mS COI IV Initialized Values Hit Protection Time 350 mS Disconnect Recognition Programming Parameters Time 300 mS Pause 1 sec Interdigit time 70 mS VMI Initialize 1 Assignment itiali Interdigit Interval Time 70 mS DTMF duration i HFS 2300 mS 1sec BP 300 mS VMI Initialize 2 Assignment 110mS Pause Time 1 Sec Disconnect Time 1 5 Sec TLI Digit Add Delete Code Delete digits 0 Assignment Additional digits NO Initialized Values TLI II Initialized Values TLI III Initialized Values With Wink Delay Signal Timeout
170. 7 3106 9 852206 et puooes 3419931 0 58 e 58818044 ut uo 8 pue 1 71 e 1861 ATAC 1 26205 621 OOF 0 ZT I 51464 82 10 x eg Bury 24132914 7 318 1597 L 10 ouo Asng 111 5 4 5 ue sayy 0 4915 Bureo 49362 e Jequinu e euo jr e Suneupirio 1 180 9235 5189 uorsuo3 x3 007 10 OEP 014296 01 IUM A U0 10 aq UBD 53112412 YAW ALON YAW 3593 03 64915 ay yeaday eq euo JNO persnq 40 pagay aq 9101 Asnq 1861 ATAF bUaLdVHO 26202 9uoj 8 ur pu 122125 3112212 YAW
171. BE PROGRAMMED CPU EB3 or higher NOTES 1 There three terminal initialization modes Station DSS BLF and Port When entering Memory Block 3D4 the programing station will default to station initialization Ce 55 Ej E e Cm pe 3 Fal Ed Ed 3 Ed LJ Pd Cow 2 Depressing the ENTER key causes the particular station or DSS BLF to be initialized 3 If no initialization occurs due to abnormal conditions the station or DSS BLF should be disconnected and connected by unplugging and plugging the line cord or the associated ESI ETU should be initialized El EL El E El B H GENERAL INFORMATION TERMINAL TEL DSS INITIALIZATION 1 i This area of the memory block is use to initialize port devices including ESI EA ESI EB ETUs The port device be indexed by port station number or DSS BLF device number only 300 171 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 1 REGIONAL DIALING ASSIGNMENT PERATION e AND 1 Go offline 2 Depress F3 then F10 8 Depress 11 See Note 1 4 Dial area number to be set 1 3 Example 1 Direct Dial See Note 2 5 Depress ENTER key 6 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line DISPLAY INTE T x x xP p 5 5 R E s T
172. CARD INTERFACE SLOT ASSIGNMENT Dial slot number 1 8 to be set OPERATION lt AND line CIx TXDXD3 11 E DISPLAY Depress F4 then F8 initfetrielalclel alsis 1 e jel 5 Depress 11 A s s 1 8 121 15 Dial module number 1 4 of the slot to be assigned Example Module 2 5 5 2 slt Example Slot 4 See Note 1 Depress one of the line keys L1 to L11 to assign the required card to the slot chosen Depress ENTER key See Note 2 iN IT R F A c e 6 gt 15 Repeat steps 6 and 7 for all slots required or go to step to select a particular interface slot Depress the key to go back on line 300 212 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 K NCTION IN ENTER Enters each slot assignment B W Decrements slot number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING EMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED
173. CD Data Terminal Ready DTR Ring Indicator Detect RI 1 Connect one end of the PC 8295A 01 to the RS 232C connector located on the rear of the RAA E 2 Connect the other end of the PC 8295A 01 to the RS 232C connector of the modem Refer to Table 920 3 the assignments of the RAA E RS 232C connector Table 920 3 RAA E Modem Signal Flow 11194815114 Frame Ground Transmit Data Receive Data NNON AU AWN gt ND 20292 CHAPTERS MARCH 1988 920 5 CONNECTING the MODEM toa LINE Although it is possible to dedicate a CO line to the on site modem for remote administration purposes it is recommended that this modem be connected to a single line port of the system instead This way when calling in to use the Remote Administration Adaptor the system attendant can transfer the calling party programmer to the station number associated with the SLI port connected to the modem If so desired a trunk may be programmed to terminate directly to the single line port thus eliminating the need for attendant intervention with system supported by a CPU EB2 or higher ETU NOTE In this application the modem connected to the RAA E must have auto answer capability The following steps should be considered when connecting the modem to a line 1 Ensure that all switches are properly set in the modem Take special care that the baud rate setting of
174. Display prompts MAINTENANCE TERMINAL HIT ANY KEY TO LOGIN Depress any key A tone is provided Display prompts PLEASE SELECT YOUR SYSTEM A ELECTRA IMS B ELECTRA MARK2 Depress B to select the Electra MarklI system tone is provided Display prompts PLEASE INPUT KEY DATA FOR bps 2400 1200 bps 600 bps D 300 bps NOTE Baud Rate selected must be the same as the setting of Baud Rate Switch on RAA E unit and at which modems are working when provided 900 12 17 Depress appropriate key for Baud Rate A tone is provided The following display appears on the screen 12 01 JAN 01 FRI ON HOOK 9 13 NOTE The Clock Calendar is the indication that the to Electra system communications link has actually been established Clock Calendar may take up to one minute to appear on the display Line status dashed lines will appear upon any change to line status If you are manually dialing the on site modem using a SLT Clock Calendar and line status dash lines will appear when the modem to modem connection is made Section 940 2 1 Anytime you depress the PC whether in idle or program mode a SELF CHECK OK display is received This verifies that the modem and or PC 8300 and the RAA E are communicating After SELF CHECK is performed depress lt Return before continuing with the next function Once you are in a memory block and
175. E Turn the PSU and the RSG E ON then check the AC output voltage which can be read on the 4 pin connector of the CCU as shown in Figure 250 7 5 _Not Used_ 4 GNO a Yellow 2av Figure 250 7 Front View of 4 Pin Connector of RSG E Unit SECTION 260 ANCILLARY DEVICE CONNECTION 260 1 GENERAL INFORMATION A Multiline Terminals can be equipped with ancillary devices such as HFU E DPA E DTA E and ADA E B These optional units and their compatibility with Multiline Terminals are shown in Table 260 1 C These optional devices are installed inside the access panel on the bottom of Multiline Terminals A maximum of one unit of each can be installed in each Multiline Terminals except for ETE 6 1 which can only accept the ADA E unit The DTA E comes with a special access panel to allow its installation into the Multiline Terminals D Prior to installing any optional device unplug the line cord from the Multiline Terminal and the RJ11C W Table 260 1 Ancillary Device Multiline Terminal Compatibility ANCILLARY DEVICES MULTILINE TERMINALS 6 1 ETE 6D 1 ETE 16D 1 16 1 200 34 Compatible 260 2 HANDSFREE UNIT HFU E NOTE Installation in all Multiline Terminals except the ETE 6 1 A Unpiug the line cord at the RJ11C W then turn the Multiline Terminal upside down face down and locate the access panel on the bottom of the Multiline Terminal
176. ELECTRA MARKII 1 The unit is connected to the system via a Standard modular line cord not provided Connect one end of the modular line cord to the modular jack RJ11C located at the rear of the RAA E unit labeled line 2 Connect the other end of the modular line cord to modular jack RJ11C connected to an ESI E Station port of the system at the MDF J blocks vue NOTES 1 The Electra MarkII system may have up to four programming station ports The first two are permanently assigned to the first two ports of the first ESI E ETU The third position be assigned by either of the first two programming stations to be any ETU port supporting an ETE 16D 1 When connected the fourth programming assignment is for the RAA E unit See Chapter 3 Programming Memory Block 1E2 The RAA E maintains its programming port status even after an extended power loss or after a 1st initialization occurs 2 Ensure that all the RAA E switch settings are correct before plugging in the RAA E modular jack 3 If the RAA is connected to an attendant port the RAA E will gain attendant programming features 9204 CONNECTING the RAA E toa MODEM Refer to Table 920 2 for the pin functions of the PC 8295A 01 cable Table 920 2 PC 8295A 01 Cable Normal Frame Ground FG Transmit Data TXD Receive Data RXT Request to Send RTS Clear to Send CTS Data Set Ready DSR Signal Ground SG Carrier Detect
177. Go into program mode as described above Display shows OFF LINE X XX PROGRAM MODE OFF HOOK 7 LK 1 5 9 13 Type F1 Return To enter Terminal Mode Display shows TERMINAL HOOK LK 1 5 9 13 900 13 CHAPTER 9 MARCH 1988 PROGRAMMING RMINAL N KEYS PC 8300 KEYBOARD PROGRAMMING TERMINAL FUNCTIO NTRIES CTION NCTION KEYS 860 F6 lt RETURN To enter Line Key Assignment Mode Display shows LINE KEY ASSIGN TEL gt HK 1 5 9 13 202 Return enter EXT number being programmed Display shows LK ASGN TEL 102 SELECT LINE KEY HOOK LK 1 5 9 13 L1 Return To enter Line Key number 1 to be programmed Display shows LK ASGN 102 CO 01 OFF HOOK 1 5 9 13 222 Due LL1 F14 Return To select line type as EXT Display shows LK ASGN TEL102 EXTENSION OFF HOOK 13 Type 100 Return To select EXT number 100 Display shows LK ASGN TEL102 EXTENSION 100 OFF HOOK 1 5 9 13 ND 20292 CHAPTER 9 MARCH 1988 While holding down the CTRL key depress E To enter information into the Electra MarkII program m
178. Good Correct AC Power Problem Pull out all connectors and printed circuit boards except for CPU EB TSW E and the first installed ESI E in Module 1 associated with the programming station Rebuild system one card at a time until problem reappears and retest Replace defective card Retest for dial tone on ESI E installed Dial Tone Replace Corresponding Power Supply No Dial Tone Check Memory Block IE 5 and assignments in Memory Blocks 1E 2 and 4C 1 Problem solved Correct Assignments No Reassign correctly Replace CCU Replace 5 Retest for dial tone Tone Dial Tone Replace TSW E and test if problem 15 not solved replace CPU EB 500 5 13 20292 CHAPTERS SEPTEMBER 1987 A2 Check All heck DC Voltages Check AC Power and the fuse Terminate one Multiline from Module 1 first ESI programming station directly on the MDF and test Correct AC Power Problem Recheck station Multiline Terminal cabling Indications Pull out all ribbon connectors and printed circuit boards except the CPU EB TSW E and the first installed ESI E in Module 1 associated with the programming station Replace Corresponding Power Supply Problem Solved No indication Check Memory Block 1 5 and ass
179. Hit Protection 50 mS x Default 350 mS PS Pause Time 500 mS x M Default 1000 mS IDI Interdigit Interval Time 10 mS x M 40 mS Default 70 mS DR Disconnect Recognition Time 100 mS x M Default 300 mS ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 puo 55288 2 03 55 Bs 09 D Duc Gee Em E Bea w0 E E E CK 3 ca C Pd CPU levels 1 Itis recommended that 4B7 be programmed prior to 4B2 since 4B7 programming overrides all 4B2 programming already done for all the trunks within that trunk group During step 6 the status of L1 to L16 will indicate the previous parameters set to the COI port See chart 3 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to increment to the next channel or the first channel of the next slot containing a COI E ETU GENERAL INFORMATION COI Il INITIALIZED VALUES i This area of the memory block used to assign timing parameters to each port description of each i 1 parameter see section 350 4 En enl Jere eve dere 300 199 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 4B3 SLI COMMON VALUES OPERATION 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F4 then F7 3 Depress F13 See
180. MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY IPROGRAMMED MUST 8E PROGRAMMED HAVE TO 8E PROGRAMMED 107 37 oo o0 CPU levels See Note 2 NOTES l Afterthe station number is entered the line key C 7 LED s will show any previous assignment to the 1 station 2 Each of the following programming keys is LI selected to allow or disallow these terminal Ce m features LEDON Enabled LEDOFF Disabled Li Originate Allow 0 E L2 Camp on Receive Allow 3 Call Forward or Busy No Answer 4 Allow 4 15 Operator Restriction Deny L6 Data Line Security Deny 4 1115 Station Lockout Deny L12 Page Access Originate Allow End L13 LCR Priority Deny L14 Trunk to Trunk Transfer Deny CPU EB2 or higher L15 Account Code Forced Verified Entry Deny CPU EB3 or higher NOTE Defaults are shown between parenthesis 3 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to increment to the next station number m 1 m m E i GENERAL INFORMATION CLASS OF SERVICE ASSIGNMENT 1 1 i i This area of the memory block is used to assign a particular class of service to each station Each class of i service allows or disallows the station user from accessing specific station features 1 1 t 1 1 ND 20392 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY
181. Memory Block 1E2 The first step when entering any area of programming is to place the programming station into the OFF LINE mode TO GO OFF LINE Depress L16 Primary Extension Line B Depress the Speaker Key receive dial tone Dial 0 in sequence After these three steps the LCD on the Multiline Terminal will be as shown The display X XX is the software level of the CPU E While the programming terminal is OFF LINE it cannot be signaled by any station in the system Only one programming terminal can be OFF LINE at one time The next step is to select the area in the system memory blocks which correspond to the feature or function to be programmed memory block index has been provided to help the programmer locate the area needed Selection of a memory block location is done by depressing the Multiline Terminal s Feature Access keys in a predetermined sequence The ETE 16D Multiline Terminal has twenty Feature Access keys F1 through F20 which are used for this purpose The Resident System Program is setup into five memory block areas Feature Access keys F1 through F5 are used to select each memory block area 1 to 5 respectively Within each memory block area memory feature sections are grouped by letter designation for example memory block 1 is divided into five sections Line Key Assignment B Ringing Assignment C DSS BLF and CO Add On Module Button Assignment
182. NOTES 1 11 L3 selects an optional feature for the CJ 1 selected station Cw L1 Off Hook Ringing ON Ring LL OFF NoRing L2InternalVoice Ring Ring OFF Voice Fl L3 Ring Tone ON 2 1 2 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to increment to the next station L4 G kl b E k F h H H H i GENERAL INFORMATION USER PROGRAM ASSIGNMENT 1 This area of the memory block is used for the attendant programming terminal to individually change certain default optional features that are assigned individually from each Multiline Terminal These user i controlled features include off hook ringing voice and tone signaling on intercom and selection of ring tone L 300 35 ND 20292 CHAPTERS SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 1D4 TRUNK GROUP INCOMING RESTRICTION OPERATION e AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline Joje fef INTE x X X p ARPES 2 Depress F1 then F9 16 N c o u R E leihlo 11111 3 DepressF14 RTE s 13 4 Dialstation number to be assigned Example Station 104 See
183. Night 1C3 DSS Button Assignment Feature and Station Appearance 104 Flexible Function Key Assignment 101 Prime Ringing Line Assignment 104 Trunk Group Incoming Restriction 1D5 Trunk Group Outgoing Restriction 106 Code Restriction Table Access 1D7 ClassofService 1D8 Station to Attendant Assignment GENERAL INFORMATION STATION COPY ASSIGNMENT This area of the memory block is used to copy the assignment of one station to as many stations as desired iinone step This greatly reduces programming time by allowing the repetitious assignments to be copied instead of using the individual programming steps i Bieta ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 e Cer 81 51 THA 181 Fes e 2 s s is Dx EIE Lal F3 Pal Ed Ed Ed 3 Ed L4 Pd Cw Ex CEIS Cea EE EAE AE 300 237 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 581 CPU INITIAL HISTORY OPERATION AND DISPLAY TCIXT P Rjo s R AIM 1 2 Depress F5 3 Depress F7 4 Depress 11 See Notes 2 and 3 5 Ifthe history is not to be cleared proceed to step 8 6 Toclearthe history Depress CLEAR key 7 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 8 DepressSPKR key to g
184. OL 1 9107 0102 SNOILVOIGNI 6 18151 sir 1 11 SNOILVOIGNI GOT 4 IdWVSs 1861 26202 LE 00 uo 43100 Bured e 559258 814 40 peururg1304d Ko ssq sseideq e 85 007 105208 197 SNV 431198359 01 10 Apeays 53431 dn suey JUJ 58910 91 e 5 30 08 sqq SNV 91 4039 01 puooas 3oeuuoostp Lay 3524424 e u ym 1 e SNY euo puodas 0 uorjeyrnsuoo uo s ysey 5908 31 3819 8x ANJ 10 TUL 859442 e 4 15 11 st 97 u2913 185918044 94 vores 94 yooy 740 8908 uorejnsuoo Survey uorejs PIou uoryejmsuos 1 PUHHI Aue 5348 48 15 1189 jo 31048 Jo 501615 ayy 180
185. Refer to Figure 260 1 Figure 260 1 Multiline Terminal Access Panel Removal B Slide the directory out of the way C Insert flat screwdriver blade into notched opening shown as and apply light upward pressure until access panel is cleared of the front lip at the same time apply pressure towards you at the rear of the pedestal shown as B until the access panel moves towards you D Remove the access panel and place it aside for later reinstallation E Locate the fourteen pin jack labeled HFU E as seen through the access view of the housing insert the fourteen pin connector from the HFU E unit as shown in Figure 260 2 ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 F Place the HFU E unit into its designated area with the cable side down Figure 260 2 Optional Unit Installation G Secure the HFU E unit by inserting the screw provided with the unit H Replace the access panel OR continue to install the DPA E unit DTA E unit or ADA E unit 260 3 DUAL PATH ADAPTOR UNIT NOTE Installation in all Multiline Terminals except the ETE 6 1 Unplug the line cord at the RJ11C W then turn the Multiline Terminal upside down face down and locate the access panel on the bottom of the Multiline Terminal refer to Figure 260 1 B Slide the directory out of the way 200 35 ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 C Insert flat screwdriver blade into notched opening shown as A and apply light upward p
186. SNS 20893 lel oem 12 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 3C1 TELEPHONE NAME ASSIGNMENT OPERATION lt AND gt DISPLAY 1 Gooffline Jex jPJRJOJGIRJA M 2 0 lt lt Speke BOL EXO LD OFF UNEL 2 DepressF3 then F8 ST TS T T TNTAIMIET TE 21111111111111111 3 Depress F11 71277 111111111 NjA MIE T E Li ixixixixixixixi 4 Dial station number to be set Example Station 104 See Note 1 5 To enter the name STEVE Enter the first 1 4 letter to be set depress the 7 dial key five 5 times See Note 2 T E t 1 0 4 11111111 6 Enterthe second letter to be set depress the 8 dial key twice See Note 2 7 Repeat dialing sequence for all letters required See Note 3 fe 1 o s iN 8 Depress ENTER key See Note 4 9 Repeat from step 5 thru 7 for all stations required 10 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 160 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 B W Removes last character entered GUIDE FEATURE PROGRAMMING ME
187. This DTMF signaling allows telephones within the system to communicate with the Voice Mail equipment via dial pad 820 2 SIGNALING PARAMETERS Depending on the signaling requirements of the Voice Mail equipment being installed signal timing parameters can be independently assigned to each of the four VMI E channels by programming of the Electra Mark system NOTE Dial Pulse Rotary Signaling is not supported by the VMI E ETU 820 3 ADDITIONAL FUNCTIONS In addition to voice path and signaling functions the provides ringing signal control and a path to an MFR E ETU This allows certain Voice Mail equipment to dial internally to access outside lines for Voice Message delivery call placement as well as the setting and cancelling of Message Waiting indication using in band DTMF signaling NOTES A The VMI E ETU is designed to pass 2 or 3 digit access codes from the Voice Mail Equipment for handling Voice Message Waiting Indications B The Voice Mail equipment must be capable of providing two different access codes followed by the extension number of the associated station One code is used for setting the Message Waiting indication while the second code is used to cancel the message indication C Default Voice Mail Message Waiting access codes are 541 and 54 to set and cancel the Message Waiting indication respectively 820 4 HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS Connection of Voice Mail equipment to the Electr
188. aL una VNVALIC 991 0 queue suSrssy 201 uo si 01 82 TIVNIAUGL G34LVIOOSSV JINNONNY 01 NOISN LXA LIS 4 1 12065 OL 8 542018 AHOW3IN 685 006 E cx E 2 2 125 41 s uic __ _______ cup s gn poe pe avn noma 1 00522222 mE 8 eir 122412 a oe 22 22 a See 28 See 289 JNVN31 NOISN31X3 OLANDER NY NOISNALX 01 OL Avia OL YNY LIO VNVW LIG PI paz tac 622 vac tat
189. ers us us EETA 113 fe L5 16 17 118 co 110 11111112 EIE Ge D DX ma 5 Oe C OP C L4 Lm Multiplier All CPU levels HP Hit Protection Time 50 mS x M Default 350 mS NOTES PS Pause Time 1 During step 4 the status of L1 to L16 indicate 500mS xM Default 1000 mS the previous timing parameters assigned to the IDI Interdigit Interval Time trunk group chosen 10 mS 40 mS Default 70 mS DR Disconnect Recognition Time 2 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to 100 mS xM Default 300 mS increment to the next CO group H M 1 GENERALINFORMATION INITIALIZED VALUES PROGRAMMING i PARAMETERS i V This area of the memory block is used to assign timing parameters to trunk groups For a description of 1 these parameters see section 350 300 207 ND 20292 CHAPTERS SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 4B8 VMI INITIALIZE 1 ASSIGNMENT OPERATION e AND DISPLAY 1 Go offline _ C x x xD 1 MiojojE 2 Depress F4 then T 12122220 3 Depress F18 1 1 gt clui 4 Dial the module number to be assigned
190. feature depending upon the user s programmed preference A maximum of thirty 16 1 Multiline Terminals can be installed ina system DISTINCTIVE RINGING allows a user to distinguish between outside internal and Boss Secretary Ring signals Each Electra MarkllI Multiline Terminal has a further choice in selecting between two ringing tones This selection can be done by user programming at each Multiline Terminal or at the attendant DO NOT DISTURB provides the Multiline Terminal user with the ability to temporarily eliminate all audible signals for incoming calls to that station except calls from an attendant and Boss Secretary Ring Figure 140 5 16 1 Multiline Terminal The DSS BLF CONSOLE is a unit that provides thirty programmable buttons each with a two color red and green LED for use with an ETE 16D 1 Multiline Terminal Together the console and Multiline Terminal create an Attendant Position The console provides the attendant with single button access to any assigned extension page zone or system feature When a button is assigned for direct station selection the associated RED LED provides the attendant with Busy Lamp Status of the assigned station The associated GREEN LED provides the attendant with the busy status of the assigned station indicating when the attendant can reach it by means of Querride or Camp On The associated GREEN LED also provides the attendant with the status of messages
191. jospueu YI 118291 10 8 11691 peusmqeise 51 gt posrAJednsun ours our v 92u819ju07 1861 PUALAVHO 6505 PEL 00 03 epo Ip 3A19221 YI e 0 159 e POY 10 4 NEJI 359298 01 e 9uo erp 155918044 4 3 Surpnj ur 99 141 151148954 01 71 pestaJednsu 0 S 1 009 1864 e SurSed 5 9 0 e paxy st st 862229 911011811581 7996 51 3 ngje 859228 BIG e 5926 Jo 1381 1587 7906 ST epo 852228 VIG e euo 9419991 3j T e euo JIT e Z 5902 ITV PSS 59107 79 69007 299 6 9107 299 5 9107 299 59407 299 19002 199 9002 199 098 852208 JO 118 1581 SMO
192. move the cursor to the upper right corner of the display over the file name IPL DO Depress the SHIFT key while the SHIFT key is depressed depress the fel key Note that an asterisk is inserted in the file name at the upper right of the display IPL DO indicating that the file IPL DO has been set as the new automatic loading file Display shows 1983 05 01 14 31 24 TEXT TELCOM C Microsoft 1 IPL DO List 12374 Name 6 Now perform a Warm Start by depressing the RESET button located on the rear of the computer The LCR Main Menu should appear in the display after a few seconds 750 6 PROGRAMMING THE LCR E ETU Key Layout and Explanation of Keys GENERAL INFORMATION Once the initialization procedure has been completed powering up the PC 8300 results in a display of the LCR main menu See section 740 5 for the initialization procedure if this has not been completed Figure 750 7 shows the keyboard layout and the keys which are used during programming ofthe LCR E ETU ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 Cursor keys BS BackSpace DELete key INSerUPASTe key STOP key EI ES GRPH graphics key CTRL ConTRoL key TAB key key Figure 750 7 Keyboard Layout 1 Number Keys 1 9 and 0 The number keys are used to enter data and to SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS select menu
193. ogule 500 9 ND 20292 CHAPTER 5 SEPTEMBER 1987 c2 Calls Dropping Check to see if problem happens on all lines Calls dropping on all lines Check to see if all lines drop at the same time Alllines together Check the outside line Check all DC button indication after voltages with the cali drops meter and AC power with a line disturbance analyzer Have Telco check the line circuits Increase the Hit Protection Timer for the lines Memory Block 48 2 or 48 7 CO Line Button LED Status Check COI E LED COI E LED Status Off Perform Second Initialization Retest If trouble persists THEN 2 Replace COI E ETU retest If trouble persists Have Telco check THEN line circuit s Replace TSW E and Test Replace CPU EB and Test Return defective ETU For Repair 500 10 5404 40 ND 20292 CHAPTER 5 SEPTEMBER 1987 No Outside Dial Tone Access Multiline Terminal or SLT Check for intercom dial tone Multiline Terminal All Multiline Terminals Affected Yes Intercom Dial Tone Check for intercom dialtone Check Multiline Terminals for intercom dial tone Check Memory Block 1E 5 for status on MFR EA and SLI E 1 Replace Multiline Terminal OR 2 Replace ESI E Intercom dial tone
194. output level and impedance refer to Section 220 SPECIFICATIONS of this manual 270 4 EXTERNAL TONE RINGING External tone ringing is available when the ECR E ETU is installed The ECR E ETU provides a continous tone source for external tone ringing The External tone can be set to any of four ring patterns See Section 340 of this manual These patterns are selectable with DIP switch SW2 refer to Table 270 1 The audio output for external tone ringing appears at the phono jack J1 on the ECR E ETU its level is adjustable with the volume control VOLI on the ECR E ETU Shielded audio cable is required for this feature 200 42 ND 20292 CHAPTER2 JULY 1987 Table 270 1 ECR E Ringing Tone Sources Ping Pong Sound The ECR E ETU provides four relay contact closures one per external ring control circuit These four contacts can be accessed at the MDF Refer to Table 230 1 which are labeled 4 through or on the ECR E which are labeled 1 1 through A4 B4 on the ECR E ETU connectors CN1 and CN2 Connection information of the locally provided amplifier and speakers is provided in Figure 270 4 Audio output specifications can be found in Section 220 It is not recommended to connect the locally provided amplifier directly to the ECR E ETU relay contacts These contacts are not designed to accept AC signaling Direct connection may also cause audio crosstalk between
195. s amp ex 650 559242 e S343 8 3105002 ATA SSC 993 uo 550 sse1doq 398 OL SunreA oSessajy 6 05 SNOILVOIGNI GOT 3 IdWVS SNOLLVOIGNI 1861 vUdLdVHO 36203 CIN SNOILVOIGNI GOT 3IdWV 14 6205 811 00 qg 12948 81 a Su qan gio 8003 axa s4431 143814 10 paurure1301d 2 141 1481 1971 92228 SNOLLVOIGNI 1 8 e 34811 Aay 859242 614 192439 8 10 pourure3soJd Aayy N Surinp J 18 SSG 94 uo LN Sse1doq e LN BUNA dn Jugy pue euo e 1481 99 218790 559228 610 Kex aut 559149 e BIG 8 9S 01 1 3ejsusA 3481 01706 ee GLIN S aajo ji H o T N SNOLLVOIGNI GOT TIdWVS L861 A Inr 1 56505 911 00 34871 5395
196. st LON 0 31 e eur SuiSury eur 2 uorjeorput 047 uo 82 611810 529814 55918024 SN V Jo 901559449 ALON go 5208 141 SNV 481 Y29132 Kay SNV Sep 8 usey saat 1 3 kay semsuy 4 SNOLLVOIGNI FTA NVS puodsa os fy 8161 S 0 1 8161 917 00 eleri TI afar 18121 18191 1011 Lieni T TTT Tf SNOLLVOIGNI 1861 1 56505 007 5208 141 8 axa 9101593 amp 99 8 189 4e3deqo sty PLOY uo 182 293 22914 01 xoou jjo aq 35 61011615 410g eu Surinp y suopueqe play 993 jr JOU st pjoy uo 5208 197 SNv s4434 qan 8 2 SNY e syurm 1371 8 Lx Ploy 10 92143 e yo 5908 197 sny Ploy
197. 0011298 01 1 9 Burg 158 5143 384 os e uo S INIII YAW ALON painbaa se 00 4289 1891 03 4235 Jursa pua d sa1dap 10159 e oq auo 40 93501 st pe32e es Jaquinu OO 9 eq euo Asng sem 5 OD IJI e 401 943 ur TUM sq peau aq qr auo papajas poo3 pu 9 pt 941 1 e 80 32 5 03 0 10 HUNI e 419 1129 96 8 e 89 HydS 5 10 e ssaidaq e 3591 uni OO V uopoejeg SNOILVOIGNI GOT WIdWVS 1861 26502 801097 se s3rnoaro YAW 10 02 9 Asng 03 54915 y Aqpuejs euoj Asng paj29 8S 2109591 0 uo
198. 10 min 115 Conference Park recall CPU EB3 5 min 2 Depressing the ENTER key causes the 3 Time out time base 10 seconds X count programming to move to the next item associated 01 99 with the next line key i GENERAL INFORMATION TIME BASE ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to assign time out counts to various system base timers Refer to Section 350 for explanation of each timer xCOUNT VALUE 300 125 ND 30291 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2D2 TIME BASE ASSIGNMENT II OPERATION AND 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F2 then F9 3 DepressF12 4 Depress line key associated with the item to be changed Example LK1 MFR Time Out LK1 LED lights See Note 1 5 Dial count value to be entered 01 99 Example Time Count 10 total of 10 seconds See Note 3 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for all items required 8 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 DISPLAY Joje 51 51 51 LE TTT 1 1 1 11 11111 sjals e 11151 0 5 5 1 171 1 1 51 1 0
199. 1XOId SATHd MOTIV 6668 0001 20 668 001 NOLLVLS DNINDISSV AULNS NOLLdINOS3ud Wal SdNOUD WALSAS 6 91 E BE 9 2 1 226 9 6 7 1 82 6 8 L 9 S b L WZ 532018 303 5 5 NOILV2I3I234S SOF 580 006 gt nvasa 3402 55322 TIY 21 ONTIVIG 3 3002 SNIOSLNO 84 91 1 51910 3002 54 IN31SAS 6 8 v E 8E tr E Z 1 22 6 9 s AN3NNNDISSVY 4 VW IDOA 3NOHd3131 190939 9NINOONI 5 1583 SV 02 11910 15013 SY 02 INN DNINOONI W 71 82 6 8 9 S v VZ 532018 6668 0001 668 001 G3NDISSV NOLLVIS ANTI ALL V ONISN IVIG NOHLOTHISSHH ON 24 442066 10 NOILVIS V LVHL SLIDIG 40 WONWIXVI AULNG _ NOLLdINOS d 15 NYJ LVHL suwa WALI 55 153 JIL 0L YZ 2018 AYOWIN 4 5 5 45 BOF MEMORY BLOCK 2 10 TIE LINE DIGIT RESTRICTION ASSIGNMENT STATION NUMBER NUMBER OF DIGITS THAT CAN BEDIALED STATION NUMBER NUMBER OF DIGITS
200. 2 L1 to 15 correspond to programs Edd respectively and will show program n MEET 9 ott ica Dex Ca 2 During step 3 the LCD bottom row xxx will show the number of program errors Up to 255 errors may be displayed gt 5 3 When the clear operation is performed all error counts for programs 1 to 5 are cleared 4 Program number and EPROM number correspondence PROGRAM NO EPROM NO Cd LED 2 E E EAA E EEG ROM 02 03 04 05 06 amp 07 ROM 06 07 08 amp 09 ROM 08 09 10 11 12 amp 13 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 5B3 INTERFACE SLOT CHECK OPERATION lt AND Gooffline Depress F5 then F7 Depress 13 Dial module number 1 4 of the slot to be checked Example Module 1 Dial slot number 1 8 for the required slot Example Slot 5 See Note 1 If the counter value is not to be cleared proceed to Step 9 Depress CLEAR key Depress ENTER key See Note 2 Depress SPKR key to go back on line DISPLAY cjue 11 300 242 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING IMEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED po poe pepe
201. 232C connector to support the RS 232C interface For internal data communication speeds of up to 9 6 kbps can be accommodated by the RS 232C interface For connecting the interface unit a 25 pin RS 232C connector is provided with the following configuration Table 220 13 DTA E RS 232C Connector Pin Configuration Signal Ground SG T Dete DCD 2 ce Ring Indicator RI ND 20292 CHAPTER2 JULY 1987 Note Either full duplex or half duplex can be accommodated with the RS 232C interface 2 Power Requirements The DTA E unit is provided with an AC DC power supply adaptor as an attachment Specifications for this AC DC adaptor are as follows AC Input 120 AC 60 Hz single phase DC Output NOMINAL DC DC VOLTAGE VOLTAGE TOLERANCE CURTENT RS 232C 12V 11 4V 0 37 210mA Line Drive 6 Circuit 3 Grounding Requirements Proper grounding is required to protect the DTA E unit and the data terminal equipment connected to the DTA E unit Usually data terminal equipment with an RS 232C interface has its frame connected to earth ground Ensure that data terminals connected to the DTA E units are properly connected to earth ground via conduit ground of the AC power cord used in the data terminals 4 Cabling Requirements For connecting of data terminal equipment to the DTA E unit a locally provided RS 232
202. 260 9 Figure 260 9 SECTION 270 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION 270 1 MUSIC ON HOLD Provision has been made to allow connection of a locally provided external music source to provide Music On Hold for held calls Music source input is made using the phono jack located on the TSW E ETU For music source s input level and impedance refer to section 220 SPECIFICATIONS of this manual NOTE Incompliance with FCC Part 15 regulations the following procedure must be implemented anytime a music on hold source is connected to this system A Makea slit the cable insulation approximately one and one half inches long at a distance of 12 inches from the plug end on the cable to be connected to the TSW E jack Take special care not to cut into the shield wire and inner wire insulation ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 B Make a circular cut in the cable insulation at end of the slit C Pull the cut insulation from the cable so as to expose the shield for the length of the slit and cut the insulation off D Bend the cable near the middle of the exposed shield and separate the shield from the inner insulation in preparation for soldering refer to figure 270 1 E Obtain 7 inch length of 20 24 AWG stranded wire and connect a ring tongue type connector at one end F Strip a one half inch length of insulation from the other end of the 7 inch wire Solder this end to the shield previously
203. 3 5 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 DISPLAY fore TET NTE T 5 EL 22 c o p e TA s e N fof TTT TTT 4 CARER TTT 7 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for any additional rejection codes required 8 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 176 JUV Lio ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 K N GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING JEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY tOGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE BE PROGRAMMED 2 Gr 4 Gs 38101181 181 c 3 56 CPU levels NOTES 1 During step 3 the display shows any current 1 2 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display 2 1 to increment to the next entry location s 3 G 3 Up to four single digit rejection codes can be assigned Coal E Fal Cd LJ Pd Lal Cx El El El El F El E F i GENERAL INFORMATION REJECTION CODE ASSIGNMENT 1 This area of the memory block is used to assign up to 4 single digit Rejection Codes The Rejection Code is used to prevent a code restricted station from by passing the dialing restriction by first dialing
204. 385 386 3B7 O 1 CPU EB3 or higher NOTES 1 Depressing the ENTER key advances this program to the next HUNT GROUP 03 5 D 2 2 C E 3 E3 Cd Cd Ed LJ 1EERHHE HH og E E E m 22 2 GENERAL INFORMATION STATION HUNT ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to assign the Hunt Search method for each Hunt Group Linear Default i Circular i Laienemine ma i aaa 300 153 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 3B8 STATION HUNT GROUP FORWARD ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F3 then F7 3 Depress F18 4 Dial the STATION HUNT GROUP NO 1 8 for which the HUNT FORWARD destination is to be assigned Example HUNTG NO 1 5 Dial EXT NO or HUNT PILOT NO as the HUNT FORWARD NO Example EXT No 2300 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 1 7 Repeating Steps 3 to 5 until station hunt forward destinations can be registered for all the HUNT GROUPS 8 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 0 1 141 jP Rjo G R A MI 5 1512 rieEjA TJulRIE 11 111 11111 10 111 1
205. 43 the month SEP the date 04 and the day SUN This display is only removed during off line programming mode when the Calculator mode is in use or during certain data communication operations ND 20292 CHAPTER 1 JULY 1987 Figure 140 4 Typical Clock Calendar Display CO ADD ON MODULE The EDE 30 1 Revision B or higher can be installed and programmed as a CO ADD ON MODULE to allow an Attendant Position the ability of having direct access to the system s forty maximum outside line terminations The system s maximum of six EDE 30 1 applies to both applications only four units can be utilized as a CO Add On Module one per Attendant Position system must also be equipped with a CPU EB ETU CODE RESTRICTION aids in the ability to tailor the station dialing restriction to every customer s individual needs The Electra MarkII offers advanced network of restrictions to control outside calls based upon area and local office codes restriction feature provides override capability on trunk group basis and accommodates Access to secondary common carriers CONSECUTIVE SPEED DIAL simplifies dialing complicated sequences of numbers such as those used for some specialized common carriers credit card and other applications All Electra Markl Multiline Terminals have the capability to Consecutively Speed Dial with access to System and Station Speed Dial memories CONSULTATI
206. 5325 13405 553229 S00 _ 5 3002 55322 1 t 3402 55322 SINNYL 3005 553229 ANNYL 23002 55322 8 NOISN31X3 NOISN31X3 YAGWNN NOISN31X3 FYOLSIY LNOASNS ONY 1531 153135 JNNYL WviubOUd 3002 1 12345 ANVON3LLV 132NYVD 103201 NOU VIS 110312071 1 4115 03345 NOLLVLS v m 313214 1 LHDIN 39vd 1vNu31X3 39Vd 135 115 11 93123 9 45 7772 11 2 1NVON3LLV SNY ON 508 TIVO NOU VNIS3Q SNY ON 5 8 GM 1192 WOLVNIDINO SNY ON 1192 1 TIVO NOLLVNILS3Q TIV YOLVNIDINO TIV 11 2 WU3xV3dS NOLLVLS WOE 3univ3a4 N L a L 37 32018 5 28 xo gt 862 006 4000 5 3000 85 00 dasoNn SPHOL VS MAN AULNG WALI 53402 55322 WJLSAS 1 32 2018 403 5 45 662 005 Tid 93395 03345 03345 83385 Tid 9334 Vig VIO 9339 VIO 9334 3905 3411533 11nv3aa 53002 325 WALSAS 1 32 32018 AHOW3IN 8 1 5 ANV 6 0 7 6668 0001 10 66
207. 84 6 Depress one of the line keys L1 to 1 11 to set the interface slot required 7 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 elu s v 111 sltioirisi 8 Repeatsteps 6 and 7 for each slot required or go to step 3 to select a particular interface slot 9 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 214 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 NCTION CO N KR EL Enters new module and slot number IF W Increments slot number ENTER Enters each slot assigned B W Decrements slot number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING IMEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED ee eee 42 e CPU levels NOTES 1 During step 5 the status of L1 to L16 indicates the type of card and status for the slot chosen See figure below uw p 241151 6 02 2 cio 141 12 es E Em LJ Ld 4 4 E 2 01 LED ON Notbusied out ESI OFF Not assigned FLASHING Busied out 2 Depressing the ENTER key will cause the display to increment to the next slot 5 m __ GENERALINFORMATION INTERFACE SLOT BUSY OUT ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is
208. 944 pue ay asn ajqryeduros 104 NO 2181 ygd Suri fox 1 1 ssa1doqq e 5918014 ur 015 ele T o1 v ijv a SNOILVOIGNI GOT TIAWV 1861 56205 16 00 ta Kpeajs 31 st 131 12228 Kpeais 51 XHd OO muB 92243 5208 147 348 aa pus 3 91 saysey 19913 11 51031 32228 4 00 LA ssedeq e 5894804d 92 eurua aum 199 71 8 au Purua J IUO e u1n321 YALNA 9u1 uay pus 945 Od o qrjeduroo 104 NO 61815 YSA 9485 10jeorput Bury 3284 3419221 59449 e 8 18014 182 Burua ut 9d 189815 YLA A
209. ALLOW NEXT 2 DIGITS NOLCR ALLOW 1 MORE LOCAL CALL DIGIT OVERRIDES LCR 1st 3rd DIGITS EQUAL N11 NORMAL OPERATION LOCAL TOLL CALL OPERATION LCR LOCAL CALL NNX XXXX YES OPERATION LCR LOCAUTOLL CALL 1 NNX XXXX 700 56 i5190 9 9NnvIO 83139 3NO1 3394035 3NO1 8861 LWALdVHO 26502 8 3 1 M35 ON 20 1N3IANDISS Y 3002 321330 SHNA AX3N 33238 313 4304034 IN3IANDISSV 18 1 3 9155 LON NOISY AUVG A1N3WNDSISSY 3181 93451559 10N 19 00 13384 313139 iON OG INJINNDISSV 33 IIHI v3uv 32435 J LYHAA 519109 43139 93491559 1N3WNOISSV Q3NOISSV 31841 31008 ALON 7251 30 31891139 NOISSY 31871 anew 31891 2NvAOY 32345 10N 5909 SNVAQY SNIYIG 93139 33891 NOI1 79340 1TYWHON AN3WNOISSV 318v13000 viv NOISSY 31971 Q3NDISSY 10N 300 vuv 1190 3413238 351 804 3189
210. AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline jolr elt INTE x x 016 2 Depress F2 then 151 151 5 00011 04771 100 3 Depress F13 ime oje 5151 juiriN e 4 Depressline key LK1 Automatic Disconnect Timer LK 1 LED lights See Note 1 5 Dial count value to be entered 01 99 5 1 o M t NT Example Time Count 04 for a total of 40 01 15 0 4 minutes See Note 2 6 Depress ENTER 7 Depress the key to go back on line 300 128 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 K NCLHONIO ON OFF Line EL Selects line ke EW CLEAR ENTER Enters timer count value GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING SS MEMORY BLOCK THAT 1111111 tO MMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED 17 ______________ 2 or higher level k12 us 5 1 During step 4 the display shows the current time count c LINE KEY TIMER DEFAULT Ca Li Automatic Disconnect 2 Time Out Time 10 min x Gl Fl Cd Ed Ce GENERAL INFORMATION TIME BASE ASSIGNMENT i i This area of the
211. BLOCK 1D8 TERMINAL TO ATTENDANT ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F1 then F9 3 Depress F18 4 Enter the station number to be assigned Example Station 104 See Note 1 5 Enter attendant number 1 4 to be assigned to the station chosen in step 4 Example Attendant 2 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 DISPLAY e ex x xI r e A T u R E es 1 lA T T 5 6 TL T E RIM lA T T 4 7 5 6 111014 1 1 121 1 jaltit 15 6 10151 1 1 1 7 Repeatsteps 5 and 6 for all subsequent stations go to step 3 to assign a specific station 8 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 44 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 SPKR Enterassignmenttoeachstation B W Backward Decrement the station number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING EMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT PROGRAMMED MUST PROGRAMMED HAVE TO PROGRAMMED 108 O All CPU levels NOTES k 2 05 P 5 6 2 8 al 1 After station number is entere
212. CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 B W Backward Decrements station number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING EMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST PROGRAMMED HAVE TO PROGRAMMED CPU EB or higher NOTES 1 After step 4 line keys L1 L6 will show the parameters previously selected SPKR ine 2 3 Gs 6 2 8 v 2 ia 5 Cee se Cel 89 fl 23 2 Line keys L1 L6 correspond to the following L1 Automatic Answer LEDON YES OFF NO L2 Automatic Release LED ON YES OFF NO L3 DTR Signal Validity LED ON VALID Terminal OFF INVALID DSR Signal Validity LED ON VALID Modem OFF INVALID L4 Incoming Internal LED ON ALLOW OFF E E E E B E E F E E B Data Call during PROHIBIT CO conversation 21 15 Depressingthe DR Rejects the 2 key after receiving internal call internal data call and urin conversation activates 5 modem pool LED OFF Answers the internal 1 data L6 LCD Indication for LED Provided When using a remote printer for internal data data calls OFF Not _ communications it is recommended that the DTR Default Provided signal for the station supporting the printer be Fr PIU programmed as INVALID Otherwise the data path stays conn
213. E ETU turn SW2 OFF for insertion of this ETU to the slot without powering down the CCU b 25 pin RS 232C connector is provided to connect the portable computer in order to input necessary data into the LCR E ETU c Route the RS 232C connector ended cable down to the right side of the CCU in such a way as to avoid interference with the insertion and removal of ETUs and with the 25 pair cables from the J1 J3 connectors Remove the access panel on the right side of the CCU which covers seven openings provided to mount RS 232C connectors See Figure 240 14 Mount the RS 232C connector in one of these openings using screws and nuts locally provided See Figure 240 15 d Connect the portable computer to the RS 232C connector mounted on the CCU in step and secure the RS 232C male connector from the computer using screws locally provided Figure 240 19 LCR E ETU Switch Layout 200 31 ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 e Turn ON the SW2 the LCR E 4 LCR data input is done from the portable computer For LCR programming refer to Chapter 7 of this manual SECTION 250 POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION 250 4 PSE AD 1PSU NOTE Before proceeding ensure that the Power Line Cord is not plugged into the AC receptacle and the system AC power switch located in the left front side of the ESE 32B 1 CCU just above the card slots is in the OFF down position The three prong AC Power Line Cord is factory pr
214. E installed port STRAIGHT R 232C Figure 270 4 Modem Pooling Block Diagram 200 45 ND 20292 CHAPTER2 JULY 1987 Table 270 2 SIGNAL SIGNAL D NATION DESIGNATION TELEPHONE LINE LAMP CONTROL MAKE BUSY RELAY CONTACTS MODEM MAKE BUSY RELAY CONTACTS IN MODEM GROUND RETURN FOR LINE LAMP CIRCUIT TALK DATA SWITCH CONTACTS IN TELEPHONE WITH TDG POWER RELAY CONTACT TELEPHONE LINE TELEPHONE LINE RING RING DETECT CONTACTS TO GROUND IN MODEM DATA MODE CONTACTS TO GROUND IN MODEM DATA MODE CONTACTS TO GROUND FROM ACU TELEPHONE SET TIP TELEPHONE SET RING CONTACT CLOSURE INDICATING THAT MODEM OR TELEPHONE IS HOLDING THE LINE CONTACT CLOSURE INDICATING THAT MODEM OR TELEPHONE IS HOLDING THE LINE GROUND RETURN FOR TD SWITCH SEE PIN 5 POWER RELAY CONTACT T amp R TO SLI E TD amp TDG CONTACT Wi R 232C R 232C M 25PIN FEMALE CONNECTOR 25 MALE CONNECTOR Figure 270 5 Data Set Modem Non Hayes Compatible Modem Telephone or ACU Interface 200 46 ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 85 232 MALE 85 232 MALE CONNECTOR CONNECTOR er CONNECTOR CONNECTOR CABLE LENGTH 50 feet 15 m CABLE Twisted pair shielded 5 232 cross cable with RS 232C male connectors on both ends Figure 270 6 Wiring Connections of RS 232C Cross Cable for Connecting a Modem to a DTA E unit 200 47 3 PRO
215. EXTRA CODE TABLE NO 1 CODE 10288 EXTRA CODE TABLE MODIFY EXTRA CODE TABLE NO 1 10288 750 7 INPUT OF DATA GENERAL input of data is done by starting at the LCR Main Menu The LCR Main menu provides a selection of various functions which the programmer can access by selecting a number Once a selection is made the CR RETURN key is depressed and the program to access the selected function is loaded from the floppy disk into the computer 4 this time a new menu is displayed which allows the programmer to select the table with which the programmer wishes to work Again a number is selected from the menu and the CR key is depressed The data for the chosen table is loaded from the floppy disk into the computer At this stage in programming various options may be available depending on which function was chosen from the LCR main menu The data may now be modified displayed or printed out Based on the above information it can be seen that the meaning of any particular keystroke can be one of two meanings The first is as a command The second is as data From a menu the selected number followed by a CR RETURN is to obtain the program for a specific function or to retrieve data for a specific table Once table data is displayed the use of keys is to change data move through the table to obtain specific data or to enter new data To get out of a table the ESC escape key is
216. Electra MarkII system provides paths for data connection and controls the setting and releasing of these paths Software does not provide for support of protoco or conversion 200 43 ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 24 VOLT DC POWER SUPPLY EPC 1A EPC 1B EPC EPC 28 Phono Jack EP on the TSW E BGM Source EXTERNAL SWITCHING RELAYS RELAY1 RELAY 2 Note Diodes 01 D3 are IN4004 or equivalent Figure 270 3 Connection of External Paging and External Background Music Figure 270 4 shows the modem pool connections the data paths DTEs and other equipment required for modem pool operation 2 Installation NOTE Prior to connecting the modem to the DTA E unit unplug the Multiline Terminal with DTA E unit installed line cord and ensure that the modem is not powered Locate a modem near a Multiline Terminal with a DTA E unit installed already programmed for modem pooling Installing Hayes compatible modems Use a modular plug ended line cord and connect the modem to an SLI E port programmed for B2 the same modem connection as in step Proceed to step C Installing Non Hayes compatible modems An ACU interface connector is provided with the modem This connector must be wired to the single line tip and ring and to the PWR relay contact of the DTA E The interface connector is connected as shown in Tabie 270 2 1 Remove the DTA E unit from the Multiline Termi
217. Flow chart C3 Reset SLI E and test if trouble persists THEN Replace SLI E and Reset MFR EA Return defective ETU for repair Go to Flow chart A1 Leave 1 SLI E 1 ESI E and 1 MFR EA installed 500 16 1 2 3 4 5 ND 20292 CHAPTER 5 SEPTEMBER 1987 E2 Ringing Problem on SLT Replace SLT Ringing Problem Solved SLT Defective Check to see if ringing problem is intermittant Intermittant Problem Check to see if SLT is call forwarded Call Forward EET EET Check RSG E cabling and RSG E Output with an AC meter Replace RSG E BLF gie Indication Terminate SLT on MDF BLF Indication Check or replace station cable Check Memory Block 1 5 for status Change SLI E first test Change MMC E or TSW E test Perform a 2nd Initialization Change CPU EB test Check MDF Connection 500 17 ND 20292 CHAPTER 5 SEPTEMBER 1987 E3 No Dial Access to Features onSLT Check to see if SLT can access intercom or CO diai tone Access to dial tone Go to Flow chart E1 Check memory Block 10 7 for Class of Service assignment Does Class of Service allow feature Reprogram 5 to allow feature Check Memory Block 2E 1 for access code assignment of feature Recheck feature access with correct code 15 correct code used
218. HARDWARE TERMINAL OPERATION AND 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F5 then F7 3 Depress F16 See Note 1 4 Todetermine Telephone Port assignment dial Station number to be referenced Example Station 120 See Notes 1 and 2 5 Todetermine DSS Port assignment depress L14 6 Enter DSS device number 1 6 7 Todetermine device type associated with a particular port depress L15 8 Enter module slot and channel number Example Module 1 Slot 3 Channel 2 9 Depress SPKR key to go back on line DISPLAY RD INE TCIT TET 18 81 8 1015 1 s n r e R M s r A T U s rie 1 11111 is 112101 5 1 Tui lvivivivi 1 51 1 s r A T U ST 7 TTT stfu tlela m 915151 e 15 Tal 1 5 s r ATT U ST mjojoj 151 jeiuj 513 5 1 Iul lylvivivi ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING IMEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED Far 51 51
219. L1 L3 to assign each flexible Feature Access key Example L2 L1 Leftkey L2 Center key L3 Right key DISPLAY __ 0 Tox XTXT gt mojoj 0151517 FEE TTT 015151 ipjeiviiicle2 T T 1 T T ty 01515111 1 01515111 12 Ixixixixixixixixixixixi 6 Dial the feature number that corresponds to the feature being assigned Example Feature number 2 Paging See Notes 1 amp 3 Example Feature number 3 Message Wait Exampie Feature number 4 Transfer Example Feature number 5 Attendant Override Example Feature number 6 Night Transfer 7 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 1015 15 11 ele ful 121 elAls e Izloiwiel i 10151511 121 01515111 r t x r e A T u R E jo s s 1 12 lAlriv 11515111 F e A T u R E 12 iuf ileiuir iMlololtl 300 20 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 56 IMEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRA
220. LCR E to refer to an office code OFC CODE TBL 015 table to determine whether service is available for SRVAREACHK that office Depress the space bar once to select NO for this option A second depression of the space bar selects the option TABLE MODIFY CHK check This option tells the LCR E to go check TAB 221 120 the office code table for a flag to determine if service is 5 available for the office code dialed by the caller 01 DEL CODE TBL 02 PFX ADD CHK OFC CODE TBL SRV AREA CHK CHK OFC CODE TBL If the CHK check option is selected it is necessary to enter an office code table number for the LCR E to check Available entries are 000 127 The example ote shows office code table number 100 assigned for TBL 02 service area check CHK OFC CODE 015 SRV AREACHK CHKOFCCODE TBL 100 NOTES 1 Each item in the route table must have an assignment made to it for the route table to be written into the computer If any items are left unassigned the entire table remains unassigned 2 If mistakes are made during the entry of data to this table the use of the cursor keys allows moving the cursor to the item to be corrected and corrections can then be implemented 3 When all data in the table is correct depressing the CR RETURN causes the data to be entered into the computer memory and the display increments the table
221. Mail Access These connect to two of the four available VMI E extension positions These VMI E extensions should be cross connected from the appropriate J block on the MDF and connected to an RJ11C connector to facilitate connection to the Genie using modular line cords See Figure 1 66 K pros GENIE MODEM 1 Fus PRINTER o STATUS status TO GENIE MODULAR m stats CONNECTORS PORT 1 AND PORT 2 Figure 1 Genie Connection Block Diagram 42 Electra System Programming 4 2 1 If the VMI E ETU is being added to an existing system in an interface slot previously occupied by a different type of ETU it is necessary to assign the interface slot to be used for the VMI E ETU in Memory Block 4 1 Refer to Chapter of the Installation Service Manual 4 2 2 The two voice mail extensions connected to the Genie System can be programmed in the Voice Mail Hunt Group in Memory Block 2C4 Refer to Chapter 3 of the Installation Service Manual 43 Installing Initializing Genie NOTE Ensure both the Genie and the computor terminal power switches are turned off 4 3 1 Configure the serial computer terminal to be used with the Genie as follows 8 bit word length no parity ignore parity on some terminals 1 stop bit auto line feed off full duplex 9 1200 baud 2013 A 21 gt 4 3 5 NUMBER MK 003 DATE JULY 7 1987
222. Main Menu in the display depress 6 then depress CR RETURN display shown is provided Select the number of the desired table then depress CR RETURN The example shows the display provided if option 1 Area Code is selected If 7 OFFICE CODE TABLE is selected two additional steps are required With the PRINT OUT MODE in the display depress 7 then CR RETURN The display to the right is provided 1 Input the starting table number and CR RETURN 2 Input the end table number and CR RETURN NOTES 1 The display is an example of area code data being printed out from the floppy disk The blocked off area is replaced with the name of the table chosen but otherwise looks the same for all other selections 2 Depress CR RETURN to go back to the Print Out display f no problem is encountered during the printout process the display shown is provided 100 49 ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 198 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS HOME NPA CODE DISPLAY HOME NPA CODE 904 awa PRINT OUT 1 AREA CODE TABLE 6 EXTRA CODE TABLE 7 OFFICE CODE TABLE 8 HOME NPA CODE 5 ROUTE TABLE ENTER MENU NO O AREA CODE TABLE PRINT OUT START OFFICE CODE TABLE PRINT TABLE NO FROM O OFFICE CODE TABLE TABLE NO FROM 100 TO HOME NPA TRE TABLE PRINT OUT START NORMAL END ND 20292 CHAPTER MARCH 1988 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS If a problem is encoun
223. NCTION CQ N CLEAR ENTER Enter option GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT PROG MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED Se ee id i D 2 8 __ _______ ee E 51 2 es ia CPU levels NOTES 1 Instep 4 if L1 is on the internal all call feature INR is allowed If L1 is off Deafult the feature is 3 m disallowed Dan Cal Je Eg g 1 GENERAL INFORMATION INTERNAL ALL CALL i This area of the memory block is used to allow or disallow the internal all call system feature When active i this feature allows all page calls to reach every multiline station regardless whether they are programmed t into a page zone or not It is mostly used for emergerncies 300 77 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2A8 ACCOUNT CODE DIGIT OPERATION e AND 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F2 then F6 3 Depress F18 See Note 1 4 Enter number of digits for the Account Code 01 14 Example Enter 09 for a 9 digit account code 5 Depress ENTER key 6 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line DISPLAY lofe fe Jt fi NTET Tox xx jPjR 016 8 518151
224. NIGHT All Stations System in Night Mode Originator Station in Call Forward Mode 100 17 ND 20292 CHAPTER 1 JULY 1987 DISPLAY LOCATION DEFINITION CALLBACK 163 CALCULATOR BUSY CURRENT CODE NEW CODE NEW CODE SET LOCKOUT SET 298 LOCKOUT DENIED Recall by Automatic Callback from 163 Originator All Calculator Circuits Busy Originator Prompt During Lockout Code Revision Prompt During Lockout Code Revision Confirmation of New Secret Code Confirmation of Lockout Status on 298 Originator Unable to set Lockout Calculator On Originator System Speed Dia Memory Number Incoming CO Call on Add On Module Originator CK 3COCALL LK16 TIE LINE Called Attendant Incoming Tie line call on Primary Extension with Trunk Group Name Assigned Ring Assigned Station QUEUE SET Originator Trunk Queuing is set Parking Area Attempted is Busy C012 NOT INSTALL Attendant CO11 NORMAL C011 BUSY Confirmation of Trunk Test For Trunks In Use BUSYOUT Confirmation of Trunk Busied Out MFR3 NOT INSTALL Attendant Confirmation of MFR Test For MFR not Installed Confirmation of MFR Test For MFR Installed Confirmation of MFR Busied Out Recall for Unanswered Parked Call Confirmation of Trunk Test F
225. NOLLVSHSANOO 09 DNIund 40 NOISS3Hd3d NOLLVSHSANOO 57170 vLva IVNUGLNI IVNDIS 0 STIVO Viva STIVO Viva Uod 5 OLLVAOLNY VIVO NOILVIS 1 NOLLdIN S3Gd 4 5 NOILV2IHID3dS gor T UOA OLLVWOLDY 3 o T z 5 5 x 4 Ba e a 84 5 E 9 a 8 a MEMORY BLOCK 10 2 DATA SERVICE ASSIGNMENT Susdang GANDISSV 40 400 NOLLOTILSS 000 OL 3IGDHH3AO MOTIV OL 8194145 NVO LNVN3J V OL INVNGL NI SIDBISAO GSNDISSV 5 I3NDISSV uu4ang HOVAOLGANDISSY S LNVN L NI AVN SYUALOVUVHD 91 JO 8 498 15 5 8 1 SLNVNGL 58312 91 SH310VHVHO SLIDIG 91 05 80 OLGSNDISSV Su34dng8 038015 YI8NNN Wall SAN3WNDISSV LNVNAL 03345 8 8 Z VZ 532018 2 5 45 8 Tenant NUMBER STORED 16 CHARACTERS MAXIMUM 300 283 NUMBER STORED 16 CHARACTERS MAXIMUM TENANT TENANT n
226. Note 1 AND gt DISPLAY tofe J LT INTE TCOIXD TXTXDY jPiRjo e R A M mojo T ANCA RU 8 8 EE EET T E 5 1116 511111 Depress L1 to 1 12 to set the desired SLI common values Depress ENTER key Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 200 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE nte M 2 9 P 5 i P 8 x i 2 156 MEMORY BLOCK MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT BEING PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED LINE BUTTONS Lila m 19 1110 1111112 551 All CPU levels NOTES 1 During step 3 the status of L1to L12 will indicate the previous SLI Common values assigned See chart Multiplier M HFS Hookflash Start Time 50 mS x M 100 mS Default 300 mS HFE Hookflash End Time HFS x 100 mS Default 1000 mS BP Bounce Protect Time 100 mS x M Default 300 mS GENERAL INFORMATION SLI COMMON VALUES This area of the memory block is used to assign timing parameters to all single line telephones See Section i 350 for a description of each parameter 300 201 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 4 4 ESI E
227. Note 1 5 Li to L8 represent trunk groups 1 to 8 respectively If no change in status is required proceed to step 7 6 Depress L1 to L8 to allow or deny access to the trunk groups for incoming calls LED ON Restricted LED OFF Unrestricted 6 N c o w miel TT T TT T 1j 7 Depress ENTER key Repeat steps 5 7 for subsequent Multiline Terminals See Note 2 or go to step 3 to restrict a specific terminal 8 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 36 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 SPKR ine B W Backward Decrements the station GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST 8 PROGRAMMED HAVE TO PROGRAMMED All CPU levels NOTES 7 1 During step 4 L1 to L8 correspond to trunk Ca 1 x5 8 55 ia 258 es groups 1 to 8 respectively and will show previous assignment Lg LED restricted LED unrestricted 2 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display F to increment to the next station number m e Ce GENERAL INFORMATION TRUNK GROUP INCOMING RESTRICTION This memory block is used to assign incoming restrictions to Multiline Terminals on a trunk group basis ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMOR
228. OPERATION lt AND Gooffline Depress F1 then F9 Depress 11 Dialstation number to assigned Example Station 104 See Note 1 Dialaone digit code to select the appropriate function See Note 2 Prime line dial 1 and depress the line key LK1 16 to be assigned See Note 3 Ringing line Dial 2 Prime Ring line Dial 3 Depress desired line key See Notes 3 6 5 For SLT Prime Line Dial 4 Enter desired Trunk Number See Notes 6 amp 7 CPU EB2 or higher For no assignment Dial 0 Depress ENTER key See Note 4 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for all subsequent stations or 50 back to step 3 to program a specific station When programming is complete depress SPKR key to go back on line DISPLAY __ jPjRJO e R A M T 1 s Rim el P R ETE 0 41 Ixixixixixixixixixi 1 P R E F laloja eiri me 2 1 lola 61116161 t P R E F 4 pirim jR M 1 rinjuiuiki 8 18 IL
229. Prior to connecting the DTE to the DTA E unit unplug the line cord of the Multiline Terminal and ensure that the power switch of the DTE is turned off Position a Multiline Terminal with a unit already installed close to the data terminal to be connected B 2 Connect one end of a locally provided RS 232C straight cable to the RS 232C connector of the DTA E unit Refer to Figure 260 6 B 3 Secure the RS 232C connector with screws provided with the RS 232C cable as shown in Figure 260 6 Figure 260 7 B 4 Connect the other end of the RS 232C cable to the 4 Attach the Wall Mount to the terminal by guiding DTE as described in the instructions provided with the two straight tabs on the Wall Mount into the two notches on the top rear of the Multiline the DTE Terminal Apply pressure to the Rubber Thumb B 5 Plug the line cord into the Multiline Terminal Guards until the Wall Mount snaps in place and connect the AC DC adaptor to the connector attaching it securely See Figure 260 8 provided on the DTA E unit B 6 Apply power to the DTE 260 8 WALL MOUNT UNIT INSTALLATION 1 Remove the Wall Mount Unit as shown 2 Remove the backing from the Rubber Thumb Guards A to expose the pressure sensitive tape install two 2 Rubber Thumb Guards as shown See Figure 260 7 3 Install Plastic Mount Supports into slots Figure 260 8 200 40 5 Slide both Plastic Mount Supports down as shown See Figure
230. ROUTE TABLE MODIFY TABLE NO 100 TRKACSSCODE 1 5 H PFX ADD ADD CODE TBL SRV AREA CHK Doo NOTES 1 When the entry is blank use of the Space Bar provides NO as the selected option 2 Repeated use of the Space Bar will cause the selected option to alternate between NO and ADD 3 Selection of NO tells the LCR E that extra digits pore should not be added when the number is dialed out by T the system i 4 Selection of ADD tells the system to add extra x ct digits before it dials out the number dialed by the nof s user An entry of the associated Extra code table number is required when this option is selected Example of Prefix Add Check ROUTE TABLE MODIFY TABLE NO 100 TRK ACSS CODE AREA CODE DEL ETR CODE ADD 1 PFX ADD 1 SRV AREA Depress Space Bar ROUTE TABLE MODIFY TABLE NO 100 TRK ACSS CODE AREA CODE DEL Depress Space Bar again wee OFCCODE TBL SRV AREA CHK 7nn ND 20292 7 1988 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS NOTES 1 When the entry is blank use of the Space Bar provides NO as the selected option 2 Repeated use of the Space Bar will cause the selected option to alternate between NO ADD and gt 223 Selection of NO tells the LCR E that the digit 1 prefix
231. Restrictions 370 Job Specifications This HOW TO USE CHAPTER provides the reader directions and recommendations for using Chapter 3 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING Section 340 describes in detail each of the programming areas in the five memory blocks This Section is to be used as a guide when programming For each programming area Section 340 provides two reference pages the first page provides step by step instructions as well as all display messages while programming The second page supplies supplement charts and notes to help explain the program instructions it also explains the use of each function and line key as it pertains to the particular program area 300 1 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 FUNCTION TIMER CHARTS Section 350 is provided as a quick cross reference for all of the system s timers which can be set through programming This section provides a full description of each timer explaining their purpose and function within the system as well as their default values range and the memory block area it is assigned TOLL CODE RESTRICTIONS Section 360 discusses the code restriction plan designed into the Electra MarkII system Initially this section describes the code restriction tables and their general use when dial restricting stations Discussion is then extended to the following dialing areas 1 dialing areas B Direct Dialing areas C OCC Equal Access D Puerto Rico area Flow charts are pro
232. SI 01 3002 551329 ONIS 31891 1008 55332 XNNYL 139 031910 300 vauv 313130 INIWNOISSY 313130 3002 v3uv 313130 L AB Y3INNOJ ALIYO Qvid 3801 30 1 3 1 00 031910 38 OL JO 14033 NI 3002 3 dav 1NTIANDISS Y 300 v1 x3 SI 0 ONITVIO 313 3NO1 4304034 8 1NIWNOISSY 318 1 3002 3211330 aav 10N 00 1 38 01 30 INOMI NI 1 AX3N 1N3INNDISS V 333H2 00V SI LV HAN aav 8861 HOHVW 26202 0 vv vu 8861 oon mrep z 2 YE oz z pm DP moon 2 5 S318V 1 3902 oz morto z me O z z 8 1 LUSIdVHO 62505 ON AREA CODE TABLES DESCRIPTION Tenant Number Area Code Table Name Route Advance or Weekly Assignment Table Number Assignment 700 59 D 20292 CHAPTER MARCH 1988 ENTRY 2X0 9X9 Route Advance W Weekly 00 63 ND 20
233. Selects trunk group number IF W Increments trunk group number ICLEAR Enters each assignment Decrements trunk group number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY SLOCK THAT MEMORY 8LOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST PROGRAMMED HAVE TO PROGRAMMED 486 481 482 487 CPU levela See Note 1 L4 NOTES 1 During step 4 the status of L1 to L12 LEDs indicate the current parameters set to the trunk group chosen Haier 2 1 41251 06 2 1 3 f ca Default NO CPU EB2 or higher L5toL8 DTMF digit duration In binary form 50 mS 60 mS Default 110 mS L9 to 112 Hookflash time In binary form 100 mS 300 mS Default 1500 mS See figure below te L1 10or20PPS for rotary dialing Default 10 PPS m 12 Rotary or dialing Default Ced 13 COorPBXline interface Default CO y L4 Disconnect Signal from CO YES NO 1 1 2 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to increment to the next trunk group E E LED OFF means upper parameter LED ua e om te OFE DTMF DURATION 2 LED 19 mo iu u us us ue Q HOOKFLA GENERAL INFORMATION INITIALIZED VALUES 1 1 i This area of the memory block is us
234. THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED All CPU levels NOTES l To allow the incoming prime line pickup feature L1 must be lit before the ENTER key is depressed To deny the feature L1 must be off Ce 2 CI ES e Dm pee 3 C EJ E3 ed Lu Fa 1 i GENERAL INFORMATION INCOMING PRIME LINE PICKUP t This area of the memory block is used to allow or deny the incoming prime line pickup feature see Section 1 400 for the operation of this feature system wide basis ND 20392 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2 5 AND AS FIRST DIGIT ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND DISPLAY 1 Go offline 2 Depress F2 then F6 3 Depress F15 4 Depress L1 and L2 to allow or disallow and or to be dialed as a first digit on a CO appearance See Note 1 5 Depress ENTER key 6 Depress SPKR key to go back on line Jole Li x 1 jMjojo E 5 5 222151 2 11115111 T T 2178 11315111 Eq i 300 72 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 ENTER Enter option 3 GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING IMEMOR
235. TI TAIWIN JS GE SNOILVOIGNI G01 LSet Anar 56505 S 007 uo 801384 889208 5143 10 8 4 5850 59242 e 552558 Jo 1181 1587 7906 sr 3182 apo 669228 911 e 9348 3 aul 888 490 e 8 auoz aures ur 31snui 01186 J9ASUE ISN OL ALON OL 7 SNOILVOIGNI WIdWNVS 8121 Tse T 191914 TI 18161 0 SESE REESE L861 ATAF 1 6202 95 007 st 559228 Jo 118 7999 51 669228 8 e e 5481 Kex aul ssouda e OL 2 2884 0 asf e 559508 Jo Suo 10 peurure1304d 66 ssaidaq e 59002 99 6 9407 299 2 2002 598 19107 194 paxtj st 4983 JO 4131p 1587 S 0 0 apod 859228 e e 97 93328 axa
236. Table also contains an office code go to step 8 B Matched item in table has only area code allow user free dialing 2 Table is deny A Matched item in table also contains an office code go to step 8 B Matched item in table has only area code Disconnect station ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 b No table found check Memory Block 3E 4 1 System allow allow user free dialing 2 System deny disconnect station Step 8 Allow three more digits to be dialed a Item in table matches area and office code dialed 1 Table is allow allow user free dialing 2 Table is deny disconnect station b If item in table no longer matches area and office code dialed locate next lowest table which contains a three digit entry which matches the area code dialed or a six digit entry which matches the area and office code dialed 1 New table found A Table is allow allow user free dialing B Table is deny disconnect station 2 Notable is found Check Memory Block 3E 4 System allow free dialing B System deny disconnect station 360 4 OCC other common carrier access refer to Table 360 4 Step 1 First two digits dialed are 10 more tables assigned have OCC Flag set then allow 3 more digits to be dialed next step b If no table assigned has OCC Flag set then disconnect station Step 2 Check last three digits dialed All three digits are dialed within ten seconds Allow next digit to be dialed
237. Terminal user places any current call on HOLD and answers the incoming or recalling CO call Camp On or Override ATTENDANT CAMP ON with a Direct Station Selection Busy Lamp Field DSS BLF console allows the attendant to expeditiously process calls even to busy extensions If after a preprogrammed time period the Camp On remains unanswered the call will recall to the attendant Figure 140 3 EDE 30 1 DSS BLF Direct Station Selection Busy Lamp Field or CO Add On Module ATTENDANT POSITIONS possible within the Electra MarkII system are a maximum of four When programmed as an attendant terminal the standard ETE 16D 1 Multiline Terminal has special access to features only available to an attendant Some of these attendant features are programming and displaying System Speed Dial memories setting Night Mode setting up calendar clock busy out defective trunks and MFR ports use of one or two DSS BLFs and a CO Add On module and more 100 5 ND 20292 1 JULY 1987 ATTENDANT TRANSFER be made quickly by use of the Direct Station Busy Lamp Field consoles Any attendant may Camp On or Transfer calls to extensions that appear on one of the DSS keys of the DSS BLF console The transfers may be supervised voice announced with answer or unsupervised ringing before answer Unanswered attendant transfers recall to the attendant position accompanied with a display identifying both the line key being recalle
238. UI 1 0 22 ALON aui 5143 aq UBS ON 12 40148 91 Asnq SJN T ALON saul 4 0 2 0013835 1 saul 4 02 2 84013915 2 seut 84013916 6 eut 88013916 6 XHd OO ON 84013616 6 Saul XHd OO ON 54013835 p 8 1 0 58 s9211319 U00 9 415504 923ue19juo L OZb SNOILVOIGNI GOT TIdWVS 1861 6202 92 00 s4434 39918 481 SNY saysey 7 Apes St GHT 92813 5908 SN aan seusep 131 Kpeajs 11 51 137 13 1x3 SNOLLVOIGNI 3 IdWVs parea 4 2 puooos pu Aay 52249 e Sse1dap 55918044 1182 353 shay aury omy 4 559443 e I MSUL 1 pue puooes e puooas Kay Sse1dop 55928044 ur 6315 eur aug 15 e 11 Aue Aq pau19jsuua
239. a four pin connector and jack labeled HAND refer to Figure 260 3 F Unplug the four pin connector ended harness labeled HAND and extend it out from the housing access hole Locate CN2 and insert the four pin connector ended harness from the ADA E unit into the jack labeled HAND H Locate and insert the eight pin connector ended harness from the ADA E unit into the jack labeled ADA Figure 260 3 ADA E Installation into an ETE 6 1 Multiline Terminal Insert the four pin connector ended harness removed in step F from the Multiline Terminal into the four pin jack CN3 located on the ADA E unit J The ADA E unit is mounted component side down after termination of the optional device required Refer to Engineering Technical Information ETI Bulletins for various device hookups K Secure the ADA E unit by inserting the screw provided with the unit L Replace the access panel 260 6 DATA ADAPTOR UNIT DTA E NOTE Installation in all Multiline Terminals except the ETE 6 1 ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 A Unplug the line cord at the RJ11C W then turn the Multiline Terminal upside down face down and locate the access panel on the bottom of the Multiline Terminal see Figure 260 1 B Slide the directory out of the way C Insert flat screw driver blade into notched opening shown as A and apply light upward pressure until access panel is cleared of the front lip at the same time appl
240. a self check is performed an ALARM 1 is received if another function is attempted before Return is depressed 940 3 PROGRAMMING VIA the PC Besides the LCD display of the programming Multiline Terminal the PC also provides line button indications similar to that of the Multiline Terminal The display shows the letters LK signifying Line Key followed by four line key numbers 1 5 9 and 13 equally spaced Idle line keys are represented as dashes in groups of four under the corresponding line key numbers Once the modem to modem or direct connection is established and the RAA program is in use but not in program mode the PC will display the line status of each line key 5 The following display indications are provided the PC when used for remote administration Line key use green steady X Line key flashing Line key in use red steady Line key is idle ND 20292 9 1988 771 go off hook using the PC depress and receive the following display EXT LINE 00 00 JAN 00 FRI OFF HOOK 9 2 To go into program mode type 0 Return and receive the following display OFF LINE X XX PROGRAM MODE OFF HOOK 1 5 9 13 940 4 PROGRAMMING EXAMPLE In this example extension 100 and different line key appearances will be programmed on station 102 as follows LK1 EXT 100 LK2 Save and Repeat 01 LK3 DND position
241. and 6 for ail subsequent tables required or go to step 3 to select a particular table 8 Depress the key to go back on line 300 184 104 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 K ICLEAR 2 ENTER Enters each table assignment B W Decrements table number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING JEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED gd S 37 paci el All CPU levels pr p 04 Gs 381 2 8 xs esl 86 NOTES C Cac 1 During step 4 L1 LED displays whether the OCC flag had previously been set to the table hosen t 3 Off OCC flag not set Ces call C eee gr sn 7 ES Ce 1 i GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE OCC FLAG ASSIGNMENT 1 This memory block area of the program is used to assign an OCC flag to each table stations assigned restriction tables that have the OCC flag set are allowed or denied to dial the common carriers which are specified in memory block 3E8 300 185 ND 30192 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 3E8 TABLE OCC CODE ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline lotr fe J TOXT TX XD Y Ie 51151
242. and Repeat Number is Stored CAMP ON DENIED Unable to Set Camp On Call CAMPON COCALL Receive CO Camp On Call CAMP ON EXT 342 Receive Internal Camp On Call from 342 OVERRIDE 320 Called Party Receive Tone Override From 320 CO LINE Originator On CO Line Key Before Dialing EXT LINE Originator On EXT Line Key Before Dialing NEIL A 201 Called Calling Station During Internal Call CONFERENCE During Conference CALL WAITING 106 Call Waiting on 106 BUSY 289 Called Station is Busy With Station No FWD ALL 298 209 Originator Confirming Call Forward Status FWD ALL NOT SET Originator Confirming Call Forward Status FWD BNA 298 gt 218 Confirming Call Forward Status FWD BNA NOT SET Confirming Call Forward Status FWD SET DENIED Originator Unable to Set Call Forward FWD CANCEL Originator Confirming Call Forward Status os 100 16 LIUU lo ND 20292 CHAPTER 1 JULY 1987 DEFINITION Calling Party Callis Being Forwarded Speed Dial Memory Buffer Status Prompt for Entering Account Code DISPLAY LOCATION FWD 256 342 Originator ACCOUNT CODE Originator NIGHT MODE SET Attendant NIGHT MODE CNCL Attendant Confirmation of Night Mode Confirmation of Night Mode Cancel LOCKOUT CODE LOCKOUT CANCEL Originator Prompt to Set Lockout Code Originator Confirmation of Lockout Cancel Wrong Lockout Code Entered N
243. area of the memory block is used to assign whether not the Electra Mark will provide dial toneto either side of a Tie line for each of the Trunk Groups which are associated with TLI E ETUs 300 219 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 4E3 TLI DIGIT ADD DELETE CODE ASSIGNMENT OPERATION Gooffline Depress F4 then F10 Depress F13 Dial the number of the Trunk Group 1 8 to be assigned Example Trunk Group 3 See Note 1 Dial the number of digits to be deleted Example 2 See Note 2 Dial the additional numbers to be added Example 3 See Note 3 Depress ENTER key See Note 4 programmed Depress the SPKR key to go back on line lt AND gt DISPLAY fe xrx 9 jP Rjo e R A M cope T 9 9 2 11 ofr PT3 x e 3 2 efr efs 2 Jajojor is oleic Repeat Steps 4 thru 7 for Trunk Groups associated with TLI E ETU to be 300 220 KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE CLEAR Clears previous assignment GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK B
244. at MOF Recable with 2 pair twisted cable Ofarad Multiline Terminat handset Pacitor across the receiver element in the 500 8 ND 20292 CHAPTERS SEPTEMBER 1987 Intermittent Ring Problems Test to see if problem occurs one line or several lines Several Lines Check memory block 1B to ensure line is programmed to ring on an existing station Test to see if problem occurs on all Multiline Terminals assigned ringing Ringing Assigned Replace at least one Multiline Terminal which has problems Retest for Problem Return Defective Terminal for Repair Program the station for off hook ring Day Night ring and deny the DND feature Test again Run the following tests corrected 1 Measure CO ring voltage with AC meter 100 vac 20Hz at the MDF Check to see if lines affected can be isolated to one Perform a second initialization Place an external ringer in front of the system on a worst case CO line Find out if the customer can hear the external ringer at times when the system does not detect ringing on this line One COI E ETU Replace ETU Check to see if lines affected can be isolated to one module Replace TSW E and test If problem is not solved replace CPU EB Same UE Replace MMC E ETU
245. available a locally provided frame ground to earth ground connection must be provided See paragraph 220 7 The AC power must be within the limits given in paragraph 220 12 Power Requirements in this section it is recommended that the best locally available AC surge protection be installed at the AC power outlet b When DC power is to be used to power the system a PSE DD 1 PSU must be installed in each CCU A locally provided 48VDC power source must be connected to the PSE DD 1 PSUs A local frame ground to earth ground connection must be provided as described in paragraph 220 7 The 48VDC power source must operate within the limits provided in paragraph 220 12 220 GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS The CCUs must be properly grounded If conduit ground is not available at the dedicated AC ND 20292 CHAPTER2 JULY 1987 outlet the following steps should be taken 1 Provide a suitable water pipe ground in accordance with the local operating telephone company procedures 2 If no water pipe ground is available a ground rod should be installed in accordance with the local operating telephone company procedures 3 Where a ground other than conduit ground is used a grounding terminal is provided on the ESE 32B 1 CCU as shown in Figure 220 3 Grounding Terminal Left Side View of ESE 32B 1 CCU Figure 220 3 CCU Grounding 4 Grounding Requirements for Modem Pooling The RS 232C is susceptible to noise and sta
246. based extensions Virtual Extensions can be assigned to line keys as desired The system total ND 20292 CHAPTER I JULY 1987 cannot contain more than 128 extensions whicn is comprised of the 48 Virtual Extensions and the 80 Station extensions VOICE MAIL INTERFACE is an option that provides the necessary interfacing of the Electra system to a locally provided Voice Mail system Voice Mail Message Waiting display is also supported This feature requires a VMI E to be installed in an interface slot as well as the support an RSG E unit and MFR EA ETU which may be Shared with single line telephones in the system 100 15 ND 20292 CHAPTER 1 JULY 1987 SECTION 150 LCD INDICATIONS DISPLAY LOCATION DEFINITION INITIALIZE All Stations System is Initializing LK12 COCALL Ring Assigned Station Incoming CO Call LK16 TR COCALL Receiving Station Receiving CO Transfer ELAPSED 01 35 CO Calling Catled Station CO Call Duration CONFERENCE 03 46 Conference Originating CO Conference Elapsed l ime Station LK16 201 Receiving Internal Call from 201 LK16 TR EXT CALL Receiving Internal Transfer LK15 RECALL Hold Recall LK16 RECALL 201 Originator Recall for Unanswered Transfer Camp On from 201 DENIED Access Denied SAVE amp REPEAT Save
247. block 4 1 System Allow allow user free dialing 2 System Deny disconnect station Step 3 Second digit dialed Digit 0 See OCC discussion b Digit 1 disconnect station c Any digit 2 to 9 go to step 4 Step 4 Third digit dialed a Any digit 2 9 disconnect station b Digit 0 or 1 go to step 5 Step 5 Fourth digit dialed Lowest possible table assigned to Station which contains the last three digits dialed as an area code item is found 1 Table is allow Matched item in table also contains an office code go to step 6 B Matched item in table has only area code Allow user free dialing 2 Table is deny Matched item in table also contains an office code go to step 6 B Matched item in table has only area code disconnect station 3 No Table is found A System Allow Allow user free dialing B System Deny disconnect station Step 6 Allow three more digits to be dialed amp If item in table matches area and office code dialed 1 Tableisallow allow user free dialing 2 Table is deny disconnect station b If item in table no longer matches for area code and office code dialed locate next lowest table which contains a three digit entry which matches the area code dialed or 6 digit entry which matches the area and office code dialed 1 Newtable found Tableisallow allow user free dialing b Table is deny disconnect station 2 No Table is found check Memory Block 3E 4
248. by the LCR E if extra digits are to be dialed Available entries are 00 15 Depress the number keys for the desired table assignment After entering the table number for extra code the display automatically drops to the next line PFX ADD CHK If NO was entered in the extra code add line it is necessary to use the cursor down key to get to the PFX ADD line Once at the PFX ADD CHK line depress the space bar to select NO for adding a prefix digit 1 before the number dialed by the caller second depression of the space bar selects ADD for PFX ADD CHK This option tells the LCR E that a digit 1 must be added before the number dialed by the caller This option might be used when the trunk to which the call is being routed is an FX foreign exchange line that requires a digit 1 be dialed as a first digit 1 dial area The displays to the right are provided for the options of NOor ADD on the PFX ADD CHK line In eases where the decision to add a prefix 1 is dependent on the CO central office exchange number dialed by the caller a third depression of the space bar selects the option CHK check This option tells the LCR E to check in an office code table to determine if the digit 1 should be added or not If this option is selected the display shown is provided 700 40 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS ROUTE TABLE MODIFY TABLENO 120 TRKACSSCODE 01 AREACODEDEL DEL
249. cables are standard RS 232C jack to jack male to male cables used to connect the computer and RAA E units to modems This cable uses pins 1 thru 8 20 and 22 910 5 PC 8295A 02 RS 232C CABLE REVERSED The PC 8295A 02 cable is an RS 232C jack to jack male to male cable which has several wiring reversals as compared to a standard RS 232C cable This cable is sometimes called a null modem cable The following leads which are used with the RAA E are reversed within the cable 2 and 3 4 and 5 and 6 and 20 Pins and 7 are not reversed This cable is used when the RAA E unit is connected directly to the computer without a modem This arrangement can be used to test the RAA E unit with the computer or to familiarize oneself with the operation of the computer in conjunction with the RAA E 910 6 MODEMS Two modems are required for programming via the Remote Administration Adaptor The first modem is connected to the RAA E unit located at the job site where the system being programmed is located The Second modem is connected to the computer located at the distant location from which the actual data entry is being made See Figure 910 1 The modems must be locally provided They must be asynchronous type modems capable of transmitting receiving data at 300 600 1200 or 2400 baud Both modems and the RAA must be set at the same baud rate The RAA E uses 8 bit ASCII Protocol with 2 start stop bits and no parity Refer to the
250. calls override by pass LCR b Depress L2 to assign whether or not local calls dialed without a 1 prefix ina 1 area will bypass LCR L2LEDON Local callsin 1 area bypass L2LEDOFF Local calls do not bypass LCR CPU EB or higher 5 Depress ENTER key 6 Depress SPKR key to go back on line jo r Jeli TXDXD le 51 151 T T 11111011 1111111 Lole 11111 11 111 11111 11 11 1 1 111 11111 300 94 ND 20293 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 T AEN 2 CLEAR _________________ ENTER Enter assignment GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED ams 120 285 289 ISPKR ON OFFLine 2 3 05 6 9 8 19 ess CPU levels See Step 4b NOTES 1 Afterstep3 L1 LED will display the previous assignment Cee 5551 moo 2 ex Hoe Elo 3 4 CJ Ed Cw E E EI EIE EEE ELE r i GENERALINFORMATION LCR LOCAL CALL OVERRIDE ASSIGNMENT 3 This area of the memory block used to assign
251. connected to a circuit its associated switch must be set to the LP position ground start trunk is connected the switch must be set to the GD position LED 1 Green lit indicates that the is receiving power LEDs 101 401 Red indicate the status of the four circuits Each LED ON indictes its associated circuit is in use Figure 240 9 COI E Switch Layout A maximum of ten COI E ETUs can be installed in a system into any interface slots B TLI E ETU The TLI E ETU provides circuitry for servicing up to two lines DID loop dial 2 wire E amp M Tie or 4 wire E amp M Tie lines It contains ten switches and three LEDs Switches designated SW101 and SW201 are used to select the type of E amp M Tie lines 2 or 4 wire NOTE When loop dial lines are connected these switches must be set to 2 wire position Switches designated SW102 and SW202 are used to select the type of lines DID or E amp M Switches designated SW103 and SW203 are used to select the type of E amp M signaling 1 5 fo amp Tie lines being used 200 24 Switches designated SW301 SW302 SW401 and SW402 are four position dip switches used to select loss level for loop dial DID 2 and 4 wire E amp M Tie lines Loss levels can be adjusted for 0 2 4 8 12 or 16 db See Figure 240 10 SW301 sets the transmission loss level for Channel 1 SW 302 sets the reception loss level for Channel 1 401 sets the tr
252. controlled only by the Attendant Positions with or without DSS BLF Consoles When an attendant sets the system into Night Mode it provides a change if so programmed from the Day Mode ringing assignment and enables the Night Call Pickup feature OFF HOOK VOICE ANNOUNCEMENT can be provided to any Multiline Terminal except ETE 6 1 with the installation of the DPA E unit The DPA E unit provides a Multiline Terminal with a secondary voice path which allows that station to receive a Voice Announcement while on a handset call with someone else This also requires the Multiline Terminal to be supported by an ESI EB as well as being programmed as a Dual Path terminal OFF HOOK RINGING allows a Multiline Terminal user to hear when an incoming call is signaling while the Multiline Terminal handset is in use The off hook ring is provided at a reduced level This can also be disabled if the user does not want this capability OFF PREMISES EXTENSION one of the features which expanded the Electra system beyond the ranges normally provided in a system of this size This feature allows the connection of a standard DTMF single line telephone located remotely from the main installation site to access the system s features with the same capabilities as an on premises single line telephone Locally provided DLL equipment is required for this feature 100 11 ND 20292 CHAPTER 1 JULY 1987 POWER FAILURE TRANSFER en
253. depends on the type of assignment made in the route tables for this office code table either prefix check or service area check 700 43 ND 20292 CHAPTER MARCH 1988 They are as follows SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS Prefix area check 0 Add the prefix 1 to the number dialed 1 Donotaddthe prefix 1 Service area check 0 Service is not available 1 Service is available NOTES 1 When all changes are made to the grid using the return key will cause the data to be entered into the computer s memory and the display will show the starting position of the next 50 office codes Depressing return again causes the next 50 codes to be displayed Prior to depressing the return key the second time the programmer may choose a new office code to jump to 2 When all changes are made to all office codes as desired the use of the ESC key causes the data to be saved to the floppy disk and returns the display to the Modify Menu h Home NPA Code Modify For purposes of allowing the LCR option to be applied properly to local calls it is necessary to input the local area code number into the Home NPA code table For use of LCR on local calls the LCR E will temporarily insert the Home code HOME NPA CODE MODIFY ahead of the number dialed to allow it to route HOME NPA CODE through the area code table and on to the different routes The following procedure describes modification of the Home NPA code table With t
254. indications on EDE 30 1 console shown in Table 220 12 Multiline 220 18 DIALING SPECIFICATIONS 1 Dial Pulse Address Signaling a Pulserate 10 pps 20 pps b Percent break 61 3 percent c Interdigital interval nominal 700 mS 2 DTMF Address Signaling a Frequencies Two sinusoidal signals one from a high group of three frequencies and one from a low group of four frequencies Table 220 13 Nominal High Group Frequencies Hz 1209 1336 1447 Nominal Low Group Frequencies Hz 10 10 ND 20292 CHAPTER2 JULY 1987 Table 220 10 LED Flash Patterns LED CONDITION FLASH PATTERNS Hag c Outside Incoming Cail Kd 0 ON While being voice Establishing conference User Programming Brokers call Answer Incoming call Camp On Override Recall ON DND set Note 2 ON Saved Note 2 DT or DR Request for modem DTE turned off or waiting for modem connection Request for modem DTE turned on established Request for modem all ems busy or distant end modem disconnected first from modem call OFF 0 sec 1 sec 2 NOTE 1 Green LED indications not provided for CNF and ANS keys on Multiline Terminals nor for outside line buttons on ETE 6 1 Multiline Terminals Therefore red LEDs will light in place of green LEDs on the ETE 6 1 Multiline Terminals NOTE
255. installation The troubleshooting flow charts and general test procedures will help the technician to identify the cause of a problem by defining the problem area and isolating the valid symptoms SECTION 520 OPERATIONAL CURRENT AND VOLTAGE CHECKS The effectiveness of this portion of the maintenance section depends upon the technician s ability to answer correctly all questions posed as accurately as possible Due to external factors it is important that no answer be assumed For example it cannot be assumed that a power supply is working properly Table 520 1 Module 1 Modules 2 and 3 5 volts 5 volts 24 volts AC Voltage 117 VAC Hot to Neutral Hot to Conduit Ground Neutral to Conduit Ground CO Line Off hook line current Module 1 2 4 3 PSE DD 1 48 volts input VOLTAGES TOLERANCE 5 volts 5 0 25 volts TP2 45V 5 volts 0 25 volts 5V 24 volts 24 2 0 volts 24V 5 0 25 volts 5 0 25 volts 24 t 2 0 volts 117 10 VAC 117 10 VAC 05 VAC MAX GtoN Ring Generator SLT 70 120 VRMS 20 Across TIP amp RING of any ringing SLT In series with TIP side of CO 25 to 50 mA line at MDF 48 8volts NOTE Measurement of ring voltage may be lower if the meter is designed for measuring 60 Hz signals only MEASURING POINTS CPU EB GND AC TERMINAL STRIP NtoL GtoL On the input Ter
256. is an audible RECALL TONE a 1024 Hz tone provided at a duty cycle of 60 IPM I HOLD INDICATION shows a Multiline Terminal user which lines on hold are being held by that Multiline Terminal A green LED indication is provided the ETE 6 1 is red at the rate of a burst wink all other stations with that appearance see a red LED at the rate of a wink or steadily lit INDICATION shows Multiline Terminal user which line the user is conversing on The indication provided is a green ETE 6 1 is red LED steadily lit All other stations with that appearance see a red LED steadily lit INCOMING CALL IDENTIFICATION allows all LCD equipped Multiline Terminals to quickly know who internally is calling This is provided on the TOP line of the LCD showing the callers name and extension number Calls from outside lines generate a display of the line key number and the of call i e incoming or transfer etc When a call comes in on the PE the LCD shows who s calling if the call comes in on an SE the user must depress the line key while on hook to see the name and number of the caller Figure 140 7 LCD Call Display Internal Call INTERNAL VOICE TONE SIGNALING flexibility enables a Multiline Terminal user to select the method he wishes to be signaled with by other station users The caller has the added flexibility to tone ring a station that has been set for voice calling by dialing an additional digit INTERN
257. lists all the programming keys and the corresponding PC keyboard entries To enter data for Function and Line Keys the CAPS key on the PC keyboard must be depressed and locked if the CAPS key is not locked on the characters representing letters will not be recognized or displayed on the screen If Function Line Key numbers that are within the valid range F1 F20 and L1 L16 are entered but are not in a recognized sequence the Electra program an ALARM 1 signal is displayed on the PC Screen accompanied by four tones For example F3 F8 and F18 entered ALARM 1 is displayed because F18 is not in the Sequence recognizable by the Electra MarkII program even though it is within the range of valid Function Key numbers ALARM 2 is displayed when data input is temporarily prohibited from being entered for one of the following reasons 900 11 ND 20292 CHAPTER9 MARCH 1988 1 Anattempt has been made to eliminate a line key appearance while the line key is ina ringing I use or I hold mode 2 busy out of a station is attempted while the station is in use 3 While a station is communicating data a data change is attempted to the station ALARM 3 is displayed when an illegal entry is attempted for System Speed Dial entry or clock calendar setting Example Trying to enter System Speed Dial buffer 100 or time of day as 25 hours An INPUT NUMBER ERROR display is received when an invalid Function Key nu
258. make sure that the power switch of the PC 8300 is off See Figure 930 1 9 When connecting the AC adaptor to the PC 8300 ALWAYS plug the adaptor into the wail outlet before connecting it to the unit 3 The adaptor should first be unplugged from the PC 8300 before disconnecting 4 Be certain that you use the PC 8271A 01 AC adaptor ONLY Serious damage to the PC 8300 personal computer may be caused by using any other adaptor 5 If you connect the AC adaptor to the 8300 when batteries are inserted in the battery case the 900 7 ND 20292 CHAPTER9 MARCH 1988 PC 8300 will operate from the AC adaptor not from the batteries e NiCad Nickel Cadmium Battery Cartridge The optional NiCad battery cartridge PC 8301A 90 or PC 8201A 90 can be used in place of the regular battery pack containing standard or alkaline AA batteries The main advantage of using the NiCad battery cartridge is that it may be recharged more than 500 times by using the AC adaptor PC 8271A 01 The insertion and removal of the NiCad battery cartridge in the PC 8300 is performed the same as for a regular battery pack as described in the section on AA battery installation however the cartridge may not be opened This battery cartridge is recharged continuously when the AC adaptor is connected to the PC 8300 even when the power switch is turned off The AC adaptor supplies electrical power to the PC 8300 via a wall outlet while the NiCad ba
259. memory block is used to assign the time out count for Trunk to Trunk Transfer Automatic Disconnect Refer to Section 350 for an explanation i BASExCOUNT VALUE 1 300 129 20293 1988 MEMORY BLOCK2E1 SYSTEM ACCESS CODE ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F2 then F10 3 Depress 11 See System Feature Access Code List of this section 4 Dialthe number of the item to be set Example Item 23 See Note 1 5 Dialnew access code or depress CLEAR key for VACANT Example Access code 55 See Note 2 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 3 exp x x jPjRjO e RjA M jMiojo e 51 5 JA c c e s s Litt tT tie ee ey 1111 Alciclels s TT 11 151 c Ti r e M 2 3 xx 1 1 1 5151 e i r e M a s Telalsiel Isis lA c c e s s c r e M 2 4 lelxitielriniale 7 Repeatsteps 5 and 6 for all subsequent items required depress TEL key to assign specific item 8 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 130 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 B W Decrement item number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY B
260. mount any Multiline Terminal 100 28 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION ND 20292 JULY 1987 CHAPTER 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE 210 GENERAL 200 1 240 CENTRAL CONTROL UNITS CCUs CONNECTION 220 SPECIFICATIONS 240 1 Wall Mounting the CCU 200 20 240 2 Floor Mounting the CCU 200 21 220 1 General Information 200 1 240 3 General Notes for ETU 220 2 Programming Station 200 1 Installation 200 22 220 3 Attendant Station 200 1 240 4 Common Control ETU s 200 22 220 4 Determination 240 5 Basic Interface ETUs 200 23 Equipment Required 200 2 240 6 Optional Interface ETU s 200 25 220 5 Installation Configuration 240 7 SMDR EETU 200 27 Example 200 5 240 8 LCR EETU 200 31 220 6 Power Requirements 200 5 220 7 Grounding Requirements 200 5 250 POWER SUPPLY INSTALLATION 220 8 Electrical Noise Generators 200 7 220 9 Additional Equipment 200 7 250 1 PSE AD 1 PSU 200 32 220 10 System Capacity 200 7 250 PSE DD 1PSU 200 33 220 11 Cabling Requirements 200 8 250 3 RSG E Unit 200 34 220 12 Power Requirements 200 8 22114 2009 260 ANCILLARY DEVICE ee CONNECTION 220 15 Outside Line Type 200 9 200 10 260 1 General Information 200 34 Indications 200 10 260 2 Handsfree Unit HFU E 200 35 220 18 Dialing Specifications 200 10 260 3 Dual Path Adapter Unit DPA E 200 35 220 19 Battery Backup 200 14 260 4 Ancillary Device Adapter 220 20 External Equipment Unit ADA E 200 36 Interfac
261. next step b All three digits not dialed within 10 seconds Disconnect station Step 3 Sixth digit dialed a Digit 0 disconnect station b Digit 1 allow more digits go to step 6 Any digit 2to9 allow one more digit next step Step 4 Seventh digit dialed Digit 1 or 0 allow one more digit go to step 6 b Any digit 2 to 9 allow one more digit next step Step 5 Check last 6 digits dialed amp Lowest possible table assigned to the station which contains the third fourth and fifth 300 259 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 digits as an OCC code and the sixth seventh and eighth digits as an office code is found 1 Table is allow allow user free dialing 2 Table is deny disconnect station b Table is not found Check Memory Block 3E 4 1 System allow allow user free dialing 2 System disconnect station Step 6 Check third fourth and fifth digits and the last three digits dialed 2 Lowest possible table assigned to station which contains third fourth and fifth digit as an OCC code item and the last three digits dialed as an area code entry is found 1 Table is allow Matched area code item in table also contains an office code go to step 7 B Matched area code item in table does not include an office code allow user free dialing 2 Table is deny Matched area code item in table also contains an office code go to step 7 Matched area code item in tab
262. of CCU 730 8 MOUNTING THE RS 232C CONNECTOR Mount the RS 232C connector in one of the openings made accessible after removing the access panel with screws and nuts locally provided See Figure 730 6 730 9 VERIFYING SW2 SETTING If the LCR E ETU was installed with power applied to the CCU verify that SW2 switch is set to the ON position if required turn ON 700 5 ND 20292 CHAPTER7 MARCH 1988 Figure 730 6 Mounting the RS 232C Connector SECTION 740 INSTALLATION OF PC 8300 740 1 GENERAL The PC 8300 is powered by four AA size 1 5 volt batteries An optional NiCad nickel cadmium Battery Pack PC 8201 90 is also available for use in place of the regular battery pack In addition there is also a backup system which consists of internal NiCad batteries which automatically switches on for emergency use These batteries charge continuously whenever the computer is in normal operation While the PC 8300 is in a storage condition the backup batteries can maintain the contents of the RAM for up to 30 days depending upon the amount of RAM installed Keep in mind that these batteries cannot actively operate the PC 8300 for very long If the main batteries have a low charge causing the backup battery system to be used the LOW BATTERY LED indicator on the PC 8300 will light up The batteries should be changed when this indicator lights up since the PC 8300 can only be operated for approximately 20 minutes from this
263. options as required 2 CR Carriage Return or Return The return key is used as an enter key during programming Normally this key will be depressed any time data is entered on the keyboard and after it is displayed on the screen Shown below are some examples of the use of the CR key To select a function from the main LCR menu 1 DOWN LOAD ORI Bu depress a number key and then depress CR 2 UPLOAD 7 SYSTEM CLEAR RETURN 3 VERIFY 8 1 DISPLAY 0 SYSTEM CONTROL ENTER MENU NO While in the DOWN LOAD UP LOAD VERIFY or SYSTEM DATA CLEAR functions a ARFA Lene SIAN RETURN arrow shown at right is provided At NORMAL END this time depressing CR RETURN is required to return to the preceeding menu display 700 17 ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 problem occurs during DOWN LOAD UP LOAD or VERIFY an error is displayed as shown atright Use of CR clears the display and returns ittothe preceeding menu Whenever MODIFY DISPLAY or PRINT OUT is used the carriage return is depressed after making the entries for selection of desired data During MODIFY mode CR RETURN is used to enter the selected data entries for a particular programming segment During DISPLAY or PRINT OUT mode CR RETURN is used to request display of additional data in consecutive numerical order 3 ESC Escape Key The ESC key is used to return to previous menu display any time a menu is displ
264. paads A ILON 5908 qqa ANQ 59249 1015 aq 0 Aq 859228 e SNOLLVOIGNI A Id WVS 59 007 Sse deq e 59499 e pasea aq 61 00 19quinu perp 911 e kay INO 559443 e 91 8 15 22 5908 147 5592494 e qdoHsseideq e fex SSC ssaidaq e 31 ano 4 255949 Kex 664 815 8910 91 9 1815 11151561 191 usq 308 1 0 5 1271 EET ANO ayo SISO eq SNOILVOIGNI GOT WIdWVS SNOILVOIGNI Q3 i 5 eset AX TAL vUaALdVHO 26205 SNOLLVOIGNI GOT TIdWYS 1861 56505 79 007 85894490 e 128919 01 2 spuooas 01 91eurtxoadde 01 5 1 A e2rjeurojn 1971 941 401 943 560 9 3 Jo 81493402 42 4 partaa aq SSq 8524439 OL q JNO sseudeq e 852228 et e SSC pesisap ssaidaq e sioyny GAT ano 01 8
265. point Storing the PC 8300 for a long time with a low charge will cause it to become inoperable NOTES 1 If the PC 8300 is operated with the Low Battery Indicator lit up for more than 20 minutes the unit will become inoperable and all the data stored in RAM will be lost ND 20292 CHAPTER7 MARCH 1988 2 Batteries should be replaced as soon as possible after the LOW BATTERY LED lights up The power switch should always be turned OFF during change of batteries 740 2 AC POWER ADAPTER The AC power adapter PC 8271A 01 converts 120 volts AC to 8 5 volts DC which is used to operate the PC 8300 This may be used when an outlet is available in order to prolong the life of the batteries NOTES 1 When connecting the AC power adapter to the PC 8300 ALWAYS plug the adapter into the wall outlet before connecting it to the unit For disconnection the adapter should be unplugged from the PC 8300 first 2 Be certain that only the PC 8271A 01 is used Damage to the PC 8300 personal computer may be caused by the use of any other adapter 3 Before connecting the AC power adapter to the PC 8300 make sure to turn the computer and all the peripherals OFF 740 3 BATTERY BACKUP 1 Make sure the power switch located on the right side of the PC 8300 is set to the OFF position See Figure 740 1 9 OFF POWER ON 1 Figure 740 1 PC 8300 Power Switch 2 Remove the cover of the battery compartment See Figure 740 2 Figure 740 2
266. programmer up to four different route table assignments which can be used by the LCR E to find the trunk to be used The priority of selection is from top to bottom first to fourth route table number assignment The following steps show how to modify the route advance tables ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 With the Modify Menu in the display depress 4 then CR RETURN The display at right will be provided Now enter the number of the route advance table to be modified then CR RETURN The example shows table 20 Now entered is the route table to be used by the LCR E as the first second third or fourth route Available assignments for route tables are 000 255 The reason for providing up to four routes is in case the first route is busy or cannot be used for a given reason the LCR E can continue to choose a different route of slightly higher cost but does not restrict the user until an available route is found If all routes are unavailable the user is restricted Once all desired routes are assigned a route advance table depressing the CR RETURN enters the data into the computer and increments the route advance table number by one Depressing the return key will now allow programming of the next table Prior to depressing the return key a second time the programmer can enter a new table number to be modified NOTES 1 The use of the cursor keys allows the programmer to make corrections to the data if any mistakes a
267. prou uo 3095924 2 4 03 y 659226 euo erp puooas aA19281 01 4881 uo 87 3195924 8 14 q 1861 ATOL 26202 007 013 15 82 uo pedureo 99 01 YT e 1182 quasaad 01 dn e 9uo uo dures 55948044 111182 MOMSUY OL 2 eum 1 uo St uo dure2 it uo dures 30138013110 0013816 IUL ALON 9101594 e 11011615 0 uauA 910 291 uod OL 9170 23018 8 eAtsn oxa Y 0 uat ploy uo 9uo ayy IJd HNEJ A ssaooe erp YSL uo Aq 1162 03 IH 1991 auo 03 185 auo 01 jr Bula 3419221 Zue Pieu uo Jua
268. take affect until all trunks in the Trunk Group are idle or when second initialization is performed 3 Depressing the ENTER key will cause the display to increment the trunk number 4 If trunks are connected in ascending numerical order to prevent collisions it is recommended that high numbered loop start trunks be assigned to unused low numbered Trunk Groups and low numbered loop start trunks be assigned to high numbered Trunk Groups Example system with 40 loop start trunks should be programmed as follows Trunk Group 1 Trunks36 40 Trunk Group8 Trunks1 5 r i GENERAL INFORMATION TRUNK TO TRUNK GROUP ASSIGNMENT i i i This area of the memory block used program individual trunks into Trunk Groups This is necessary because system features such as trunk dial access and code restriction are based on Trunk Groups and not individual trunks i 4 i i 300 105 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2C2 TRUNK GROUP TO TENANT ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND gt DISPLAY 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F2 then F8 3 DepressF12 4 Dialtenant number 1 3 Example Tenant 1 See Note 1 tor INTEL iP 181016 mojoj 5 9 T TT T T Jel r e NTATN T 1 11 r R u N x
269. the TSW E ETUs One slot can be used to install an optional common card such as an SMDR E or an LCR E ETU When slot 8 in the interface card section is not occupied it can be used to install another optional common card The 5 32 1 CCU provides service for up to 32 ports Maximum 1 per system 2 ESE 32E 1 CCU This CCU is the expansion Central Control Unit This steel cabinet is designed to be stacked on top of the ESE 32B 1 CCU or on top of another ESE 32E 1 CCU it is not a stand alone unit and must be used in conjunction with the ESE 32B 1 CCU The ESE 32E 1 CCUs require a PSE AD 1 or PSE DD 1 power supply to provide service to all equipment supported by this CCU It also requires an to control this equipment The ESE 32E 1 CCU provides 8 slots in the interface card section each section can support 4 ports The ETUs that can be installed in these 8 slots are COLE TLI E MFR EA ESI EA ESI EB SLI EA SLI EB CNF E ECR E and VMLE ETUs N1 20292 CHAPTER 1 JULY 1987 In addition there are 3 slots in the common control optional common card section 1 of these 3 slots is occupied by the MMC E 2 slots can be used to install optional cards such as LCR E and SMDR E maximum of two ESE 32E 1 CCUs can be mounted The first expansion CCU expands the total system capacity up to 64 ports Two expansion CCUs provide service for up to 96 ports 3 PSE AD 1 PSU The PSE AD 1 PSU is
270. the extra code it contains will be added in front of the number to be dialed OFFICAL CODE TABLES OFC CODE TBL One Hundred Twenty Eight 128 Office Code Tables 000 127 are provided Each Office Code Table contains all the possible office codes and a flag bit for each office code which can be set either as 0 1 The meaning of the setting of each flag bit depends on whether the Office Code Table is referenced by the Prefix Add Check or Service Area Check parameters of a given Route Table 1 For Prefix Add Check 0 The prefix 1 is to be added to the number to be dialed when this office code is dialed Route Advance Options TRUNK ACCESS CODE GROUP TRK ACCS CODE AREA CODE DELETE AREA CODE DEL EXTRA CODE ADD ETR CODE ADD number to be dialed PREFIX ADD CHECK PFX ADD CHK SERVICE AREA CHECK SRV AREA CHK 700 13 19 Program Designation OPTIONS 1 8 The Trunk Group which corresponds to the Trunk Access Code Group related will be used to complete the call DEL Delete the area code from the number to be dialed NO includes the area code in the number to be dialed ADD adds the extra code from the specified Extra Code table in front of the No extra code is added the 1 in front of the number to be dialed Do not add the Prefix 1 CHK Whether or not the Prefix 1 is added depends on the office code d
271. the modem matches that of the RAA E and that the modem is set for auto answer 2 If a dedicated Central Office CO line is being used connect the CO line to the modem as described in the instruction manual provided by the modem manufacturer If a single line port position is used connect the modem to the single line port as if it were an SLT following the instructions provided by the modem manufacturer If a line is not already available it may be necessary to run a cable and connect a modular jack to a single line port of the system s MDF 920 6 GROUNDING the and MODEM The RAA E unit and the modem connected to it must be grounded to the same earth ground point In order to effectively ground the RAA E unit a spade lug connected to an 18 grounded wire should be fastened underneath the screw on the back RS 232C side of the RAA E unit See Figure 920 1 920 7 MODEM to MODEM CONNECTION Depending upon the type of modems and computers used the procedures used to make the end to end modem connections will vary Refer to the modem s and computer s instruction manual to determine the proper procedure for end to end connection Things to take into account are manual or autodial capabilities and manual or auto answer capabilities It should also be noted that the ADMI DO File is a stand alone Host program and does not contain a Communications Application program therefore Request To Send RTS and Data Terminal Read
272. the programming Cw station Cs B E E ELT B E i GENERAL INFORMATION RINGING ASSIGNMENT i This area of memory is used to assign both day and night mode ringing features for the line appearance of each Multiline Terminal other than the primary extension The programming allows the flexibility of a i line per station immediate or delayed ringing option for day and night conditions ND 20292 CHAPTERS SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK DSS BLF TO ATTENDANT ASSIGNMENT OPERATION lt 1 Gooffline See Note 1 2 Depress F1 then 3 Depress F11 4 Enter device number of DSS BLF to be assigned 1 6 Example 1 See Notes 2 amp 4 5 Enter the attendant number 1 4 to be associated with the DSS BLF Example 3 6 Depress ENTER key DISPLAY olr ft fi te T 19015151 ele 10151 5 lA s s N isis TTT TT jo s s Iro A s s N 21515111 10 515 1101 1015151 Jairivis T 1 0 5 1101 A T T 01515121 7 Repeat steps 5 6 additional DSS BLF console assignments See Note 4 8 Whenall D
273. these buttons and lift the top half of the unit while pulling these slide lock buttons Raise the front side of the unit approximately 5cm and the lid will automatically open and the front side of the unit will slowly come down The lid will support the disk unit in the open position Figure 740 6 Opening the PC 8231A Lid 3 Locate the PC 8300 and the floppy disk unit PC 8231A near each other See Figure 740 7 Figure 740 7 Locating Floppy Disk Unit PC 8231A 4 Connect one side of the 8 pin floppy disk cable to the FDD interface on the rear panel of the PC 8300 See Figure 740 8 5 Connect the end with the ferrite toroid to the floppy disk unit PC 8231A See Figure 740 7 740 5 PRINTER CONNECTION 1 Locate the PC 8300 and the printer near each other See Figure 740 8 700 7 ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 Figure 740 8 Locating Printer 2 Connect the 26 pin connector female of the printer cable PC 8494A or PC 8294 to the PRINTER interface on the rear panel of the PC 8300 3 Connect the 36 pin connector male of the printer cable to the parallel input connector of the printer 740 6 PC 8300 CONNECTION TO LCR E 1 Connect one end of the RS 232C cable PC 8495A 01 to the RS 232C interface on the rear panel of the PC 8300 2 Connect the other end of the RS 232C cable to the RS 232C connector of the LCR E ETU which was previously mounted on the right side of the CCU in paragraph 730 8 SECT
274. to a separate ground to minimize noise interference 220 9 ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT In addition to electronic station equipment the CCUs and their components other equipment is required This includes cables modular connecting jacks quick connect blocks or similar equipment etc This additional equipment must be locally supplied 220 10 SYSTEM CAPACITY 1 Electra MarkII capacities are as follows a System ports 96 ports max b Outside lines 40 lines max c Intercom paths Non blocking 4 Station sets 80 sets max t 41 2 4 0 INIENFACE CAROS CARDS PSI 12 44 Installed in basic CCU me 1 Installed in first expansion CCU Installed in second expansion CCU installed in any CCU interface cards are as follows ESI SLI COL MFR ECR VMI TLI NOTE 1 NOTE 2 Figure 220 2 System Block Diagram 200 7 ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 e DSS BLF consoles 6 units of the total of six a max of 4 units can be CO Add On Modules f System speed dial 80 buffers 16 digits each g Station speed dial 20 buffers each station 16 digits each 110 buffers for the ETE 16K 1 h Conference circuits 4 max i Modem Pool 4 modems max NOTE These figures represent the maximum number of individual type devices installed Since the system capacity is defined by 96 ports some devices may not be installed up to their
275. type F9 depress RETURN to enter the information etc Another means of entering consecutive Function Button numbers or Line Button numbers in program mode is available Instead of entering F1 RETURN then F9 RETURN thei F17 RETURN Class of Service Assignment you can enter up to 16 characters by using only the first F or L in the string of numbers and inserting a comma after each item to send the information to the RAA E therefore the same information could be entered as F1 9 17 RETURN Once a RETURN is used you must enter another L to begin another string Another example of entering line button assignments while in the Line Key Assignment Memory Block F1 F6 is as follows the line button assignments can be checked by typing L1 RETURN then L2 RETURN then L3 RETURN etc A fast method would be L1 2 3 etc while viewing each assignment every time the comma is used When assigning a name in Memory Block 3C an must be entered as a lead character in front of the name being assigned The tells the PC 8300 that what follows is an alphabetic string instead of a command Once the new name is typed depress RETURN to enter the name in the display followed by a CTRL E which enters the name in memory If more characters are entered ALARM 115 displayed and the extra character is not accepted 900 18
276. u1n394 YJLNA ue y LY ed pue paeoq ax Od asn e qrjeduioo 104 e 86 007 Ho 5208 1 4 00 peseo oJ 51 aur e 5908 84815 yga jo 5808 51 440 5208 64815 YLA Od 10 apo eurur9 e sseudeq e 1 31 81 191 13918 ua Kpeajs st X8d OO 891801d 2 3208 pesve au st Xdd OO 4410 5908 848185 ysa 03908 8908 24815 go Od un 10 apo eururie jo 100 e SNOILVORINI GoT 4IdWVS SNOILVOIGNI 1861 ATAC 1 2650 66 00 844311 440 903 84915 YSA 16 St 181 users 81 CHT XHd OO 385928054 YIM eurura BUTT NAL Aq paataoas 1182 72 4 Lax LA 5 03 jou 1919 Buruse Ke dsrp ur 812991 a10 Jasn ay Aq pausisse a18
277. used to busy out or restore individual interface slots inthe system 300 215 ND 10392 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 4E1 TLI LINE TYPE ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND DISPLAY TUE 10 8881 Te Exp sle einjojuje 2 Depress F4 then F10 3 Depress 11 4 Dialthe number of the Trunk Group 1 8 to be r RIKT 1612 assigned Example Trunk Group 2 See Note 1 2 01 Ir fy fefe ririk 612 111111 5 Dial the number 1 4 of the line type to be assigned Example 3 See Note 2 E 1 7 6 Depress the ENTER key See Note 3 7 Repeat Steps 4thru 6 for all Trunk Groups associated with a TLI E ETU to be programmed 8 Depress key to go back on line 300 216 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 0 EL Enters new Trunk Group number Increments Trunk Group number LEAR NTER Enters each assignment B W Decrements Trunk Group number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING OGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED 21 4 2 4 3 4 4 per 6 065 Cee o7 8 18
278. viewing The normal sequence of operation within the display mode is to select a number from the display After entering the selection number depress the return key This causes the computer to load the data from the floppy disk into the computer memory Once this is done a display is provided which requests the table number to be viewed Within the area code tables an area code must also be entered The office code tables also require an additional entry After this information is entered into the computer the display mode function displays the contents of the requested table Once the table has been viewed the programmer depresses return and the table number in the display is incremented by one and the contents of the new table may be viewed Use of the cursor up key allows moving to the table number position and selecting a different table for viewing If this is done depressing the return displays the new table After all desired tables have been viewed depress the ESC key to return to the Display Menu A new table type can be selected and further viewing is possible 700 45 de ND 20292 CHAPTER7 MARCH 198 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS DISPLAY AREA CODE TABLE 6 EXTRA CODE TABLE SCHEDULER 7 OFFICE CODE TABLE 8 HOME NPA CODE ROUTE TABLES NO O ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 Use of the ESC key while in the Display Menu CR SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS RETURN the dis
279. when station 123 hangs 00 04 30 upon the call OUTGOING CALLS USING SYSTEM SPEED DIAL 07 04 86 09 00AM 08 05 OG 120 00 15 32 525 System Speed Dial S followed by system speed dial buffer number Total of 3 digits Figure 240 17 SMDR Sample Printouts of Call Records 200 30 240 8 LCR E The LCR E ETU contains three switches an LED and a RS 232C connector ended cable 1 Switch 2 designated SW2 RESET is a slide switch used to reset the LCR E ETU with interruption of all ongoing operation This switch is also used to remove power from the ETU when the ETU is removed or inserted without powering down the CCU Switch 1 designated SW1 is used to connect backup battery to the LCR E MEMORY This switch should be set to the ON position to allow memory retention during power failure or brownouts Switch is a 7 position dip switch which is used to select baud rates in the range of 150 9600 LED 1 green lit indicates that the LCR E ETU is receiving power DIP 1 96x100 48 24 cun 12 co 6 com 3 coum 1 5 ON OFF Figure 240 18 LCR E DIP 1 Switch ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 2 Connection of LCR a The LCR E ETU must be installed into either OPT1 or OPT2 or any combination slot of any CCU Prior to installation ensure that switch SW1 is set to the ON position and that the baud rate switch is set to the proper position When installing the LCR
280. while ports two and four can have either feature if the adjacent port does not have both 30 DTA E Unit The Data Adaptor provides a Multiline Terminal with the capability of asynchronous data switching A Multiline Terminal equipped with a DTA E unit can switch data between it and an outside party using a modemi with an internal station equipped with a unit Speeds of up to 9 6kbps can be accommodated internally on the RS 232C type interface maximum of one DTA E unit can be installed per Multiline Terminal with LCD system maximum is 80 units NOTE The Data Switching feature has a direct impact on the Dual Path features system maximum and vice versa When a station requires both Dual Path and Data Switching it needs the use of three paths each ESI EB contains 8 paths utilized by the four ports therefore removing the second path from the adjacent port Only ports one and three of the ESI EB ETU can have both features while poris two and four can have either feature if the adjacent port does not have both A CPU EB ETU and an ESI EB ETU are required to support this feature 31 ADA E UNIT The ADA E unit is the Ancillary Device Adaptor Unit that allows the Multiline Terminal to connect such locally provided devices as speakerphone jackset handset amplifier etc and is mounted into the Multiline Terminal 2832 WMU E The WMU E is a universal wal mount unit which be used to wall
281. 0 1 Two Line Liquid Crystal Display The ETE 6 1 does not have a display the ETE 16K 1 Multiline Terminal is equipped with a 7 line LCD each line capable of showing 16 digits The top two lines of the LCD are equivalent to that of the ETE 6D 1 and ETE 16D 1 Multiline Terminals The bottom five lines provide a directory function with eleven pages individually customized by the Multiline Terminal user each page can contain up to ten commonly called numbers Speed Dial Each Electra MarkII system can accommodate a maximum of thirty 30 ETE 16K 1 Multiline Terminals ANCILLARY DEVICE CONNECTION The Electra MarkII Multiline Terminals have the ability to support the additional operation of either a headset jack automatic dialer handset amplifier or external speakerphones This is made possible with the addition of an ADA E unit to the Multiline Terminal Figure 140 2 ETE 6 1 Multiline Terminal ND 20292 JULY 1987 CHAPTER 1 ANSWER HOLD provides the ability to place an on going call on hold by depressing the Answer Key to respond to an incoming call ANSWER KEY is provided on all Multiline Terminals The LED associated with the Answer Key flashes when an internal call is directed to that Multiline Terminal s extension and when any line key is ringing at that station Additionally the Answer Key s LED will flash when that station receives a Camp On or Tone Override signal depressing the Answer Key the Multiline
282. 0 14 DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Table 220 9 SHIPPING WEIGHT HEIGHT WIDTH DEPTH kg mm m mm 43 Ibs 143 4 259 16 125 8 19 6 375 mi 640 320 26 Ibs 11 13 16 259 16 12 5 8 11 8 300 640 320 4 lbs 83 32 315 16 91 16 u 7 206 230 4 lbs 83 32 9 1 16 206 00 230 5 tbs 8 3 32 9 1 16 2 4 206 230 2 51 lbs 2 5 32 TUB 55 200 35 16 84 35 6 884 35 6 84 35 16 84 35 16 84 gt Te 8 ar 220 15 OUTSIDE LINE TYPE Two wire loop start lines Two wire ground start trunks Two wire loop dial DID puise lines Two wire E amp M Tie lines type 1 or 5 Dial Pulse Four wire E amp M Tie lines type 1 or 5 Dial Pulse eRe oe Table 220 8 Fuse Replacement UNIT PSE AD 1 SPECIFICATION DESCRIPTION DIMENSIONS AC INPUT DC INPUT 48 125V 8 0A 250 0 5 DC INPUT 24V 13 64 x 45 64 Qmm mm NOTE All fuses used are normal blown glass tube or ceramic type Do not use slow blow fuses 200 9 ND 20292 CHAPTER2 JULY 1987 220 16 NETWORK AND CONTROL 1 Control a Control Stored program with distributed processing Central Processor 16 bit microprocessor c Clock 8 MHz Module Processor TSW E amp MMC E 4 bit one chip microprocessor e Interface ESI E
283. 0 Q5 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 192021 22 23 Rk RR kh NOTES 1 Use of the ESC key returns to the Display Menu 2 If desired successive depressions of the CR RETURN key allows viewing of consecutive tables 100 46 3 Use of the cursor up key allows moving the cursor back to the table number position and changing it to a new number Then depress CR RETURN to view the new table d Route Advance Table Display While in the Display Menu depress 4 then the CR RETURN key The display shown is provided Enter the desired table number 00 63 then depress the CR RETURN key NOTES 1 Use of the ESC key returns to the Display Menu 2 f desired successive depressions of the CR RETURN key allows viewing of consecutive tables 3 Use of the cursor up key allows moving the cursor back to the table number position and changing it to a new number Depress CR RETURN to view the new table e Route Table Display While in the Display Menu depress 5 then the CR RETURN key The following display is provided Enter the desired table number 000 255 then depress the CR RETURN key NOTES 1 Use of the ESC key returns to Display Menu 2 If desired successive depressions of the CR RETURN key allows viewing of consecutive tables 3 Use of the cursor up key allows moving the cursor back to the table number position and changing it to a new number De
284. 00 See Notes 1 and 2 4 Depress ENTER key See Notes 3 and 4 5 Depress SPKR key to go back on line _ iN E Ox jejRjo e R A w 1111 jA p p RTe s s jA p o R E s s _ ixixi 300 252 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY MMED 1 MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO 8E PROGRAMMED 5 5 52 2 3 NOTES 1 Line key and Address Correspondence zc dm 21451825 rum 2 Thedisplayed Address is shifted to the left coe 000010 3 During step 4 when the ENTER is depressed 4 d the data corresponding to the address is displayed 4 Each time the CLEAR key is depressed the 1 displayed data size is changed 1 byte 4 bytes 6 bytes gt 8 bytes 1 byte _ 5 5 4 2 212212 14121212122 gt LIxixE T vivE E GENERAL INFORMATION DATA DUMP This area of the memory block is used to
285. 04 VE requires CPU EB or higher level ETU Hunting pilot number requires CPU EB3 or higher level Go to step 10 01515111 r e A T u R E Dial feature number required 01515111 r efA r u R ET Kk E Y Example Number 2 See Notes 3 and 4 15 0 161 plajele 12 0 2 2 21515111 015151 kJel 8 1 11 51 General Information Depress ENTER key Repeat steps 5 to 10 for all DSS buttons as required Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 18 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 ine GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO PROGRAMMED 1 200 c3 CPU levels See Step 6 115 NOTES 1 Once the device number is entered the LJ program automatically moves to row 1 column 1 of the selected DSS BLF which is shown by the LED of L1 15 the programming station 221 1120 2 Depressing L16 line key 16 toggles the Cw n programming between feature assignment and station assignment When in feature assignment mode assignments are made from right to left starting with row 6 button 5 3 FEATURE FEATURE 2 Paging 4 n 3 Message Wait 4 Transf
286. 1 SW1 is the reset switch When activated this momentary switch causes all service in progress to be interrupted This switch should not be used in anoperating system unless absolutely necessary The CPU EB or CPU E must be installed in the CPU slot of the ESE 32B 1 CCU B TSW E ETU The TSW E ETU contains three switches two LEDs one connector and two RCA phono plugs 200 22 Switch 1 SW1 is the reset switch Depression of this momentary switch causes all service in progress associated with the ESE 32B 1 CCU to be interrupted This switch should not be used in an operating system unless absolutely necessary The LEDs indicate module memory working status Under normal operating conditions they are fluttering to indicate memories being activated When SW l is depressed the LEDs momentarily turn OFF Anytime the CCU is disabled the LEDs are OFF Connector CN2 is used for data transmission between the TSW E ETU and the MMC E ETU in the first ESE 32E 1 CCU the cable provided on the MMC E ETU is plugged into this connector Switch IN OUT SW2 is used to choose the MOH source from either internal or external When the music chip is used for MOH source set this switch in the IN position If external MOH source is connected set this switch to the OUT position For external source connection instructions are provided in section 270 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION Switch labele
287. 1 21 Example Module 1 1 sl 2 5 Dialthe slot number to be assigned Example Slot 7 1 7 elni 6 Dialthechannel number to be assigned i Ti rli Example Channel 1 See Note 1 0 19111 Isit 7 Iclal 7 Depress L1 to 1 12 to set the desired timing parameters of the selected VMI port See Note 2 00111 15 7 2 8 Depress ENTER key See Note 3 9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 for all VMI ports to be assigned 10 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 208 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 ON Q N ne D D EL Selects new mod slot channel location Increments channel number ENTER Enters each assignment B W Decrements channel number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMED MUST PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED 253 EJ p 4 5 Gel 9 Gel 02 cs os e Co m Gel A Ce 281 O l fl Fal ca Ls 8 CPU levels NOTES 1 During step 6 L1 L12 shows the previous assignments 2135 4418 1 i tope zen 0 3 G L Es F E E E E Multiplier M HFS Hookfl
288. 11 U29143 axa Sutsn 55918024 uy e2uo19juoo 4 2 4 8808 147 sny quil 181 0159 Aay AND e 01 8 0 e s4431 qq 8 axa aut 59458 Kay IND e SNv SNOLLVOIGNI X IdWVs 1861 ATAC 56 02 62 00 st qr 389 AND 559480414 9519197103 Apeays 54131 8 xa4 05 PIOH 92u048juo 330 5908 137 2 Alied p v 45198359 JNO 559499 e eee T 78348 1371 18 axa Jayjouy 03 4484 10 1182 sayj0ue 8013110 pue 19 018 ssaidag e sw sny ANO ssaidaq e shay eur Bursn Apeays 5081 2218 00 omy 55928044 ur 824919102 shay eur Bursp I a 18181 6 Ho 5908 5 83
289. 1111111 2111111111111111 1 1111 1 1 11111 2111111111111111 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 _________________ CLEAR ______________ GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED ams 2B6 285 All CPU levels NOTES Q8 051 251 71 2 12 6s 1 After step 3 line key L1 LED will display the Ce see current assignment 2 m D NN C e OA ol 45 Ce 3 3 Ed 4 TE um GENERAL INFORMATION LCR 1 DIALING ASSIGNMENT This area of the memory block is used to provide the LCR E with the information whether the i i system in a 1 dialing area i ND 20293 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCE 2B6 LCR LOCAL CALL OVERRIDE ASSIGNMENT lt AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F2 then F7 3 Depress F16 See Note 1 4 a Depress L1 to assign whether or not local calls will override LCR L1LEDON L1 LED OFF Local calls route through LCR Local
290. 2 DND and Save amp Repeat functions may be assigned on line buttons Applies to CO Add On module as well as Multiline Terminal 200 11 ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 Table 220 11 Tone Patterns TONE FREQUENCY Hz FLASH PATTERNS Dia Voice Page Alert Tone Attendant Tone Override Call Forward Alert Tone gt 0 25 sac ON x 2 3 bursts 0 25 sec ON x 2 3 bursts 50 1 see 2 secs OFF 0 Boss Becretary 480 606 mE 350 440 Call Forward Confirmation Tone ND 20292 CHAPTER2 JULY 1987 Table 220 12 DSS BLF Visual Indications LED STATUS FLASH PATTERNS Station Primary Ext 1 Idleor Station Busy Idle or Busy Other Use Primary Ext ecall DSS KEY Off Line and Lockout Red Flashing Internal and M External In Use Red Paging ra Message Mode Red Night Mode Red Night Transfer NOTE Steadily Lit Red LED Attendant cannot override Flashing Red LED Attendant cannot override Winking Red LED Attendant can override Steadily lit Green LED Attendant can override LED OFF Attendant can call NOTE2 LED indications on DSS keys are the same regardless of dual path but what attendant can do may be different NOTE3 Multili
291. 292 CHAPTER MARCH 1988 WEEKLY SCHEDULE TABLES 3 3 NUMBER NUMBER NUMBER 700 63 9 00 9 00 9149 jo 1uouruSissy a HH LI I IL LII IL ILI puesvSuegzquny F 4 1 1190 ro 20 zo 00 gt 53 318V1 1 25 ATIVA 8861 LUadLdVHO ND 20292 CHAPTER MARCH 1988 DAILY SCHEDULE TABLES H 9 gt gt gt 7 700 65 89146 paudissy 952 000 Anoy 20 8 Bulag saquing 9 00 91484 a ueApy d 2534 511891 32NVAQV 1 04 8861 L S31dVHO 26200 BUSINESS SYSTEMS DIVISION ENGINEERING Electra BERT ETINUMBER 003 DATE JULY 7 1987 GENESIS GENIE VOICE MAIL SYSTEM CONNECTION PROCEDURE 1 DESCRIPTION This Engineering Technical Information Bulletin describes the procedure for connecting the Genesis GenieVoice Mail System to the Electra system via the VMI E
292. 2uanbos paads St 1414 paeds Zurpasaid paojs Jaquinu 312ip 3581 ssejun paads 1548 8 659328 10144 1snui 5862208 etp 10 peurureuso1d Kay SSA Surjerp 15 10 0013235 31559228 03 20114 erp paads 10 paurure180ad 6601 e2uenbes 898 2 days uy LON parje e Bunerp paads 15 paads 0118 6 jo suorjeurquioo asn e 81 3A739941 0 J SpUBY YI e s4431 97 19928 20 e eArnnoesuo 8 Sut erp 99 jo Aue e eur eurd J SNOILVOIGNI 3 IdWVS SNOLLVOIGNI GOT eget 26202 9 00 pe ejdsip aq 0 31911181958
293. 3 2 1 us San Exi e 92 OA Boe 24 1 Line key and incoming ring duration time correspondence LK1 Less than 0 1 sec LK2 More than 0 1 sec but less than 0 3 sec LK3 More than 0 3 sec but less than 0 45 sec 1 4 More than 0 45 sec but less than 0 65 sec LK5 More than 0 65 sec but less than 0 9 sec LK6 More than 0 9 sec but less than 1 5 sec More than 1 5 sec but less than 2 5 sec LK8 More than 2 5 sec 2 E E E E BI B E F 2 Depressing the ENTER key increments the display to the next Trunk Group number Ce 9 3 The Trunk Group number is incremented decremented with the F W and B W keys C C Ed Gl 1 4 This assignment is valid for CENTREX or PBX Lines connected to COI EB ETUs i GENERAL INFORMATION CENTREX RINGING ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to assign one of the two Ring Patterns available to particular types of incoming ring signals The assignments correspond to the duration of the incoming ring signals and i programmed in a Trunk Group basis V 300 143 ND 10292 3 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 3B3 FORCED ACCOUNT CODE DIGIT ASSIGNMENT OPERATION e AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline jojr r FOI T is v s 2 r ejA T u R e F13 See Note 1
294. 31X3 ASNE 31vnidoudav A 5 NOLLVIS sz o1 6668 0001 20 668 000 NOISN311X3 NOISNALXd GANDISSV 40 28 1 STIHVL 3100 40 GANDISSV ATSNOIATUd STTGVL 9 s P E TIVI OINI NOLLVIS 40 LNSWNDISSY QXIORHISHND ANVI 9319141533 2007 a 2102 INOZ DNID Yd IV NH3INI Q310IHIS34 DNIODLNO 0 SdNOUD NND IHL OL 01 OININOLLVIS 30 LN3ANDISSV 931911533 ONINOONI I 5 0114 LNVON3LLY NOL G31VIOOSSY 40 NOLLOs 13S z pd INOL ONIONIY V J0 NOILOTTAS ONTTVNDIS DNINOONI on LNNOIOY 1 NO 310A 3910A 40 8 NALA TANO ONISN LOOHLIA ANNAL 440 motivo A OL XNITHLSSJSNYHI OL 05 o1 ONIONIY ONINOONI LIS NV 804 3915110 OLSTIV9 NOISN31X3 a NODNILQ08 1509 1Svar1 3d1A0N4 61 ort SV GANDISSV OL 3NI109 N3SOHO STUNLVAA STUNLVad 3NI TONIONTH ANV oL A 53909 DNIDVd 01553029 3NITONIONIH A ANIT HLOS 40 NOLLOSTAS 31000 1VIO3IdS Y ONISN RE NOOH 440 DNIOD N3HA motivos 39335 40 LNO NOLLVIS S32 Vd ONNA 32135 ANTI NOISSINSNVHL 19810354 HOOH 440 DNIOD MO
295. 360 2 1 Dialing Area 300 258 360 3 Direct Dial Area 300 259 360 4 300 259 360 5 Puerto Rico 300 260 370 Job Specification Sheets 300 266 310 GENERAL The Electra is stored program controlled system Upon initial power up the system s CPU E ETU scans each of the possible interface slots up to thirty two to determine the hardware configuration The system stores this information as well as system default values in memory This area of memory is referred to as the resident system program After the initial power up a trained technician can change the resident system program so that the Electra can meet the particular needs of the customer Samples of job specification sheets are provided in this chapter These sheets help organize each customer s programming needs and should be used and retained on the job site as well as inthe office NOTE Before attempting any programming of the Electra MarkII System it is important that the battery on the CPU E be checked to make sure it is on Failure to do so may result in loss of system programming 320 HOW TO USE THIS CHAPTER Chapter 3 of this installation manual provides all the necessary information for programming the Electra system chapter is divided into the following sections 310 General 320 How Use This Chapter 330 Resident System Default Values 340 System Programming 350 Function Timer Charts 360 Toll Code
296. 431 051 p e WSt qe3se INO 884doc SNOLLVOIGNT Gat aes 18161 0 1 1 1 1854 019 1 SNOILVOIGNI TYIdWVS 4861 1 5 05 007 onurjuoo 014615 ou UT SBM 014835 194102 jespueu e dio 08 5 437 ano pue 1xa amp 15 St 1971 489 55918044 e 81 qA 8 uorjeys 9uo uey 3utddoa e 92u949juo Suruopusqy ST 9880 614 184 19430 12430 01 3181 1118 UBD Kex eur ay uo 94 1 1 0 ST 9oua18juo2 9582 514 Aquo auo surejuoo Aue yy play aAtsnpoxa 3 pjou uo 4 epdrjjnur Sursn j vo o uo19juoo uou A ALON uorjeorput pou aArsn ox s shay 8 051 seuseg 4 dn pue fex 859249 e NOLLVOIGNI 00
297. 5 395 YOIYM Jaquinu uorsuojxa 943 5343 uo218 e Kex e savedde 8 559 943 spuooes G 121 941 uo 4 aq 03 eessour y jun e 491 991 uo Bessa SUIT 4 SNOILVOIdNI 427 1 5 SNOILVOIGNI 2965 47110 26502 1 SNOILVOIGNI GOT 1 5 1861 AINE 56505 007 5208 131 e 519 00 e aq 03 jequinu uorsuajxe e jr e 8303 18 sii uoo TUM 1 589249 e SNOLLVOIGNI GOT 5 1861 PHSLdVHO 2620 04 00 5908 5 yy Apeays 53481 1471 2918 axa 559492 e Wseg S C aT SNV pue 0 59 Apeays 63431 GAT SNY Kex SNV sseu
298. 5 uonumsuo SNOILVOIGNI TIdWVS SNOLLVOIGNI 1861 26502 8 SNOLLVOIGNI 021 1861 A IOS 2650 65 007 uo e nsuoo uo 189 15159814 SN V Jo 401659299 Apeays 53481 431 SNV 2101 uo GN V 5249 auo 10 sny 4 5919294 BUILTIN L e st 92918 axa 86818014 183 YUM 1 4 1841 ploy uorje3 nsuoo uo 8 eoe d 01 SN V 559249 e 3188 e equinu 011816 81 e 2003 puooas mn SNV uo 5208 1841 589499 e y 51 GHI 99948 1 355918019 ut 3120 8 18D 8204019 SNOILVOIGNI 14 8 8121 0T t SNOILVOIGNI GOT TIdWVS 2861 56505 07 007 SNOILVOIGNI 31d WVS puooos 35 1 uorjoeuuoo 3 Aa SNV 941 Jo uorssaudap q pue
299. 5 1 1 7 Repeatsteps 5 and 6 for all required stations go to step 3 to assign a paging zone to a specific station 8 Depress SPKR key to go back line 300 46 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 SPKR ON OFF Line B W Backward Decrement the station number MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO 8E PROGRAMMED AE p tae e _____ ______ CPU levels NOTES 1 After station number is entered the display LL 1 will show previous zone number assigned to D the station aa m 3 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to increment to the next station number L 2 Zone 0 is a no zone assignment E El El kl F b E E H E El F EI E E ELE i GENERAL INFORMATION TERMINAL TO PAGING ZONE ASSIGNMENT This area of the memory block is used to assign each Multiline Terminal to of the three internal page zones in the system If necessary a Multiline Terminal can be placed in a no zone assignment ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 1D10 CALL PICK UP GROUP ASSIGNMENT 1 OPERATION lt AND off line Depress F1 then F9 Depress F20 Enter the station number to be assigned Example Station 104 See Note 1 Enter group number to be assigned to the station chosen i
300. 5 1151 k 15 1 1 1 126 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 NCTIQN O N GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING IMEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT PROGRAMMED MUST PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED All CPU levels See Note 1 NOTES 0 2 Ge 4 5 66 2 8 es 144 1 During step 4 the display shows the current count of the timer chosen 591 BT SS MFRTimeout 10 sec L2 TalkStart Timer 18 sec L3 Delayed Ringing CO line CPU EB3 isse 1 L4 Delayed Ringing Extension CPU EB3 10 sec L5 Voice Mail Automatic Dial Send Start CPU EB3 2 sec L6 Delay Announce Start CPU EB3 20sec Cd Ed Ed LJ fd 2 Depressing the ENTER key causes the programming to move to the next item associated with the next line key BEBE F H H B E EL ELE EL EE 3 Time Out Time 1 sec Xcount 01 99 i GENERAL INFORMATION TIME BASE ASSIGNMENT II i This area of the memory block is used to assign time out counts to MFR and Talk Start base timers Refer to t Section 350 for explanation of each timer BASE x COUNT VALUE 300 127 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2D3 TIME BASE ASSIGNMENT III OPERATION
301. 5348 ssa 9 58 9u uo Kex 50 582442 e 7 8 axa 3 51180 18449101 06 SNOILVOIGNI GOT 1861 PFHXLdVHO 6 02 011 00 53481 00 sureuo s3434 qan Yun ssa syUIM 497 18 0 74 st 1971 49213 SNOLLVOIGNI HO lt 13948 1 e P24 171 19918 1 Xgd OO e eui Jo ed uo Surpuodop se Kex our 6 Surjo duroo uod uorsuejxe 18 run uo eut ayy uorsuajxo 03 Sur119jsuu 1 11816 uodn uo dure gt 1 10 uorsuojxo 5 431 80 03 GN V payloads 55944 pae ALON 84 9 05 0 JIS SSd 941 uo sseideq j18d 9105105 ATA SSC 943 39149 e 19001 801 10
302. 551 c3 c D fal Pal Fd 4 73 Ce 2 1 9 1 12 correspond to VMI 1 4 respectively E EIE E B EL EL E E LE i GENERAL INFORMATION VMI ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to assign whether Voice Mail equipment or Single Line Telephones i will be connected to each of the four 4 VMI ports and whether DTMF tones will be sent not The i equipment connected determines the dial tone that is provided on hookflash 1 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2B9 LCR BYPASS ASSIGNMENT OPERATION lt AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline TC x X XD 6 518151 LITT TEP EP TT Je viPlA ss 2 Depress F2 then 3 Depress F19 See Note 1 LED ON Bypass LCR LEDON Bypass LC sei 4 Depress L2 thru 8 to select which trunk access code groups bypass LCR See Note 2 LED ON Bypass LCR LED OFF Restricted Ieir 51511111 5 kjejyi 121 8 5 Depress ENTER key See Note 3 6 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 100 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 ine TEL Changes Assignment IEW CLE
303. 559 49 1 702 55 9 15 Aq Surg reay Jaye 8 114 6 4284 8908 GOT 413195 02 ggg Jo 0155944 3 SNV 05 LIY SSC 930N 76802 0002 pa1oprsuoo st ayy 98 uey 5591 3 6661 9861 PaJaptsuoo 51 1894 ay gg 1938213 9g 51 1894 189A 6 930N 151 007 pajoip 404 5 66 02 Jequinu erp paads 5 Aq PIC e pu jaspueu3jr e auo pu jaspuBy e Surerg paadg 545 2 eouenbes paads 5 1 0 545 10 011015 e S1a su e eouenbos pajoip aq 01 apis no 20550 SMOT O aouenbos 5 Jo 10116165 e 61 00 erp paads uorje3s RIG euo YII e ur Sur erp 013816 4 15 pue paads 013835 51013801102 awos as 1184
304. 6 79 g 9 6 3 532018 AMONS3IN uOd 5 45 gor MEMORY BLOCKS 5 6 7 8 amp 9 SYSTEM RESTRICTIONS CODE TABLE NUMBER CODE TABLE NUMBER ALLOW DENY ALLOW DENY OCC CODE ASSIGNMENT MEMORY BLOCK MEMORY BLOCK CODE TABLE NUMBER CODE TABLE NUMBER OCC CODE ASSIGNMENT ALLOW DENY OCC CODE ASSIGNMENT MEMORY BLOCK MEMORY BLOCK ta z lt CODE TABLE NUMBER OCC CODE ASSIGNMENT ALLOW DENY CODE ASSIGNMENT 300 307 806 006 IVNDIS 001 OOF 0 SINTTOO V 30 5 Su 009 999 0 SASNVd 43345 40 Su 01 081 OF NOLLVHAG AWILAHL OO DNITVIG 01001 AUVLOU CASN ALVY 29104 LOTTAS SLNAWAUINDAY UIWOLSNI 4 NO DNI IVIG 5 10 1 5 SINOL IVIG HO NOL 84 4002 IVId 0251 ANOL LOTTAS SFA 00 WOUJ IVNDIS LOSINNOOSIG Sw 09 091 09 ANLA 40 NOILVUNG 09 OL 40 001 0011 006 AHL HSV 14 X8d 09 40
305. 7 then CR RETURN The display shown will be provided Now enter the table number to be modified then CR RETURN Available entries are 000 127 The example at right shows table 010 chosen Now enter the office code number to be modified OFFICE CODE TABLE MODIFY Available entries are 200 999 The example shows TABLENO 010 201 0 The display will appear as a grid showing the entry of OFFICE CODE O or 1 in the position for up to 50 office codes the TABLE NO 010 left of the grid is displayed the starting number for OFCCODE 201 200 each row of the office codes Across the top of the grid 210 is provided columns 0 9 which correspond to the last digit of the office code on any line For example to find the office code position for 201 in the display above locate the number 200 and look to the right under the column labelled 1 The crosspoint between row 200 and column 1 is the position corresponding to 201 The cursor will be positioned at the office code that was chosen in the step above Two methods are now available for changing the assignment in the office code table Depressing a 0 or 1as required will enter that number into the display Depressing the space bar causes the cursor position displayed to alternate between 0 and 1 or 1 and 0 Using the cursor keys allows the programmer to move around the grid to change any desired office code position The significance of the 0 or 1
306. 8 001 TIVAS 6 0 7 v 6668 0001 10 668 001 Q 4NDISSV 1 8 1 006 008 AWVN Q3NDISSV DNISG ANNUAL df1OHD ANNUL V OL GSNDISSV SHALOVUVHO 8 0141 51000 9 INN QS3NDISSV ONIA NOLLVLIS NOLLV IS OL GANDISSY 5 10 01401 TNVGONSLLV OL G3NDISSV NOLLVLS CAVA 0 MN INVONGLLV 30 LNAWNDISSY SNOLLIQNOO MO I4DBISAO LNVGNGLLY NOILVNIISSG OLGSNOISSV SI LNVONGLLV WIHWON NOILdIHOSUG WALI T L DE tr E Z V 532018 AYOWIW 5 NOILV2I4ID3dS MEMORY BLOCKS 2 3 4 AND 3 1 2 MEMORY BLOCK 3 2 MEMORY BLOCK 3C 1 NAME 7 DIGITS MAX STATION NAME 7 DIGITS STATION 300 301 NAME 7 DIGITS MAX STATION NAME 1 DIGITS STATION ZOE 006 1 OLSHSEWN 6668 0001 20 668 001 SNDISSY 9 8 1 OL SHHEINTN 6668 0001 20 668 001 NOLLVNIISS3G 8 86 0 D HOUVS LNNH SNDISSV e L 8E LNOH OL 5 86 6668 0001 20 668 001 10714 NDISSV ONTA ZHD 440 98549 NO 7045 9 XOU 440
307. 80816 UL ALA NO 18915 YLA 3 Syusr 1371 18 ua kay 589 49 e JATIA 51 GAT 8 ue SUJE Asng 43484 NO 184815 ULA 2 SNOILVOIGNI 4 IdWVSs 1 SNOLLVOIGNI GOT WIdWVS 1861 PHSIdVHO 6807 CIN 98 007 5908 wt eve AAT 8 ua Seusey 147 SNOLLVOIGNI XIdWVS 184g 941 3109591 52104594 e 5598024 j 2 1189 93104 Suruopueqy Kex 5592424 e Kex sessaudep Suite 4318 ue 8 ut 180 ON NO 18031 YLA T T Iv ulvia BERBER TT TT 9 25 11 Ts CECO 111 TASAS SNOILVOIGNI GOT 3 IdWVS 1861 1 26202 18 007 5208 1411 1a sang qan
308. 8300 940 4 Programming Example 940 5 IBM Type Compatable Version Software 940 6 General Programming Notes 900 1 900 1 900 2 900 2 900 2 900 2 900 3 900 4 900 4 900 5 900 5 900 5 900 5 900 6 900 7 900 8 900 8 900 8 900 9 900 9 900 9 900 10 900 11 900 12 900 13 900 13 900 16 900 18 900 1 SECTION 910 EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION 910 1 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION ADAPTOR UNIT The Remote Administration Adaptor unit RAA E is compact self contained unit 7 9 in x 3 9 in x 1 9 in 200mm x 100mm x 50mm that allows remote or local programming of the Electra system by means of a personal computer The RAA E unit contains an RJ11C modular jack for connection to the Electra MarkII system and an RS 232C connector for connection to a modem or PC It also contains 5 switches for proper interface settings a green LED to indicate power is available a hybrid IC card for interfacing with the system an 8 bit processor a 16 ROM IC and associated circuitry The RAA E unit requires no external power source It is powered by the Electra MarkII system via the modular jack connection The function of the RAA E unit is to translate the Manchester Encoded data from the ESI E ETU to ASCII signals for use by the PC or modems A floppy disk is supplied with the RAA E unit This disk software is written in one of two formats either CP M DOSN 82 Basic for use with the NEC PC 8300 or eq
309. 834802 IN3IN32NnONNV AVT3G 3A3538 W3QOW TIVO ANYA 5 55322 39 Vd 1 1 1 55322 39 4 TVNH31X3 119733 N3MSNV ON GUVMUO4 1 2 X2v8TIV2 O1nV 132NV2 IMYA gt gt lt 22 395NVU 55 3SV8 IN31SAS 8 2 532018 965 OOF NYGLLVd 3000 G3HIS3G 4002 55425 0850 SHOLVIJI MIN AULNG NOLLdINOS3d WALI 300 55322 WALSAS 1 32 12018 AYOWIN 5 45 166 006 3902 5115 303 353134 3d OD 5115 401 OD OL HSY133100H 39 VSS3IN TIYIN 3210A TVIG WHOSINA TVIG 1710 WHOdINA Tvia WuOsINN WuodiNn Wuo4INn WYOSINN WHy03INn wuo 3iNn WIG Wid WHOdINN W3oJINRn 1718 INVGNILLV ANOL 39 553 1530038 ADVE 11 2 Wall 3un1v33 e mm 380 3805 1 3002 55322 WALSAS 1 12 81192 Du VINOLRV 8 31403
310. 92 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 digits dialed locate next lowest table which contains a three digit entry which matches the area code dialed or a six digit entry which matches the area and office code last 6 digits dialed 1 New table found A Table is allow allow user free dialing B Table is deny disconnect station 2 Notable found check Memory Block 4 A System allow allow user free dialing B Systemdeny disconnect station ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 TABLE 360 2 1 DIAL AREA PBX ACCESS COOE DISCONNECT DISCONNECT DISCONNECT OFFICE CODE OVERRIDE DISCONNECT AREA COOE OVERRIDE DISCONNECT NOTE 1 ALLOW DENY NOTE 2 ALLOW USER TO DIAL 3 MORE DIGITS AC AND OC OVERRIDE ALLOW USER FREE DIALING ALLOW USER FREE DIALING DISCONNECT NOTES 1 No office code included with area code entry 2 Office code included with area code entry 300 262 ND 20293 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 TABLE 360 3 DIRECT DIAL AREA DIRECT DIAL PBX ACCESS CODE DISCONNECT CODE DISCONNECT Ni DISCONNECT DISCONNECT NO p s gt ES ALLOW USER TO ALLOW USER TO DIAL 1 MORE DIGIT DIAL 1 MORE DIGIT ALLOW DENY oc DENY OVERRIDE ory DISCONNECT OVERRIDE DISCONNECT ALLOW DENY ALLOW NOTE 2 ALLOW USER TO DIAL 3 MORE DIGITS FREE DIALING DENY 2 DISCONNECT AC AND O
311. 92489 91 4 2101591 auo e auo uorjeuliguo e 1equinu uorsuajxe 6 1716 uorjgurjsap jeq e 6 1011815 VIG 4 uorsuejxe 6 1011875 921105 e Zp 1 oN sng 82 689228 BIg e gp oN Asng L 1189 3 59228 VIP jespueu jr e etp YF e ag 1718 LIS uoneunsoq 1180 0 0 L86V A Ine 6607 IN 00 161 00 9101894 e erp paads pu gg 3 nejaqp 852228 15 aq 03 e euo 3ospueu YI e apoosseooe YUNI e 18614 peedg uone3s Suruureas044q 20 1861 A Inf 6202 Lyi 007 81900320 101381 10124 e 320 011835 e 2201821 JATIA e SE 8 uo jnox2o Joy peurure3801d 10118138 0j 395 aq xosq G2 pue 988552
312. 97195 Kj e2ryeurojne 5 aptsyno ue 8 pasn st uorsuajxo ue Aj1ed 10 PEM e 5208 33 yeada 2 559249 e euo PIp 94192810 J SpULY jj e 83431 137 32928 Xgd OO eut 4 2 10 559249 e 612 shay 189493 2 SAVY eurn jq 01 dn urejuoo UBD 19pinq ut s19jjnq yeaday 2 0g Jo y ALON por 9101591 305208 4 sr po erp s4431 urs ELI JOY peurure1So1d 559442 e peejs 11 St 051 49913 4 00 59 18018 89 4 29138018110 ABS 01 1 6 TZ 0CP SNOLLVOIGNI 99 00 18114 auo 10119 JUO 1 uo dure auo Suny 510 uo 189 orsnjy 8 9 ur jeuruue eurn rs 910 ALON 81431 poa 10j
313. A s e N 1 2 111 6 671 16111 18 21212121 e 6 1 0 2 1 300 154 ND 20293 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 pz 37 Gel D 410118 t3 us SPKR ON OFF Line TEL Selects a new Hunt Group number F W Increments Hunt Group number CLEAR Clears FWD destination assignemt ENTER Enters each assignment B W Decrements Hunt Group number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING IMEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY IROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED 385 386 388 ____________ CPU EB3 or higher NOTES l Depressing the ENTER key advances this program to the next HUNT GROUP Cz 9 C LLL m Dm LJ ana Hoe E Com GENERAL INFORMATION STATION HUNT GROUP FORWARD ASSIGNMENT This area of the memory block used to assign an extension No or Hunt Group Pilot No as the Forward destination of a DIT or DID incoming call when all extensions the Hunt Group are busy 300 155 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 3B9
314. AA E to remain busy and if the PC was in program mode the other programming stations will not be able to go into program mode 9405 IBM type COMPATIBLE VERSION SOFTWARE A EQUIPMENT REQUIRED NOTE The modem must be capable of executing the Hayes Command Set l IBM XT IBM AT NEC Multispeed or an NEC APC IV must be locally provided NOTE The IBM type version RAA software will run on either a 1 2 mb high density disk drive or a 360 kb low density disk drive 2 IBM RAA version diskette available on either a 5 25 or a 3 5 diskette 3 Operating system on the IBM XT IBM AT NEC Multispeed or NEC IV has to be 5 0059 Equivalent to NEC APC IV MS DOS 3 2 4 Refer to Sections 9 10 4 920 6 and Figure 910 1 for RS 232C cables modem and block diagram information etc B EXECUTING IBM TYPE COMPATIBLE SOFTWARE 1 Insert the RAA disk into the available drive Ensure drive prompt is for the drive that the RAA disk is in and enter COMLINK 2 Depress Return Display shows NEC Remote Administrator Terminal Emulator Ver 1 0 Caps lock key must be set on Press any key to continue _ 3 Depress any key Caps lock must be on Display shows RAA TERMINAL EMULATOR Are You Using a Modem Y N 4 Enter Y for Yes or N for No so that you will be able to access the modem screen when needed you enter Y the display shows RAA TERMINAL EMULATOR Are you using a Modem Y N Select System A
315. AA Host Disk The RESIDENT SYSTEM PROGRAM is located in the memory of the CPU EB or CPU E ETUs and enables the system to fully function after a first initialization The CPU scans the installed circuits and Multiline Terminals and assigns standard default values This allows system operation before programming has begun This provides the installer a method to test the system for normal operation thereby allowing later problems to be identified probable programming errors RESTRICTION INCOMING ullows the assignment on a per station per trunk group basis of restricting a station s ability to answer incoming calls This is required for Private Line assignment RESTRICTION OUTGOING allows the assignment on a per station per trunk group basis restricting outgoing calls This is required for Private Line assignment RINGING LINE PREFERENCE makes call handling more efficient and is especially useful for Attendant Positions Any Multiline Terminal ean bc programmed to seize any ringing incoming call to that station by going off hook 100 12 SAVE and REPEAT allows the storage of telephone numbers up to 16 digits Any line key except PE can be programmed to become a Save and Repeat key After dialing an outside number depression of this line key will cause the system to memorize the number dialed and light the associated red LED Depressing this key when the station is receiving dial tone will cause the numbe
316. ABLE NO 04 hourly number showing in the display In the daily schedule display the numbers 0 23 correspond to the hours of the day in military time If hour 0 is assigned a table that table will be referred to from the hour of midnight to 00 59 59 AM The use of hour number 13 refers to the time between 01 00 00 PM and 01 59 59 PM After selecting a table assignment for each hour depressing the CR RETURN enters the data into the computer for that table and increments the table number by 1 Depressing the return key will now allow programming of the next table Prior to depressing the return key a second time the programmer can enter a new table number to be modified NOTES 1 The use of cursor keys allows the programmer to freely move the cursor position to correct any mistakes made during entry of data 2 if any hourly assignments are left blank unassigned when the LCR E looks at this table during that hour busy tone is returned to the calling party and therefore the calling party is restricted 3 data is entered into the floppy disk until the ESC key is depressed At the time that the ESC key is depressed the data is saved to the floppy disk and the display is returned to the Modify Menu d Route Advance Table The route advance table is used to select which route tables will be used by the LCR E to determine the trunk to be used to process the attempted call The route advance table makes available to the
317. AL EXTENSION ASSIGNMENT OPERATION e AND gt DISPLAY 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F2 then F8 3 Depress F20 4 Dial number of VE 01 48 being assigned Example VE 01 See Note 1 5 Dial extension number to be assigned to the VE number chosen Example Extension 200 See Note 2 6 Depress ENTER key See Notes 3 amp 4 olr TOIXD jP R O G R AI M T T 51 51 A sTE T 2111111 11 iviel TT TT viel 2 211111 dvie Als s i e N o w 1 vie 41 T 11 12 0 0 14 JAlsis r eiN Join xi TT 7 Repeatsteps 5 and 6 all subsequent VE numbers to be assigned or go to step 3 to assign a specific Virtual Extension 8 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 122 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 9 N GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING EMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED is 653 2 s 3 CPU levels NOTES 1 During step 4 any previous extension number Ce assigned to a VE number chosen is displayed Total number of VE numbers is 48 regardle
318. AL ZONE PAGING WITH MEET ME allows anyone if allowed by Class of Service within the Electra MarklI system to generate a voice page via station speakers to selected or to all zones of the installation Up to three zones can be established by program assignment of stations into particular zones Any station can release the page and talk privately to the originator of the page call by dialing the answer access code set by default as 556 LAST NUMBER REDIAL allows a station user to redial the last outside number they dialed either from the dial pad Save and Repeat key button or Speed Dial key button This feature is accessed dial code dial or programmable Feature Access key LEAST COST ROUTING dial access to a CO linc processes the completion of an outside call via the least costly route available The LCR E provides cost effective call routing based on the time of day and day of week LOOP START TRUNKS can be terminated onto the Electra 15 MDF via the telephone company provided RJ21X terminal System assignment of trunk type Loop Start or Ground Start is done on a per trunk basis at the associated COI E MESSAGE WAITING indication is provided to all stations within the system except single line 100 10 telephones without a Message Waiting lamp or not supported by an SLI EB The 6 1 will show a lit red LED marked MW each of the other type Multiline Te
319. AR 4 1 ENTER Enters assignment soc sene LOCK mar PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO 8E PROGRAMMED 107 1285 286 CPU EB or higher NOTES 1 After Step 3 line key LED s 2 thru 8 will display the previous assignment LEDs 2 thru 8 correspond to trunk access code group 2 thru 8 per 2 05 1 5 18 9 8 1 i esl Ce Gee 554 C23 C Cm OAs cn Hoe Cd ol 2 L1 LED is always off and cannot be changed Attempting to do so results in error tone 3 Once ENTER is depressed no further changes can be made If new changes are required depress F19 again or TEL key to re enter the memory block E E E RABE GENERAL INFORMATION LCR BYPASS ASSIGNMENT i When dialing a station assigned for LCR this area of the memory block is used to assign system wide whether or not Trunk Access Code Groups 2 thru 8 will bypass LCR NOTE Reorder tone is received by i station assigned for LCR when that station dials an access code not assigned to by pass LCR 300 101 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2810 RECALL KEY OPERATION FOR TIE LINES OPERATION AND 1 Gooffline 2 DepressF2 then F7 3 Depress F20 DISPLAY Je fi INTE x 6
320. ATIONS 100 16 FEATURE ACCESS CODES NUMBERING PLAN 100 19 Codes Dialed While Re 100 19 ceiving Dial Tone or Second Dial Tone Codes Dialed When Not Receiving Dial Tone or 100 21 Second Dia Tone EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 100 22 Genera Information 100 23 Equipment Description 100 23 100 1 SECTION 110 GENERAL The Electra MarklI digital telephone system is versatile high performance microprocessor based stored program controlled fully digital telephone system that provides numerous voice and data capabilities for handling both intra office and outside traffic The Electra digital telephone system offers the flexibility required to meet almost any organization s communications needs by using the Pulse Code Modulation PCM technique and time division switching Businesses both small and large can derive maximum benefit from the Electra Markll s port oriented system design The Electra can provide termination for up to 80 stations and up to 40 outside lines Systems can be tailored to a customer s needs by use of the variety of Electra MarkII s Multiline Terminals plus standard 2500 type single line telephones 32 POR n 64 PORT 96 PORT 575 SYSTEM SYSTEM PRI Neu ONE BOTH LY XPANSION EXPANSION FIGURE 110 1 CENTRAL CONTROL UNTTS CCUs Electra Markll as a total communication system offers a wide variety of features most of which are standard and
321. AVE TO BE PROGRAMMED RAMMED 267 2 8 29 7 po All CPU levels See Note 2 NOTES 1 Although there are a total of 10 relays 1 10 relays 1 3 are permanently assigned to External Page zones 1 3 During step 4 any previously assigned function for the selected relay will appear If there was no previous assignment the display will show VACANT 2 If L2 External Ring is depressed a number from 1 to 4 has to be entered If L3 Delay Announce is depressed no additional digits are required and you proceed with step 7 CPU EB3 or higher 3 Depressing the ENTER key will cause the display to increment to the next relay number 4 Trunk groups associated with DIT or DID trunks will not activate the External Chime or External Ring contacts 1 This area of the memory block is used to assign either Night Chime 1 3 External Ringing Control 1 4 or Delay Announcement functions to control relays 4 10 Relays 1 3 have a fixed assignment to External Page i zones1 3 i GENERAL INFORMATION ECR RELAY ASSIGNMENT ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 2 0 P Ds D 2 8 wr es er 158 44 s Ce Ce 2 CI Cod D m3 3 E Ed 4 Ed 1 E E E E El k H l E E E E 300 121 ND 30291 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY 2 10 VIRTU
322. Asng 515692044 ut 162 993 ST 4LON euo 1 2 ayy Asnq o3 BIG e 150130 uo paisng uo asn 9 pt ST Yuna ayy Jo Sr uorsorpur TVWHON eures ou jo 611816 JUANI 993 AIT 941 10 parsng aq 03 96 1 4 20 07 10 yuna 59 55952 Asng 81 2103 BIP 5544 Wr e 9948 axa aul K1eurq 559443 e 9103594 nQ Asng YAW pue yuna 00 LOSP SNOLLVOIGNI 4XidWVS SNOILVOIGNI 3 IdWVS 1861 5650 601 00 Sty Jo 00 1011296 295 Suruopusqy ploy c s3431 urey 82 2614 8208 03 aq ssa bua ssa 1eujoue jou Sr 182 Y J e ejosuoo 41 55 943 uo sex SSA pauSisse aq osje 5 HALON pm 2 uorsua xo oq 182 0 9 05402
323. B DATA AND SECOND VOICE PATH ASSIGNMENT OPERATION lt AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline jo r J Je fi INTE ilre molol clalro mlolo T TT TT EX po E Tp 2 Depress F4 then F7 ies i 2 T 5 3 Depress F14 rini 2 e T 12 5 2 5 Dialslot number 1 8 of ESI card to be assigned 5111 2 Example 51064 Note 1 2 151101 141 6 Depress L1 to L8 to assign each ESI port as required See Note 2 i nti iMjo p ujL e 2 15 5 4 Dial module number 1 4 of ESI card to be assigned Example Module 2 7 Depress ENTER key See Note 3 8 Repeatsteps 6 and 7 for each ESI card as required or go to step 3 to select a particular ESI EB port 9 Depress the key to go back oh line 300 202 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE QN O EL Enters new module and slot number F W Increments to next ESI slot ENTER Enters each ESI path assignment B W Decrements to next ESI slot GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING IMEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY LOCK THAT PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED CPU levels See
324. BLE ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 750 9 Error Messages SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS This section is provided to assist the programmer in understanding the possible error indications provided by the LCR support equipment This section is divided into two parts The first part provides an example of each error display The second part is a table which provides the following a Listing of error b Reason for error c Possible solution s for each error d The Command Mode during which the error may occur 750 9 1 PC 8300 and Assoicated Eqiuipment Troubles 1 Line Trouble When the line connection to the LCR E is faulty SNR DOWN LOAD START display similar to the one shown will be provided LINE TROUBLE 2 Floppy Disk VO Error When the computer cannot communicate properly with the Disk Drive Unit a display similar to the SYSTEM DATA SAVING one shown is provided FDD ERROR J 3 Printer Output Error When the printer does not indicate to the computer that it is ready to receive data a display similar to EXTRA CODE TABLE PRINT OUT START ND the one shown is provided ABNORMAL E PRINTER NOT READY 4 750 9 2 LCR E Status Indications 1 LCRRestart Should the LCR E restart during a transfer of data between the computer and the LCR E other than AREA CODE TABLE DOWN LOAD START during System Control command a display ABNORMAL END similar to the one shown will be provided LCR RE
325. BLF Consoles being used by 4 Note 2 20 Note 4 Divide the number of Multiline Terminals CO Add On modules and DSS BLF Consoles being used by 4 Note 2 20 Note 4 Divide the number of single line telephones and or modems being used by 4 Note 3 18 Note 4 Divide the number of single line telephones and or modems being used by 4 Note 3 18 Note 4 CIRCUITS PER ETU 1 The number of conference circuits being used When installing external page chime and tone ringers an ECR E ETU is required When connecting voice mail system single line telephone and or Dictation equipment is required 1 Notes 4 5 amp 6 Divided the number of DID and E amp M Tie Lines being used by 2 Note 1 20 Note 7 Note If the result not a whole number round it up to the next higher whole number Note 2 A Multiline Terminal with DPA E unit Off hook Announcement Adaptor or DTA E unit Data Switching Adaptor installed requires an ESI EB ETU divide the number of those Multiline Terminals installed by 4 If the result is not a whole number round it up to the next higher whole number This is the quantity of ESI EB ETUs required If some ports are still available on an ESI EB subtract the number of available ports on the ESI EB ETU from the number of Multiline Terminals being used w o DPA E or DTA E units Then divide the number by 4 If the result is not a whole number round it up to the next higher whole numb
326. C OVERRIDE NOTES 1 office code included with area code entry ALLOW USER 2 Office code included with FREE DIALING 2 area code entry 300 263 TABLE 360 4 OTHER COMMON CARRIER ACCESS NOTES 1 Nooffice code included with area code entry YES ALLOW USER TO DIAL 3 MORE DIGITS 2 Office code included with area code entry DISCONNECT ALLOW USER TO ALLOW USER TO DIAL 1 MORE DIGIT DIAL 1 MORE OCC AND AC OVERRIOE DISCONNECT OCC AC AND OC OVERRIDE DISCONNECT ALLOW USER FREE DIALING 0 30292 SEPTEMBER 1988 TABLE 360 5 SPECIAL CODE OVERRIDE TABLE PUERTO RICO TYPE PBX ACCESS CODE DISCONNECT 1 9 ALLOW USER TO DIAL 2 MORE DIGITS SPECIAL CODE OVERRIDE DISCONNECT DISCONNECT ALLOW USER TO DIAL 1 MORE DIGIT OVERRIDE DISCONNECT DISCONNECT AC ALLOW NOTE 1 OVERRIDE NOTE 1 ALLOW DENY NOTE 2 ALLOW USER FREE DIALING NOTES 1 No office code included with area code entry 2 Office code included with area code entry AC AND OC OVERRIDE DISCONNECT ALLOW ALLOW USER FREE DIALING 300 265 quawusissy 88202 yuniy 03 4 jueurudissy yunay juauiudissy 5 0 JUNIJ vec dnoar
327. C Cable 700 5 730 7 Removing the Access Panel 100 5 730 8 Mounting the RS 232C Connector 100 5 730 9 Verifying SW2 Setting 700 5 740 INSTALLATION OF PC 8300 740 1 General 700 5 740 2 Power Adapter 700 6 740 3 Battery Backup 700 6 740 4 Floppy Disk Unit PC 8231A Connection 700 6 740 5 Printer Connection 700 7 740 6 PC 8300 Connection 700 7 To LCR E ETU 750 PROGRAMMING 750 1 General 700 7 750 2 How To Use This Section 700 7 750 3 Programming System NPM for LCR 700 8 750 4 LCR Programming Construction 700 11 750 5 Initializing the PC 8300 700 14 750 6 Programming the LCR E 700 16 750 7 of Data 700 25 750 8 Explanation of LCR Commands 700 29 150 9 Error Messages 700 52 760 ALGORITHMS 760 1 Processing for LCR 700 54 760 2 LCR Processing 700 55 770 JOB SPEC SAMPLES 770 1 Area Code Tables 700 59 770 2 Weekly Schedule Tables 700 62 770 3 Daily Schedule Tables 700 64 770 4 Route Advance Tables 700 66 770 5 Route Tables 700 68 700 1 MARCH 1988 770 6 Office Code Tables 700 70 770 7 Extra Code Tables and Home NPA 700 72 SECTION 710 GENERAL The Least Cost Routing LCR feature is used by the system to select the most economical route line when originating outside calls The Electra provides this feature as an option and requires the installation of an LCR E ETU Additionally a portable computer 8201 PC 8300 manufactured by NEC Corporation is required to program the LCR featu
328. C straight cable with a male connector at each end must be obtained Cable specification is as follows Length Type 50 feet 15m Twisted pair Shielded RS 232C straight cable with two RS 232C male connectors NOTE Other pins are not connected oO Qv A NM o Figure 220 3 RS 232C Straight Cable Pin Connections 200 15 ND 20292 CHAPTER2 JULY 1987 SECTION 230 SITE PREPARATIONS and MDF IDF CONSTRUCTION 230 1 GENERAL INFORMATION This section presents a survey of the planning details that should be considered prior to installing an ELECTRA MARK II system Detailed planning in advance of the actual installation will help ensure that minimum time and cost are incurred and concurrently will cause a minimum disruption of the customer s business activities Additional benefits of a well planned and executed installation include flexibility for changes and expansion at minimum cost efficient maintenance and increased customer satisfaction 230 2 SITE SURVEY In most cases a survey of a customer s premises is needed to develop a cost estimate for the installation This preliminary data should be used in the site selection of the Main Distribution Frame MDF A second visit to the job site may be necessary to obtain exact dimensions of the area selected for the MDF cable lengths and possible IDF locations This information will provide the basis for planning an orderly and
329. Connect the terminal to Genie RS232C cable connector using an RS232C null modem cable pins 2 and 3 reversed and ensure the switch is set to TERMINAL PRINTER See FIGURE 1 Apply power to the terminal Apply power to the Genie The System Diagnostic message should appear on the terminal Refer to the Genie Technical Reference Manual for setup information Genie BAUD Rate Settings The Genie RS232C port is pre set for 1200 baud If the terminal being used cannot be configured for 1200 baud Genie s baud rate can be changed to 300 2400 or 9600 as follows Remove Genie s top cover by removing four 4 screws two on top and two on the bottom Remove Genie s front cover shown in Figure 1 by removing four 4 screws two on top and two on the bottom holding the cover in place and the two HEX screws securing the RS232C connector to the front cover Locate the CPU the lowest PCB with two ribbon cables attached Disconnect the two ribbon cables from the CPU card e Remove the CPU card HANDLE THE CPU CARD BY THE EDGES ONLY Locate the Baud Rate Jumper Block 2 on the CPU card near the ribbon cable connectors Move the jumper to the desired baud rate setting JUMPER LOCATION MARKING BAUD RATE SELECTION 96 9600 48 300 24 2400 12 1200 Reinstall the CPU card Again be careful to handle the CPU by the edges only Reconnect the two ribbon cables to the CPU card Replace the front and top covers GENIE
330. D EXCLUSIVE AND NON EXCLUSIVE with RECALL are features provided to allow for individualized and speedy call handling EXCLUSIVE HOLD allows a station user to place an ongoing conversation on HOLD while ensuring that no other stations are able to accidentally remove it from hold The holding station s corresponding line key LED green provides a special interrupted wink I HOLD indication ETE 6 1 LED is red for easy identification all other stations with that appearance have the corresponding LED red lit steadily Single line telephones do not have hold indication NON EXCLUSIVE HOLD enables a Multiline Terminal user to place an ongoing conversation on HOLD and allows the user to go to any other station with that appearance and retrieve the call from hold LED indication of the held line is shown as green ETE 6 1 is red wink at the holding station or interrupted I HOLD wink and red wink at all the other stations Single line telephones do not have this ability HOLD RECALL provides a reminder to the user that has forgotten a call placed on hold this recall is provided for either Exclusive or Non Exclusive Hold The RECALL toa station is controlled by a timer that is preprogrammed by the installer The LED at the holding station will flutter green the ETE 6 1 LED is red while at other stations it will remain steadily lit or winking red Accompanied at the holding station with the change in the LED flash rate
331. D 1 IN SECOND 32 1 SCREW TERMINAL BLOCK ON PSE DD 1 IN FIRST ESE 32E 1 SCREW TERMINAL BLOCK ON 1 IN ESE 32B 1 TO LOCALLY PROVIDED 48 VDC POWER SOURCE Figure 250 5 Interconnection of PSE DD 1 PSU 3 Turn on the power switch on the PSE DD 1 PSU located in the first ESE 32E 1 CCU 4 Turn on the power switch on the PSE DD 1 PSU located in the ESE 32B 1 CCU H Check the DC output voltages These voltages can be checked at the test pins on the CPU E or CPU EB ETU or on the MMC E ETU in the corresponding CCU 200 33 ND 20292 CHAPTER2 JULY 1987 250 3 RSG E UNIT NOTE System power shouid be off during these procedures A Remove the two mounting screws located at the top and bottom of the RSG slot in a CCU where SLI EA SLI EB or VMI E ETUs are installed B Install an RSG E unit into the RSG slot of the required CCU as shown in Figure 250 6 C Secure the RSG E unit with the screws previously removed in step Figure 250 6 Installing RSG E Unit D Connect the 4 pin connector ended cable provided on the RSG E unit into the designated RSG connector J5 located in the upper left ofthe CCU If the adjacent CCU requires ringing signal use the supplementary cable included in the RSG packing box Connect an end of the cable into the connector on the RSG E unit and the other end of the cable into the designated RSG connector J5 located in the upper left of the adjacent CCU
332. DISSV NOISNSIXS AULNG WALI INAWNDISSV NOISN31X3 OLNY 4 100d DNIDNIN 01 86 9 81771532018 AHOIW3IN 301 5 04 141239 gor 9 wv 9 E ul o gt lt lt gt x lt Nn x 9 gt 5 2 22 e a E 3 gt IJ TIE DE gt 011 De T 1 T T b 2 TJ TIE m b Ti pe I 8 e Tere 0 1965 1050 J M i 16 2 1 e Tl T lb Il gt lE b rl 1 b Il T a LOCATION LOCATION d 4 59107 jeu19 x 3 27 9u07 z g 9107 1907 or 59007 60 9007 80 6 9407 9 1 9107 90 190 90 61 9 7 9 0974 WVSJSNVHL LHOIN LN SOPHN4AO LNVANALLV WGJSNVHL wax aDVSSaW
333. DR E DIP 1 Switch D LOOSEN SCREW AND REMOVE ACCESS PANEL Q o Figure 240 14 Right Side View of CCU c Connect a printer or other peripheral device to the RS 232C connector mounted on the CCU in step b and secure the RS 232C male connector from the printer or other peripheral device with screws provided with the device d Turn ON the SW2 of the SMDR E ETU 3 A 25 pin RS 232C connector is provided with the following pin configuration All pins are active high SMDR E Output Connector 5 2 Hk FUNCTION TXD Transmit Data RXD Receive Data RTS Request To Send CTS Clear To Send DSR Data Set Ready Signal Ground DCD Data Carrier Detect constant high 20 DTR Data Terminal Ready 1 OQ i SMDR print out string is as follows ASCII 7 hits plus one parity bit even one stop bit 4 SMDR Output Format For SMDR general format and sample printouts of call record See Figures 240 16 and 240 17 Figure 240 15 Mounting the RS 232C Connector 200 28 ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 Start Date Month Day Year 8 digits Start Time Hour Minute AM or PM 7 digits Trunk Number 2 digits Trunk Group 2 digits TypeofCall OG OT IT OGC ICC OTC 2 3 digits Station Number 3 4 digits 07 04 86 09 00 08 05 120 00 15 32 102885167537000 LCR 123456 LCR Least Cost Routing LCR without account
334. DSS BLF number 1 6 to be initialized Example DSS BLF 2 Depress ENTER key 1 When initialized 2 When not initialized See Note 3 To access port area depress 1 15 Depress SPKR key to go back on line _ INTE T 5 1151 DIN ry aye 2 E 2 E fale TZ E 1 21 2 EjRIM Piin 21 21515151 z 01552 T TT E RIMI 1 2 repu T gf 080 180 ifn fate z zleo ze 300 170 ND 30292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 2 6 5 81 071 48 5 9 02 93 us KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE PKR ON OFF Line TEL Selects port device number Increments port device number CLEAR ENTER Enters each port device to be initialized B W Decrements port device number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MUST PROGRAMMED HAVE
335. Depressing the space bar will cause the display to show NO as the entry for this line 700 39 ND 20292 CHAPTER MARCH 1988 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS ROUTE TABLE MODIFY TABLE NO 3ROUTE ADVANCE MODIFY TABLENO 120 TRKACSSCODE Lb AREACODEDEL ETRCODEADD PFXADDCHK x SRV AREA CHK ROUTE ADVANCE MODIFY x TABLENO 120 TRKACSSCODE AREACODEDEL B ETRCODEADD X ADD CH SRV AREA ROUTE TABLE MODIFY TABLE NO 120 TRKACSSCODE 01 AREA CODEDEL DEL ETRCODEADD PFX ADD CHK MODIFY BLE NO 120 TA TRKACSSCODE 01 AREACODEDEL DEL ETRCODEADD NO PFXADDCHK SRVAREACHK ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 If it is desired to add digits before the number dialed depress the space bar again This option may be desired for an SCC secondary common carrier call where it may be necessary to dial a local number followed by an account code prior to dialing the long distance number Another application might be where the call is being routed through a PBX or Centrex line where it may be necessary to dial an access code prior to obtaining CO central office dial tone The display at right is now observed It is necessary to enter a table number for the Extra code table to be referred to
336. Dialed While Receiving Dial Tone or Feature Access Tone CODE FEATURE CONDITION Setin Default Call to Attendant Extension Numbering 3 or 4 digit XXX Or XXXX Call Forward All Calls Station Confirm Set Cancel Call Forward Busy No Answer Station Confirm Flexible Set Flexible Cancel Flexible 100 19 ND 20292 CHAPTER JULY 1987 FEATURE CONDITION CODE Call Forward All Calls Attendant Confirm Flexible 44xxx Set Flexible 44 Cancel Flexible 44 Call ForwardBusy No Answer Attendant Confirm Flexible 45 Set Flexible 45xxxyyy Cancel Flexible 45 Call Forward All Calls Destination Confirm Flexible 47 Set Flexible 47 Cancel Flexible 47 Call Forward Busy No Answer Destination Confirm Flexible 48xxx Set Flexible 48 Cancel Flexible 48 Cancel Flexible 49 Set Flexible 49 1 or2 Single Line Telephone Exclusive Hold Set or Retrieve Flexible 4 after flash BGM Over Multiline Terminal Speaker Call Voice Page via Multiline Terminal Speakers Flexible 550 Internal Paging Zone 1 Flexible 551 Zone 2 Flexible 552 Zone 3 Flexible 553 All Zones Flexible 554 Meet me Answer Flexible 556 External Paging 1 Flexible 561 Zone 2 Flexible 562 Zone f Flexible 563 All Zones Flexible 564 Meet Me Answer Flexible 566 Station Speed Dial Program for Single Line Tel
337. EA ETU contains four identical circuits to serve up to four SLTs A maximum of 18 SLI EA ETUs be installed per system 15 SLI EB ETU The SLI EB ETU is the Single Line Telephone Interface Unit which includes the functions of the SLI EA ETU and provides Message Waiting indication to SLTs equipped with a Message Waiting lamp Each SLI EB ETU contains four identical circuits to serve up to four SLTs The SLI EB ETU is required for use with power failure transfer of COs to SLTs A maximum of 18 SLI EB ETUs be installed per system 16 MFR EA ETU The MFR EA ETU is the Dual Tone Multi Frequency Receiver Unit that is used to receive and translate the IND 20292 CHAPTER JULY 1987 DTMF signals generatcd by SL Ts and Voice Mail System Each MFR EA ETU provides two receiver circuits shared by SLTs in a system When SLTs VMLE ETUs are installed in a system MFR EA ETUs are not required maximum of 4 MFR EA ETUs be installed per system 17 CNF E ETU The CNF E ETU is the Conference Unit that is used to establish a non amplified Conference between up to 4 parties both outside lines and extensions No more than two outside lines can participate a Conference call A CNF E ETU is required for each Conference in progress A maximum of 4 CNF E ETUs can be installed per system 18 SMDR E ETU The SMDR E ETU is the Station Message Detail Recording Unit that provides the user with de
338. EING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED PROGRAMMED 4E1 4E2 4E4 CPU EB or higher NOTES 1 During step 4 the display will show the previous assignment of the selected Trunk Group 2 Depressing key on the dial pad during step 5 will clear the additional digits assignment on display 3 Upto three 3 additional digits can be added up to three 3 digits can be deleted 4 Depressingthe ENTER key will automatically return you to step 3 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 Gs 5 Gel 9 2 is 11101 02 us 66 x oe 251 E E4 1 GENERAL INFORMATION TLI DIGIT ADD DELETE CODE ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to delete and or add up to three 3 digits for each ofthe Trunk Groups which are associated with TLI E ETUs The purpose of adding and or deleting digits is to facilitate the i connection of DID trunks and Tie Lines to the system which are supported by TLI E ETUs i 2 300 221 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 4E4 INITIALIZED VALUES 1 OPERATION AND DISPLAY Coot line Joye uti INTE X X
339. ER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE SPKR ON OFF Line TEL Enters new module and slot number Increments slot number CLEAR ENTER Enters each slot initialization B W Decrements slot number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING 818128 81 61 7 sz es 158 is CPU EB3 or higher NOTES 1 During step 4 the status of L1 to L16 indicates the type of card assigned to the slot chosen See figure below uc 3 TLI MFR NOT NOT EA USED USED La Ed Fa F3 LJ 5 NOT NOT NOT EA USED USED USED USED LED ON Assigned OFF Notassigned E E FI E E Bj 18 GENERAL INFORMATION SLOT INITIALIZATION i This area of the memory block is used to initialize interface cards to the CCU interface slots i i i i i i i i t i 300 169 ND 20292 CHAPTERS SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 304 TERMINAL TEL DSS INITIALIZATION 1 9 10 11 12 OPERATION t AND DISPLAY Go off line Depress F3 then F9 Depress 14 Dial station number to be initialized Example Station 120 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 1 When initialized 2 When not initialized See Note 3 To access DSS BLF area depress 1 14 Dial
340. Electra IMS Electra MarkII 5 Ifyou select system B Electra MarkII Type B Display shows RAA TERMINAL EMULATOR Are you using a Modem Y N Select System Electra IMS B Electra Select Com Port 1 Com 2 6 Select COM PORT which applies to your configuration A or B For example type A Display shows RAA TERMINAL EMULATOR Electra IMS B Electra MarkII Select Com Port A Com 1 B Com 2 Select Baud Rate 2400 Baud B 1200 Baud 600 Baud 300 Baud 900 16 AAR n 7 Select baud rate B C D Ensure that the baud rate selected matches the baud rate of the modems and that of the RAA E unit Display shows If modem is used otherwise see display in step 10 and continue from there AT help OK 8 Enter ATDT followed by the telephone number for the modem associated with the RAA E at the job site and depress RETURN ATDT 7530093 a Modem will go off line and will dial the telephone number entered Display shows help ATDT 753 0093 N gt ATDT 753 0093 b Carrier tone is received and a connection is made If left in this mode the time and date will appear in the screen Example 11 58 Assumes modem is connected to DTMF Telco line help ATDT 753 0093 Connect L11 58 JAN 01 SUN 9 Enter ATO and depress RETURN Computer screen r
341. F13 4 Dial tenant number to be assigned 1 3 Example Tenant 1 See Note 1 5 Enter last system buffer location to be allowed to override 1st tenant toll restriction Example 56 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 7 Repeatsteps 5 and 6 for each tenant as needed 8 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line DISPLAY JENE CIx xT x 6 jMloj oiE is Yis F e A rju Ra E gd b p Er II 5 TTT T 1 1111 15 15 0 2101 1 1 2101 1 5 0 folvielr 1 isie 012101 Xi x 2 151 6 stelo oivieja 2 2121 2 2 300 68 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 K NCTIQN SPKH ENTER Enter completed tenant assignment B W Backward Decrement tenant number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT PROGRAMMED MUST PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED All CPU levels NOTES e pe 02 e De 5 Gel 7 8 91 42 e 15 CI G C COD Dm e Loc m Fl Fed 549 Ie e 1 1 When the tenant number is entered the display will show current information assigned
342. F3 P Ao OAO 5 GENERAL INFORMATION SLT ASSIGNMENT 4 This area of the memory block is used to assign guaranteed connection between the and SLT modem Remote maintenance operation guaranteed this assignment i i 3 4 1 D 4 1 300 147 20293 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 3 5 STATION HUNTING PILOT NUMBER ASSIGNMENT OPERATION lt AND DISPLAY 10 5 15121 relat lufre T 2111111 1 11 1 e P t o T 1 6 1 e 2 P r t o v 2 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F3 then F7 3 Depress F15 4 Dialthe STATION HUNT GROUP NO 1 8 Example 2 5 Dialthe HUNT GROUP PILOT NO EXT NO other than PE and VE Example PILOT NO 190 s e 1 t o T iH IN T e 2 JP 1 1 9101 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 1 iH ju N T s e t o r N o i IN e 3 Jel r clolri 7 Repeat Steps 3 to 5 for the HUNT GROUPS to be specified 8 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 148 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988
343. FROM Multiline Terminals of system functions is permitted locally at any of up to three ETE 16D 1 Multiline Terminal positions or remotely at a PC using an RAA E unit Some changes to the system program can be entered while the system is in full operation Other changes can be entered and will take effect when the affected circuits and stations are IDLE PUSHBUTTON DIAL DTMF or DP are provided on all Electra Multiline Terminals and only DTMF dialing is possible with single line telephones for simplified and speedy calling Trunks are assigned on an individual or trunk group basis to generate either Dual Tone Multi Frequency DT MF or Dial Pulse DP dialing signals RECALL BUTTON is provided on all Electra Multiline Terminals This button can be used to generate either a hook flash to access features provided by an outside exchange or to abandon a call while retaining the outside line for origination of another call The Electra MarkII System can be programmed from a remote location with the REMOTE ADMINISTRATION ADAPTOR RAA E The RAA E which is located at the job site provides access to the system with the assistance of the following equipment Job Site CPU EB ETU ESI EB one circuit ETU modem 212A compatible with auto answer SLI E one circuit RSG E unit Remote Location 1 modem 2 NEC PC8300 Laptop Computer 3 NEC PC8231A Floppy Disk Drive 4 R
344. Figure 230 3 for station modular jack RJ11C W connection 200 17 ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 Table 230 1 41 43 Connection Information J Connector and Port Relationship LEAD FUNCTIONS KEY SLT J3 1 91 DID T 1B o 5337 65 78 um 79 13 457 14 48 15 16 48 17 49 18 507 19 83 dd z z 5 181 POI 82 517 POl Bina 33 4 z 4 RT RT RT RT RT RT RT RT 4 3 gt E 3325 33 4 z 12 44 RL 176 T NOTE 1 Number shown quotes is the port number associated with the first ESE 32E 1 Number shown in parentheses is the port number associated with the second ESE 32E 1 CCU NOTE 2 VMI E does not provide power failure transfer 33 23 33 4 em 200 18 ND 20292 CHAPTER2 JULY 1987 ac sacou JA DC IN DR 22 C _ om 888 88 00 28 Figure 230 2 Front View of ESE 32B 1 CCU Electra telephone system One pair cabling is required it is recommended that twisted pair cabling TOMDF be used Refer to section 220 of this manual for specifications Table 230 1 for lead identifications and Figure 230 4 for simplified schematic of station termination STATION C When SLTs a
345. GRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED 3 5 3 9 201 2 3 022 065 4 51 2 3 CPU levels NOTES 1 During step 4 the line key LED indication C displays the trunk groups previously assigned Cuc to the table chosen L1 to L8 correspond to trunk groups 1 to 8 respectively 3 LED Assigned Off Not Assigned 2 A maximum of 4 Trunk Groups be assigned a to each table 3 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to increment to the next table El EL EL EL EL El El EL B E E E E E GENERAL INFORMATION TRUNK GROUP TO CODE TABLE ASSIGNMENT i This memory block area of the program is used to assign Trunk Groups to code restriction tables Up to four i trunk groups can be assigned to each table 300 183 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 3E7 TABLE OCC FLAG ASSIGNMENT OPERATION lt AND gt DISPLAY 1 Gooffline Mio piE 2 Depress then F10 3 DepressF17 4 Dial table number to be set 01 32 Example Table number 14 See Note 1 5 Depress L1 to set or not set OCC flag to table chosen 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 8 1 181 1115 T Repeat steps 5
346. GRAMMING TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION DESCRIPTION 310 General 320 How to Use This Chapter 330 Resident System Default alues 340 System Programming Data MEMORY ASSIGNMENT BLOCK 1A Line Key Assignment 1B Ringing Assignment 1C DU Button Assignment DSS BLF to Attendant Assignment BLF Terminal Assignment DSS BLF Button Assignment DSS BLF Flexible Function Key Assignment DSS to CO Add On Module Assignment CO Add On Module Line Key Assignment CO Add On Module Day Ring Assignment CO Add On Module Night Ring Assignment ON 1D Station Feature 1 Prime Ringing Line Assignment Data Services Assignment User Program Assignment Trunk Group Incoming Restriction Trunk Group Outgoing Restriction Code Restriction Table Access Class of Service Assignment Terminal to Attendant Assignment Terminal to Paging Zone Assignment Call Pickup Group Assignment e ND 20292 SEPTEMBER 1988 CHAPTER 3 PROGRAMMING MEMORY ASSIGNMENT PAGE BLOCK PAGE 1 Station Assignment 300 1 1 Terminal Exchange 300 50 2 Terminal Add Port 300 52 300 1 3 Terminal Busy Assignment 300 54 4 Terminal Telephone Information 300 56 300 3 5 Port Information 300 58 6 Telephone Number Exchange 300 60 300 10 7 Telephone Number Change 300 62 PAGE 2A System Feature 1 H Programming Terminal 300 64 2 Speed Dial Tenant 300 10 Assignment 300 66 3 Speed Dial Override 300 12 Assignmen
347. GROUP NAME ASSIGNMENT OPERATION e AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline jo r TXTXDY jP R o s R A M 5 15 als 6 LITITIITITTILITI 3 DepressF12 6 N A M E T 4 Dial the number of the trunk group 1 8 to be assigned Example Trunk Group 3 See Note 1 5 Usingthe dial pad enter the desired name the 3 selected trunk group Example New York See Note 2 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 3 ir R U NIK e R olu jP e n olulP T T 2 Depress F3 then F8 7 Repeat steps 4 and 6 for all trunk groups to be assigned names 8 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 162 NCTION GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED 322 ___ p CPU EB or higher NOTES 1 After a trunk group has been selected the display will show any previous name assignment Default name CO CALL 2 The name assigned to each trunk group is limited to eight 8 characters includin
348. HAND refer to Figure 260 2 F Unplug the four pin connector ended harness labeled HAND and extend it out from the housing access hole G Locate the four pin connector ended harness from 1 on the ADA E unit into the jack labeled HAND H Locate and insert the eight pin connector ended harness from CN1 and CN2 on the ADA E unit into the jack labeled ADA Insert the four pin connector ended harness removed in step F from the Multiline Terminal into the four pin jack CN3 located on the ADA E unit J The ADA E unit is mounted component side down after termination of the optional device required Refer to Engineering Technical Information Bulletins for various device hookups K Secure the ADA E unit by inserting the screw provided with the unit Replace the access panel OR Set up to install the HFU E unit DTA E unit or the DPA E unit 260 5 ADA E INSTALLATION INTO A ETE 6 1 MULTILINE TERMINAL A Unplug the line cord at the RJ11C W then turn the Multiline Terminal upside down face down and locate the access panel on the bottom of the Multiline Terminal refer to Figure 260 1 B Slide the directory out of the way C Depress the flexible key tab on the access panel and apply upward pressure D Remove the access panel and place it aside for later reinstallation E Locate the eight pin jack labeled ADA as seen through the access view of the Multiline Terminal housing just below is
349. I AJT SNOLLVOIGNI FTANVS 2861 ANC 6505 1861 11 14 69 00 urod eurroeq 3581 843 18919 p o 18310 62 Jo 195 1 18 554 pagud st uorjoung yeg 58 51 8423 uorjoung Jo MOLLT UOISIAIP 10142824905 58 suorje no eo 1 uorjoung SUL TAL 1 491 414 Pu TAL 1 491 444 TAL 1 49 4 03 papraoad st amp ejdsiq eurure eur Ww UNLI 72402 02 007 MOU ST GUTULIO ssq ssedoq e e Jo mo uman uorung 1078 10 peururge1801d Kay 5601 941 59442 e 0101 2 5808 197 INO Sse1doq e SNY Sseidaq e 660 ssaidaq e INO 5944 e uonounyg 1038 80 104 Avy 580 SNOILILVOIGNI TIdWVS SNOLLVOIGNI 3 IdWVS 1861
350. ION 750 PROGRAMMING 150 1 GENERAL This section is intended to provide the user with a complete understanding of how to program the LCR subsystem It is strongly recommended that this section be read in it s entirety BEFORE attempting the actual programming This will allow for faster and more efficient programming 750 2 HOW TO USE THIS SECTION The remainder of the programming section Section 150 is divided into the following subsections PROGRAMMING SYSTEM NPM FOR LCR Section 750 3 describes in detail the related programming areas within the system memory blocks which are required to properly implement the LCR feature LCR PROGRAMMING CONSTRUCTION Section 750 4 provides a basic description of how the LCR subsystem is configured within the Electra MarkII Digital Telephone system and provides explanation of the various parameters of the LCR data programming ND 20292 CHAPTER MARCH 1988 INITIALIZING THE PC 8300 Section 750 5 explains how to initialize the PC 8300 portable computer in preparation for LCR programming and how to set it up to allow the automatic execution of the LCR data program upon power up of the PC 8300 PROGRAMMING LCR DATA Section750 6 explans how data is entered into the LCR program via the PC 8300 INPUT OF DATA Section 750 7 explains the general flow of programming and provides detailed examples on how the various sections of the program are accessed EXPLANATION OF LCR COMMANDS
351. ION CQ N 1 During step 4 any current access code group assigned for the Trunk Group chosen is displayed 2 ACCESSITEM ACCESS DIAL CODE A C G CODE 9 Fixed 8 Default 70 Default 71 Default 72 Default 73 Default 74 Default 75 Default ONDAN 3 Depressing the ENTER key wiil cause the display to increment to the next Trunk Group ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 D CJ 55 L3 E3 E OAG GN S 4 i GENERAL INFORMATION TRUNK GROUP TO ACCESS CODE GROUP i This area of the memory block is used to assign access item codes to the system s Trunk Groups Access item i i code 1 cannot be changed as indicated in note 2 above i 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 14 1 2 2 1 4 2 1 300 109 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2 4 VOICE MAIL HUNT GROUP ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND DISPLAY Lj 1 Gooffline IP 016 JA M 2 Depress F2 then F8 sivisi 11111 11 3 Depress F14 See Note 1 4 Enter VMI port extension number to be assigned to 1 10 1 the Voice Mail Hunt Group 11140710 147
352. LE LINE KEY ASSIGNMENT ND 20292 Depress SPKR key to go back on line CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 1C7 CO ADD ON MODULE DAY RING ASSIGNMENT OPERATION lt AND DISPLAY Go off line ofr ett NTET xT X X JejRjo a R A M 1 Depress F1 then F8 p sTs 7 B 22 dE Depress F17 nia clo TT Enter the device number 1 4 of the CO Add On TAIpIMIOIDI2 Module to be programmed Example CO Add On Module 2 See Note 1 TTT TTP Ter Depress line keys L1 L5 to assign the desired lolaly 2 ringing pattern as shown below i Rlowlil T T Green LED ON Ring CPU EB or higher Red Delayed Ring CPU EB3 or higher LED OFF No Ring CPU EB or higher Depress ENTER key See Note 2 jA 6 2 iRiolwi2i 1 Repeat Steps 5 and 6 for all line keys to be programmed on the selected device 300 26 ne B W Backward Decrements row number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED TO BE PROGRAMMED po gu 107 CPU EB or higher See Step 5 NOTES
353. LOCK 286 Local Call Override OPERATION DISPLAY 1 Gooffline Depress and 101 e Inle Ix Ix Tx lalm 2 Depress F7 then F16 PER EP E 3 Depress L1 to assign whether or not local calls will override LCR Pee owe L1LEDOFF Local calls route through LCR Local calls override by pass LCR b Depress L2 to assign whether or not local calls dialed without 1 prefix 1 area will bypass LCR L2 LED ON Local calls in 1 area bypass LCR L2LEDOFF Localcalls do not bypass LCR 4 Depress 9 4 5 olei 2 5 Depress to line 2 5 MEMORY BLOCK 2B9 LCR Bypass Assignment OPERATION 1 Gooffline Jole Je f fu r 2 per E lelei 516111 gt 4 Depress 1 2 thru L8 to select which trunk access code groups bypass LCR LED Bypass LCR LED OFF Restricted DISPLAY 2 Depress F2 then F7 3 Depress F19 5 5 is 1418 2 5 Depress ENTER 6 Depress key to go back on line 700 10 4 Prefix Add Check PFX ADD CHK
354. LOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE BE PROGRAMMED CPU levels See Code List on next page NOTES Ei NCTION IO 2 81 D x 95 2 ess 16 1 During step 4 the display shows the previous Access Code assigned to the item chosen e ANO E LC Cee Ce mm L3 Fl Fal Cd Ed 4 fd Cow 2 The Access Code entered in step 5 cannot already be assigned to another Acccess Code number or be associated with the Station Numbering Plan 3 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to increment to the next item number E El E Fl El E E El E E E E E B 4 i GENERAL INFORMATION SYSTEM ACCESS CODE ASSIGNMENT i i This area of the memory block is used to reassign the feature Access Codes of the System For a list of the i Access Codes refer to the page immediately following i 300 131 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 IBLE ITEM 03 05 06 08 13 14 15 17 24 26 27 30 32 34 35 36 37 38 DE SYSTEM FEATURE ACCESS CODE LIST bg FEATURE BGM over station speaker Call Forward All Originator Call Forward All Destination Call Forward All Attendant Call Forward Busy No Answer Originator Call Forward Busy No Answer Destination Call Forward Busy No Answer Attendant Call Park Call Pickup Dire
355. Line can be assigned to stations supported by SLI or VMI ports only 7 An access code must be programmed for CO release if internal dial tone is required Access code item 93 i GENERAL INFORMATION PRIME RINGING LINE ASSIGNMENT This area of the memory block is used to assign prime line and or ringing line preference to Multiline Li 1 t 1 285 Terminals and to assign Prime Line Extension Prime Line SLTs When prime line or prime ringing i line feature is chosen a line key must be selected depressed for each station 1 1 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 102 DATA SERVICE ASSIGNMENT OPERATION lt DISPLAY 1 Go offline Jofer NTE T TC X TX XD P mojoj u R E 2 Depress F1 then F9 3 Depress F12 4 Dial station number to be assigned Example Station 120 See Note 1 palla 5 Depress line keys L1 L6 to select desired parameters See Note 2 6 Depress ENTER See Note 3 7 RepeatSteps 5 and 6 for ail subsequent stations or go to Step 3 to program a Specific station 8 DepressSPKR key to go back on line 300 32 fT Try 5 15 515 uli wie jxjej v ND 20292
356. MEMORY BLOCK 3B2 CENTREX RINGING ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline olee Je 1 81016 8 LAE Trt 3 Depress F12 6 118161 eiejolulei 1 1 1 T RIK iojE P RIe s s cti nfe 2 Depress F3 then F7 4 Dial Trunk Group number 1 8 to be assigned Example Trunk Group 1 5 Depress L1 to L8 to assign the appropriate ring pattern and detection time s to the Trunk Group selected See Note 1 LEDON 1 Hzinterrupted tone 0 5 sec ON 0 5 sec OFF LED OFF 2sec ON 4 sec OFF tone Default nfe r R K 16 2 iD EjP R e s s 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 7 Repeatsteps 5 and 6 to assign all Trunk Groups required or depress TEL to assign a specific Trunk Group 8 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 142 ND 20292 CHAPTERS SEPTEMBER 1988 KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE B W Decrements Trunk Group number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED am 22012 Ld CPU EB3 or higher NOTES _ 51 2 0 4 5 Ge 2 P i
357. MMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE PROGRAMMED er pr Gs 6 5 4 8 an 3 28 15 5 2 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to increment to the next function key 3 FEATURE FEATURE Paging Message Wait Transfer Attendant Override Night Transfer CPU levels NOTES 1 For paging assignment one of the following 1 codes is entered 1 CODE FEATURE E EE 05 Internal all call 06 Internal zone 1 07 Internal zone 2 4 08 Internal zone 3 09 internal zones es 10 External zone 1 11 External zone 2 12 External zone 3 13 External all zones OIN GENERAL INFORMATION DSS BLF FLEXIBLE FUNCTION KEY ASSIGNMENT This area of the memory block is used to program the three Feature Access keys on the lower row of the DSS BLF These Feature Access keys can only be assigned to access features they can not be used to access stations feature should not be assigned to more than one key 1 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 1 5 DSS TO CO ADD ON MODULE ASSIGNMENT OPERATION a AND DISPLAY Re Goof line Jole JF NE TC X TX XD 6 2 Depress F1 then F8 0 5 5 7 Bic Ep ETE Sc 3 Depress 15 cjo a p M o p u L e
358. MORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAY MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE BE PROGRAMMED ALL CPU levels NOTES 1 During step 4 the display shows any previous name assigned to the station chosen K NCIION pr 2 G3 Pr Gs 6 2 x 561 fe 8 135 28 Cac ooo Cx Ez 581 Pad Ed Ed Cd Ed Ed LJ Fed 2 Each character is entered by selecting a dial key and depressing it a number of times Use the table below as a guide The F W and B W keys are used to move to the next or previous entry E El E B 9 El DIAL PAD KEYS 2 4 5 6 27 2 9 0 4 1 2 5 16 7 9 tQ mI 5 sis space 5 42 SPACE These Dial Pad Key patterns are repeated every six depressions CO 3 The character string is limited to seven digits including spaces 4 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to increment to the next station number r i GENERAL INFORMATION TELEPHONE NAME ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to assign user names to each station and or voice mail box 300 161 ND 20291 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 3C2 TRUNK
359. MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED ________ 1 2 10 2 1 2 4 1 4 8 All CPU levels See Note 1 NOTES the memory blocks of Terminal Feature Block 1D 1 The following is a list showing the relationship of device type to line key assignments 11 16 L2 ETE 6D C C 2 L3 ETE 6 i eres 14 16 2 CPU EB3 or higher pee L5 16 1 L6 30 1 5 19 Unit CPU EB or higher L16 Indicates Vacant or Unassigned LEDON Assigned d 2 Single line instruments are not assigned in this memory block They can be assigned in memory block 4C1 or when the system is initialized first or second C7 1 51 351 88 151 fe 58 Ez 2 RON 3 Station assignments cannot be changed when eStation is busy 0 ETE 16D is an attendant station 3A2 Station is a programming telephone 2A1 ETE 16D is assigned the BLF feature 1C2 Station is assigned as a tandem port The previous type device is still connected 4 Terminal add port cannot be completed when the port is assigned as a DSS BLF therefore the DSS BLF assignment must be removed 1C1 before 1 2 can be completed El El F EEE H E B El El E E B 5 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to increment to the next channel number i GENE
360. ND 20292 Electra 42 22 DIGITAL TELEPHONE SYSTEM INSTALLATION SERVICE MANUAL NEC AMERICA Inc ND 20292 JULY 1987 INSTALLATION SERVICE INTRODUCTION This manual provides the information required to install program and maintain the Electra Digital Telephone System This manual is divided into nine chapters as follows CHAPTER 1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Chapter 1 contains general descriptive information about the system and details the telephone company and FCC requirements It also includes feature description terms access codes indications and equipment identification CHAPTER 2 HARDWARE INSTALLATION Chapter 2 provides the information required to prepare and install the system It also contains description and installation information about ancillary devices connected to Multiline Terminals CHAPTER 3 PROGRAMMING Chapter 3 provides descriptive information about the programming and explains how to enter the data base record onto the programming sheets job specs and into system memory CHAPTER 4 STATION OPERATION Chapter 4 provides the operation procedures for Multiline Terminals Attendants single line telephones and DSS BLF consoles CHAPTER 5 MAINTENANCE Chapter 5 provides maintenance instructions and flow charts for the system CHAPTER 6 ETI Engineering Technical Information Bulletins pertinent to this system should be included in this section to provide a complete and update
361. NDEM HUNT GROUP ASSIGNMENT 1 1 LI This area of the memory block is used to assign Trunk Groups to Tandem Hunt Groups Different Trunk Groups may be assigned the same Hunt Group 1 M ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 5A STATION COPY ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND DISPLAY The feature to be copied must be Shown in the display before entering copying mode Example Ringing assignment on Station 104 1 Depress F5 3 Depress F6 4 Dialthe station number to be copied Example Station 105 5 Dialthelast highest station number to be copied Example Station 125 6 Depress ENTER key See Notes 1 and 2 7 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 236 932 ON OFF Line We GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED All CPU leveis NOTES 1 Depressing the ENTER key will cause the feature assigned to the station identified in step 1 to be copied to all stations between the lowest and highest station inclusive defined 2 After the ENTER key is depressed the display will return to the feature from step 1 with the station number incremented by one 3 The following memory blocks are the only memory blocks that can be copied using this feature 1A Line Key Assignment Not S amp R SE or PE 1B Ringing Assignment Day amp
362. NFORMATION TABLE ALLOW DENY This memory block area of the program is used to individually assign each of the 32 code restriction tables as either allow or deny tables i i i i i i i i i i 300 181 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK3E6 TRUNK GROUP TO CODE TABLE ASSIGNMENT OPERATION lt AND gt DISPLAY 1 Gooffline 2 Depress then FIO 3 Depress F16 4 Dial table number to be set 01 32 Example Table number 14 See Note 1 tole Je f fu fi P 018 15 115 Trae 22121 TTTTTTTT e Tr c 5 Depress up to four line keys L1 to L8 to assign the appropriate Trunk Groups for the table chosen See Note 2 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 3 r B t 5 E p 2 421 7 Repeatsteps 5 and 6 for all subsequent tables required or go to step 3 to select a particular table 8 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 182 ND 20293 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 NCTION QO ON OFF Line EL Enters new table number Increments table number ENTER Enters each table assignment B W Decrements table number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMED MUST BE PRO
363. Note 1 NOTES 1 During step 5 the display will show the previous ESI path assignment for the ESI ports chosen Although a slot associated with an ESI EA ETU can be accessed and will display it s path assignment no assignments can actually be changed See figure below 12 EN EE CH1 CH2 CH3 CH4 L1 L2 Channel 1 L3 L4 Channel 2 L5 L6 Channel 3 L7 L8 Channel4 OFF OFF Single Voice Path OFF ON Dual Voice Path ON OFF Data CPU EB or higher ON ON Data and Dual Voice m or higher 2 Only Channels 1 and 3 can be assigned for both data and dual voice path For this to be done the next adjacent channel s Channel 2 and or Channel 4 must be assigned single voice only however data and single voice can be assigned to all four channels ee 280253 G2 05 D Gs 861 Dr 2 um eU 412 16 Cee 551 aud 1 gt Dem me m gan cap c F4 Cs 3 Depressing the ENTER key will cause the display to increment to the next ESI slot 4 ETE 6 ETE 16 2 Multiline Terminals not compatible with data or dual path features GENERAL INFORMATION ESI EB DATAAND SECOND VOICE PATH ASSIGNMENT This area of the memory block is used to assign data capa
364. OGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY SLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMEO HAVE BE PROGRAMMED All CPU levels NOTES 1 After step 3 line key L1 LED will display the previous assignment LILEDON Allow forward override LILEDOFF Deny forward override i GENERAL INFORMATION ALLOW FORWARD OVERRIDE This area of the memory block is used to allow or deny on a system wide basis the ability to re direct a call forward previously set to different target station ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 ND 20393 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2B3 DIT TRUNK TO TENANT ASSIGNMENT OPERATION e AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline 2 Depress 2 then F7 3 Depress 13 4 Enter the trunk number to be assigned 01 40 Example Trunk 2 See Note 1 5 Enter the tenant number 1 3 to be assigned to the particular trunk Example Tenant 2 See Note 3 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 is Y s FTe A T u RaTE 2 T Li TTT TTT A TTT loli r eIN AIN T it T e N A N T 2 rfr K r e N AN T k o 2 1 2 Tr Tl eln al 7 RepeatSteps 4 and 5 for all subsequent trunks or depress TEL to assign a spec
365. OJ SB 51 859229 JO 3121 ISBT S 0 0J 3 neje q 8 552228 aded 852228 18 5 yespuey jr e 3 YI e 1 OL 9107 600 9107 870 1861 PHARLdVHO 26202 007 puooos 3511 IYJ 3 4 uorjoeuuoo IYJ 19 03 669228 6592205 q se 89522 yons LON 1841 9 1 01 po12auuo224 51 1014846 au ploy uo o ejd p 3 neJa T ssaoov erp usey puo2as YIT euo dn Juey 9AtSn oxo uo 182 1541 92814 03 3 neje T SSI pue uo WEI 10116156 AJ 888 8034 SuneAsuy q 35 03 A Eoryeurojne st uorjeis gt 22814 oj y 559258 erp pu yoo uaym
366. ON HOLD offers the Electra Markl system user the convenience of originating a call to a second station in the system while using the same line from an existing call This allows the user to consult with someone while holding the outside party Afterwards the user may initiate a Conference return to the outside party alternate between the two calls Broker s Call or Transfer the outside party to the consulted internal party DATA COMMUNICATION is made available when the system is equipped with a ETU and with a DTA E unit installed in each Multiline Terminal ETE 6D 1 ETE 16D 1 and ETE 16K 1 requiring this feature These data ready Multiline Terminals require ESI EB type ports The DTA E unit provides a terminal user with the capability of Data Communication and Voice Communication simultaneously 100 7 ND 20292 JULY 1987 LINE SECURITY provides a station protection from receiving audible tones such as Camp On or Override while busy this prevents disruption of ongoing data transmission when a terminal is connected to an acoustic coupled modem DC POWER OPERATION may be desired for its simplicity of providing standby power The system can be powered by a local 48VDC source When so required each CCU must be equipped with a PSE DD 1 PSU this PSU is installed instead of the PSE AD 1 PSU DIAL 0 FOR ATTENDANT speeds the calling process when seeking to reach the attendant When the syst
367. PC 8300 Battery Compartment Cover 3 Install four AA size dry batteries in the battery compartment See Figure 740 3 4 Replace the cover of the battery compartment 700 6 Figure 740 3 8300 Battery Installation 5 Turn ON the battery backup switch located on the bottom of the PC 8300 See Figure 740 4 Figure 740 4 PC 8300 Battery Backup Switch NOTES 1 As outlined in the section on batteries the backup power source consists of internal nickel cadmium batteries The Backup Power switch located on the bottom of the PC 8300 must be in the ON position for the computer to operate 2 If the PC 8300 is stored and is unused for more than 30 days the backup power switch should be set to OFF to prevent the total discharge of the batterie and deterioration in performance 740 4 FLOPPY DISK UNIT PC 8231A CONNECTION 1 Power to the micro floppy disk unit is supplied by an AC pack included or by the optional battery pack When using the unit in the home or office AC power can be obtained by inserting the AC pack as shown Insert the AC pack into the device until it clicks thus making sure that it will not pop out during use The inlet is usually covered by a sliding cover Figure 740 5 Inserting the AC Power Pack 2 The lid of the 8231 is opened by the slide lock buttons on the left and right side of the unit Place your hands on both of these buttons and lift place your hands on both of
368. Panel s B The ETUs used in this system make extensive use of CMOS technology Extreme care must be taken to avoid static discharge when handling ETUs C A switch is provided on the interface ETUs to protect circuitry from any damage during installation with system power ON D The component side of ETUs must be on the right side when installed Viewed from the front as shown in Figure 240 5 115 518 aE e Figure 240 5 Installing ETUs 240 4 COMMON CONTROL ETUs A CPU E CPU EB Prior to programming the system data Switch 2 SW2 must be set to the ON position to allow memory contents retention in case of a power failure or brownout Failure to activate the backup battery circuit will result in the system data returning to default values and the loss of speed dialing callback request message waiting clock calendar station and trunk group name assignments etc if a power failure or brownout occurs Anytime a CPU E or CPU EB is installed the system clock calendar must be set This also applies when battery backup fails for any reason This procedure is provided in Section 430 of this manual Figure 240 6 CPU E Switch Layout When this ETU is removed for long term storage set the SW2 switch to OFF position This will prevent the battery from constantly discharging The battery when fully charged will retain memory contents for approximately 7 days Switch
369. RAL INFORMATION TERMINAL ADD PORT EQUIPMENT TYPE i ASSIGNMENT This area of the memory block is used to assign specific terminal equipment to unused ports systems that have been previously programmed and to add new terminal equipment when expanding the system This i area of the memory block is also used to change the type of device assigned to a specific port ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 1E3 TERMINAL BUSY ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND DISPLAY LyP RjoleiRjAlM 2 Depress F1 then F10 515 11618 EDT 3 Depress F13 See Note 1 5 1 1111111 5 Depress line key L1 to assign the desired status to the terminal See Note 2 6 Depress ENTER key See Notes 3 amp 4 iT 5 IN our cjHi i 0151 r N o u T 151 8 cinan 1 9 Depress 1 1 to change the status of the selected port See Note 2 4 Enter station number to change its busy out status Example Station 104 7 To access port area depress L13 8 Tochange the port s busy out status enter module 1 4 slot
370. RS232C NULL MODEM CABLE TERMINAL Transmit Transmit Receive Receive DTE DTE Figure 2 RS232C Communications Terminal Interface 3 8 VOICE MAIL INTERFACE ND 20292 FEBRUARY 1987 CHAPTER 8 VOICE MAIL INTERFACE TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE 810 GENERAL 800 1 820 SPECIFICATIONS 820 1 General Information 800 1 820 2 Signaling Parameters 800 1 820 3 Additional Functions 800 1 820 4 Hardware Requirements 800 2 820 5 Hardware Installation 800 2 830 PROGRAMMING 830 1 Required Programming 800 2 830 2 Recommended Programming 800 2 SECTION 810 GENERAL The Voice Mail Interface VMI E provides the Klectra Mark system with the ability to support selected Voice Mail equipment Depending on the type of Voice Mail equipment and the method of connection a greater or lesser degree of integration is provided The VMI E will support when used with Voice Mail equipment that provides these features Access to Voice Mail system via Hunt Group b In Band Voice Mail Message Waiting Indications Set and Cancel Call placement by the Voice Mail System SECTION 820 SPECIFICATIONS 820 1 GENERAL INFORMATION The VMI E ETU provides four 4 discrete two way ommunication channels which are used for _ interfacing Voice Mail equipment Each VMI E 800 1 channel is equipped with a DTMF encoding circuit which sends DTMF signaling to the Voice Mail equipment
371. RY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO PROGRAMMED All CPU levels See Step 15 NOTES F W Forward Increments port device number G2 Ge Gs Ge 0 2 us Gee ae C3 E gt m E ET 3 1 There are four terminal busy out assignment modes Station Port DSS BLF and Modem When entering Memory Block 1 3 the programming station will default to station busy out assignment E E E E B B Bj 2 After specifying the port device by station number DSS BLF number modem number or by port location 1 1 is set to assign a particular status to the port device 1 indications are follows LEDON Port Not Busied Out LEDFlash Busied Out LEDOFF Port Not Assigned 3 Program changes are not accepted when Multiline Terminal isunplugged not idle DSS BLF console is unplugged SLT or modem is not idle A terminal is assigned as a tandem port 4 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to increment to the next device number This area of the memory block is used to busy out or restore port devices including ESI E SLI E i COLE TLI E VMI E MFR E and CNF E ETUs The port device can be indexed by port stat
372. S 232C cable PC 8495A 01 is used to connect the PC 8300 to the LCR E ETU One end of the RS 232C cable is connected to the RS 232C connector located on the rear panel of the PC 8300 The other end of the cable is connected to the RS 232C connector provided with the LCR E ETU See Figures 120 5 120 1 Figure 720 5 Outside View of RS 232C Cable PC 8495A 01 14 25 Figure 720 6 Connector Pin Configuration 700 3 PIN NO Contrast adjustment ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 SIGNAL REMARKS Protective Ground Transmit Data Receive Data Request to Send Clear to Send Data Set Ready Signal Ground Data Carrier Detect Data Terminal Ready Ring Indicator 09 gt OTHER PINS ARE NOT CONNECTED Figure 720 7 Connector Wiring Connection d Printer Cable PC 8494A or PC 8294A This printer cable is used for connecting a printer to the PC 8300 The 26 pin female end is connected to the PRINTER connector located on the rear panel of the PC 8300 The 36 pin male end is connected to the connector provided on the printer See Figures 720 8 720 9 and Table 720 1 Figure 720 8 Outside View of Printer Cable PC 8494A or PC 8294A 1 25 0000000000009 0000000002000 dE Figure 720 9 Connector Pin Configuration e Floppy Disk 3 5 inches The floppy disk is used for programming and maintenance of the LCR data Th
373. SIN3IANDISSV IWA OL LIS 100d W3GOM VNV LIG 65 22 GNV 8 v 2 532018 062 006 LONNVO 3HVALIJOS WALSAS GXIA SI HWIHO LHOIN 9NIONTH L LL HSHWAN AWIHO ONBIIVNHSLIXS LHDIN 804 LHOIN SLVOIGNI OLEN IN 1 LNAWNODISSV 4 ANNUAL 4 SNO LOTTAS NUGLLVd Rio OL 19 22225 CR ETE MOO em 2 a SNHXLLVd G3NDISSV OL 1041862 6 02 08 Lot SIN3WNDISSV 6 8 55 42018 AYOWIWN 5 121345 gor QS3NOISSV AVTAY HOS 162 006 3HVALJOS NALSAS A TVAWSLENI m E E Z 20 9 U E 27 Eun 1 4L SLNAINNDISSV 6 ANY 8 77 22 532018 AHOW3IN 301 5 2345 g8O 565 008 H ISV IIVAV SNOISNALX N3WNDISSY 21 NOISNALXA WLS 336 G3NDISSV d ac
374. SLI E ETUs in one CCU only if not then in two adjacent CCUs NOTE 3 External speakers and amplifiers for paging must be locally provided 200 6 The same care should apply to modem connected to the DTA E unit modem to be connected is not provided with a three prong type cord supporting conduit ground the modem must be properly connected to earth ground 220 ELECTRICAL NOISE GENERATORS Certain equipment such as welding machines thyristor driven power supplies large electric motors etc generate electrical noise As a stored program machine the Electra MarkII system is vulnerable to this noise When this type of machinery is present at an installation the following precautionary steps are urged 1 Locate the CCUs telephone sets and cabling away from these machines 2 If cables must pass near these machines use shielded cable with the shield grounded External Paging Speaker External Source Multiline Terminal OSS BLFs DID Lines 8 Multiline C pu Terminals 5115 SLI on E CO PBX Lines Modems O source Night Fo External gt Tone Ring BGM Sources cw Voice Dictation fg Equipment SLT Modems ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 3 Ensure all machines of this type are well grounded
375. SS BLF to attendant assignments are completed depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 14 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 B W Backward Decrement device number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING IMEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED ________ 2 __ ic Ce All CPU leveis NOTES SPKR ta 111 ar 2 8 E e 138 1 Before DSS BLF can be assigned the 3rd or 4th attendant station the station must first be assigned as an attendant C 070 Dm pm 1 E3 LJ Ed 4 Cow 1 2 Display will show VACANT or ATT 1 to 4 depending on whether an assignment was made previously 3 A maximum of two DSS BLFs be assigned to one attendant D 4 Use the B W and F W keys to quickly locate a particular device when required El El El El El El E E E E EI B i GENERAL INFORMATION DSS BLF TO ATTENDANT ASSIGNMENT 1 The DSS BLF console of which there a maximum 6 are assigned to attendant positions in this memory block This programming area is closely related to memory block 3A2 Attendant 3rd amp 4th i Assignment where stations are assigned as attendant positions Memory blocks 3A2
376. STARTED TAN AD ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS 2 Insufficient Data If an LCR program was created which does not produce enough information to allow Call Routing ROUTE ADVANCE TABLE DOWN LOAD START when this program is transferred from the LCR E ABNORMAL END SYS DATA INCOMPLETE to the computer a display similar to the one shown is provided AREA CODE TABLE DOWN LOAD START ABNORMAL END 3 Electra Not Ready LCR RESTARTED If the computer is unable to communicate with the LCR E a display similar to the one shown is provided During the input of data or commands if an invalid input is keyed in the computer it will generate a beep tone to indicate that an invalid command or data was entered Table 750 1 Error Table REASON POSSIBLE SOLUTION COMMAND MODE Line Trouble LCR E ETU and Check RS 232C cable Verify cable Down Load PC8300 Disk Drive connections Ensure LCR E ETU Up Load not communicating Busyout switch is ON Verify System Control properly PC 8300 and disk Check cable between PC 8300 and commands except FDD Error drive not Disk Drive Check power on Disk System Control communicating Drive Check for properly inserted properly diskette Check that diskette write protect tab is set properly Printer Not Ready PC 8300 cannot communicate with Check connections to pr
377. Section 750 8 describe each command and gives examples of their use ERROR MESSAGES Section 750 9 explains the various possible error messages as well as the reasons why they occur and possible solutions for each of them 750 3 PROGRAMMING SYSTEM NPM FOR LCR 1 Programming System Data Prior to programming LCR data using the portable computer PC 8300 system data relating to LCR must be programmed from a programming position keyset Keys used for programming are shown in Figure 750 1 a 8 Ec era 5s I8 Figure 750 1 Programming Keys 700 8 IMPORTANT Before going into system data programming make sure the switch SW1 on the LCR E ETU is turned ON for battery backup of system data NOTE Memory Blocks 2C1 2C2 and 2C3 may have to be referenced for proper LCR operation Incoming Tie lines can use tandem access to seize outgoing trunks Economy of service can be achieved by assigning LCR to the tandem ports associated with those Tie lines This allows the system to route the tandem calls to the most economical line available a Override of LCR Override of LCR can be assigned by class of service on a station basis When it is programmed to a station LCR does not apply to the station b LCR 1 Plus Dialing Assignment LCR 1 plus dialing assignment must be programmed if the location of the system is a 1 plus dialing area This assignment is on a system ba
378. Station Selection also DSS BLF Data Terminal Adaptor Dual Tone Multi Frequency External Control Relay Card Electronic Station Interference Electronic Telephone Equipment Electronic Telephone Unit Extension F Federal Communications Commission Forward Forward Busy No Answer G H Handsfree Unit Speakerphone ND 20292 1 JULY 1987 IDF INT LCD LCR LED LK MDF MFR MIC MMC MSG MW NBR occ OPX PCM PE PSU PR RAA RSG SCC 4 Integrated Circuit Intermediary Distribution Frame Internal Calling on Intercom J K L Liquid Crystal Display Least Cost Routing Light Emitting Diode Line Key M Main Distribution Frame Multi Frequency Receiver Dual Tone Microphone Unit and Control Button Module Memory and Controller Message Message Waiting N Number 0 Other Common Carriers Off Premises Extension P Pulse Code Modulation Primary Extension Power Supply Unit Power Failure Transfer Tip Side Power Failure Transfer Ring Side Q Remote Administration Adaptor Ringing Supply Generator 5 Specialized Common Carriers 100 SE Secondary Extension S amp R Save and Repeat Feature and Control Button SLI Single Line Telephone Interface SLT Single Line Telephone SMDR Station Message Detail Recorder SPD Speed Dial SPKR Speaker Control Button STA Station lt Time Division Multiplexing Switching Method TLI Tie Line Interf
379. T 4 This area of the memory block is used to assign the number of digits 1 13 for the Forced Account Codes 300 145 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 384 RAA SLT ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND DISPLAY jo E e o i INTE iPIR o c RIA v Mlolo e is 15121 jR AlA s t v 1 is 151011 4 1 Gooffline 2 Depress then 3 Depress F14 4 Dialstation number of the SLT port associated with the RAA and then station number of RAA Example Station No of SLT 150 Station No of RAA 104 5 Depress ENTER key 6 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 146 ND 20293 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE GUIDE FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY MUST PROGRAMMEO HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED G2 Ge 5 81101 8 49 1 us Ca Ce or higher NOTES 1 Default assignment is No Correspondence 1 Ce Co cL 2 clear the setting during step 3 depress the Geen 3 CLEAR key and then the ENTER key Ce m 1 LJ Ed 9S Pa
380. T Taf r e NJA N T T T T T 5 Depress L1 to L8 to assign the appropriate Trunk Groups to the tenant chosen See Note 2 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 3 T R u N K e r E N A N T T T 1111 T Repeat steps 5 and 6 for all subsequent tenants or depress TEL key to program a specific tenant 8 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 106 EL Enters new tenant number Increments tenant number CLEAR 2001 ENTER Enters each assignment B W Decrements tenant number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY SLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROG MUST PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED RAMMED 2 2 283 2 3 2C2 ________ 8 4 3C2 CPU levels NOTES SPKR ine 1 During step 4 any previous Trunk Group assignment for the tenant entered is shown by the LED pattern of L1 to L8 2 In assigning the Trunk Groups to a specific tenant in step 5 the following procedure is used L1 to L8 correspond to Trunk Groups 1 to 8 respectively LEDon Assigned to tenant LED off Not assigned to tenant 3 Depression of the ENTER key will increment the display to the next tenant number GENERAL INFORMATION TRUNK GROUP TO TENANT ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to assign up to eight system Trunk Groups to each of the tenants ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEP
381. TEL Select new slot information GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING BEING M MEMORY LOCI EMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED CPU EB3 or higher NOTES 1 display at the bottom row of the LCD is the software slot assignment type and yyyy is the hardware slot installed card type Card type LCD display OunozZ urro TO m ma eng 2 When slot is not installed or assigned is displayed 29 3 Ifthe hardware slot type is different from the software one the hardware slot card does not work Software card type the type that has been recognized by the main software presently Hardware card type the type which is presently installed i GENERAL INFORMATION SOFTWARE HARDWARE SLOT STATUS i This area of the memory block is used to display software hardware information for each ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 Ci 5181 rd 08 1 era 12 15 551 zm 551 Ca em Ex F3 Pa Em JKL 8 akele cm LIES E If you want to change the software card type you can reassign it by system programming 4C 1 Card Interface Slot Assignment ND 20391 CHAPTER3 AUGUST 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 5B6 SOFTWARE
382. TEMBER 1988 x 891 ez e ess os Duc 551 sec C Ec 25 Em 58 L4 P3 300 107 0 20392 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2C3 TRUNK GROUP TO ACCESS CODE GROUP OPERATION Gooffline Depress F2 then F8 Depress 13 Dial Trunk Group number 1 8 Example 4for Trunk Group 4 See Note 1 Dial access item code A C G 1 8 to be assigned to the Trunk Group chosen Example Dial 3 for item code A C G number 3 See Note 2 Depress ENTER key See Note 3 Trunk Group Depress the key to go back on line MM AND ye DISPLAY totr J Jt INTE P R r ajm miojo sivisi TTT 11111 11111111 6 el fel 1111 1111 TIRIKI s TAT TeT JsS 1 T T iriki 16141 1 1 Tal Ici Teix 11 8 61 el ef lela T T 6 1813 r RIk s TAT c Je 111 rir k 615 Tal Ter six Repeat steps 5 and 6 for all subsequent Trunk Groups required or depress TEL key to assign a specific 300 108 B W Decrement Trunk Group number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY SLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGI MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE BE PROGRAMMED 2 __ ___2 1 ___ 2c3 C All CPU levels NOTES ri K NCL
383. TER key See Note 3 Repeat steps 7 and 8 for all VMI ports to be assigned 10 Depress the key to go back on line 300 210 vvu eiu ND 20292 CHAPTER SEPTEMBER 1988 ee aLock tmarmay 77777272 PROGRAMMED MUST GE PROGRAMMED HAVE BE PROGRAMMED 488 CPU levels 12 5 1 Duringstep 6 L1 L16 show the current 02 9 5 6 9 8 assignments LINE BUTTONS 111112 4 NERS Te 15 16 117 18 Cee Gee sel pee 2 css B aoa 2 3 d Ce 9 E E E E Multiplier M Interdigit Interval 40 mS 10 mS x M Default 110 mS DTMF Digit Duration 60 mS 50 mS x M Default 110 mS Pause Time 500 mS x M Default 1000 mS Disconnect Time 500 mS 200 mS x M Default 1500 mS 3 Depressing the ENTER key will increment the display to the next VMI port GENERAL INFORMATION INITIALIZE 2 ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to assign various signal timing parameters to each VMI port 1 2 2 1 1 800 211 ND 20292 CHAPTER SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 4C1
384. THAT CAN BE DIALED STATION NUMBER mM m NUMBER OF DIGITS THAT CAN BE DIALED NUMBER OF DIGITS THAT BE DIALED 300 287 moje oq AN auoudejos o Suis 20 juourdinbo 22104 uo sua1xe ad 1 yuaurdinba 922128 o 6668 0001 40 668 001 uorsuajxo T A 104 6668 0001 40 668 001 J8quinN 6668 0001 40 668 001 J qwuny AN 6668 0001 10 668 001 jung 40 1 6668 0001 40 668 001 uny 40 5 IWA OL LIS 1004 VNV LIG 5 22 8 1 303 5 5 45 882 006 15 perq omy 0 5 9210A OO Jaquinu uotsua4x JWA 1994 941 10 SUTNI 9 1004 9 asn 115 8 8155 Kejaq 0 1558 81 34811 943 3993 juny 10 ayy 8 81 LIG 943 1843 juny 10
385. TIV OL 22 OLS3NOLONINKOONI TIY SINIQ an A NAHM 912195 ANTI FIAI o1 SANIT OO NO 1 15 8 HOLVH3dO G 91 1 ke gunivaa amma STIVO NOLLVIS 92 002 NOISNSLX4 ancag OL 6621 0001 10 668 000 NOISNSLX3 155 OL NOLLVIS AULNG Wall AULNG NOILdINOSAA WALI 11 17 OL NDISSV ANOM3K d g 1 4 alo 3 HE 9 41118101 via a 1 ol x slo ajaja 1 41 11 D N 1 01252 I ojalala 4 218 G3lonussuNn v jajaja 1 1 304 3AV31 1 3 ol 214 g 5 21513 9 Tis 3 m 0 1 4 viv old 4 414131 85 40 5 SNOLLOTHLS33 ANNAL 38Y1 3002 2 SLN3IANDISSSV NOILVLS 2 3 542018 131 0L 6 8 9 1 SNOILINULSNI NOILVDISIDIdS MEMORY BLOCKS 1D 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 AND 1 1 amp 2 STATION ASSSIGNMENTS 1D 7 104 amp 12 5 2 STATION ADD PORT
386. TRUNK GROUP TO LINE POOL GROUP ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline __ o TOxI Ix x D 1 18 6 2 Depress F3 then F7 5 2 r e a r u R e 1 LTT TEP Tee Py 3 Depress F19 6 1 i 1 1 8 1 1 4 Dial Pool Group number 1 to 8 TrIRTuINIKT 6 TeToToTt 1 Ter Example Pool Group 2 See Note 1 iL vine 1 8101 1221 5 Depress L1 to L8 to assign the appropriate trunk groups to the Pool Group chosen See Note 2 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 3 7 RepeatSteps 5 and 6 to assign Trunk Groups to all the desired Pool Groups or depress TEL key to program a specific Pool Group 8 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 156 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE CLEAR ENTER Enters each assignment B W Backward Decrements pool group number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY SLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMEO 380 _____ _____ or higher NOTES 1 During Step 3 any previous Trunk Group 2 0 5 6 9 assignment for the Pool Group entered is shown 2 Inassigning the Trunk Groups to a specif
387. UIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY SLOCK THAT MAY MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED e All CPU levels See Note 1 NOTES 2 15 C 1 After port location is entered the second line of the display will show wc x 1 ixixixix 18111 1 1111 2402 9 um Dx Cu PORT ETU C STATUS COMM AGE TUNE CPU EB3 or higher Cs 55 PORT STATUS 1 n GENERAL INFORMATION PORT INFORMATION L i This area of the memory block is used to check the status of a port When checking the status of a port three basic items are checked These whether the system acknowledges the port through i software and hardware and the number of ETU communication errors ND 20292 CHAPTER SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 1E6 TELEPHONE NUMBER EXCHANGE OPERATION lt AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F1 then F10 3 Depress F16 4 Dialoneofthe station numbers to be exchanged Example Station 104 5 Dial the other station number to be exchanged Example Station 125 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 1 7 Repeat steps 4 6 for all additional exchanges 8 Depress SPKR key to go back on line Joie J Ej CIX x xD 1
388. UIPMENT INTERFACING 1 Music on Hold MOH a Auxiliary input 0 6 V RMS signal level b Input impedance 10k ohms 2 SMDR Output Female connector System output Standard RS 232C 3 External Paging Audio a Output power 10 0 dBm signal level b Output impedance 600 ohms 4 BGM Input Auxiliary input 0 1V RMS signal level b Inputimpedance 50k ohms 5 External Paging Contacts Contact rating 500 mA 24V DC 6 Hookswitch contacts Contact rating 100 mA 48V DC NOTE Do Not Send AC Signal Through Hookswitch Contacts 7 External Tone Ringer Output Output Level 0 1V peak to peak 1 0V peak to peak b Output Impedance 600 ohms c Relay Contact Rating 500mA 24V DC 200 14 AJU 14 8 Night Chime Relay Contact Rating 500mA 24V DC 9 DTA E Relay Contact Raiting 24VDC 1 120 0 5A 220 21 DTA E The DTA E unit is provided with an RS 232C for interfacing with Data Terminal Equipment DTE Prior to configuring a system with data capability you should complete the job specification sheets provided with this manual available in the ESE 32B 1 CCU as document number ND 20234 An understanding of system programming is required to complete the job specification sheets See Chapter 3 Programming This section contains specifications for the DTA E unit and precautions that must be followed when installing the DTA E unit 1 Interface The DTA E unit is equipped with a female RS
389. W Decrement Ext Ring Control circuit GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK 8EING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO 86 PROGRAMMED All CPU levels NOTES UNIO N 1 There are 4 External Ringing Control circuits CJ 1 4 thatany or all ofthe Trunk Groups 1 8 can Care n be assigned to Ca 2 2 Each External Ringing Control circuit can b Cs Each External ging Control circuit can be assigned one of five ringing intervals 1 5 NR 1 During step 4 the previous interval assignment onana c E INTERVAL 1 NUMBER RINGING PATTERN IKL 1 0 5 sec ON 0 5 sec OFF n 2 1 1 OFF 3 2secON 2sec OFF us D 4 0 5 sec ON 0 5 OFF 0 5 2 5 5 Continuous Always ON 3 When assigning Trunk Groups to the External Ringing Control circuits L1 L8 correspond to Trunk Groups 1 8respectively LEDON Assigned 5 Trunk groups associated with DIT or DID trunks LEDOFF Notassigned will not activate the external ring contacts 4 Depressing the ENTER key will cause the display to increment to the next External Ring Control circuit GENERAL INFORMATION i i This area of the memory block is used to assign Trunk Groups to any or all of the 4 available External Ring Control circuits and to assign each of these circuits
390. Y BLOCK 1D5 TRUNK GROUP OUTGOING RESTRICTION OPERATION AND DISPLAY 1 Go offline ofe J e i NE T xx 1 mojoj 2 2 Depress F1 then F9 101118 0 11 1 3 Depress 15 6 Joul lelo rie s 5 L1 to L8 represent trunk groups 1108 respectively If no change in status is required proceed to step 7 4 Dialstation number to be assigned Example Station 104 See Note 1 6 Depress L1 to L8 to allow or deny access to the trunk groups for outgoing calls LED ON Restricted LED OFF Unrestricted 6 ofu r s o R E s 0 T TT T1111 7 Depress ENTER key Repeat Steps 5 7 for all subsequent Multiline Terminals or go to step 3 to restrict a specific terminal See Note 2 8 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 38 ine B W Backward Decrement the station number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE BE PROGRAMMED 15 202 263 CPU levels NOTES 1 During step 4 L1 to L8 correspond to trunk groups 1 to 8 respectively and will show any previous assignment
391. Y BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY 8LOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED All CPU levels NOTES x 037 31 51 381 7 Gr MM x5 6 c 2 o ess ess s CU Ced m 3 Fal CHO 1 4 L1 and L2 are set to allow or disallow the option according to the following patterns L1 ON not sent out if first digit OFF sent out L2 ON not sent out if first digit OFF sent out I EE F EI E oe ce GENERAL INFORMATION AND AS FIRST DIGIT ASSIGNMENT area of the memory block is used to allow disallow and from being sent out of the system as the first digit when a station is on an outside line If the feature is disallowed dialing as the first digit will access system features such as last number redial If allowed then system speed dial and last number redial can be accessed via the primary extension 16 300 73 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2A6 SHDR INCOMING PRINT OPERATION 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F2 then F6 3 Depress 16 AND DISPLAY tofe J fe ji INE TXTXD jPjRjO s R A M Mjolp E 15 151 1 21111111111 1111 15 erfi 111 21111111111 1111 4 Depress as required t
392. Y BLOCK SEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROG MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED lag 261 263 2686 CPU EB2 or higher NOTES 1 By default Uniform Dial Numbers are assigned to Trunk Access Code Group 2 Cu 551 se La Ed 54 Fd 3 LJ Pd Lal Cow 1 2 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to increment to the next Uniform Dial Item Number E E BE Ee BJ GENERAL INFORMATION UNIFORM DIAL TO TRUNK ACCESS CODE GROUP ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to assign Trunk Access Code Groups to the various Uniform Dial Numbers required With Tie Line service this assignment determines which trunks will be used when i accessing uniform dialing 300 115 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2C7 NIGHT CHIME ASSIGNMENT OPERATION a AND gt DISPLAY 1 Gooffline totr le J nfe xt xD lP mojoj 1 T 5 5 T TT 211111 1 12 11 11 2 Depress F2 then F8 T T EPIT TTT TTT 3 Depress F17 4 Dial the night chime number being assigned 1 3 Example Night Chime 1 See Note 1 11411 111 1 5 Depress 11 to 1 8 assign the appropriate Trunk Groups to the night
393. a ut 190 amp 51 19228 4 00 0 11706 SNOLLVOIGNI FIdWVS SNOLLVOIGNI GOT 14 8 1861 PHAuIdVHO 2620 811 007 8208 SNV Proy uou uo 4 61 11959 4 pue 51484 weed axa Suturoout 94 2 SN V 559241 4 181 49928 100 903 194 8 Tre 01 AT Surgsep 93 8 qaq 8 axa ssa1dap p oq uo 183 1496914 aoe q 78 197 8 Sutusejj sq SNV pue axa uasoyo aq suorje1ado 347 Jo euo Sutsn 35218044 Apeais 11 st 197 02218 ur Buut 4ooq jjo uay M 3uspueny SNOILVOIGNI TIdWVS 611 007 jnoxy o 013936 ay 16 15 3nox20 IYI UF 61 Jey uorje3s jo 310320 aq OL ALON 208 141 49918 dn Juvy e 3A139391 484225 4103201 1018 0 FIG e 70000000000 401835 aquinu uorsuojxe
394. a Digit 1 or 0 disconnect station b Any digit 2 to 9 allow user to dial another digit next step Step 4 5th Digit Dialed a Digit 1 or 0 allow another digit go to step 6 b Any digit 2 to 9 allow another digit next step Step 5 Check last 3 digits dialed a Lowest possible table assigned to station which contains the last three digits dialed as an office code entry is found 1 Table is allow allow user free dialing 2 Table is disconnect station b No table is found check Memory Block 3E 4 1 System is allow allow user free dialing 2 System is deny disconnect station Step 6 Check last 3 digits dialed a Lowest possible table assigned to station which contains the last three digits dialed as an area code entry 1 Table is allow A Matched item in table also contains an office code go to step 7 B Matched item in table has only area code allow user free dialing 2 Table is deny Matched item in table also contains an office code go to step 7 300 260 vw B Matched item in table has only area code disconnect station b Notabie is found check Memory Block 4 1 System allow allow user free dialing 2 System deny disconnect station Step 7 Allow three more digits to be dialed a Item in table matches last 6 digits dialed 1 Table is allow allow user free dialing 2 Table is deny disconnect station b If item in table no longer matches the last six 300 261 ND 202
395. a Mark II system requires a VMI E ETU and an RSG E unit that supports the CCU in which the VMI E ETU is installed ND 20292 FEBRUARY 1987 CHAPTERS If the Voice Mail equipment to be connected provides call placement and or in band message wait signaling capability an MFR E ETU is also required The RSG E unit and the MFR E ETU may be shared with single line telephones installed in the system NOTE No more than 1 VMI E ETU can be installed system 820 5 HARDWARE INSTALLATION The VMI E ETU can be installed in any interface slot of the Electra Mark II system that is supported by an RSG E unit Refer to Chapter 2 of this manual for more information on hardware installation 830 PROGRAMMING 830 1 REQUIRED PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCKS 4 8 and 4B9 are used to assign signal timing parameters to each channel of the ETU Refer to the specifications of the Voice Mail equipment being connected to determine any changes necessary for proper operation Engineering Technical Information bulletins are issued to assist in the connection of specific Voice Mail equipment MEMORY BLOCK 4C1 CARD INTERFACE SLOT ASSIGNMENT can be used to assign interface cards in this case the VMI E ETU to the various CCU interface slots When installing a a vacant interface slot not previously assigned before initial power up no additional programming of this memory block is required Howeve
396. a remote location is in the opposite direction OR B the CO may be connected directly to the modem if so desired SECTION 920 RAA E and MODEM INSTALLATION 920 1 RAA E UNIT SWITCH SETTINGS The RAA E unit has five switches which are used to set up proper interfacing to the modem or computer and between the RAA E unit and the Electra MarkII system Switch SW1 is located on the front of the RAA E unit Switches SW2 SW5 are accessed by removing the grounding screw located on the rear of the RAA E unit and pulling back and up on the cover See Figure 920 1 Reassembly is accomplished by reversing this procedure Switches perform the following functions NOTE the switch settings are changed for any reason disconnect and reconnect the modular line cord This allows the RAA E to read the new settings Table 920 1 shows the switch settings Pull Cover Back and Up Grounding Screw 4 Front 85 232 Figure 920 1 Removal of RAA E Cover Rear View of RAA E Unit 1 51 Baud Rate Switch is a bank switch consisting of 4 dip switches accessible from the front panel next to the POWER LED indicator This switch must be set to the same baud rate as the modem connected to the RAA E unit Only one dip switch should be set to the ON position the other three must be off baud rate setting of 300 600 1200 or 2400 can be obtained by turning on the corresponding dip Switch 2 SW2 Direct Modem Switch is used to te
397. able assgnments are done on an hourly basis using military time 0 23 hours To assign the daily schedule tables the following Steps are used With the Modify Menu in the display depress 3 then CR RETURN The display shown will be provided Available entries are now 00 63 This is the number of the daily schedule table to be modified Depress the number desired then depress CR RETURN The example below is for table 03 700 36 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS SYSTEM DATA SAVING WEEKLY SCHEDULE MODIFY WEEKLY SCHEDULE TABLE 7 DAILY SCHEDULE MODIFY 2 DAILY SCHEDULE TABLE 2 1 DAILY SCHEDULE DAILY SCHEDULE TABLE NO 03 01 234 6 78 9 1011 kh kk 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 192021 22 23 kk Rk ke ND 20292 CHAPTER MARCH 1988 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS Once the table data is displayed the programmer must DAILY SCHEDULE MODIFY enter the route advance table number to which the DAILY SCHEDULE TABLE NO 03 LCR E should refer to determine which route table i i E gt ae m aa will be used to process the attempted call 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01 01 00 00 00 Route advance tables are numbered 00 63 One of DAILY SCHEDULE MODIFY these table numbers should be assigned under each DAILY SCHEDULE T
398. ace TRF Transfer Feature and Control Button TSW Time Division Switch U V VMI Voice Mail Interface W WMU Wall Mount Unit Station SECTION 140 FEATURE DESCRIPTION ACCOUNT CODE ENTRY allows the recording of up to 14 digits when on an outside call This feature requires the use of the SMDR E ETU and becomes part of the generated call records ADD ON CONFERENCE provides the ability to converse with up to three additional parties in any combination of interna and or outside however more than two outside lines can be included This feature can be accomplished with the use of a CNF E ETU which can be installed in any available interface slot up to a maximum of four CNF E ETUs per system Conference calls are not amplified and are therefore subject to the quality of the CO lines used ALL CALL PAGE stations not restricted from access to paging are able to initiate a voice page to all idle Multiline Terminals speakers Any station can respond to the page call releasing the paging and establishing a private conversation This feature is software controlled and can be disabled if desired ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY two of the four Electra MarkII Multiline Terminals are provided with a two line LCD each of the two lines are capable of showing up to 16 digits with more than fifty different fixed and flexible readouts These Multiline Terminals are the ETE 6D 1 and ETE 16D 1 220 Figure 14
399. al Twisted 2 pair b Single line telephone Twisted pair c DSS BLF Console Twisted 2 pair d CO Add On Module Twisted 2 pair e RAA E unit Twisted 2 pair f Music Source Hi Fi type shielded audio cable Hi Fi type shielded audio cable g External amplifer h Modem cable RS 232C cable with jacks on both ends Special Null modem cable 220 12 POWER REQUIREMENTS 1 AC Input PSE AD 1 117 V AC 10 60 Hz 10 single phase b A dedicated outlet separately fused and grounded is required 2 DCInput PSE DD 1 40VDC 56VDC 200 8 200 8 3 Power Consumption PSE AD 1 and PSE DD 1 Table 220 6 DISSIPATION 1 600 BTUs hr 3 200 BTUs hr 4 800 BTUs hr NOTE When PSE DD 1 PSUs are installed power dissipation of the locally provided 48VDC power source and batteries should also be taken into account 4 Power Supply Outputs PSE AD 1 and PSE DD 1 Table 220 7 Power Supply Outputs 24V 2V 5V 0 25V 5V 0 25V 5 RSG E Unit a Output voltage 70 120 V RMS b Output frequency 17 23 Hz Output power 4 1 6 Fuse Replacement When a fuse is blown refer to Table 220 8 for fuse replacement specifications 220 13 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION 1 Temperature ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 a Operating 32 F 104 F C 40 C b Recommended long term 50 F 90 F 10 32 2 C 2 Humidity Operating 10 90 relative non condensing 22
400. allowed Page Access All stations are allowed LCR Priority No station is assigned to LCR Trunk to Trunk TRF All stations are denied Account Code Forced Verified All stations are denied 108 Terminale Atiandant Assignment 1010 Catt Pickup Group Assignment No station is assigned to any eall pickup group 7 77771 77 rea Termina Tetephone information Depends on system configuration Hardware software yes or installed Telephone Number Exchange 77 Programming Terminal Attendants 1 and2 Fixed programming position Attendant terminal must be 160 Third programming station is not assigned Speed Dial Tenant Assignment All system speed dial buffers 20 99 are assigned to tenant 1 All system speed dial buffers override code restriction x as 19t SMR Incoming 2 Account Code Digit 10 digits Code 2 Not assigned Modem Pooling PC Keyboard Dialing Allow Forward Override ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK FUNCTION DEFAULT VALUES DIT Trunk to Tenant Assignment DIT trunks assigned to tenant 1 DIT Assignment No Assignment LCR1 Dialing Not 1 dial area LCR Local Call Override Local calls override LCR Modem Pool Assignment No as
401. an AC DC power supply that when used is mounted in each CCU This PSU converts 117 VAC into the necessary voltages required to operate the system This PSU provides the required DC voltages 5V 5V 24V to ETUs installed in the CCU and to the devices connected to the CCU 4 PSE DD 1 PSU This power supply accepts DC input voltage of 48VDC and converts it to the necessary operating DC voltages of 5V 5V and 24V required by CCU This PSU allows the system to powered from locally provided nominal 48VDC power source thereby avoiding disruptions of system operations caused by commercial power failures and brownouts Each CCU requires either a PSE DD 1 or PSE AD 1 these two PSUs cannot be mixed within a system 5 RSG E Unit The RSG E unit is the ringing supply generator required to provide ringing signal to single line telephones SLTs and a voice mail system The RSG E unit is mounted into the CCU to support up to 32 SLTs and or voice mail The RSG E unit installed in a CCU supplies ringing signal to SLTs Voice Mail and modems connected to that CCU One RSG E unit can supply ringing signal to an adjacent CCU provided the combined CCU ringing requirements are not excessive 6 RAA E The Remote Administration Adaptor RAA E provides access to the Electra system program from a remote location The system program can be 100 23 ND 20292 CHAPTER 1 JULY 1987 can be changed defecti
402. an be used to test the dual tone multi frequency receiver circuits the MFR EA ETUs to determine if they are operational If a problem is detected an attendant can busy out the defective circuit Once the problem is corrected the attendant can restore the circuit TRUNK QUEUING allows station users to increase their call processing efficiency in a high traffic environment The system must be supported with a CPU EB ETU and the stations dial access to the busy trunk group cannot be via LCR Station users who are denied a trunk or Line after dial access via an extension when all trunks in the trunk group are busy can queue onto the trunk group by a dial access code When a trunk in that trunk group becomes idle the system reserves it and initiates a Recall indication to the queuing station s primary extension when station and extension are idle TWO COLOR LEDs are provided on the line keys of all Multiline Terminals except the ETE 6 1 to more rapidly distinguish between the status of lines green LED provides the Multiline Terminal user with such status information as Hold 1 056 and Hold Recall red LED provides indication of all other line status The DSS BLF Console is also provided with two color LEDs on buttons programmed for direct access to extensions UNIVERSAL PORTS provide complete flexibility for installation and cost savings for the end user Electra MarklII system allows the installation
403. and 3A4 when needed must programmed prior to programming this memory block i i ND 20292 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 1C2 BLF TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT OPERATION lt AND 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F1 then F8 3 Depress F12 4 Enterextension number to be assigned Example 104 See Notes 1 2 and 3 5 Depress ENTER key DISPLAY jojr J LH jRjo G R A M ER 015 15 ET qe 2 211 11111 jB t r 6 0111 813 r e t JA sIs r e N oiai 1 1 01111111 telil tlele 551116 0121 1 1 11111 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for each of the required stations to be assigned 7 When all required stations are assigned depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 16 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 SPKR ine GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY MUST PROGRAMMED HAVE TO PROGRAMMED gaga C 0 2 x 56 fi is os se CPU levels NOTES 1 maximum of 30 stations 10 per module can be assigned the station BLF feature Only the ETE 16D Multiline Terminals can be assigned EE ES 2 Depressing the ENTER key causes the displa
404. anges to area code assignment are made the programmer depresses the ESC key and the data is saved to the floppy disk as shown NOTES 1 The area code assignments made in these tables determine which tables will be searched by the LCR E In the above examples it should be noted that the selection of WEEKLY sends the LCR to the WEEKLY schedule tables If ROUTE ADVANCE is chosen the LCR E will proceed to look in the ROUTE ADVANCE tables for further directions The use of WEEKLY tables eventually results in the selection of route advance tables via the DAILY tables In both cases the least cost route is selected from the final information located in the Route Tables 2 Data is not saved onto the floppy disk until the ESC escape key is depressed At that time the display is returned to the Modify Menu b Weekly Schedule Table Modify The option of selecting a different route based on day of week and time of day is made available by assigning the table type as weekly in the area code tables If this option is chosen it is necessary to assign weekly tables and then daily tables The following steps show the procedure for weekly Schedule table assignments With the Modify Menu in the display depress 2 then CR RETURN The display at right is provided c Daily Schedule Table Modify The daily schedule tables are used to select different assignments of route advance tables for a Specific area code based on the time of day The avail
405. ansmission loss level for Channel 2 SW402 sets the receiving loss level for Channel 2 LEDs 1 and 2 RED indicate the status of the two circuits Each LED ON indicates its associated circuit is in use LED 3 GREEN when lit indicates the TLI E ETU is receiving power A maximum of twenty TLI E ETUs can be installed in a system into any interface slots Allswitches OFF Odb Switch 1 ON 2db Switch 2 ON 4db Switch 3 ON 8db Switch 4 ON 12db Allswitches 16db Figure 240 10 SW301 SW302 SW401 or SW402 pad switch settings on TLI E ETU C ESI EA EB ETU Installing ESI EA ESI EB provides support for up to four Multiline Terminal and or EDE 30 1 units ESI EB is required when a Multiline Terminal is equipped with the DPA E unit for the dual path feature or a DTA E unit for data capability LED LP1 Green lit indicates that the ESI E is receiving power LEDs 1 4 Red indicates the status of the four circuits Each LED ON indicates its associated circuit is in use maximum of twenty ESI E ETUs be installed in a system into an interface slot ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 09122337 eaa Figure 240 11 ESI E Busy Switch with LEDs D SLI EA EB ETU Installing an SLI EA or SLI EB ETU provides support for up to four single line telephones and modems or Dterm IIs The SLI EB ETU is required when power failure transfer of CO lines and or
406. ard Time must be assigned less than lo 1 9 18 toseconds 11011111 9 1122 5 Outgoing Guard Timer can be used for Loop Dial 9 iz 24 6 E amp MTieL fixed out Guard T wee GENERAL INFORMATION 11 INITIALIZE VALUES This area of the memory block is used to assign various timing parameters listed above to each Trunk Group associated with TLI E ETUs 300 227 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 4E7 INITIALIZED VALUES OPERATION AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline ofr J ETT INTE 1 R o e R A M rit T Te 6 2 Depress F4 then F10 3 Depress 17 T2 E a iMiolo s Lloiri jciui 4 Dial module number 1 4 where port being assigned is located Example Module 1 1 151 2 Jci 5 Dial slot number 1 8 where port is being assigned Example Slot 5 ze aT iM olpI1 sitlo ris 17 6 Dial channel number 1 2 of TLI port to be assigned Example Channel 1 11 sti 1 eluh 7 Depre
407. as indicated in Figure 930 2 Figure 930 2 Battery Pack Location 74 Push down and outward with both thumbs remove the battery compartment see Figure 930 3 Figure 930 3 Removal of Battery Pack Remove the battery case completely and turn it over so the tab is on the bottom refer to Figure 930 4 Figure 930 4 Battery Pack 6 Insert a quarter into the slot as shown in Figu 930 5 and gently pry off the top of the battery case Figure 930 5 Removal of Battery Pack Cover 7 Insert the four AA size batteries with positive and negative poles positioned as shown in F igure 930 6 All negative poles must be touching the springs of the battery case If the batteries are not placed exactly as described the PC 8300 could be damaged Figure 930 6 Inserting Batteries 909 6 8 Snap the top of the battery case in place Install the battery case as shown in Figure 930 7 Figure 930 7 Replacing Battery Pack ADAPTOR f using a PC 8300 near a wall outlet the optional AC adaptor PC 8271A 01 is another convenient power source To connect the AC adaptor to the PC 8300 follow these steps See Figure 930 8 1 Plug the AC adaptor into the wall outlet 2 With the PC 8300 power switch turned off plug the single jack end of the PC 8271A 01 into the interface on the rear of the PC 8300 labeled DC 8 5 Figure 930 8 AC Adaptor Connection NOTES 1 When connecting the AC adaptor
408. ash Start Time 50 mS x M 100 mS Default 300 mS HFE Hookflash End Time 100 mS x HFS Default 1000 mS BP Bounce Protect Time 100 mS x M Default 300 mS 3 Depressing the ENTER key will increment the display to the next VMI port GENERAL INFORMATION VMI INITIALIZE 1 ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to assign various signal timing parameters each VMI port 300 209 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 4B9 VMI INITIALIZE 2 ASSIGNMENT 9 Depress F4 then F7 Depress F19 Dial the module number to be assigned Dial the slot number to be assigned OPERATION lt AND DISPLAY Go offline 2 tofe F C Tr NE TCIX TX XD jP R o s R fale 21 12 15 2 2 0 1 5 Example Module 1 Example Slot 7 21 21 111 151101 1121 21 21 0111 161 151 Dial the channel number to be assigned Exampie Channel 1 See Note 1 Depress L1 to L16 to set the desired timing parameters of the selected VMI port See Note 2 21 121 5 71 21 Depress EN
409. ate indication 12 00 JAN 01 SUN At this time it is recommended that a first initialization Memory Block 3D 1 be executed from one of the system programming stations first two ESI E ports after the power up of the system See Chapter 3 of this manual 530 4 After Initialization Before any programming is attempted the battery switch on the CPU EB ETU should be turned on This will prevent all completed programming from being lost if the system loses power At this point all ports may be checked in software to ensure the initialization process scanned all hardware correctly This can be done by displaying the contents of Memory Block 1E 5 on the system programming Terminal Refer to Section 330 for explanation of Memory Blocks After all previous steps have been checked and any problems found corrected the system programming can be completed Use of the job specification sheets also supplied in Section 370 simplifies the programming process 500 2 uvvu CAUTION Ensure the battery switch on the CPU EB ETU is turned ON The next step is for the technician to run a Second Initialization not a First Initialization a First Initialization causes all programming memory to be lost The Second Initialization cleans out or refreshes the system RAM without any loss of programming This completes the installation procedure for the Electra System The technician should at this point check the operatio
410. ated by the TLI E ETU Each Tie Line supported can be any combination of loop dial 2 wire E amp M or 4 wire E amp M or Type 5 E amp M tie lines must be rotary dial Incoming Tie Line calls cannot access other outside lines TONE OVERRIDE allows station users to signal a busy extension they want to talk to Once alerted a Multiline Terminal user can immediately answer the Override by depressing the Answer Key placing their existing caller on Consultation Hold Single line telephones can place their existing call on Exclusive Hold and answer the override call To further assist in identification of calls TRUNK GROUP NAME ASSIGNMENT allows Multiline Terminal with LCD users to receive the Name of a Trunk Group that is ringing in or being transferred to the primary extension Once the call is answered the Trunk Group Name disappears and is replaced by the Elapsed Call Timer indication Each Trunk Group s Name is individually programmed by the installer and can be up to eight characters this feature requires the system to utilize a CPU EB ETU With the support of a CPU EB ETU the Attendant Positions have the ability of TRUNK MFR TEST and BUSY OUT Each individual trunk circuit can be examined to determine if it is in good working order If a particular trunk is found to be inoperable the attendant can busy it out When the problem is corrected the trunk circuit can be restored Additionally single line telephones c
411. atot rom modem considered ON when PR PN negative reversed PB signal considered ON when positive N DTR or PB signal selected SW1 5 sent to DTE or modem DH DS 0 DSR is hardware controlled NOTE 1 DTR RTS and PB signals and transmit data are considered ON when actually present from DTE regardless of switch setting on switch positions 1 4 NOTE 2 All switches are set to the OFF position for shipping Denotes the recommended switch setting 2 Switch SW2 is used to perform a data loop back test A character entered via the DTE keyboard is echoed back from the DTA E unit to the CRT display of the DTE This test verifies that the transmission paths between the DTE and the DTA E unit are established While testing the switch is set to ON The switch must be set to OFF for normal operation oT SE NOTE Switch 3 positions 1 7 is used to set the RS 232C RCS TIME 221 0 defining the time interval for sending the CTS signal after receiving 2 OFF the RTS signal for the modem and position 8 is used to select either full duplex or half duplex 4 012sc OFF Only one switch of the first seven positions should be on the ON 5 0 245 OFF position at any time to assign the RCS TIME Normally switch 3 6 0728 OFF issetto ON lise Whenswitch position 8 is ON Full Duplex switches in positions ON FD
412. available to all stations in the system ND 20292 CHAPTER 1 JULY 1987 The Electra is engineered for maximum user convenience and ease of operation Solid state circuitry modular construction and a minimum of mechanical components ensure simple maintenance and high reliability This section of the manual provides details of the full requirements needed to be known prior to the installation of the Electra MarklI SECTION 120 REGULATORY INFORMATION 120 1 General Information The Federal Communications Commission FCC has established rules which permit this telephone system to be directly connected to the telephone network jack is provided by the telephone company Jacks for this type of customer provided equipment will not be provided on party lines or coin lines The telephone company may make changes in its technical operations and procedures If such changes affect the compatibility or use of this telephone system the telephone company is required to give adequate notice of the changes 120 2 Company Notification Before connecting or disconnecting this telephone system to or from the telephone network the telephone company must be provided with the following l Yourtelephone number 2 FCC registration number If the Electra is to be installed as Multifunction System the registration number to be provided to the local telephone company is AY589N 16156 MF E b If the El
413. ayed on the screen Also the ESC key is used in the MODIFY mode after completing the selection and or entry of desired data Example of ESC key being used to go from the DISPLAY menu to the LCR main menu Depress ESC key Display shows During MODIFY mode use of the ESC key causes data to be saved to the disk drive and then returns the display to the MODIFY menu as shown at right 100 18 ann SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS AREA CODE TABLE DOWN LOAD START ABNORMAL END LINE TROUBLE AREA CODE TABLE MODIFY TENANT 1 awe AREA SORE TABLE MODIFY TENANTNO AREA CODE 200 TABLE NAME WEEKLY TABLE NO 01 AREA TABLE DISPLAY TENANTNO AREACODE TABLE NAME 200 WEEKLY BLE NO 01 DOWN AREA CODE TABLE 6 EXTRA CODE TABLE 2 WEEKLY SCHEDULE 7 OFFICE CODE TABLE EDULE 8 HOME NPA CODE 9 10 ALL DATA ENTER MENU NO LCR MAIN MENU 1 DOWN LOAD 6 PRINT OUT 2 UPLOAD 7 SYSTEM DATA CLEAR 3 VERIFY 4 MODIFY 5 DISPLAY 10 SYSTEM CONTROL ENTER MENU NO SODE TABLE MODIFY 200 WEEKLY 01 4 Cursor Keys 1 lt The cursor keys the 4 arrow keys at the right of side of the keyboard are used to move the cursor on the screen in the respective direction of the arrow shown on the key This key is mainly used during the MODIFY mode 5 CTRL X Control key X key The CTRL Key and the X key when dep
414. bility and or a second voice path to an ESI EB port i Multiline Terminals assigned a dual path are able to receive a voice page while off hook when its primary i extension line is idle All dual path terminals have to be equipped with a Dual Path Adaptor DPA E and assigned to ESI EB All stations assigned for data capability must be equipped with a data adapter DTA E and assigned to an ESI EB ETU in CCUs 1 thru 3 300 203 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 4B6 INITIALIZED VALUES OPERATION lt AND gt DISPLAY 1 Gooffline Infe f jP RJo s R A M 2 Depress F4 then F7 rit jeinjojulei 4 Dial trunk group number 1 8 tobeassigned clolt 1 z 3 ciniolule 2 5 Depress L1 to L12to set the desired parameters of the CO group Corresponding LED s go on or off accordingly i 2 ea 3 16 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 7 Repeatsteps 5 and 6 for each CO group required or go to step 3 to select a particular trunk group number 8 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 204 vvv ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE EL
415. block is used to program the Overflow feature on the attendant positions i i 800 137 ND 20293 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 3A4 ATTENDANT TO TENANT ASSIGNMENT QPERATION lt AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline 2 Depress then F6 3 Depress F14 See Note 1 4 Depress F W key See Note 3 5 Dialthe number corresponding to the Tenant 1 3 to be assigned Example Tenant 2 See Note 4 6 Depress ENTER key lofe F f uti fet TOIXD XDEXD 15 151 21111111 11 111 1111 1 1 1 jA r T T E NfA N T A STSIN 2 1 1 1 A s e NT 112 44 121 jA r T r e NJA N T 6 Alt 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for all attendants required See Note 2 8 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 138 ND 20292 CHAPTERS SEPTEMBER 1988 NCIION O N iun GUIDE FEATURE PROGRAMMING IMEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED 3A2 3A3 _______ Po CPU
416. by a switch mounted on the LCR E A maximum of 1 LCR E ETU can be installed per system Data input programming to LCR is provided by a portable computer _____ dm ier Figure 170 1 Front View of Electra 21 VMI E ETU The VMI E ETU is the Voice Mail Interface Unit that provides circuitry for Voice Mail integration including Message Waiting indication to this system Each VMI E ETU contains four identical circuits to serve up to four mail entry ports A CPU EB ETU is required to support the connection of an SLT or DTMF controlled dictation equipment to VMI E ETU maximum of 1 VMI E ETU can be installed per system The VMI E ETU requires the support of both an RSG E unit and an MFR EA ETU 22 6 1 TEL The ETE 6 1 TEL is a fully modular digital Multiline Terminal with 6 line keys 7 function keys and 1 message wait LED Line keys can be assigned for outside lines extension lines DND Do Not Disturb S amp R Save and Repeat DT Data Transmit or DR Data Receive This Multiline Terminal requires twisted 2 pair cabling to the MDF Main Distribution Frame or IDF Intermediate Distribution Frame 23 ETE 6D 1 TEL The ETE 6D 1 TEL is a fully modular digital Multiline Terminal with 6 line keys 7 function keys and 10 programmable Feature Access keys for DSS station speed dialing or feature acc
417. chime selected See Note 2 LTT 111 1111 111111 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for all night chimes to be assigned 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 3 8 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 116 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 K NC HONO N ICLEAR ____ GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING IEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROG MUST PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED 227 CPU levels NOTES D 05 Be 2 8 5 67 1121 s 86 1 There 3 Night Chimes 1 3 that assignedtotenants 1 3 551 2 When assigning the Trunk Groups to the Night C 2 1 Chimes line keys 1 8 correspond to Trunk Cw Groups 1 8 respectively 5 LEDON Assigned to Night Chime Ce LEDOFF Notassigned to Night Chime 75 3 Depressing the ENTER key will cause the display to increment to the next Night Chime 4 Trunk groups associated with DIT or DID trunks will not activate the external chime contacts E Ca o 24 Ce i GENERAL INFORMATION NIGHT CHIME ASSIGNMENT 4 i This area of the memory block is used to assign the Trunk Groups to any or all of the 3 available Night Chime circuits to provide relay contact closur
418. code Number Dialed Manually or Station Speed Dial Max 24 digits Call Duration Hour Minute Second 8 digits Least Cost Routing LCR with account code Account Code Max 14 digits 1 Amaximum of 34 digits can be printed per line NOTE2 Typesofcalls are as follows OG Outgoing Call IC Incoming Call OT Transferred Outgoing Call IT Transferred Incoming Call OGC Conference on Outgoing Call ICC Conference on Incoming Call OTC Conference on Transferred Outgoing Call ITC Conference on Transferred Incoming Call Figure 240 16 SMDR General Format of Call Records 200 29 ND 20292 CHAPTER2 JULY 1987 INCOMING CALLS Incoming Call Without an Account Code Incoming Call With an Account Code 07 04 86 09 00AM 08 05 IC 120 07 04 86 09 00AM 08 05 IC 120 00 15 32 00 15 32 3456217 Account Code Max 14 digits TRANSFERRED CALLS Transferred Call Without an Account Code Transferred Call With an Account Code 07 04 86 09 00AM 08 05 IT 120 123 07 04 86 09 00AM 08 05 IT 120 123 00 05 45 00 05 45 345621798 Transferred Station Number Transferring Station Number CONFERENCE CALLS A conference call is printed in tne following sequence 07 04 86 09 00AM 08 05 OG 120 H Printed when a conference is 00 03 15 102885167537000 established with station 123 07 04 86 09 03AM 08 05 OGC 120 Printed when station 120 hangs gt 00 06 45 up on the conference 07 04 86 09 10AM 08 05 OT 120 123 x Printed
419. cted Call Pickup Group Ex Hold SLT Internal All Call Non tenant Internal Call Zone 1 Non tenant Internal Call Zone 2 Non tenant Internal Call Zone 3 Non tenant Internal Meet Me Answer Non tenant External Call Zone 1 Non tenant External Call Zone 2 Non tenant External Call Zone 3 Non tenant External Al Zone Non tenant External Meet Me Answer Non tenant Night Call Pickup Night Mode Station Speed Dial Program for SLT Station Lockout Station Lockout Cancel from Attendant CPU EB or higher Special Code Program Change Station Lockout Trunk and MFR Select Test Trunk and MFR Busy Out Restore Extension Number Extension Number Extension Number 300 132 DEFAULT 49 41 47 44 42 48 45 4 6 6 4 55 56 60 68 58 61 62 59 67 57 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 50 60 79 90 91 92 93 94 FIXED CODES Trunk Access Code 2 Trunk Access Code 3 Trunk Access Code 4 Trunk Access Code 5 Trunk Access Code 6 Trunk Access Code 7 Trunk Access Code 8 Automatic Call Back Trunk Queue Callback Request Message Tone Override Attendant Override Uniform Dial CPU EB2 or higher Voice Mail Hunt Voice Mail Message Waiting Hookflash to CO SLT only CPU EB2 or higher CO Release SLT only 2 or higher Account Code Forced Verified or higher Attendant Call Trunk Access Code 1 Last Number Redial Off Line for System Programmin
420. ction Key Assignment Function Key 1 Message wait On DSS BLF Function Key 2 Night transfer Consoles Function Key 3 Transfer land2 DSS to CO Add On Module Assignment No DSS BLF units are assigned as CO Add On Modules CO Add On Module Line Key Assignment Not Assigned 1C7 CO Add On Module Day Mode Ring Not Assigned Assignment 1C8 CO Add On Module Night Mode Ring Not Assigned Assignment r Prime Line to Primary extension Prime Ringing Line Assignment No ringing line preference is assigned on all Multiline Terminals Data Service Assignment 4 No auto answer auto release Off Hook Ringing to Attendants 1 and 2 only User Program Assignment Voice Tone Signaling Voice Ringing Tone 1 104 Trunk Group Incoming Restriction No station is restricted on all trunk groups 105 Trunk Group Outgoing Restriction No station is restricted on all trunk groups Code Restriction Table Access No code restriction table is assigned to any station 300 3 ND 30292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK FUNCTION Class of Service Assignment DEFAULT VALUES Originating Camp On All stations are allowed Receiving All stations are allowed Call Forward All stations are allowed 9 Operator Restriction No station is restricted Data Line Security No station is assigned Station Lockout No station is
421. d the display Ce 7 previous attendant assigned to the Cac 2 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display C E to increment to the next station number O Ea Fd fa P L4 Fd EEEE El bl Fl E El El E ELE i GENERAL INFORMATION TERMINAL TO ATTENDANT ASSIGNMENT 1 i This area of the memory block is used to assign each station to one of the four possible associated attendants If the system requires more than 2 attendants and or more than one tenant memory blocks 2 and or 3A4 must be programmed BEFORE this memory block V 300 45 0 20292 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 109 TERMINAL TO PAGING ZONE ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F1 then F9 3 Depress F19 4 Enter the station number to be assigned Example Station 104 See Note 1 5 Enter zone number 0 3 to be assigned to the station chosen in step 5 Example Zone 2 See Note 2 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 3 DISPLAY lofe INTE jP Rjoje R Mjo p E 1 1210 Te aeli RI M z o 4 zloiwieix 1 Ir E RIM z o N E 1 2 iT EJ RIM z o N E 16 11 6 lelt li
422. d MELODY SW3 is used to select one of two melodies from the internal MOH source generated by the music chip mounted on the TSW E is used to adjust the volume of the melody provided the melody chip RCA phono plug EP is used for connection of a locally provided amplifier for external paging RCA phono plug MOH is used for the connection of an external MOH source if needed The TSW E ETU must be installed into the TSW slot in the ESE 32B 1 CCU C MMC E ETU The MMC E ETU contains one switch two LEDs one cable and one connector Switch SW1 is the reset switch Depression of this switch causes all service associated with the CCU to be interrupted This switch should not be used in an operating system unless absolutely necessary The LEDs indicate module memory working status Under normal operating conditions they flutter to ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 indicate memories being activated When SWI is depresssed the LEDs momentarily turn OFF When the CCU is disabled the LEDs are constantly OFF Figure 240 7 TSW E Switch Layout The flat cable must be connected to the connector on the TSW E ETU or the other MMC E ETU When it is connected to the other MMC E ETU the cable of that MMC E ETU must be already connected to the TSW EETU Refer to Figure 240 8 The MMC E must be installed in the MMC slot of an ESE 32E 1 CCU 240 5 BASIC INTERFACE ETUs Although the system scans all the sl
423. d PSE DD 1 PSUs 250 2 PSE DD 1 PSU NOTE Before proceeding to install the PSE DD 1 PSUs ensure the Input Line Cords are not connected to the locally provided 48VDC power source and the input power switches on each PSE DD 1 PSU are in the OFF position The Input Line Cords for the PSE DD 1 PSUs must be locally provided A Remove the four mounting screws located at the top and bottom of the PSU slot in each CCU Place the screws aside for later reuse B Install a PSE DD 1 PSU into the PSU slot in each CCU making sure its power switch is in the OFF position C Secure each PSU with the four screws removed in step A D One cable is provided with each PSE DD 1 PSU This cable is a 6 pin connector ended DC IN power cable Connect each DC IN power cable of each PSU to the 6 pin 44 connector located immediately above in its CCU See Figure 250 4 E One screw terminal block provided with four screws is located on the lower front of each PSE DD 1 PSU Connect three PSE DD 1 PSUSs using locally provided cables as shown in Figure 250 5 F Connect the first PSE DD 1 installed in the ESE 32B 1 CCU to the output of the locally provided 48 VDC power source using a locally provided cable 1 Turn on the locally provided 48 VDC power source ND 20292 2 JULY 1987 2 Turn on the power switch the PSE DD 1 PSU located in the second ESE 32E 1 CCU SCREW TERMINAL BLOCK ON PSE D
424. d after installation and during normal operation to run the same program All contents of RAM are retained Under normal operating conditions after initial installation the first display provided is the LCR Main Menu upon power up or reset 750 5 1 Cold Start Initialization Under normal operating conditions the memory data in the PC 8300 is battery backed and is retained when the power switch is turned off If the battery voltage drops too low the memory may be lost and a cold start is required The following procedure describes how to reinitialize the PC 8300 This procedure is also followed when the PC 8300 is first used for LCR programming 1 Ensure that the batteries are fully charged and that the backup switch located at the bottom of the PC 8300 is turned to the ON position 2 Ensurethat the LCR floppy disk is not installed in the disk drive unit PC 8231A The micro floppy disk is removed by pushing the eject button until the disk is completely ejected Figure 750 5 Removing the Floppy Disk 3 Ensure that both the PC 8300 and disk drive unit are turned off 4 Closethe write protection hole on the floppy disk NOTES 1 Opening the write protection hole wiil prevent writing onto the micro floppy disk Closing it will permit writing on to the micro floppy disk Data and files which you do not wish erased are protected by opening the write protection hole To change or replace data or programs contained on the
425. d and the extension the transfer or camp on was made to AUTOMATIC CALLBACK allows users to prompt the system to notify them when a busy extension becomes available After calling a busy extension set an Automatic Callback by dialing 1 as set in default When both parties are idle the system will signal first the originator and after answer the called station AUTOMATIC HOLD occurs whenever attendant with a DSS BLF console engaged in a call depresses a DSS extension or paging access button This places the call on NON EXCLUSIVE HOLD This is also true for Multiline Terminal users that have programmed and depress the Feature Access keys for DSS or paging access This places the call on Consultation Hold AUTOMATIC RELEASE is performed by the Electra System when an outside party abandons the call for this feature to function the outside line must provide a timed disconnect signal Automatic release is always provided with ground start trunks and E amp M Tie lines BACKGROUND MUSIC via EXTERNAL SPEAKERS used for paging from the Electra MarkII system will be interrupted only to those speakers paged within a zone This feature requires locally supplied music source paging system and control relay as well as the optional ECR E ETU BACKGROUND MUSIC be provided to all Multiline Terminal users The system is designed to accept two separate music sources to be utilized Each user can select eit
426. d field book CHAPTER 7 LEAST COST ROUTING Chapter 7 provides detailed installation and programming information for the LCR feature CHAPTER 8 VOICE MAIL Chapter 8 provides a brief outline of Voice Mail interfacing Specific details are provided in Chapter 6 ETIs CHAPTER 9 REMOTE ADMINISTRATION Chapter 9 provides the installation programming and operation information for the Remote Administration Adaptor RAA E The Electra Digital Telephone System is also the subject of the following documents ND 20233 Electra MarkII Digital Telephone System General Description ND 20234 Electra MarklI Digital Telephone System Job Specifications One copy supplied with each ESE 32B 1 ND 20235 Electra MarklI Digital Telephone System Circuit Description ND 20236 Electra Digital Telephone System Schematic Drawings TOU nur HELLE 1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION ND 20292 JULY 1987 CHAPTER 1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE 110 120 120 1 120 2 120 3 120 4 120 5 120 6 130 140 150 160 160 1 160 2 170 170 1 170 2 GENERAL 100 1 REGULATORY INFORMATION 100 2 General Information 100 2 Company Notification 100 2 Incidence of Harm 100 2 Emitted Radio Frequency Interference 100 2 Hearing Aid Compatibility 100 2 Service Requirements 100 3 GLOSSSARY OF ABBREVIATIONS 100 3 FEATURE DESCRIPTION 100 4 LCD INDIC
427. d in any option slot in either ESE 32B 1 or ESE 32E 1 CCUs e LCR E ETU can be installed in any option slot in either ESE 32B 1 ESE 32E 1 CCUs 4 CCUs PSUs and RSGs 5 32 1 CCU is always required b ESE 32E 1 CCU Divide the total number of interface ETUs by 8 If the result is not a whole number round it up to the next higher whole number The whole number minus one is the quantity of ESE 32E 1 required NOTE If total number of interface ETUs 8 and both SMDR E and LCR E ETUs are being installed an ESE 32E 1 CCU is required c PSE AD 1 PSE DD 1 PSUs One PSE AD 1 or PSE DD 1 PSU is required for each CCU Combined quantity of ESE 32B 1 CCU and 32 1 CCU is equal to the total amount of PSUs required Table 220 4 Optional Equipment OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT ETE 6 1 Compatible with other options simultaneously Not connectable C zConnectable ETE 6D 1 PSE AD 1 and PSE DD 1 PSUs cannot be installed in the same system together Table 220 2 Recommended MFR EA Quantities QUANTITY OF SINGLE LINE CONNECTIONS d RSG E Unit An RSG E unit is required for each or two adjacent CCU in which SLI EA or SLI EB and VMI E ETUs are being installed Table 220 3 Recommended RSG E Quantities QUANTITY OF RSG E UNITS SINGLE LINE RECOMMENDED CONNECTIONS 5 Optional Equipment Table 220 4 shows the optional equipment that can be mounted into Mu
428. data that has been transferred 3 If no problem is encountered during up load the display shown at right or one similar to it is AREA CODE TABLE UP LOAD START provided NORMALEND J Depression of the CR RETURN key is required to return to the down load menu 4 Ifa problem is encountered during up load the following display or one similar to it is provided ALL DATA UP LOAD START Depression of the CR RETURN key is required to return to the up load menu ABNORMAL END OFFICE CODE TABLE LINE TROUBLE 44 5 It is recommended that the RS 232C cable between the LCR E ETU and the computer be checked prior to doing a down load or up load 3 Verify Mode VERIFY tection of vari Its in th displ 1 AREA CODE TABLE 6 EXTRA CODE TABLE menu 2 WEEKLY SCHEDULE 7 OFFICE CODE TABLE shown at right 3 DAILY SCHEDULE 8 HOME NPA CODE 4 ROUTE ADVANCE 5 ROUTE TABLE 10 ALL DATA ENTER MENU NO At this time selection of one of the available table numbers will result in the display shown at right AREA CODE TABLE VERIFY START Example for area code verify Depress 1 then CR RETURN ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 NOTES 1 The previous display is an example of area code data being verified between the floppy disk and the LCR E The name of the table chosen will be Shown in the display 2 Exceptions to note 1 are the office code table and all data verify
429. depressed At this time the data for that table is saved to the floppy disk MODIFY MODE and the previous menu is displayed Depressing the ESC key again will return the programmer to the LCR main menu or selecting new number and depressing a CR RETURN allows retrieval of another table As an aid in understanding the programming procedure refer to Figure 750 8 the general programming flow diagram This diagram provides a general overview of programming procedure is ND 20292 CHAPTER MARCH 1988 shown in the diagram 8 functions are available while at the LCR main menu At any time only one function or operational mode can be used The use of a second function is only available by escaping back to the LCR Main Menu Once a function is selected a new menu is provided except SYSTEM CONTROL where a table type can be selected From the Main Menu selecting SYSTEM CONTROL sends a reset signal to the LCR E then allows return to the Main Menu A study of the general programming diagram shows that in all other functions after selecting a table type different operations are available based on the chosen function In the following sections of this document is provided a detailed explanation of each of the functions shown in the general diagram For an explanation of the LCR Main Menu refer to section 750 8 1 That section also gives a brief description of the 8 available functions Section 750 8 2 provides an i
430. deq e aan SNV as 10 9101 uo dureo uod st 13471 12918 axa pueses n 7 eur BUTYL 300 81 182 uo padureo eq jt 91 uo dure 184 8 dn st 1011218 uo Surdureo sr ouo snq 10 euo 82 Aq 514 2103 10119 sr uo dures ALON dn e euo jo 5208 7 axa ssoudoq e 11 St 8 1001836 0 uou auo uod geu OL uo dure SNOLLVOIGNI ATAWVS SNOILVOIGNI GOT 5 18ger A Inn UXIdVHO 56505 19 007 5208 1971 SNV s3431 147 19918 usep axa saysey SNY AAT 99928 31 st 01811 32228 axa SNOILVOIGNI yy uotsuojxa 10 5591090 e 910159
431. desired station number is displayed then go to step 5 11 When all stations are programmed depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 10 1 F W Forward Increment station number LEAR Vacant line assignment ENTER Enter for each line assignment B W Backward Decrement station number o EL Select station to be assigned MEMORY 8LOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED _______ 2610 122 __________889 3810 See Step 6 for CPU levels NOTES K GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING 18 1D2 2 1 When programming appearances for a 6 button station line buttons L1 L5 should be selected on the programming station During step 4 if a non assigned line position is selected the display will show VACANT Line keys must be idle before an assignment change can be made Line key 6 is always the station s primary extension number for ETE 6 and ETE 6D Multiline Terminals Line key 16 is always the station s primary extension number for ETE 16 ETE 16D and ETE 16K Multiline Terminals Depression of the ENTER key causes the program to move to the next line key position to the right GENERAL INFORMATION e 2 05 Di 9 2 ND 20292 SEPTEMBER 1988 6 174 2
432. desired trunk i 4 ND 20293 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 266 UNIFORM DIAL TRUNK ACCESS CODE GROUP ASSIGNMENT OPERATION 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F2 then F8 3 Depress 16 4 Enterthe uniform dial item number to be assigned 01 20 Example 02 See Note 1 5 Enter Trunk Access Code Group Number to be assigned to Uniform Dial Number chosen 2 8 Example Dial 4 for Trunk Access Code Group 4 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 AND gt DISPLAY TCIXD xx te IR oje is vis TT TTT ule lol 1 ule loje 2 1 11 17111 ufe 1 rik ule oje 012 1 1 T I rik uj loje 0 2 1 1 ufe loje 1 TIR KI lt 6 o 10131 1 1 7 RepeatSteps 4 and 5 to assign all Uniform Dial Numbers required or depress TEL to assign a Specific Uniform Dial Number 8 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 114 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 I IN PKR ON OFF Line EL Selects Uniform Dial Number W_ Increments Uniform Dial Number LEAR Clears previous assignment NTER Enters each assignment B W Decrements Uniform Dial Number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMOR
433. disk not in the LCR E ETU 700 30 ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 5 Display SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS The Display option is used to allow the programmer to view the contents of the data presently in the floppy disk This option does not allow changing of data and is used only to confirm the present data 6 Print Out The Print Out option is used to send table data to a printer for purposes of having a hard copy This option is recommended to be completed as the last step after verification of proper LCR function to obtain a hard copy of the LCR program The office code table can be printed as OFFICE CODE TABLE PRINT follows with the PRINT OUT menu in TABLE NO FROM 7722 the display depress and 41 Enter ma start fable number and OFFICE CODE TABLE PRINT P TABLENO FROM 001 TO Enter the end table number and OFFICE CODE TABLE PRINT depress 4 Example 002 TABLENO FROM 001 TO 002 SYSTEM DATA LOADING OFFICE CODE TABLE PRINTOUTSTART C 7 System Data Clear The system data clear option is used to clear data from the tables This option clears the data in the floppy disk not the LCR E ETU The option is provided to clear only one table at a time 8 System Control The system control option is used to restart the LCR E ETU This option is recommended for use after any changes are made to the programming in the LCR E 750 8 2 Command De
434. display the system s memory i This facility is useful for diagnostics and remote maintenance service in the event of system s trouble 1 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 SECTION 350 FUNCTION TIMER CHART MEMORY TIMING VALUE TIMER BLOCK DEFINITION Minimum Default Maximum Call Park Recall Time before a call placed in call park 180sec 990 sec recalls except conference call Delay Announce Time Delay before 10sec 600sec Infinite Timeout i Delay Time before system starts 10 sec 70 sec recording the duration of an outgoing call 990 sec attendant station after a DSS BLF Transfer or Camp On is unanswered Recall timing for any call from a non 10 sec 50 sec 990 sec attendant position after a Camp On Transfer or a call placed on Non Exclusive Hold is unanswered Cancel Automatic Timeout value for a callback that goes 10 sec 20sec 990 sec Callback unanswered Call Forward No Time before a call forwards after no 20 sec 990 sec Answer answer Exclusive Hold Time before a call placed on Exclusive 60 sec 990 sec Recall Hold recalls External Page Access Allowed time for External Page 300 sec 990 sec Duration Internal Page Access Allowed time for Internal Page 990 sec Duration Maximum time modem within 600 sec 990 sec Timer modem pool can be reserved by a Station SMDR Valid Call Minimum duration of an outside call 40 sec 990 sec Time
435. distinctive ringing control intervals 1 of 5 available patterns 1 EXTERNAL RINGING CONTROL ASSIGNMENT ND 30292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2C9 ECR RELAY ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND y DISPLAY 1 Go offline 2 Depress F2 then F8 3 Depress 19 4 Dial the number of the relay being assigned 04 10 Example Relay 04 See Note 1 5 Depress 1 1 L2 L3 to assign the selected relay to Night Chime External Ring or Delay Announcement respectively Example L1 Night Chime See Note 2 6 Dial the number ofthe Night Chime 1 3 tobe assigned to this relay Example Night Chime 2 7 Depress ENTER key See Note 3 7 nfe T x xD Miolpje isjvis TTT 1111 111 11111111 T T TT TT 81 5 n e t A v oTa T T T TT 81 1 Tafslejn 4 I TT 5 8 014 1 2111 a s e N 015 T T E Repeat steps 5 7 for all subsequent relays to be assigned 9 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 120 iN B W Decrements relay number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROG MUST BE PROGRAMMED H
436. e TXTXT 5 151 1 r A B tTE AN 43 4 Depress 1 1 to L8 to assign 1 or direct dial to each Trunk Group See Note 1 5 Depress ENTER key 6 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 174 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 CLEAR NTER Enters assignment MEMORY THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED Do 51 6 2 D 19 011141 2 us CPU levels NOTES 1 L1 to L8 correspond to Trunk Groups 1 to 8 respectively Line key LED 1 dial area OFF direct dial eS Go Gee Edd 1 gt D e Fal Fa Fa Fa Ga 3 Fa F3 E El El E F E E p h El El F EL E E El GENERAL INFORMATION 1 DIALING ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to designate whether 1 dialing and or direct dialing service is required on the CO lines installed This designation is assigned on Trunk Group basis ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 3E3 REJECTION CODE ASSIGNMENT OPERATION lt 1 Gooffline 2 Depress then F10 3 DepressF13 See Note 1 4 Dialsingle digit rejection code 2 9 Example 2 assigns the first rejection code See Note
437. e 1108 Aqua 10 9 31089 poo 552208 e pue YI e 81 4 uou A 1861 AOL 1 56505 9 5930 996 4 175 03 serdde Ajuo dure au puo dure 8 115 2 81102 81618140 51121545 3910A ALON 545 teur 8 668 10 91517 e YT e WIMSUY 01 7 45 32104 Aq suornajsur 943 e reur INOA 69 3 n9ja 1 apo 859228 81 e 9403 YI e OL 9210 A 5 07 186 56205 6 1 00 4013298 5143 9818 AYOLOAYIC 943 Jo 8 116 940 eurnin yg 5143 03 Adde ose 99 UY 19410 5910489 p1epuejg TEUTUL y 514 03 9 4618 8 ST 9210389 9nbrun 941 143 JO OLT ur aq 1 91 99
438. e CLEAR key to set no restriction C co 2 T 3 Depressing the ENTER key will increment the E Ca display to the next station number Cz 1 4 This digit inspection will occur on all trunk groups associated with Tie lines C9 Cz Fi c j 5 L i Ls 0 GENERAL INFORMATION TIE LINE DIGIT RESTRICTION ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to limit the maximum number of digits that each station is allowed to dial when using a Tie Line ND 20292 CHAPTER SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2 1 MODEM POOLING TERMINAL KEYBOARD DIALING ASSIGNMENT OPERATION e AND y DISPLAY 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F2 then F7 3 Depress F11 4 Depress line key 1 to allow or deny terminal keyboard dialing LEDON Allow LEDOFF Deny 5 Depress ENTER key See Notes 1 amp 2 6 Depress SPKR key to go back line tote fk Tox x 7 LIPjR O S mjofofet 5 1151 2 21111111111 11 11 pic 5 5 211111111 1111 300 84 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 IW CLEAR __ ENTER Enter each assignment GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY 81 THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST PROGRAMMED HAVE BE PROGRAMMED am CPU EB2 o
439. e LCR programming software and LCR data is stored in this floppy disk ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 f Any parallel interface printer that conforms with the Centronics Standard can be connected to the PC 8300 printer is used to provide a printed copy for verifying and checking the programmed LCR data INSTALLATION OF LCR E ETU 730 1 GENERAL This section provides a complete and comprehensive understanding of the proper installation of the LCR E Table 720 1 Connector Wirine Connection 26 PIN CONNECTOR FUNCTION 8201A DATA STROBE Parallel Data CONNECTOR Centronics Parallel Printer Busy Printer Select 00 4 CONO DODONA UNEO Signal Ground Signal Ground Signal Ground Parallel Interface Printer SECTION 730 Figure 730 1 Installing the LCR E ETU ETU and the portable computer PC 8300 It is recommended that this section be read in its entirety to familiarize yourself with its content to enable faster more productive installation The LCR E makes extensive use of CMOS technology Figure 730 2 Battery Backup Switch SW1 Special care must be taken to avoid any static discharge to the LCR E ETU 730 2 INSTALLATION OF THE LCR E 730 4 SWITCH SETTING The LCR E ETU is installed in the OP2 OP3 or 4800 See Figure 720 1 and Figure 730 3 dual purpose card slot of any CCU The comp
440. e been saved on some external orage medium such as a cassette tape or a floppy disk otherwise all those files will be lost ND 20292 CHAPTER 9 MARCH 1988 SECTION 940 PROGRAMMING 940 1 GENERAL NOTE Before programming with the RAA E unit its connecting port must be programmed as an RAA E port in Memory Block 1E2 LK9 Programming Memory Block 1E2 is not required if the unit is connected to the Electra MarkII System prior to performing a first initialization Make sure that the RAA E switch settings are set properly See Table 920 1 The programmer must be completely familiar with the programming procedures of the Electra MarkII system before programming using the Remote Administration Adaptor RAA E Programming procedures for the Electra 1 system using the RAA E are outlined in the following paragraphs The Remote Administration Adaptor RAA E allows a PC to be used as a programming terminal To program the Electra system Function and Line Keys are used when inputting information from programming station To input information from a PC enter the actual characters shown on the keyboard For example to enter data for Function Button F1 depress characters and then 1 on the keyboard of the PC then depress Return Key to enter the information To enter data for Line Button L1 depress characters L and 1 on the keyboard then depress Return to enter the information Table 940 1
441. e example at right shows table 120 Data is now entered from top to bottom starting at TRK ACSS CODE trunk access code The entry for trunk access code determines which trunk access code will be used by the system CPU to select a trunk Depress the number of the trunk access code desired and the cursor will jump down to the AREA CODE DEL line automatically If an incorrect number is entered the Cursor UP key can be used to return to the TRK ACSS CODE line for correction Although the computer will accept entries from 00 15 as trunk access code only codes 01 08 will work on the Electra The next data to be entered is on the AREA CODE DEL line This entry determines whether the area code dialed by the caller should be dialed out on the chosen trunk This option is provided in case the caller is being routed to a line such as an FX line where it is not necessary to dial the area code Depressing the space bar allows selection of one of two options for this line The first time the space bar is depressed selects NO do not delete as the entry The second depression of the space bar selects DEL delete as the entry The example shows the selection of DEL as the entry After area code delete selection is made depress the cursor down key to position the cursor at the ETR CODE ADD line This option is used to tell the LCR E whether it is necessary to dial extra digits prior to dialing out the number dialed by the caller
442. e reset by turning the ON OFF switch on the ETU to the OFF position and then turning it back ON To give capacitors in the ETU time to discharge allow some time before turning the switch back to the ON position ND 20292 CHAPTERS SEPTEMBER 1987 A SYSTEM DOWN 1 2 3 B PARTIAL OPERATIONS 1 2 INDEX TABLE FLOW CHART NUMBER CONDITION No Internal Dial Tone To Any Multiline Terminal or Single Line Telephone No LED or Display Indications On Any Multiline Terminal No System Tones Are Available Radio Frequency Interference Central Office Line Problems a Intermittent ring Problems b Calls Dropping c NoOutside Dial Tone Access d COSignaling Problem Multiline Terminal Problems a Terminal Function Problem b Ringing Problems Dial Tone Access Problems Single Line Telephone Problems a NoDial Tone Access b Ringing Problem c Access To Features Low Volume Problems External Paging Problem Station Message Detail Recording SMDR Problems No Call Accounting System 500 4 PAGE NUMBER 500 5 500 6 500 7 500 8 500 9 500 10 500 11 500 12 500 13 500 14 500 15 500 16 500 17 500 18 500 19 500 20 500 21 ND 20292 CHAPTER 5 SEPTEMBER 1987 Al No Internal Dial Tone To Any Multiline or SLT No DC Voltage or Check AC Power incorrect DC Votage 5 and the fuse Check OC Voltages
443. e to connect external common audible ringing when the i tenant is in night mode 300 117 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 _ MEMORY BLOCK 2C8 EXTERNAL RINGING CONTROL ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND DISPLAY l Go offline 1 19 618 1 molo 2 Depress F2 then F8 3 Depress F18 nial T T T loll TRITT TOTT CE 4 Dial the number of the External Ringing Control circuit being assigned 1 4 Example Ext Ring 1 See Note 1 EXIT TT T T LT 1 CTT 2 5 Dial the number ofthe desired ringing interval 1 5 to be assigned to this External Ringing Control circuit Example 2 See Note 2 6 Depress L1 to L8 to assign the appropriate Trunk Groups to the External Ringing Control circuit selected See Note 3 7 Depress ENTER key See Note 4 E xir 811141 61111112 8 Repeatsteps 5 7 for all subsequent External Ringing Controls to be assigned or depress TEL key to program a specific External Ringing Control circuit 9 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 118 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 08 5 81 6 151 1861 ess es B
444. eDepress 1 then the CR RETURN key ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS xxx MAIN MENU 6 PRINTOUT SYSTEM DATA CLEAR 1 DOWN LOAD 9 5 DISPLAY 10 SYSTEM CONTROL ENTER MENU NO 1 PROGRAM LOADING LOAD 1 CODE TABLE 6 EXTRA CODE TABLE 2 WEEKLY SCHEDULE 7 OFFICE CODE TABLE 3DAILY SCHEDULE 8 HOME NPA CODE 5 ROUTE TABLE 10 ALL DATA ENTER MENU NO MODIFY 1 AREA CODE TABLE 6 EXTRA CODE TABLE 2 WEEKLY SCHEDULER 7 OFFICE CODE TABLE 3 DAILY SCHEDULER 8 HOME NPA CODE 4 ROUTE ADVANCE 5 ROUTE TABLE ENTER MENU NO SYSTEM DATA LOADING ND 20293 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS The program for modifying the table chosen is loaded PROGRAM LOADING Once the program is loaded the table is AREA CODE TABLE MODIFY displayed TENANT 2 3 Example of Table Input Once table data is retrieved the number of the specific table to be displayed or in this case modified must be entered followed by pushing the CR RETURN key With Area Code table modify displayed AREA CODE TABLE MODIFY TENANT 2 Depress 01 then CR RETURN key AREA CODE TABLE MODIFY TENANTNO 1 AREACODE CIT Depress 200 then CR RETURN key TABLE 3 200 Depress Space Bar then CR RETURN key Tone is pro
445. each modem in the Modem Pool A i maximum of four 4 modems can be assigned to the Modem Pool with each modem requiring a dedicated or VMI port and Multiline Terminal equipped for data ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 288 VMI ASSIGNMENT OPERATION lt AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline ofe fe Ip mojo 58151 21 LiL TTT TT Pt ry rrr sel isleiri fxielv tii fa 4 Set L1 L4 to assign whether Voice Mail equipment Single Line Telephones will be connected to each port ofthe VMI See Note 1 LEDON Voice Mail Default LED OFF SLT CPU EB or higher 2 Depress F2 then F7 3 Depress 18 5 Set L9 L12 to assign whether tones will or will not be automatically sent to each of the VMI ports See Note 2 LEDON Send DTMF tones LED OFF Do not send DTMF tones Default CPU EB3 or higher 6 Depress ENTER key 7 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 98 ND 30292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 ENTER Enter assignment B W GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY SLOCK THAT PROGRAMMED MUST PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED 1 CPU levels See Steps 4 and 5 NOTES 1 11 14 correspond to VMI ports 1 4 respectively us co Cec 5
446. ected until the printer is turned off and the system sees a change in DTR status When connected to a modem the DTR signal is supplied by the DSR signal from the modem validity 3 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to increment to the next station GENERAL INFORMATION DATA SERVICE ASSIGNMENT i i 1 i This area of the memory block is used to assign the various operational parameters to stations equipped and programmed to support data communications ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 1D3 USER PROGRAM ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND gt DISPLAY L Geofflins C 187 TC X P mojoj T 2 Depress F1 then F9 3 DepressF13 4 Dialstation number to be assigned Example Station 104 See Note 1 5 Ifnochange in status is desired proceed to step 7 6 Depress L1 L3 to select appropriate feature capability See Note 1 islelri 131 13 7 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 Repeat steps 5 7 for all subsequent stations or go to step 3 to program a specific station 8 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 34 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 PKR ine GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT PROGRAMMED MUST 8E PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED 2 TUM i57 po i 3 138 as
447. ectra is to be installed as key system the registration number to be provided to the local telephone company is AY589N 16174 KF E To install the Electra as a key system the system cannot contain any SLI E ETUs with dial access to the Trunk Groups The Trunk Group Access Code Group Assignment must be programmed to make vacant ali Access Code Group Assignments and the system must be equipped with a CPU EB ETU 3 Ringer equivalence number 2 08 4 USOC Jack required RJ21X for 50 position miniature ribbon amphenol type connector Items 2 and 3 mentioned above are also indicated on the system equipment label 120 3 Incidence of Harm If this system is malfunctioning it may also be causing harm to the telephone network telephone system should be disconnected until the source of the problem can be determined and until repair has been made If this is not done the telephone company may temporarily disconnect service 120 4 Emitted Radio Frequency Interference In compliance with FCC Part 15 rules the following Statement is provided IMPORTANT NOTE This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the installation service manual may cause interference to radio communications This equipment has been tested and approved for compliance with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J of Part 15
448. ed to set the desired parameters to the COI E circuits These settings are i onatrunk group basis For a description of these parameters see Section 350 300 205 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 4B7 COLIV INITIALIZED VALUES PROGRAMMING PARAMETERS OPERATION AND DISPLAY Mjojp E 1 Gooffline m o TT TTT L 2 Depress F4 then F7 2 eir oluje 1111 3 Depress 17 i nti Ir i Tz 4 Dial trunk group number 1 8 to be assigned Example Trunk Group 4 See Note 1 5 Depress L1 to L16to set timing parameters to the trunk group Tale zea ein oju P s 1 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 7 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for all trunk groups required or go to step 3 to select a particular trunk group 8 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 206 vvu ND 20292 CHAPTER SEPTEMBER 1988 EL Enter new trunk group TEL Enternewtrunkgroup ENTER Enter each trunk group asssigned B W Decrement trunk group PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED 4 7 481 482 486 LINE BUTTONS 19 1101 1221
449. efficient installation For example the collected data about the job site will generally permit the MDF to be partially preassembled at the installer s shop thereby helping to minimize the time spent at the customer s premises Preassembling the MDF and IDF would be especialiy advantageous for those cases where the MDF or IDF must be placed in an area that is awkward for this type of work 230 3 SITE LIMITATIONS Installation of a telephone system is seldom a straightforward routine procedure The uniqueness of each customer s situation requires a tailored approach to each job In selecting a permanent site for the MDF the installer may encounter problems Such as the following eLimited space is available and must be used regardless of its suitability The available space may be adequate but may pose one or more environmental hazards eThe proposed location has limitations such as insufficient lighting or the lack of a suitable ground for grounding the CCUs Whatever the nature of the adversities encountered the installer must make the necessary decisions to arrive at the best possible solutions for both the customer and the equipment being installed It is beyond the scope of this manual to cover all possible situations with specific solutions The following are general guidelines precautions and necessities which should be observed when making the decisions for installation It should be noted that there are cer
450. ely The use of the INS key allows the programmer to insert digits in front of the present cursor position 700 23 ND 20292 CHAPTER MARCH 1988 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS TABLE NO 0 OFC CODE 200 200 OFFICE CODE TABLE TABLE NO 0 12 OFC CODE 200 20 ND 20292 7 1988 The use of DEL allows the programmer to delete the character located at the present cursor position example of both INS and DEL use follows INS Key example Depress INS key Depress 0 NOTES 1 During Insert mode the display will show INS MODE and the position to the left of the cursor is filled in with the new character 2 The cursor is indicated by a box around the character at the present cursor position in the example above 3 use of the cursor keys removes the programmer from Insert Mode Example of DEL delete Depress DEL NOTES 1 The use of delete causes the character under the cursor to disappear and all characters to the right shift left 2 The cursor is indicated by a box over the character at the present cursor position in the example above 700 24 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS EXTRA CODE TABLE MODIFY EXTRA CODE TABLE NO CODE 10288 EXTRA CODE TABLE MODIFY x XTRA CODE TABLE NO CODE 10288 INS MODE EXTRA CODE TABLE MODIFY EXTRA CODE TABLE CODE 0 10288 INS MODE EXTRA CODE TABLE MODIFY
451. em is configured with more than one attendant position DIAL 0 will enable the user to reach the attendant assigned DIRECT INWARD DIALING DID allows outside calls on DID trunk to be directed to particular stations within the system These terminations can be accommodated when the system is equipped with TLI E ETUs and a CPU EB ETU A maximum of forty such terminations of line terminations can be accommodated in each system this total including Tie lines and CO lines DID signaling supports immediate delayed and wink start DIRECT PAGING ACCESS with the EDE 30 1 DSS BLF console provides the attendant added speed in call processing and locating personnel Buttons can be programmed to provide direct access to Call Paging Internal or External Zone Paging The programmable Feature Access keys on the Electra Multiline Terminals can also be used for direct paging access DIRECT STATION SELECTION provides one button selection to rapidly call internal parties DSS BLF consoles and the programmable function buttons on the Electra Multiline Terminals provide this operation The DIRECTORY FUNCTION of the ETE 16K 1 Multiline Terminal provides the station user with eleven page LCD customized by the user Each page can contain up to ten frequently called numbers Depressing the directory button causes the pages to change depressing one of the selection buttons generates a speed dial call DSS call or accesses a
452. emory System automatically advances to LK2 Display shows LK ASGN TEL102 CO 02 OFF HOOK LK 1 5 9 13 L1 T RAS NS F18 lt RETURN To select line type as Save amp Repeat Display shows ASGN TEL102 SAVE amp REPEAT OFF HOOK LK 1 5 9 13 01 RETURN To select Save amp Repeat buffer 1 Display shows ASGN 102 SAVE 8 REPEAT 01 i OFF HOOK 1 5 9 13 LI 1 01 While holding down the CTRL key depress E To enter information into the Electra MarkII program memory System automatically advances to LK3 Display shows LK ASGN CO 03 TEL102 lt gt LK 1 5 9 13 F20 lt RETURN To select line key function as DND position Display shows LK ASGN 1102 POSITION i lt gt 1 5 9 13 20 900 15 ND 20292 9 1988 While holding down the key depress E enter information into the Electra MarkII program memory System automatically advances to LK4 Display shows LK ASGN 0 TEL102 OFF HOOK 9 13 At this time you may continue programming other features or exit program mode by going on hook CTRL D NOTE The programmer must go on hook CTRL D before terminating the communication link Failure to do so results in the port associated with the R
453. emory Block Yes 2A 6 Assignment Compare each of the following parameters between the printer and the SMDR E Baud rate 300 4800 ASCII output 7 bit word with 1 stop bit Even parity No 15 Printer 85232 compatible No SMDR requires an 85232 connection Parameters Match No Set parameters correctly Yes s SMDR E ETU Yes in option slot No Must be installed in option slot QN LED1 on SMDR E OFF or OFF Check ON OFF switch SMDR E If switch Test for proper operation is off turn switch on LED off Check installation manual for Check 5 in 85232 cable connection another option slot 2 Run printer self test if available Perform a 2nd Initialization If LED is still off then Replace SMDR E ETU If LED is LED on SMDR E ON or OFF Q still off then Replace CPU EB ETU Recheck in originai slot 500 21 7 LEAST COST ROUTING LCR ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 LEAST COST ROUTING LCR TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION DESCRIPTION PAGE 710 GENERAL 700 1 720 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 720 1 General 700 1 720 2 LCR E ETU 700 1 720 3 Portable Computer 8300 700 2 730 INSTALLATION OF LCR E ETU 730 1 General 700 4 730 2 Installation of LCR E ETU 700 4 730 3 Switch SW1 Setting 100 4 730 4 Switch Setting 700 4 730 5 Switch SW2 Setting 700 5 730 6 Routing the RS 232
454. emory when the power is turned off 930 5 AUTOMATIC SHUT OFF When the PC 8300 is on and no key has been depressed for over 10 minutes the unit s power will automatically shut off to prevent excess discharge of the batteries When the automatic shut off function has been activated the power switch has to be 900 8 manually set to the OFF position and then turned ON again to turn the PC 8300 back on The predetermined time period of 10 minutes after a cold start for the automatic shut off can be altered using a BASIC language POWER command The automatic shut off feature may be canceled by the use of the POWER CONT command when the AC adaptor is connected to the PC 8300 Refer to the PC 8300 User s Guide The only times the automatic shut off function cannot be activated is when the PC 8300 is in the terminal mode of TELCOM and when a BASIC program is being run 930 6 LOW BATTERY LED If the batteries have a low charge causing the Backup Battery to be used the Low Battery LED on the PC 8300 will illuminate The batteries must be charged as you can only operate the PC 8300 for approximately 20 minutes with the Backup Battery Storing the PC 8300 for a long time with a low battery charge will cause it to become inoperable If you continue to operate the PC 8300 with the Low Battery LED lit for more than 20 minutes the unit will become inoperable and you will lose all data stored in the RAM Batteries should be re
455. ephones Flexible 58 Station Lockout Change Specia Code Flexible 59 Neat Call Pickup Flexible 60 100 20 m CHAPTER 1 JULY 1987 FEATURE CONDITION CODE Station Lockout Set or Cancel Flexible 61 Special Code Cancel from Attendant Flexible 62xxx Station Not Locked Out Set Default Value from Attendant Flexible 62xxx Night Mode Set or Cancel Attendant Only Flexible 68 Call Pickup Directed Flexible Group Flexible Trunk Access Group3 8 Flexible Group 2 Fiexible Group 1 Fixed Last Number Redial Fixed Station Speed Dial Access Fixed System Speed Dial Access Fixed Off Line For System Programming Voice Mail Message Set Flexible 541 Voice Mail Message Cancel Fixed ee Account Code Entry Call Park Set On second dial tone penc 211201 4 x 0 9 Trunk Test Attendant Only Flexible Retrieve With Station No dial tone MFR Test SLT only Trunk MFR Busy Out Attendant Only Flexible Trunk MFR Restore Attendant Only Flexible 57 160 2 Codes Dialed When Not Receiving Dial Tone or Feature Access Tone CONDITION CODE Change Voice Announce to Tone Signal and Tone Signal to Voice Announce Call Back Messages Inspect Receiving Station On Hook Fixed Set Calling Station Off Hook Flexible Cancel Receiving Station On Hook Fixed 51 FEATURE Tone Override Attendant Override
456. epressF3 then F10 3 Depress F15 4 Dialtable number to be set 01 32 Example Table number 14 See Note 1 5 Depress L1 to allow or deny table chosen 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 DISPLAY INTE T TCIXD TX XD Y PTT Tit 1 111114 TT 7 Repeatsteps 5 and 6 for all subsequent tables required or go to step 3 to select a particular table 8 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 180 uuv 10 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 K NCTION Q IN ON OFF Line EL Enters new table number Increments table number ICLEAR 4 1 NTER Enters allow deny option Decrements table number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING IMEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE BE PROGRAMMED CPU levels NOTES 1 During step 4 the LED indication on L1 P Gs D D 8 De Ceg eee indicates the previous assignment for the table LED Allow Tabl Ca Off Deny Table 3 1 2 Cs Gl Ej xj E GENERAL I
457. er This is the quantity of ESI EA ETUs required Note 3 It is necessary for an SLT with message wait lamp to be supported by SLI EB Divide the number of modems and or single line telephones with message wait lamp by 4 If the result is not a whole number round it up to the next higher whole number This is the quantity of SLI EB ETUs required If some ports still available on an SLI EB subtract the number of available ports on the SLI EB from the number of single line telephones w o message wait lamp Then divide the resulting number by 4 If the result is not a whole number round it up to the next whole number This is the quantity of SLI EA ETUs required Note 4 Combined total of ESI EA ESI EB SLI EA SLI EB and VMI E ETUs cannot exceed 20 80 stations max Note 5 When a voice mail system is connected to the Electra MarkII MFR EA ETU s may be required depending on the model of voice mail system Note 6 When modem pooling and or a voice mail system is connected to the Electra MarkII an RSG E unit is required Note Combined total of CO PBX DID and E amp M Tie lines cannot exceed 40 200 3 ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 3 Common ETUs a CPU E or CPU EB ETU must be installed in the CPU slot in the ESE 32B 1 CCU b TSW E ETU must be installed in the TSW slot in the ESE 32B 1 CCU c MMC E ETU must be installed in the MMC slot in each ESE 32E 1 CCU d SMDR E ETU can be installe
458. er TUV 5 Attendant Override 6 Night Transfer These features are usually assigned to row 6 but can be assigned to other rows after all the buttons in row 6 are assigned El El E El F E B BL LJ 4 4 The following is a list of codes which can be used when assignin ing 05 internal call 5 Astation or feature should not be assigned to 06 Internal zone 1 more than one DSS BLF button per console 07 Internal zone 2 08 Internal zone 3 09 All internal zones 10 External zone 1 11 External zone 2 12 External zone 3 p A mm GENERAL INFORMATION DSS BLF BUTTON ASSIGNMENT Feature and Station Appearance 1 i This area of the memory block is used to designate appearances the DSS BLF Each position on the DSS BLF have the appearance of either an extension or feature Extension number assignment appears on the DSS BLF from the upper left to the lower right key while feature assignment appears from the lower right to the upper left key 1 1 2 4 2 i i i i i i ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 1 4 DSS BLF FLEXIBLE FUNCTION KEY ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F1 then F8 3 DepressF14 4 Enterdevice number 1 6 for the DSS BLF desired Example DSS 1 5 Depress
459. er a no group assignment depress the 4 un CLEAR key and then the ENTER key 4 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display IKL to increment to the next station number E E E E El GE LB FABER E FE B E GENERAL INFORMATION CALL PICKUP GROUP ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to assign stations to call pickup groups There are a total of 8 groups that stations be assigned to A station can only be assigned to one group ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 1 1 TERMINAL EXCHANGE OPERATION Gooffline Depress F1 then F10 Depress 11 Dial the extension number of one of the stations to beexchanged Example 104 Dial the extension number of the second station to be exchanged Example 120 See Note 1 Depress ENTER key Repeat steps 4 to 6 for any other pair of stations that Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 50 jo r F jP mjojoje 2 7 T 4 21212111 ajola 1 1 13121011 31414111
460. er switch on the right side of the PC 8300 4 While holding CTRL and SHIFT down press the button on the rear of the PC 8300 Then release both CTRL and SHIFT This procedure is called a cold start 5 Adjust the contrast control See Figure 930 10 on the right side of the PC 8300 so that the LCD display gives the right amount of contrast and light for comfortable viewing Figure 930 10 Contrast Adjustment Once the power has been turned on and the screen contrast has been adjusted the display should always appear as shown below after a cold start 1983 01 01 00 00 00 C Microsoft 1 TEXT TELCOM Load Save List 25717 28758 When using PC 8201A Although you may eventually have more files than Shown above you should at least have the BASIC TEXT and TELCOM file names displayed on the screen since these three are written in the Read Only Memory or ROM They will not be erased even by a cold start If the screen does not look like the one shown you Should perform a cold start again Refer to paragraph 930 3 step 4 To turn the power on for the second and subsequent times only turn on the power switch on the right side of the PC 8300 930 4 TURNING the POWER OFF The power supply to the PC 8300 can be turned off at almost any time whether you re in an application software program or whether you re in the MENU The Backup Battery maintains the contents of the m
461. er this number can be dialed via an OCC This option is used to determine whether the OCC to which the user is being routed provides service to the specified office code area Special use of the numbers 0 and 1 is made in the office code table assignment which may be required for either prefix check or service area check The example at right shows how these are used Depress 0 NOTES 1 For service area check 0 Noservice in area check route advance table for next route available 1 Service is available continue 2 For prefix check 0 Prefix required add the digit 1 before the number to be dialed 1 prefix required do not add the digit 1 before the number to be dialed 3 the example above the cursor position is indicated by the box around the digit 7 Other Keys Used INS DEL In MODIFY mode other keys may be used within the Extra Code Table when assigning additional digits to be dialed out on the line to which the user is being routed One possible application for this feature may be the need for dialing an access code plus a pause if the line is a PBX line Another application might be the dialing of a local number followed by an account code if the line is to be used for dialing through an OCC The use of a P in this table assignment means that the system is to pause when it gets to the P in the dialing sequence The and symbols will cause the system to dial the respectiv
462. erence while programming LCR 700 34 da ae SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS OFFICE CODE TABLE VERIFY START BER HERES ee AREA CODE TABLE VERIFY START NORMAL END J ALL DATA VERIFY S ABNORMAL END OFFICE CODE TABLE MODIFY 1 AREA CODE TABLE 6 EXTRA CODE TABLE 2 WEEKLY SCHEDULER 7 OFFICE CODE TABLE 3 DAILY SCHEDULER 8 HOME NPA CODE 4 ROUTE ADVANCE 5 ROUTE TABLE ENTER MENU NO ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS a Area Code Table Modify With the Modify Menu displayed depress 1 then CR RETURN The computer loads the area code table data from AREA CODE TABLE MODIFY the floppy disk and when done displays the Area TENANT NO 70 Code Table Modify display as shown At this time enter the tenant number for which the AREA CODE TABLE MODIFY NO de assi ts are to be made Depress a TENANT area code assignments are to ade pr AE 1 number 1 3 then CR RETURN NOTE Although it is possible to enter 0 as a tenant number this assignment has no function when used with the Electra and will result in no operation or incorrect operation of the LCR Now type in the area code to be assigned then CR AREA CODE TABLE MODIFY RETURN The example shows the display for TENANT NO 1 o0 selection of tenant 1 and area code 200 ARERO AE po we Based on the area code dia
463. es corresponding LED indications between ON and OFF 1Hz interrupted tone 0 5 sec ON 0 5 sec OF F LED OFF 2 secs 4 secs OFF Default See Notes 1 and 2 5 Depress ENTER key 115111 PjA T T E R N 1515 6 Depress key to go back on line 300 140 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT OGRAMMED MUST PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED am 382 486 or higher NOTES C 51 351 181 e 288 ss iss 5551 L3 ca Dem Ed ca 73 Ce Oa 1 Line key and Trunk Group correspondence LK1 Trunk Group 1 LK2 Trunk Group 2 LK3 Trunk Group 3 LK4 Trunk Group 4 LK5 Trunk Group 5 LK6 Trunk Group 6 LK7 Trunk Group 7 LK8 Trunk Group 8 2 This assignment is valid for COI EB as well as for and TLI E FIEL B B E E E E GENERAL INFORMATION FIRST RING PATTERN ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to assign in a Trunk Group basis one of the 2 availabie ring patterns 1 H to the Ist ring cycle after an incoming call is detected i 800 141 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988
464. eserve lodging or rental automobiles 7 Hotel and motel rooms At least ten percent of the rooms must contain hearing aid compatible telephones or contain jacks for plug in hearing aid compatible telephones which will be provided to hearing impaired customers upon request Single line telephone sets used in conjunction with this telephone system may or may not be hearing aid compatible The manufacturer of the single line telephone set must provide notice of hearing aid compatibility to comply with FCC rules The Multiline Terminals provided for this telephone System can be made hearing aid compatible 120 6 Service Requirements In the event of equipment malfunction all repairs will be performed by NEC or an authorized agent of NEC is the responsibility of users requiring service to report the need for service to NEC or to one of their authorized agents SECTION 130 GLOSSARY OF ABBREVIATIONS A ADA Ancillary Device Adapter ANS Answer Key 100 3 ATT BGM BLF CCU CNF CPU co COI DID DIR DND DP DPA DSS DTA DTMF ECR ESI ETE ETU EXT FCC FWD FWD BNA HFU ND 20292 CHAPTER 1 JULY 1987 Attendant B Background Music Busy Lamp Field Central Control Unit Conference Card feature and control button as well Central Processing Unit Central Office Central Office Line Interface D Direct Inward Dialing Directory Key Do Not Disturb Dial Pulse Dual Path Adapter Direct
465. ess codes Figure 170 2 ETE 16D 1 Telephone two color LED is provided to each line key which can be used for outside lines extension lines Data Transmit and Data Receive DND or S amp R features This Multiline Terminal is equipped with a 2 line LCD with 16 characters per line The ETE 6D 1 terminal requires twisted 2 pair cabling to the MDF or the IDF 100 26 24 ETE 16D 1 TEL The ETE 16D 1 TEL is a fully modular digital Multiline Terminal with 16 line keys 7 function keys and 20 programmable Feature Access keys for DSS with BLF indications Station Speed Dialing or feature access codes two color LED is provided to each line key which can be used for outside lines extension lines Data Transmit and Data Receive DND or S amp R features This Multiline Terminal is equipped with a 2 line LCD with 16 characters per line The ETE 16D 1 TEL requires twisted 2 pair cabling to the MDF or the IDF 25 ETE 16K 1 TEL The ETE 16K 1 TEL is a fully modular digital Multiline Terminal with 16 line keys 7 function keys and 10 programmable Feature Access keys assigned for DSS BLF Station Speed Dialing or feature access codes The 10 programmable Feature Access keys are associated with a 7 line 16 digit LCD with 11 pages The desired page can be selected by the DIR Directory key A total of 110 programmable designation buffers are available The top 2 lines of the LCD are used to indicate Clock Calendar and
466. establishes paths between stations and outside lines extension lines or call process tones The TSW E also has functions similar to the MMC E within the ESE 32B 1 CCU and provides the source output for external paging To connect MOH and BGM sources the TSW E BTU houses audio digitizer circuits to change analog signals to digital signals 10 COI E is the Central Office Line Interface Unit that contains circuitry for outside ring detection hold dialing and control function Each COI E ETU provides four identical circuits to serve up to four CO trunks which can be any mix of Loop Start or Ground Start Trunks or dial pulse dialing A maximum of 10 COLE ETUs can be installed per System 11 TLI E TLLE provides for the termination and operation of up to 2 E amp M Tie Lines loop dial 2 wire E amp M or 4 wire E amp M Type 1 or Type 5 and 10 pulse dial DID line Wink delayed second dial tone or immediate start loop signaling are supported Along with the possible terminations accommodated with the COI E ETU the system maximum of 40 outside lines is observed 12 ESI EA ETU The ESI EA ETU is the Electronic Station Interface Unit required to provide data control and voice service to the Multiline Terminals without the off hook announcement feature 1t can also accommodate the DSS BLF Console and CO Add On Modules Each ESI EA ETU con
467. eturns to the RAA display Depressing the ESC key at any time during programming brings up the modem screen depressing the ALT H at any time during programming brings up the help screen NOTE After returning to the RAA screen the time will appear approximately in one minute but you can start programming immediately ND 20292 CHAPTER9 MARCH 1988 lt MARKII gt 11 58 JAN 01 SUN lt ON HOOK gt LK 1 5 9 13 Alt H Help Esc Modem Online 10 Depress to go off hook Display shows lt MARKII gt EXT LINE OFF HOOK 11 59 JAN 01 MON Modem Online Alt H Help If no modems are used direct connection Display shows lt MARKII gt EXT LINE OFF HOOK gt 11 59 JAN 01 MON Alt Help Screen NOTE The following display indications are provided on the computer when used for remote administration 0 Line key in use green steady X Line key flashing Line key in use red steady Line key is idle 900 17 ND 20292 CHAPTER 9 MARCH 1988 11 Depress 0 RETURN to go off line Program Mode Program as you would with a ETE 16D i Depressing the Alt H shows the keystroke depressions needed for proper programming Help Screen lt MARKII gt OFF LINE lt gt lt gt PROGRAM MODE Alt H Help Esc Modem Online 12 To exit the RAA terminal emulator program follow this procedure l Insu
468. eurn uone nope Isny 8 1957 skay 58929 IMBI pue perg paadg uorjeyg Surururea804d JON 9d yeaday euo dure 359 4 1189 14313 dnyatd 1180 104 0 14 190 194024 2107 18 9107 jeusayuy pesrA1ednsu 19jsuga Wed 1189 5180 18429341 seurT 4 00 pupua aun 067 1803F 067067 65 057 85057 029 06v 75 057 EZ OSP 66 05V 12007 02 00 600 gror 1442 91 02 900 361742 200 IL ocv orot 690 80 00 900 500 8 057 O0GP Togt OP 191 00 TST 007 041 00 671 007 186 7 56505 8120 8014 0123126 8 peurudag EOS 205 Tos 007 151 00 007 7 00 PPI 007 007 4 NOLLVLS 14
469. exposed in step C place tape around this connection to prevent the possibility of any unwanted short circuits G Connect the plug end into the TSW E MOH jack Cable N Shield Figure 270 1 MOH Cable Shield Ground Exposed H Route the cable down and to the right side of the CCU to avoid interference with the insertion and the removal of ETUs Exit the other end of the cable at the right rear side of the CCU Thering tongue type connector installed in step E must be connected to the screw holding the PSE AD 1 PSU Refer to Figure 270 2 showing a suggested connection 270 2 EXTERNAL PAGING Audio output for external paging appears at the phono jack EP on the TSW E Shielded audio 200 41 ND 20292 CHAPTER2 JULY 1987 cable should be used for external paging audio connections The ECR E ETU provides three contact closures one per zone for use in zone paging with meet me answer These contacts are labelled EPC and EPC 1B through EPC 3A and EPC 3B A maximum of one ECR E ETU can be installed in a system providing a total of three paging zones It is necessary for the audio output to be connected to a locally provided amplifier and speaker s which are connected to the output of the amplifier via control relays also locally provided If the amplifier is a both way amplifier two way paging is available For connection information to a locally provided amplifier refer to Table 230 1 and Figure 270 3 For e
470. f five including Message Waiting from an attendant and from the voice mail messages be scanned one at a time Each message display gives the time the message was left identifies the caller and provides a number to cail Callback Messages can be cleared while the terminal is idle or will be automatically removed when the cal is returned CALL FORWARD ALL CALLS allows a station user to re direct all calls to their extension to someone else s extension a virtual extension or an Attendant Position The ability to set Call Forward is a function of the stations Class of Service assignment Call Forward All Calls can be set or cancelled by the forwarding station by the destination station or by the attendant CALL FORWARD BUSY NO ANSWER allows station user to re direct all calls to their extension while they are talking on it or while they are away 100 6 from their station to someone else s extension virtual extension or an attendant The ability to set Call Forward is a function of the stations Class of Service assignment Forward Busy No Answer can be set or cancelled by the forwarding station by the destination station or by the attendant CALL PARK allows a station user to temporarily park any call except a four party conference or a Conference made on two line keys removing the call from the extension placing it on hold thereby allowing the extension to be free for other call processin
471. ffer to be assigned to the Ist 15 1 0 3 tenant Example 50 See Note 2 ITlEINIAINITI2 5111 0 0 5 Repeat step 4 for each tenant Enter 99 for the last tenant assigned 10101 10101 6 Depress ENTER key 300 66 20293 3 1988 MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT OGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED All CPU leveis NOTES 1 During step 3 the display will show the previous number of tenant assigned to the buffer locations 2 2 Buffer number must be within the range 20 Dx e 2 to 99 3 A maximum of three tenants can be assigned Lu m El E E B AEE 6 6 6 i GENERAL INFORMATION SPEED DIAL TENANT ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to allocate in blocks the system speed dial buffers 20 to 99 to each the system s tenants maximum of three tenants can be assigned and the buffer numbers of each tenant i 1 1 are not allowed to overlap ND 20293 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2A3 SPEED DIAL OVERRIDE ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F2 then F6 3 Depress
472. ftie line DTMF digits 60msec 1 1 0 760 msec Time msec 300 256 oro 360 CODE CALL RESTRICTION 360 1 General provide dialing restrictions an individual station basis a method of code restriction has been designed into the Electra MarkII system The Electra MarkII utilizes a pattern of 32 system tables containing specific area and office codes Each table is set as an allow or deny table Allowing restricted stations to dial only specific area and office codes is then accomplished by assigning one or more tables to the stations as required If operator restriction Memory Block 1D7 is not assigned to a station then it is not restricted from dialing any number This section will fully explain this procedure It is recommended that before attempting to program any code restrictions that this section be fully reviewed Table 360 1 ses t pa eap ERI ______ BR RE AREA CODE OFFICE CODE There are 32 system code tables Example shown in Table 360 1 available the Electra MarkII system Each table has several parameters assignable Allow Deny Parameter Each table can be assigned as allow or deny table If a table is set as a deny table stations assigned t
473. g Speed Dial Station Speed Dial System Internal Voice Ring Signaling Callback Request Message Retrieve Account Code Entry Callback Request Message Cancel 300 133 ND 20292 CHAPTERS SEPTEMBER 1988 8 70 72 73 74 75 1 0 Not Assigned 63 54 Not Assigned Not Assigned Not Assigned 0 00 19 20 99 1 1 ND 30292 CHAPTERS SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 3A2 ATTENDANT 3rd AND 4th ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND DISPLAY tofe T e Nfe TXDXDY 1 Go offline 810168 MlojDjET 2 Depress 51 5111 121 15 iyisi T LILITIIITITITTTT3 31 A s s N 01 8 615 klely 3 6 4 DepressF12 See Note 1 5 Depress L3 and or L4 to assign or eliminate the 3rd and or 4th Attendant as needed 6 Depress ENTER key 7 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 134 N PKR ON OFF Line EL F W LEAR NTER Enters attendant assig W GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING PROGRAMMED Phe CPU levels NOTES ment MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY HAVE TO 8E PROGRAMMED MEMORY BLOCK THAT MUST BE PROGRAMMED 1 During step 3 L3 and L4 display any previous attendant assignment L3 LED
474. g functions The call can be retrieved at any station within the system by dialing an access code 4 X as set in default where X is call park location 0 9 and the Call Park area used parked call will recall to the primary extension of the station that placed the call The system when equipped with a CPU EB ETU will provide ten Call Park areas CALL PICKUP DIRECTED provides any station the capability to answer a call voice or ringing intended for a different station by dialing an access code CALL PICKUP GROUP provides the ability to assign station pickup groups to enable ringing calls in the group to be answered by any station within the group by dialing an access code The system provides eight Call Pickup Groups CALL TRANSFER can be performed by any station in the system of any call to any other station in the system The ability to originate or receive Camp On a form of Transfer to busy extensions is based on the Class of Service assignment of both stations CLASS OF SERVICE is a programming assignment to allow or deny access to Camp On Originate Receive Call Forward Operator Restriction Data Line Security Station Lockout Data Access Originate and LCR priority features Incoming Outgoing and Code Restrictions are assigned separately A CLOCK CALENDAR DISPLAY is provided to all Electra MarkII Multiline Terminals with an LCD This display is on the bottom line of the LCD ie displays the time of day 07
475. g spaces Each character is entered by selecting a dial key and depressing it a number of times Use the table below as a guide The F W and B W keys are used to move to the next or previous entry 213415 718 0 l 2 3 45 6 7 8 2 M P T W s sfe 4 5 elele 5 2 space SPACE D E P R 5 8 N 5 The dial pad key patterns repeat ever six depressions ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 ee pr e 4 5 P 9 8 9 e 21 4 15 C CE Dn Rel 7 EE Qm Ced me FOS Cx EJ LJ Pd c ma Cz 3 Depressing the ENTER key automatically advances the display to step 3 i GENERAL INFORMATION TRUNK GROUP NAME ASSIGNMENT 4 i i This area of the memory block is used to assign names of up to eight 8 characters including spaces to i ieach trunk group These names wiil appear in the displays of Multiline Terminals so equipped when receiving ring transfered DID Tie line or DIT calls to an idle extension 4 4 300 163 ND 20292 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 301 FIRST INITIALIZATION OPERATION em AND DISPLAY tolr XDXD3 Pp
476. ge in the system status required go to step 6 Depress ENTER key to restore the System Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 192 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 CO N ISPKR ON OFF Line GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING IEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY tOGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED All CPU levels NOTES De Gs Ge Gn 8 _ 7467 03 us 86 1 Duringstep 3 the status of line key L1 indicates if the system is busied out 55 Em gem F3 EX P al 1 L1 System busied out OFF System not busied out E E GENERAL INFORMATION SYSTEM ALL BUSY RESTORE ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to restore a system that busied out During busy out condition the system does not provide any call processing Programming station is able to enter program mode during i System busy out condition 300 193 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 442 SYSTEM ALL BUSY OUT ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline tole Je J C INTE lP istyisitielml Te u s v
477. go back on line 300 64 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 b Ob 2 Enter new station number W Backward GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE BE PROGRAMMED All CPU levels NOTES CE reni Gmel ex Ce 3 Fal unc 14 1 During step 3 the display will show the previous station assigned 2 The station number entered must be associated with an ETE 16D Multiline Terminal E E B E d GENERAL INFORMATION PROGRAMMING TERMINAL i This area of the memory block is used to assign an ETE 16D Multiline Terminal system programming capabilities Only the first and second system attendants are able to program this memory block Only one i programming station at a time can be off line 1 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2A2 SPEED DIAL TENANT ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND DISPLAY 1 Goofflne 00 x x mjojoje 2 Depress F2 then F6 5 i Epp pepe 3 DepressF12 See Note 1 Is P p 1 219 lolo 4 Enter last speed dial bu
478. gt DISPLAY offline ET TX XD 9 Imlo oe T T TT T qp 2161 clol 111 2 1511 iciui T 5 1 T is to be programmed Example Module 1 11 151 2 Dial CCU slot number 1 8 where COI port is to be programmed Example Slot 2 AR Iz 1 5 21 Dial COI channel number 1 4 of COI port to be assigned Example Channel 1 See Note 2 Depress L1 to L12 to set the desired parameters of the COI port Corresponding LED s turn on or off accordingly clol nti z e sitlolri2 2 Depress ENTER key See Note 3 Repeat steps 7 and 8 for all additional COI ports as required or go to step 3 to select a particular COI port Depress the key to go back on line 300 196 Q N R ON OF F W Increments channel number CLEAR _ ______________ ENTER Enters each assignment B W Decrements channel number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO PROGRAMMED ao CPU levels See in Note 2 NOTES
479. h the CCU to the upper bracket knobs also reinstall the two screws removed in step D as shown in Figure 240 2 The ESE 32E 1 CCUs are equipped with one wall mounting bracket This bracket must first be detached from the CCU to properly wall mount it When the first ESE 32E 1 CCU is to be installed repeat step B Locate the two mounting screws in the upper rear of the CCU holding the mounting bracket to the CCU remove the two screws and the bracket Also remove the two screws located on the top front of the CCU 200 20 4 Mount the metal bracket using four locally provided fasteners as outlined with the template Refer to Figure 240 1 K Insure that the hooks provided on the top rear of the ESE 32B 1 CCU are fully seated within the open slots on the bottom rear of the ESE 32E 1 CCU Figure 240 2 Wall Mounting ESE 32B 1 CCU After mounting the ESE 32E 1 CCU onto the ESE 32B 1 CCU secure them using the four screws removed in step I as shown in Figure 240 3 L When the second ESE 32E 1 CCU is installed it should be done in the same manner as the first ESE 32E 1 CCU M Install the top panel onto the top CCU and secure with the screws removed in step NOTE All removed front panels should be reinstalled by securing with the screws removed in step B after the required ETUs are installed and the system is tested Refer to Figure 240 4 240 2 FLOOR MOUNTING THE CCU The CCUs are designed to be wall mou
480. he CO Add On module device number 1 4 will automatically associate the CO Add On module to an attendant position 1 4 respectively E E F EJ E E BI E B E GENERAL INFORMATION DSS TO CO ADD ON MODULE ASSIGNMENT t t 4 This area of the memory block is used to assign EDE 30 1 DSS BLF units to function as CO Add On Modules A maximum of four 4 DSS BLFs can be assigned as CO Add On Modules this impacts the i overall limit of six 6 DSS BLF units that be installed in a system It is possible for given attendant i be assigned two 2 DSS BLF consoles and 1 CO Add On Module Only an EDE 30 1 Revision or higher can be assigned as CO Add On Module i 0 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 1 6 CO ADD ON MODULE LINE KEY ASSIGNMENT OPERATION lt AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline JE JP 2 Depress F1 then F8 3 Depress F16 cto r NTATC iol laloiMoloi i TTT 4 Enter the CO Add On Module device number 1 4 5 5 to be assigned Example CO Add On Module 3 L See Notes 1 and 2 5 Dial the number of the CO trunk 01 40 to be assigned to the selected l
481. he Modify Menu in the display depress 8 then RETURN The display shown will be provided HOME NPA CODE MODIFY HOME NPA CODE 516 Now type in the numbers corresponding to the local area code in which the system is installed Depress return to enter the data into the computer s memory Depress the ESC key to enter the data into floppy disk and return the display to the Modify Menu Depress the ESC key to return the display to the LCR main menu 700 44 5 Display Mode The display mode function is made available at the LCR Main menu This function allows the programmer to view the data available in any of the tables in the floppy disk This function does not allow the programmer to change data just look at it this function only allows viewing data from the floppy disk the programmer may decide to up load data from the LCR E to the floppy disk before using this option if it is desired to view the contents of the present data in the LCR E The following pages show the steps required to properly use the display mode function The first step in using the display mode function is to make sure that the LCR MAIN MENU is in the display of the computer While at the LCR Main Menu depress 5 then the return key The program for the display function is loaded from the floppy disk and the display at right is provided This is the Display Menu The Display Menu allows the programmer to choose any table for
482. he second CR RETURN displays the data for the item number 750 8 Explanation LCR Commands This section explains the LCR RETURN support terminal commands required to properly program the required data for proper operation of the LCR E ETU It is recommended that section 750 7 be fully read and understood prior to reading this section Once the initialization procedure has been completed powering up the PC 8201A PC 8300 results in display of the LCR main menu See section 750 5 for the initialization procedure if this has not been completed The LCR main menu provides the programmer with 8 options 7nn 29 ND 20292 7 1988 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS AREA CODE TABUE MODIFY TENANT NO AREA CODE 3 300 TABLE TABLE NO 01 AREA CODE TABLE MODIFY 1 AREACODE 201 xxx AREA CODE TABLE MODIFY AREA CODE 3 201 TABLE ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 The options and key in numbers are SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS 1 Down Load 5 Display 2 Up Load 6 Print Out 3 Verify 7 System Data Clear 4 Modify 10 System Control NOTE Key in numbers 8 and 9 are not used The selection of any option above except System Control results in the display of a second menu With the Main Menu displayed depress the DOWN
483. hen it is removed or inserted without powering down the CCU Figure 240 12 SMDR E ETU Switch Layout Switch 1 designated SW1 ON OFF is used to connect backup battery to the SMDR E ETUs memory This switch should be set to the ON position to allow memory retention during power failure or brownouts Switch is a 5 position switch which is used toselectabaudrate 300 4800 LED 1 green lit indicates that the SMDR E ETU is receiving power 2 Connection of SMDR a The SMDR E ETU must be installed into either or OPT2 slot or a combination slot of any CCU Prior to installing the SMDR E ETU ensure that switch SW1 is set to the ON position and that the baud rate switch is set to the proper position When installing the SMDR E ETU turn SW2 OFF for insertion of this ETU to the slot without powering down the CCU b Route the RS 232C connector ended cable down and to the right side of the CCU in a manner to avoid interference with the insertion and the removal of ETUs and with the 25 pair cables from J1 J3connectors Remove the access panel on the 200 27 ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 right side of the CCU which covers seven openings to mount RS 232C connectors See Figure 240 14 Mount the RS 232C connector in one of the openings using screws and nuts locally provided See Figure 240 15 DIP 1 48x 100 24 12 Com 6 Com 3 ON OFF Figure 240 13 SM
484. her music source to be heard over their Multiline Terminal s speaker BATTERY BACKUP ofsystem memory is provided via small batteries on selected printed circuit boards to protect such memories as the system program Speed Dial messages and Clock Calendar SMDR to list just a few BROKER S CALL is a calling method offered to allow a station user to alternate between two calls Multiline Terminal users merely depress the Answer Key to alternate between two calls on the same line key Single line telephone users depress the hook flash and dial the access code set in system default as 4 BUSY LAMP FIELD telephone is a standard programmable feature of the ETE 16D 1 Multiline Terminal Any of the twenty programmable Feature Access keys which are programmed for Direct Station Selection will also provide Busy Lamp Field indication of the station or virtual extension programmed A maximum of ten ETE 16D 1 with BLF assigned Multiline Terminals can be connected to each Central Control Unit CCU CALCULATOR FUNCTION is offered to all Multiline Terminals with an LCD This is a fouc function six digit calculator which can be accessed up to five stations simultaneously CALLBACK MESSAGE is an indication on the terminal s LCD of who within the system has called and would like a return call Up to five Callback Messages be received at any station The LCD indicates the amount of Callback Messages to a maximum o
485. his table will be restricted from dialing any code or area office code entered into the table Ifa station is assigned a deny table and an allow table that both contain identical area or area office codes the system will allow the station to dial the ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 number if the table number comes before the deny table number Example Operator restriction is assigned to Station 104 Station 104 is assigned Table 01 and Table 14 B Table 01 is assigned as an allow C Table 14 is assigned as a deny D Tabie 01 has its first entry programmed for 516 753 E Table 14 has its first entry programmed for 516 represents digits 1 0 and After the 516 is dialed the system will inspect all the tables assigned to this station starting with the first table then to the next in numerical order the Electra Mark II system will look for a match between the number entered into a table and the number dialed The example shows that if 516 is dialed there will be an area code match in Table 01 containing 516 753 and Table 14 containing 516 The system only sees the match for Table 01 as it scans the tables in numerical order If the system first saw the match in Table 14 the station user would have been restricted because Table 14 has been set as deny Although there is a match in Table 01 it is not a complete match because the 516 in the table also contains an office code 753
486. ialed This is determined by the information in the specified office code table NO Service or the selected route is available for all office codes CHK checks the specified office code for information on whether the selected route provides service to the office code dialed d gt hi oca ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 1 The Prefix 1 is not added when this office code is dialed 2 For Serice Area Check 0 Service is not provided by the D specified route for this office code 1 Service is provided by the specified route for the office code h HOME NPA TABLE HOME NPA CODE One 1 Home NPA Table is provided This table is used to enter the Area Code of the area in which the gt 8 5V PC 8271A 01 here to plu 8300 into wall outlet being system resides This assignment is very importa and MUST be made When local calls calls dialed without an area code are to be routed through LCR the area code which is programmed into the Home NPA Table will be added to the number dialed 750 5 INITIALIZING THE PC 8300 There are two types of initialization with the PC 8300 computer l Cold Start Used during initial installation or when battery failure occurs All contents of RAM are erased Connect the optional AC Adapter g the PROTECT switch This switch prevents data from entered into bank
487. ic Pool Ca Group in Step 4 the following procedure is used Cw L1 to L8 correspond to Trunk Groups 1 to 8 LEDON Assigned to Pool Group LED OFF Not assigned to Pool Group 3 Depression of the ENTER key will increment 4 ALARA EERE E by the LED pattern of L1 to L8 C3 Coo respectively the display to the next Pool Group number I RR 4 i GENERAL INFORMATION TRUNK GROUP TO LINE POOL GROUP ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to assign up to eight system trunk groups to each of the pool groups i 300 157 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBERT 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 3B10 LINE POOL GROUP AUTO EXTENSION ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND DISPLAY Torr 8 18 11 2 Depress F3 then PT Pjolo t 1 101015 4 111 111 1 5 Eachextension line position L1 to 1 15 required to be a Pool Auto Extension PAE for the station chosen in Step 3 should be selected See Notes 1 amp 2 LED ON Assign Pool Auto Extension LED OFF Do Not Assign pool auto extension 3 Depress F20 4 Dialstation number being assigned Example Station 104 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 3 7 Repeat Steps 5 and 6 until all de
488. ice The private code is established and changed by the individual station user If the private code is displaced or not readily available the attendant can override the station lockout restore the station to normal operation and reset the private code to its default value STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SMDR E is an optional ETU which provides detailed call record information about the telephone ND 20292 CHAPTER 1 JULY 1987 usage of the system Call records are generated for incoming outgoing conferenced and transferred outside calls Station identification trunk identification time of origination call duration and account codes are among the information provided To retrieve these reports a locally provided printing or call accounting device compatible with a standard RS232C output must be installed Whether or not incoming calls will generate a record can be selected via system programming SPEED DIAL Station is provided to every station within the Electra system Because each station type has its own unique capabilities access to the individual twenty speed dial buffers may vary 1 ETE 6 1 dial access to 20 memories 2 ETE 6D 1 dial access to 10 memories and direct Selection to 10 more 3 ETE 16D 1 direct selection and or dial access to the 20 memories 4 ETE 16K 1 direct selection to 110 memories 5 Single Line Telephone dial access to 20 memories Each memory location has the ca
489. ific trunk 8 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 88 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 EL Enters Trunk number Increments Trunk number CLEAR Clears previous assignment ENTER Enters each assignment B W Decrements Trunk number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED am 2 19 2c2 3A4 E 2 9 Een 5 NOTES 1 Default trunk assignment All trunks assigned to Tenant 1 2 Depressing the ENTER key will increment the display to the next trunk number C3 Dm Cm pex Lal Ed Ed ca Ifa 14 el 4 4 E C Oa 3 DIT trunk to tenant assignments should correspond to the same tenants as assigned in Trunk Group to Tenant assignment in Memory Block 2C2 3 E E E EE E i This area of the memory block used to assign DIT trunks to tenants Each DIT ANA trunk follows the day night assignment of its tenant ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2B4 DIT ANA ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND 3 DISPLAY 1 Gooffline jojr f eft nfe x xT 15 151 2 T 111 11 11111 2 12 eixiTi xi xi xi xi
490. ignments in 1 2 4 1 Correct indication Retest for Indication on Multiline Terminal installed Correct Assignment Reassign correctly Rebuild system One connector card atatime Replace defective card Replace ccu Retest for Indications Correct indications No Indications Replace TSW E and test 1f problem is not solved replace CPU EB 500 6 ND 20292 CHAPTER 5 SEPTEMBER 1987 No System Tones Are Available Test for internal call processing Internal Cail Processing No Internal Dial Tone Redefine problem and select the correct flowchart Not Working Check cables between TSW E and MMC E s Ribbon Cables Replace MMC E together with associated ribbon cable Remove ribbon cables and check for tones in Module 1 Reinstall one ribbon cable on Mod 2 then test for problem Replace Mod 3 Problem Solved Replace MMC E and test Problem Solved Replace MMC E in Mod 1 and test Replace TSW E and test If problem is not solved CPU EB Reinstall remaining ribbon cables 500 7 ND 20299 CHAPTER 5 1987 B1 Radio Frequency Interference RFI Check cabling System at MDF Check cable of affected Muttiline Terminai s Ground aij unused Pairs
491. ine button Example CO trunk 10 line keys L1 L5 will light in turn corresponding to the button location within the particular row being assigned See Notes 3 amp 4 6 Depress ENTER key lw 7 RepeatSteps 5 and 6 for all line buttons on the selected device to be programmed 8 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 24 tik 515 A p M o p s 1515 A p M o o s 11111111 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 W Backwards to previous line button IMEMORY 8LOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED acs haac ON OF ine euo CPU EB or higher NOTES 1 IfTEL 4 key is depressed once any time after step 4 the display s second line will change to Cu Show za 2011 2027 Em This allows selection of individual rows 2 If TEL key is depressed twice any time after step 4 the program is returned to step 3 3 Ifa CO trunk is already assigned depressing the CLEAR and ENTER keys assigns this line d key as VACANT 7 4 trunk which already appears on a line key on the associated attendants ETE 16D Ls Cw terminal cannot also be programmed on the CO line key console EJ E I E GENERAL INFORMATION CO ADD ON MODU
492. ing 200 14 260 5 ADA E Installation Into a 220 21 DTA E Unit 200 15 ETE 6 1 Multiline Terminal 200 36 260 6 Data Switching Adapter Unit DTA E 200 37 260 7 DTA E Installation 200 39 280 SITE UDR CONSTRUCTION 260 8 Wall Mount Unit Installation 200 40 230 1 General Information 200 16 270 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT 230 2 Site Survey 200 16 CONNECTION 230 3 Site Limitations 200 16 230 4 Site Selection Conditions 200 16 270 1 Music on Hold 200 41 230 5 MDF Construction 200 16 270 2 External Paging 200 41 230 6 CCU Cables 200 17 270 3 Background Music 200 42 230 7 Outside Lines 200 17 270 4 External Tone Ringing 200 42 230 8 Station Equipment 200 17 270 5 Night Chime 200 43 270 6 Modem Pooling 200 45 210 GENERAL This chapter provides a complete and comprehensive understanding of how to properly install each component of the Electra Markl Digital Telephone System 6 is recommended that this chapter be read in its entirety to familiarize yourself with its content This will enable a faster more productive installation and cut over For cut over of systems power being supplied to the system should be applied as a final step just prior to system operational testing as described in Chapter 5 of this manual The Electronic Telephone Units ETUs make extensive use of C MOS technology STATIC DISCHARGES TO ANY ETU MUST BE AVOIDED Each interface and optional ETU contains a switch to protect its circuitry from damage during remova
493. inter Check Print Out printer power Check that printer is printer ON LINE Check paper feed LCR Restarted LCR E restart during Replace LCR E Down Load command associated Up Load with LCR E Verify System Control System Data Insufficient Data Check LCR Program Down Load all Down Load Incomplete received from LCR E Tables Replace LCR E Key System Not Invalid data or no Check LCR E switch settings If Down Load Ready data from LCR E settings are right replace LCR E Beep Tone Invalid input keyed Check cursor position to determine All command modes in required input and enter valid entry 700 53 ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 START NORMAL NO OPERATION NO LCR YES ISTK AC DIALED IS ASSIGNED FOR IT 9 BYPASS YES ACCESS TRUNK IN TRUNK RQUP NO BYPASS LCR 1 AREA DIRECT DIAL NOTE Normal operation indicates that a trunk will be accessed from the 9 Access Code Group 700 54 ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 DIRECT DIAL AREA DISCONNECT OPERATION NO LCR LOCAL CALL OVERRIDES LCR WAS N11 DIALED NORMAL OPERATION YES LCR LCR TOLL LCR LOCAL NORMAL CALL CALL OPERATION 1 XXXX NNX XXXX NO LCR 700 55 ND 20292 CHAPTER7 MARCH 1988 1 DIAL AREA NON 1 LOCAL CALL OVERRIDE YES LOCAL CALL OVERRIDES LCR NO NORMAL OPERATION OPERATION
494. ion 102 See Note 1 5 Enter the maximum number digits digit string length that the station will be allowed to dial when using a Tie line 01 99 See Note 2 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 3 J ule jMjo D E 51 151 1 Lit PET TT rrr yy tli fel fel 23 2 TPT TTT TT Jel le 10 121 1 fot te Tr tr xt fel 7 5111 Tle 1110121 Joi 611111 12 iti Tel rie te l1 lo 3 Jot 7 Repeat Steps 4 and 5 for all subsequent stations or depress TEL key to assign a specific station 8 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 82 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 TEL 2 Selects station be programmed Increments station number LEAR Clears previous assignment NTER Enters each assignment W Decrements telephone number MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY 8LOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED 4 1 4E10 or higher NOTES 61 62 1 us s 1 After step 4 the display will show any previous Ce 2541 c assignment Default is No restriction TEN 2 Depress th
495. ion H number DSS BLF device number or modem device number only GENERAL INFORMATION TERMINAL BUSY ASSIGNMENT ND 30391 CHAPTERS SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 1E4 TERMINAL TELEPHONE INFORMATION 1 10 OPERATION Go offline Depress F1 then F10 Depress F14 See Note 1 To determine Telephone Port assignment dial station number to be referenced Example Station 104 See Note 2 To determine DSS Port assignment depress L14 Enter DSS device number 1 6 Example 6 See Note 3 Todetermine device type associated with a particular port depress L15 Enter port information in order by module slot and channel See Note 4 Example Module 1 Slot 3 Channel 2 X AND DISPLAY tofe fe LI mojo 8511 6 1 21202222 p Tele 5 515 161 3 1 15 eluh 131515121 11 1 2 2 1 8 01556 10101 1 sitio risj clh 2 15 1 1 5 3 151515151 6 Check the information of other stations ports or modems by using the F W B W
496. ion of CO PBX hookflash when 1700 mS COD RECALL button is depressed Hit Protection Time 4B 2 4B 7 Minimum duration of a disconnect 350 mS 700 mS COD signal from the central office before the system disconnects the line 0 5 a 8 4 9 4B 2 4B 7 Duration of pauses stored in speed dial 1 sec 7 COD memories Disconnect 4B 2 4B 7 The minimum time interval after the 1400 mS system releases a CO line before it can COD be reaccessed This allows time for the CO network to also release the line between two consecutively dialed digits sent by the system to the Hookflash Start 4 3 4B 8 Minimum hookflash duration from a 100 mS 800 mS Time SLT Single Line Telephone in order to receive second dial tone Hookflash End Time 4B 3 4B 8 Maximum hookflash duration from Start SLT Single Line Telephone in order to Time receive second dial tone Recognition Time Minimum allowabie time interval 10 mS 180 mS Central Office 300 255 ND 20291 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 SECTION 350 FUNCTION TIMER CHART Contd MEMORY TIMING VALUE VALUE TIMER BLOCK DEFINITION Default Maximum Bounce Protection 4B 3 4B 8 Lapsed time after hook flash before 300 mS 1400 mS Time SLT detecting on hook condition Disconnect Time 4B 9 Duration of timed desconnect signal 500 mS 7 sec VMD which is sent to the Voice Mail Syste
497. iring for power supplies RSG flat cable connectors etc should be checked for good solid connections Refer to Chapter 2 Hardware Installation of this manual for connection instructions B AC DC Power With an AC DC meter check all power See Table 520 1 It is recommended that this test be run with only the TSW E CPU EB ETUs and 1 or 2 MMC E s installed the CCUs on two and three cabinet configurations C Initialization Check To check if the system is initializing correctly it is suggested that only Module 1 be powered up with the CPU EB TSW E and one ESI EB ETU with terminals installed After initialization all the terminals assigned to this ESI EB ETU should be able to call each other via intercom These stations by default will be assigned station numbers 100 103 the first two terminals must be ETE 16D 1 530 3 System Initialization Once the previous steps are completed and checked the entire system should be initialized With the power off all the interface and option cards can be installed in each module as indicated on the job specification document It is important to check that the battery switch on the CPU EB ETU is turned off and all interface and option ETU switches are on At this point the technician can power up the system During the power up procedure each display terminal will temporarily display INITIALIZE After the initialization process each station display will show default time and d
498. ith the optional ECR E ETU and locally provided amplifier speakers and relays With the page Meet Me feature the Electra system allows any station in the system the ability to answer a page at which time the paging circuit is released and is again available for paging The Electra MarkII provides a common uninterrupted signal to the optional ECR E ETU for External Tone Ringing The ECR E ETU contains five control ring relays each relay can be programmed for a different interruption pattern When connected to a locally provided call alerting device this feature provides a user in a noisy environment the ability to hear an incoming outside line ringing ND 20292 1 JULY 1987 FLEXIBLE LINE ASSIGNMENT provides the ability to assign any except for each Multiline Terminal s own extension line keys to outside lines appearances of other extension lines Save and Repeat Data Transmit Data Receive Do Not Disturb features Electra Markli s FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN is assigned by the resident system program when the system is first initialized With a few exceptions the numbering plan can be altered for customer requirements via system programming FLEXIBLE RINGING ASSIGNMENT is the ability to provide ring tone signals to stations that have an appearance of the CO or extension line being called Separate ringing assignments can be set for DAY MODE and NIGHT MODE FLEXIBLE TIMEOUTS are provided to a
499. ization and test If trouble persists THEN Replace CPU EB 500 13 ND 20292 CHAPTER 5 SEPTEMBER 1987 02 Multiline Terminal Ringing Problems Problem Occurance Intermittant Consistent Check to see if problem occurs on CO or internal calls Problem Occurance Internal Check Memory Block 1A for the correct line button assignment Incorrect Assignment Check to see if station is call forwarded or in DND Station call forward OND Check and adjust volume control Test Yes No Cancel Feature Check Memory Block 18 for both day and night ringing assignments Reset station then Reset ESI E Incorrect Assignment es 1 Allow off hook ring on station and test If trouble persists THEN Send in Multiline Terminal for repair NOTE Internal calls include station to station as well as transferred calis 2 Disallow DND ND 20292 CHAPTER 5 SEPTEMBER 1987 Check to see if problem occurs on CO or internal CO or Internal Dial Tone Goto Flow chart A1 500 15 ND 20292 CHAPTER 5 SEPTEMBER 1987 E1 No Dial Tone Access on SLT Check Memory Block AC 1 for Correct MFR EA and SLI E assignments Assignment s Correct Reassign CO or Internal dial tone Replace SLT and test Replace COI E and retest Replace SLT and test Goto
500. ized Values SLI Common Values ESI EB Data and Second Voice Path Assignment COLIII Initialized Values COI IV Initialized Values Programming Parameters VMI Initialize 1 Assignment VMI Initialize 2 Assignment 4C Card Interface 1 2 Card Interface Slot Assignment Interface Slot Busy Out Assignment PAGE 300 164 300 166 300 168 300 170 300 172 300 174 300 176 300 178 300 180 300 182 300 184 300 186 300 188 300 190 300 192 300 194 300 196 300 198 300 200 300 202 300 204 300 206 300 208 300 210 300 212 300 214 ND 20292 CHAPTER SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY ASSIGNMENT PAGE BLOCK 4E TLI Programming 1 Line Type Assignment 300 216 2 TLI Dial Tone Assignment 300 218 3 TLI Digit Add Delete Code Assignment 300 220 4 TLI I Initialized Values 300 222 TLI II Initialized Values 300 224 6 Initialized Values 300 226 7 TLI IV Initialized Values 300 228 8 TLI V Initialized Values 300 230 9 Tandem Port to Hunt Group Assignment 300 232 10 Trunk Group to Tandem Hunt Group Assignment 300 234 5A Station Copy Assignment 300 236 5B 1 CPU Initial History 300 238 2 System Program Check 300 240 3 Interface Slot Check 300 242 4 Terminal Check 300 244 5 Software Hardware Slot Status 300 246 6 Software Hardware Terminal Status 300 248 5C 1 System Data Last Change 300 250 2 Data Dump 300 252 350 Function Timer Charts 300 254 360 Code Call Restriction 360 1 General 300 257
501. l then remove the front panel by sliding it to the left Place the panel and screws aside for later reinstallation C Unscrew the two screws located on the top front of the CCU then remove the top panel Place the panel and screws aside for later reinstallation D Unscrew the two screws located on the bottom front of the CCU then remove the base panel Place the panel and screws aside for future reinstallation E Locate the two mounting screws on the upper rear of the CCU holding the upper mounting bracket to the CCU remove the two screws and the bracket F Remove the two mounting screws holding the lower mounting bracket to the base panel G Use the template provided with ESE 32B 1 CCU to layout CCU s in position Install eight locally provided fasteners appropriately for wall mounting in positions shown on the template CCU s must be mounted correctly for proper operation Install the wall mounting metal brackets as shown in Figure 240 1 using the eight locally provided fasteners Mount the base panel onto the lower bracket using the two screws removed in step F See Figure 240 1 Figure 240 1 Wall Mounting Bracket and CCU Base Panel Using the open slots provided on the back panel of the CCU mount the CCU to the knobs of the upper bracket and onto the base panel Make sure that the upper bracket knobs are fully seated within the open slots of the CCU Tighten the screws from above the CCU to securely attac
502. l Printer Cable PC 8494A or PC 8294A LCR Floppy Disk 3 5 inches provided with LCR E g Parallel Interface Printer NOTE The PC 8201A requires six 8k RAM ICs installed The RAM ICs are PC 8201A 06 tems a can be obtained from an NEC Home Electronics distributor Item fis provided from NEC America Inc Item g must be locally provided 4 Equipment Configuration PC 8300 a 3 SASE PC 82314 Figure 720 3 8300 Configuration 5 Equipment Description 8300 PC 8300 consists of the following CPU ROM RAM section Key Board 8 line x 40 digit LCD Printer Interface Floppy Disk Drive Interface RS 232C Interface Telephone Interface Bar Code Reader Interface Data Recorder Interface The PC 8300 requires a floppy disk unit PC 8231A to program and maintain the LCR E ETU It also requires an RS 232C cable for the connection of the LCR E ETU to the PC 8300 Liquid crystal display Low Voltage Display LED Battery case Electrical power switch Figure 720 4 Outside View of PC 8300 b Floppy Disk Unit PC 8231A The floppy disk unit PC 8231A is connected to the PC 8300 using a floppy disk cable included with the PC 8231A The PC 8231A accommodates a 3 5 inch floppy disk used to enter and store LCR data See Figure 720 3 c RS 232C Cable PC 8495A 01 The R
503. l and insertion while power is applied to the unit make it a habit to first ensure this switch SW1 is OFF In ide Side View Front View of Installed of Installed sw OFF Figure 210 1 SW 1 of ETUs SECTION 220 SPECIFICATIONS 220 1 GENERAL INFORMATION Prior to configuring any system first complete the job specification sheets provided in Section 370 of this manual and available in the basic CCU as ND 20234 and make sure that all types of station equipment and feature options are taken into account 200 1 ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 An understanding of the system programming is required to properly complete the job specification forms Refer to Chapter 3 Even though each CCU has 8 interface slots and 32 ports all ports are not used for installing station equipment The installation requirements will dictate the availability of ports for installing station equipment This section contains examples that are provided for illustrative purposes only as well as system specifications Twenty five pair cable binders to the MDF should when possible pair the same type ETUs together within a cable binder This will simplify the MDF wiring 220 2 PROGRAMMING STATION A maximum of 4 programming positions can be available in a system Station equipment connected to the first three programming positions must be a ETE 16D 1 Multiline Terminal supported by an ESI EA or ESI EB ETU the fourth p
504. le does not include an office code disconnect station b table found Check Memory Block 3E 4 1 System allow allow user free dialing 2 System deny disconnect station _ Step 7 Allow three more digits to be dialed Six digit item in table matches last six digits dialed 1 Table is allow allow user free dialing 2 Table is disconnect station b Ifitem in table no longer matches the last six digits dialed locate next lowest table assigned to the station which contains an OCC code which matches the third fourth and fifth digits dialed and either a three digit entry which matches the area code dialed or a six digit entry that matches the last 6 digite dialed area office code 1 New table found A Table is allow allow user free dialing B Table is deny disconnect station 2 Notable is found check Memory Block 3E 4 A System allow allow user free dialing B System deny disconnect station 360 5 Puerto Rico refer to Table 360 5 Step 1 First digit dialed a Digit 0 disconnect station b Any digit 1 to 9 allow two more digits to be dialed Step 2 Check last three digits dialed Anitem in the special code table matches last three digits dialed to allow another digit next step NOTE When Memory Block 3E 1 is assigned as Puerto Rico Code Table 32 is used as a special code table only b No item in the special code table matches last three digits dialed Step 3 4th Digit Dialed
505. led the LCR determines AREA CODE TABLE MODIFY which tables should be examined The first decision that must made is the type of tables to be routed ARER AME 200 through Two types of tables can be selected based on TABLE NO the area code The first type is the weekly schedule tables The second type is the route advance tables Depress the Space Bar to select the type of table The first depression of the Space Bar causes the display to show WEEKLY as the selected table type Depressing the Space Bar again selects ROUTE ADVANCE as the selected table type After selecting PNE NT n TABLE the table type depress the Cursor Down key to get to AREA CODE 200 the Table No line and enter the desired table number TABLE NAME WEEKLY for the table type chosen The example shows the TABLE NO 10 selection of WEEKLY table number 10 maximum of 64 tables can be selected 00 63 for either WEEKLY or ROUTE ADVANCE Once the above steps are completed two options are available If corrections are required the use of the Cursor Up key allows returning to the line requiring change If no changes to the data is required depress the CR RETURN and the display increments to the next table number Selection of a new area code can be made at this time or depressing CR RETURN ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 displays the data for the area code number in the display Once all ch
506. left for busy or unattended stations when in the message mode Up to two DSS BLF Consoles can be set to function with an Attendant Position up to two attendant 100 8 positions can be provided with two DSS BLF Consoles each two more Attendant Positions can each be equipped with one DSS BLF Console The resulting totals are six DSS BLF Consoles associated with four attendant positions The number of CO Add On Modules will also affect the 6 console maximum DSS BLF RECALL with station identification provides the originating attendants LCD with the line key number that was transfered or camped on as well as the station number of the station that did not answer the Camp On This allows the attendant to respond and address the recall quickly and efficiently The ELAPSED CALL TIMER is a counter which is shown on the LCD of a Multiline Terminal engaged in an outside call This timer provides a constant reminder of the on going call s length Figure 140 6 LCD with elapsed call time EQUAL ACCESS ACCOMMODATION is provided to permit the Speed Dial memories and Code Restriction processes to allow connection of CO lines that provide access to Specialized Common Carriers SCC EXTERNAL ZONE PAGING WITH MEET ME enables system users to quickly and easily locate and communicate with each other The system provides for the ability to set up three zones plus all zones of External Paging w
507. levels e 1221 e NOTES 1 During step 3 the display shows any current assignment for the attendant to be set ee 2 The 3rd and or 4th attendants must first be allowed in memory block 3A2 before assigning them to a tenant C 3 ATTENDANT 1 always assigned to TENANT 1 4 Thisassignment cannot be made when any station is assigned to this attendant 108 DSS BLF console is assigned to this attendant 1C1 Therefore related assignments must first be 1 cleared to allow this assignment to be made GENERAL INFORMATION TO TENANT ASSIGNMENT 1 1 This area of the memory block is used to assign the four possible system attendants to a particular i i tenant s A maximum of three Tenants are available i 1 1 1 1 4 300 139 ND 30292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 3B1 FIRST RING PATTERN ASSIGNMENT OPERATION lt AND DISPLAY 21 Geoffline CIx x xD iP RjO c R A M Mlolpie 15 v s 2 T BERR 115111 18111 161 elA T T E RIN 8 515 tii inje 2 Depress then F7 3 Depress 11 4 Depress L1 to L8 to assign the appropriate first ring pattern to the desired Trunk Groups Repetitive depression of those line keys toggl
508. ll the processor in the RAA E unit that it is connected directly to the computer DIRECT position or to a modem MODEM position 900 3 MARCH 1988 5 2 sw3 Swa 5445 mi wai mc DIRECT MODEM RAA 16LK IMS MKII High Low 25 CN2 ere 85 232 JU Figure 920 2 RAA E Unit Switch Locations Top View 3 SW3 RAA 16LK Switch tells the RAA E unit how to configure itself to translate the information being received from the system and being sent to the system This switch should be set to the RAA position The 16LK position is reserved for future use Table 920 1 RAA E Switch Setting DEFAULT VALUE 300 Baud Reserved for Future ND 20292 CHAPTER9 MARCH 1988 4 SW4 IMS MKII Switch tells the RAA E unit the type of system to which it is connected Electra IMS or Electra MarklI Set the switch to the position 5 SW5 High Low Switch is teserved for future use and has no function 920 2 WALL MOUNTING the RAA E UNIT When wall mounting the RAA E unit the site selected should meet the following conditions 1 High enough off the floor tb prevent damage due to flooding 2 Away from water pipes to damage due to leaks or condensation i 3 An area free of corrosive lor flammable gases excessive chemical or industfial dust and other materials which could be a hazard to personnel or equipment 4 Away from strong electric and or
509. llow the system to be altered via programming to the customer s needs Standard timeouts set the resident system program upon first initialization FULL HANDSFREE OPERATION is an optional feature that can be accomplished in either of two methods installation of the HFU E unit into the Multiline Terminal or installation of the ADA E unit into a Multiline Terminal with a qualified speakerphone locally provided connected Wither method allows a Multiline user to initiate or receive a call outside or internal and converse without using the Multiline Terminal handset GROUND START TRUNKS minimize the possibility of incoming and outgoing calls colliding on the same ETU This phenomemon collision is known as glare addition automatic release is always provided on ground start trunks HANDSFREE ANSWERBACK is a convenience feature that allows Multiline Terminal user to respond to a voice call without lifting the handset When a voice call is received at a Multiline T erminal the voice is heard from the Multiline Terminal s speaker and the user can respond handsfree via the Multiline Terminal s microphone provided the microphone is on ON OFF status is indicated by the red LED above the MIC button HANDSFREE DIALING AND MONITORING allows a Multiline Terminal user to initiate a call and monitor the line without lifting the handset 100 9 ND 20292 CHAPTER1 JULY 1987 HOL
510. ltiline Terminals When a DPA E DTA E or both are mounted into a Multiline Terminal the Multiline Terminal must be supported by an ESI EB ETU MULTILINE TERMINAL 160 1 16 1 NOTE Requires terminal be supported by ESI EB 200 4 220 5 INSTALLATION CONFIGURATION EXAMPLE An example is provided in Table 220 5 to help in understanding some of the requirements when configuring a system In this example 12 CO lines 12 Multiline Terminals without optional equipment 5 Multiline Terminals with DPA E units 3 Multiline Terminals with DTA E units 2 Multiline Terminals with both a DTA E and unit 10 SLTs without message wait lamp 6 SLTs with message wait lamp 3 external speakers for zone paging 6 handsfree units 4 ADA E units 2 conference circuits 4 Tie Lines 3 DSS BLF consoles CO Add On Module LCR and SMDR are being installed The equipment required to support this configuration is shown in Table 220 5 Refer to Figure 220 2 to help in the conceptional understanding of the system 2206 POWER REQUIREMENTS a When AC power is to be used to power the system a PSE AD 1 PSU must be installed in each CCU The system must have a dedicated grounded 117VAC 10 outlet separately fused for 4 8 or 12 AMPS depending on CCU requirements See paragraph 220 12 The AC outlet must be a standard 125 Volt 15 Amp three prong type which provides conduit ground If conduit ground is not
511. m Answer Detect TLI 4E 4 Time duration needed to recognize an 1820 mS answer from the called party Release Detect TLD Minimum time after hanging up before 1820 mS recognizes a disconnect from the Pre Pause Time Lapsed time before sending pulsed 12 sec TLD digits to CO after distant end goes off hook Pause Time TLD Duration of pauses stored in speed dial memories Time duration lapsed before recognizing an off hook condition from the CO with a delay or wink signal ngth of Wink Length of wink signal sent to the 180 mS 450 mS xy distant end Length of Delay Length of delayed signal sent to the 300 mS 4200 mS Signal distant end Loop Off Guard Time 4E 5 Time duration lapsed before TLD recognizing a disconnect condition after sending an answer signal on loop dial Tie lines ink Delay Signal The length of time in seconds that the 7 sec Detection Timeout system will monitor the central office line for receipt of a wink signal Time duration lapsed after sending a disconnect signal that the line is monitored to verify a distant disconnect on loop dial tie Lines When using a Tandem Port the 12 sec 28 sec maximum time before the voice path is or established after dialing the first digit and between each digit dialed DTMF Interdigit Minimum time duration between 40 msec 70 msec 180 msec Time DTMF digits when dialing DTMF Duration Duration time o
512. magnetic fields heavy motors radio transmission etc 5 An ambient temperature of 50 F to 90 F 10 C to 32 C and 10 to 90 relative non condensing humidity 6 Mounted on the systems MDF or an adjacent backboard A wall mounting bracket is supplied with the RAA E unit The following steps outline the procedure for wall mounting the RAA E unit NOTE When locating the RAA E unit on the wall allow space for the connection of the RS 232C cable to avoid sharp bends on the cable The RS 232C cable should not exceed 50ft in length Attach the wall mounting bracket to the RAA E unit with the screws provided as shown in Figure 920 3 2 Locate the RAA E unit with mounting bracket on the wall in the desired position 3 Using the wall mounting bracket already attached to the RAA E unit as a template mark the location of the wall mounting screws A and B 4 Using Number 8 panhead woodscrews insert the screws into the positions marked Do not tighten the screws all the way leave enough room for the bracket to be placed over the screw head 5 Place the RAA E unit with mounting bracket attached onto the mounting screws and secure it to the wall by tightening the screws A and B 900 4 A MOUNTING BRACKET WALL MOUNTING BRACKET SCREWS 2 SERIAL NO NEC Corporation MADE IN JAPAN Figure 920 3 RAA E Bottom View with Wall Mounting Bracket Attached 920 3 CONNECTING the to the
513. maximum numbers depending upon the system configuration 2 The central equipment of this telephone system consists of up to three Central Control Units CCUs a Basic CCU 32 ports b Basic CCU One Expansion CCU 64 ports c Basic CCU Two Expansion CCUs 96 ports 3 A maximum of two DSS BLF consoles and one CO Add On Module can be equipped at any attendant position 4 Combination of system speed dial memory numbers and any number can be assigned to station speed dial Consecutive Speed Dial Memory Assignment By using this technique more than a sixteen digit number can be available for speed dialing 220 11 CABLING REQUIREMENTS Each CCU is equipped with three 50 position miniature ribbon type female amphenol connectors 50 position miniature ribbon type connector male ended cables are required for connections to the Main Distribution Frame MDF Allowable loop resistance length and type of cable are as follows 1 Maximum Loop Resistance and Cable Length using 24 AWG a ETE 6 1 80 ohms 1 500 feet 450m b ETE 6D 1 65 ohms 1 300 feet 400m ETE 16D 1w BLF 40 ohms 820 feet 250m d ETE 16D 1w o BLF 55 ohms 1000 feet 300m e ETE 16K 1 55 ohms 1 000 feet 300m f RAA EUnit 55 ohms 1000 feet 300m DSS BLF console 55 ohms 1 000 feet 300m CO Add On Module 55ohms 1000 feet 300m 600 ohms including instrument i Singleline telephone Dd Cable Type a Multiline Termin
514. may require terminal exchange ND 20292 CHAPTER SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED 10511551 51 9 02 p MY mpm 181 58 es s NOTES e ON Q ine Ce 1 1 This exchange will only operate correctly ifthe wc 1 following conditions are met Both stations are the same type Cz Cm Neither ETE 16D is an associated attendant See 3A2 Neither ETE 16D is a programming position See 2 1 perd Both stations are idle Neither ETE 16D is assigned BLF feature See 1C2 L 1 E El E El El LL E E E B EL GENERAL INFORMATION TERMINAL EXCHANGE 4 1 This area of the memory block is used to exchange station numbers and feature programming between two Stations of the type i 1 1 4 ND 20293 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 1E2 TERMINAL ADD PORT EQUIPMENT TYPE ASSIGNMENT OPERATION Gooffline Depress 21 then F10 DepressF12 Enter module number 1 to 4 to select a specific CCU Example 1 Selects the ESE 32B 1 CCU Enter slot number 1 to 8 to select a specific interface slot Example 3 Selects the 3rd card slot from the right side of the selected CCU
515. mber or Line Key number which is outside the range of valid Function Line Key numbers F21 and above and L17 and above is entered For Example F1 F9 and F21 In this case F21 is an invalid key number outside the range of Function Key numbers 940 2 PROGRAM BOOT PROCEDURES 940 2 1 INITIAL PROGRAM BOOT PROCEDURE SET UP After a Cold Start power up of the PC 8300 as described in paragraph 930 3 the initial display is as Shown below with the word BASIC highlighted in dark shading 1983 01 01 00 00 00 C Microsoft 1 BASIC Load Save List 28758 Depress special function button fel load on the PC Located directly below the display screen s left side Display changes to 1983 01 01 00 00 00 C Microsoft 1 BASIC TEXT TELCOM Load from 1 ADMI DO Ensure Caps Lock is Depress lt Return 7 Display changes to 1983 01 01 BASIC 00 00 02 C Microsoft 1 TEXT TELCOM SER Type ADMI BA Depress Return Display prompts Ready Depress Return Red LED disk drive flashes on then off Display changes to 1983 01 01 BASIC 00 00 04 C Microsoft 1 TEXT ADMI BA TT Load Save List 21193 940 2 2 PROGRAM BOOT 8300 Using the cursor movement keys move the cursor to the upper right hand corner of the display over the word ADMI BA Depress lt RETURN
516. message wait signaling to single line telephones and or voice mail messaging is used in the system LED 1 Green lit indicates that the SLI E is receiving power LEDs 101 401 Red indicates the status of the four circuits Each LED ON indicates its associated circuit is in use maximum of eighteen 511 ETUs can be installed in a system into any interface slot SLI E ETUs require the support of at least one RSG E unit and an MFR EA ETU Refer to tables 220 2 and 220 3 E MFR EA ETU The MFR EA ETU contains a switch and an LED When inserting or removing an MFR EA with power applied to the CCU switch 1 SW1 must be set to the OFF position LED 1 green lit indicates that the MFR EA is receiving power maximum of four MFR EA ETUs be installed in a system into any interface slot to provide a maximum of 8 circuits The MFR EA ETU is required to support the dialing of any SLTs modems and or VMI E ETU installed 240 6 OPTIONAL INTERFACE ETUs A CNF E ETU The CNF E contains a switch SW1 and an LED SWI is used to remove power from the when the ETU is removed or inserted without powering down the CCU 200 25 ND 20292 CHAPTER2 JULY 1987 Table 240 1 Interface ETU LED Switch Reference SWITCH LED 101 Busy 1 SW 101 Trunk Selection Loop Ground LED 201 Busy 2 SW 201 Trunk Selection Loop Ground LED 301 Busy 3 SW 301 Trunk Selection Loop Grou
517. micro floppy disk the write protection hole must be closed It opens and closes by way of a small slide switch 2 Make sure the micro floppy disk is correctly inserted When correctly inserted a click will be ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 heard and the micro floppy disk will be pulled into the unit 5 Insert the LCR floppy disk into the disk drive unit Figure 750 6 Inserting the Micro Floppy Disk 6 Turn the disk drive unit Ensure that the green LED goes on and that shortly thereafter the red LED turns on for a second or two and then turns off If the red LED does not come on for a second or two and then turns off go back to step 1 above NOTE In step 7 below the computer is turned on while depressing the SHIFT and CTRL keys Cold start is also accomplished with power to the computer already on by depressing the RESET button located on the rear of the PC 8300 while depressing the SHIFT and CTRL 7 While depressing the SHIFT and CTRL key simultaneously turn on the PC 8300 Ensure that the red LED on the disk drive lights for a second or two and then goes off If this does not occur go back to step 1 above 8 Proceed to the auto start setting procedure 750 5 2 Warm Start The Warm Start is performed by turning the power switch ON This is the normal method used that allows retention of the LCR Main Menu program in the computer Under normal conditions the last screen displayed when power wa
518. minal Strip of PSE DD 1 48V ND 20292 CHAPTER 5 SEPTEMBER 1987 because it has replaced another power supply It is necessary to test the output of the power supply with meter to be sure This is why before a technician can attempt any troubleshooting the correct tools should be available 1 Digital or Analog Multimeter capable of reading DC current and voltage B AC current and voltage C DC Resistance 2 Test Set linemen s being capable of Termination and Monitor modes B DTMF and Dial Pulse dialing 3 tools A Set of Screwdrivers common and cross head blades B Set of Pliers Long nose and diagonals Punch down tool 4 The complete Electra Installation Service Manual with all the latest up to date information as well as the completed job specifications SECTION 530 OPERATIONAL TEST PROCEDURES 530 1 When the Electra MarklI system is first powered up it runs through an initialization process During this process the CPU EB ETU in module 1 scans each of the twenty four interface slots to determine the hardware configuration used This information is stored in the Resident System Program memory with the system default values Section 530 provides test procedures to be used before during and after this initialization process 530 2 Before Initialization It is important that the following steps be taken by the installation technician A Cable Connections All w
519. modem s instruction manual to set up the different parameters Some modems use dip switches for set up and some types need a PC with a terminal emulation program to set these parameters NOTE Problems may occur at baud rates higher than 1200 on standard voice grade telephone lines If transmission rate of 2400 baud is required it may be necessary to use data grade lines to ensure the integrity of the data being transmitted between modems Figure 910 1 provides an overview of the relationship of equipment used with an RAA E unit Once a connection is established the signal flow at the remote location is from the computer to the modem and out through the CO At the Electra 2 STRAIGHT SERIAL CABLE RSZ321 900 2 ESIEt SLI Et ELECTRA SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE o 8 Transfer Connection STRAIGHT SERIAL MARKII CABLE 5232 LOCATION n REMOTE LOCATION Figure 910 1 RAA E Block Diagram Hook Up amp Signal Flow location the signal comes in from the CO one of two ways through the COLE ETU from there it is transferred or diverted via DIT ANA into the SLI E ETU From the SLI E ETU the signal goes through the modem to the RAA E unit and to the ESLE programming port of the Electra system Signal flow from the on site location to
520. n depth explanation of each function as related to the programming procedure In general the DOWN LOAD UP LOAD and Verify functions are used for the maintenance function whereby data is transferred to and from the LCR E and the LCR disk The MODIFY MODE is used to customize the data for a specific application on the LCR Disk The DISPLAY MODE is used to examine data without changing data This is similar to the MODIFY MODE but runs faster because no changing or saving of data is done PRINTOUT is used to retrieve a printed copy of the system data SYSTEM DATA CLEAR is used to clear the data on the disk which is no longer desired 700 25 202 OGL TINSIW 808 NIVA NDI O41NO2 O1 1138 W31SAS fIN3W NIVW3 14 ANIA NIVIN 32101 49315 viva 3dv553 W31SAS NO 9349312 NNJN O1 Nun138 1318v1 03123135 31891 123135 NNIW 39312 viva W31SAS NNJN NIVW 342101 349353 37891 831 3 TJ 100 1108 Siviva 03123135 SI 31891 3801 31891 1 133135 OLNYNLIY 31891 3002 321330 41 123135 NNJN AV IdSIQ OL 34 253 YO AN3W 19510 OL 3181 1X3N 31891 349353 335 OL 134 553843 YO 1341530 SW ay 3NINVX3 Q3uis3Q 123135 NIV 32101 34925330 87 NNIW 454 Avidsia 9351534 123135 318V1 MIN H31N3 NNIN NIVIA
521. n of each Multiline Terminal to ensure the system is working properly SECTION 540 TROUBLESHOOTING FLOW CHARTS 540 1 Problem Solving find the cause of a problem first consider all the symptoms carefully As each aspect of the problem is considered the technician is guided to a probable solution It is imperative the problem be defined as accurately as possible so the most efficient steps to a solution can be taken The troubleshooting flow charts in this section will help define a problem and direct the technician through the troubleshooting steps 1 SYSTEM DOWN Although this term is used to describe many 500 3 ND 20292 CHAPTER 5 SEPTEMBER 1987 conditions it will only be used in this section to describe one of the following situations a No access to internal dial tone on any Multiline Terminal or Single Line Telephone installed b No LED indications or no display indications on any Multiline Terminal installed c Nosystem tones are generated 2 PARTIAL OPERATION This term will refer to any situation which cannot be completely described under the conditions of a SYSTEM DOWN Refer to the index table listing these conditions 3 RESET DEFINITION In the troubleshooting flow charts the technician is at times directed to reset the station and or ETU a Station Reset Is accomplished by unplugging the station line cord from the station and then plugging it back in b Reset The ETUs ar
522. n step 4 Pick up group 1 See Note 2 Depress ENTER key See Note 4 DISPLAY ole JF J nye TTC Tx Mjojolel F E A T U R E E Tu eT Te 7 2 T 1 Tufe Ts T 4 1 19111 6121 e ir e xp Tufe T 1 161 T 1 0 5 Teluei el T Repeat steps 5 and 6 for all required stations or go to Step 3to assign a call pick up to a specific station Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 48 ND 20292 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 EL Select station to be programmed F W Forward Increment station number LEAR Clear pickup group assignment ENTER Enter assignment to each station B W Backward Decrement the station number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO 8 PROGRAMMED 3 __ E vs us 56 NOTES 1 After station number is entered the display E will show either 7 or the previous pickup group number assigned to the station E pp E 2 station can only be assigned to one of 8 enter possible pickup groups in the system gt 3 Toent
523. nal being connected to the modem Plug in the PWR contact plug in the CN 2 socket of the DTA E unit See Figure 270 5 2 Connect the other end of the PWR cable red and white wires to the TD pin 5 and TDG pin 25 of the ACU interface female connector provided with the modem 3 Connect the SLI tip and ring to be used for the modem to pins 7 and 8 of the ACU interface female connector 4 Plug the female ACU interface connector into the male interface connector on the back of the modem C Set the baud rate of the modem to 300 or 1200 as required This setting must be set to the same baud rate normally used by the distant modem when modem pooling REVERSED 85 232 sce FIG MULTILINE 210 6 TERMINAL WITH OTAE STRAIGHT 85 232 MULTILINE TERMINAL WITH OTA E ELECTRA ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 D Set up the necessary parameters of the modem refer to the instructions provided with the modem If the modem is used for incoming modem pool use the modem auto answer mode must be enabled E Plug the line cord into the Multiline Terminal and connect the AC DC adaptor to the connector provided on the DTA E unit F Power up the modem G Repeat the installation steps for all modems up to 4 maximum to be installed for use in modem pooling H Refer to Chapter 3 Programming Memory Block 2B 7 to assign the modems to the single line port and Multiline Terminal with DTA
524. nd LED 401 Busy 4 SW 401 Trunk Selection Loop Ground LED1 Receiving Power SW1 BusyOut LED 1 Busy 1 2 Busy 2 LED 3 3 LED 4 4 LED 5 Receiving Power ESI E SW1 Busy Out 1 LED 101 Busy 1 SLI E 2 LED 201 Busy 2 amp 3 LED 301 Busy 3 4 401 4 LED1 Receiving Power SW1 Busy Out LED1 Receiving Power SW1 Busy Out LED1 Busyl SW 101 E amp M Type Selection 2 or 4 wire SW 102 Trunk Selection Loop DID or E amp M Tie lines SW 103 E amp M Signaling Type Selection 1 5 SW 301 Transmission Loss Level Selection SW 302 Receiving Loss Level Selection LED2 2 SW 201 E amp M Type Selection 2 or 4 wire SW 202 Trunk Selection Loop DID or E amp M Tie lines SW 203 E amp M Signaling Type Selection 1 or 5 SW 401 Transmission Loss Level Selection SW 402 Receiving Loss Level Selection En LEDS3 Receiving Power NOTE When a loop dial trunk s is connected to the TLI E ETU SW 101 and or SW201 on the ETU must be set to the 2 wire position SW1 Busy Out 200 26 aJU aU LED green lit indicates that the CNF E is receiving power A maximum of four can be installed in a system into any interface slots B ECR E ETU The ECR E ETU contains two switches SW1 and 5479 an LED a volume c
525. ndants for example are ND 20202 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 completed in this group The last group of sheets are used for documenting all of the necessary information about the system configuration This section is very useful for service technicians who need to keep track of adds moves changes and in some cases for troubleshooting Each job specification sheet additionally includes a brief description sheet explaining all the chart entries These job sheets must be kept up to date and LEFT ON THE JOB SITE to provide technicians with all the necessary information needed to provide the customer with proper and professional service A duplicate copy of the job spec sheets should also be maintained at the servicing office in the customer s file for reference ENTERING THE PROGRAMMING MODE AND THE SELECTION OF MEMORY BLOCKS In order to use the sections just discussed a brief description of how to enter the programming mode and the selection of memory block areas is necessary Initially programming of the Resident System Program can be accomplished by either of two ETE 16D Multiline Terminals These station positions are automatically assigned to the two lowest ESI E ports in the system Although these positions are fixed a third programming position can be assigned to any ESI E port the system that supports an ETE 16D Multiline Terminal For unit a fourth ESI E port can be assigned in
526. ne 300 250 300 250 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED CPU EB3 or higher NOTES Bi 51 281 381 E Es ez 55 1 During step 3 displayed time and memory block number is the last time and memory block number the Answer key was depressed except when the Error Tone was heard 111213 2 2 014 LLL Lu Hour minute Month Day Memory DSS Button Block Depressed DSS BUTTON DEPRESSED FUNCTION INDICATIONS 2 s 8 te o ___ Repeat 0 BND Position Dm Al cus Ed c 4 E E GENERAL INFORMATION SYSTEM DATA LAST CHANGE i This area of the memory block is used to display information about the last system data change This includes Time Date and Memory Block 300 251 ND 20193 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 5C2 DATA DUMP OPERATION AND gt DISPLAY 1 Gooffline 2 DepressF5 F8 and F12 in order 3 Depress 111 116 for setting thedesired address to be refered Example Address 4000
527. ne Terminal The EDE 30 1 can also be utilized as a CO Add On Module the EDE 30 1 must be Revision B or higher The CO Add On Module can increase the outside line appearances at an Attendant Position to the system maximum of forty The system maximum for EDE 30 1 units remains six a maximum of four CO Add On Modules can be installed one per Attendant Position When programming an EDE 30 1 unit as CO Add On Module the system must be supported with a CPU EB ETU 28 HFU E UNIT The HFU E UNIT is the Handsfree unit that provides the user with Full Handsfree operation for both outside and internal calls t is mounted into the Multiline Terminal NOTE The 6 1 TEL cannot be equipped with the HFU E 29 DPA E UNIT The DPA E UNIT is the Dual Path Adaptor Unit that provides a user with the off hook announcement feature and is mounted into the Multiline Terminal NOTE The ETE 6 1 TEL cannot be equipped with the DPA E Multiline Terminal equipped with DPA E must be supported by an ESI EB ETU The Data Switching feature has a direct impact on the Dual Path features system maximum and 100 27 ND 20292 CHAPTER 1 JULY 1987 vice versa When a station requires both Dual Path and Data Switching it needs the use of three paths each ESI EB ETU contains 8 paths utilized by the four ports therefore removing the second path from the adjacent port Only ports one and three of the ESI EB ETU can have both features
528. ne Terminals with built in BLF LED flash patterns are same as the ones on the DSS BLF console but green LED indication is not provided 200 13 ND 20292 CHAPTER2 JULY 1987 b Frequency deviation Less than t 1 5 c Signal level Nominal level per frequency 6 AdBm Minimum level per frequency Low group 10dBm High group 8dBm Maximum level per frequency pair 2dBm d Rise time Within 5 mS e DTMF tone duration Default 110 mS Minimum 60 mS Maximum 760 mS f Interdigital time Default 70 mS Minimum 40 mS Maximum 180 mS 3 Dialing Memories a Station speed dialing 20 buffers 16 digits each per station 110 buffers 16 digits each per ETE 16K 1 b System speed dialing 80 buffers 16 digits each per system c Last number redial 1 per station 16 digits max d Saved number dialing Save amp Repeat 80 per system 16 digits max 220 19 BATTERY BACKUP 1 Backup battery power is provided on the CPU E the SMDR E and the LCR E These batteries when fully charged retain memory contents for approximately 7 days when power is removed from these ETUs 2 Functions receiving backup with battery power are as follows a System Program b Speed Dial Memories System and Station Night Transfer Status Call Forwarding Clock Calendar Callback Request Message Waiting Do Not Disturb Save amp Repeat SMDR Data LCR Data e 220 20 EXTERNAL EQ
529. ng the selected one is now displayed NOTES 1 If itis desired to change the table or office codes being viewed use the cursor up key to return to the office code or table number position where a new table number and or new office code can be entered Then depress the CR RETURN key 2 Depressing the CR RETURN key causes the table number to be ineremented by one and displays the contents of the new table SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS EXTRA CODE TABLE DISPLAY EXTRA CODE TABLE NO 2 O EXTRA CODE TABLE DISPLAY EXTRA CODE TABLE NO 03 CODE P03 434 0941 OFFICE CODE TABLE DISPLAY TABLE O NOOPFICE CODE TABLE DISPLAY TABLE 100 OO OFFICE CODE TABLE TABLE NO 100 OFCCODE 200 200 210 2 1 1 1 1 1 700 48 8 Use of the ESC returns to the Display Menu h Home Code While in the Display Menu depress 8 then the CR RETURN key The display shown is provided NOTE Once the home code is viewed the only option available is to depress the ESC key and CR RETURN to the Display Menu 6 PRINTOUT MODE The option of obtaining a hard copy of the table data is made available using the PRINT OUT Menu chosen from LCR Main Menu The data printed out is the information presently stored on the floppy disk The following steps allow the programmer to obtain a print out of any table data With the LCR
530. ns on the left and right sides of the unit Place your hands on both of these buttons and lift the top half of the unit up while pulling these slide lock buttons Raise the front side of the unit approximately 2 inches and the lid will automatically open and the front side of the unit will slowly come down The lid will support itself in the open position as shown in Figure 930 14 Figure 930 14 Opening the Disk Drive ND 20292 CHAPTERS MARCH 1988 930 8 2 Inserting a Micro Floppy Disk To insert a micro floppy disk into the PC 8231A first make sure the power to the PC 8231A is turned OFF Position the micro floppy disk with the spindle side down and insert into the drive until about 1 2 inch of it can be seen as shown in Figure 930 15 Figure 930 15 Inserting a Floppy Disk Then gently push the micro floppy disk into the drive until it clicks into place the eject button is popped out and the drive is closed Figure 930 16 shows the micro floppy disk inserted in correct and incorrect positions NOTE Bending or forcing the micro floppy disk into the drive may damage it Micro Floppy Disk Correctly inserted position Incorrectly inserted position Figure 930 16 Views of Inserted Disks Lift the top half of the unit Close the lid with one hand 7930 8 3 Removing a Micro Floppy Disk To remove a micro floppy disk from the drive push th eject button on the PC 8231A in until the micro floppy disk pops ou
531. nted when necessary floor mounting can be accomplished by stacking the CCUs A Place the ESE 32B 1 CCU in its permanent and safe location ND 20292 CHAPTER JULY 1987 B Unscrew the two screws located on the lower portion of the front panel then remove the front panel by sliding it to the left Place the panel and screws aside for later reinstallation Figure 240 3 Wall Mounting ESE 32E 1 CCU C Unscrew the two screws located on the top front of the CCU then remove the top panel Place the panel and screws aside for later reinstallation D When the first ESE 32E 1 CCU is to be installed repeat step B Remove the two screws located on the top front of the CCU then mount the CCU onto the ESE 32B 1 CCU E Insure that the hooks provided on the top rear of the ESE 32B 1 CCU are fully seated within the open slots on the bottom rear of the ESE 32E 1 CCU Secure them using the two screws removed in step D F When the second ESE 32E 1 CCU is installed it should be done in the same manner as the first ESE 32E 1 CCU G Install the top panel onto the top CCU and secure with the screws removed in step 200 21 ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 240 3 GENERAL NOTES FOR ETU INSTALLATION A It is recommended that power be OFF during installation and maintenance unless this will seriously inconvenience the user This will prevent accidental damage to equipment Figure 240 4 Installing Top Panel and Front
532. number by one Depressing the return key will now allow programming of the next table Prior to depressing the return key a second time the programmer can enter new table number to be modified 100 41 ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 4 When ali route tables are assigned correctly the use of the ESC key causes the data to be saved to the floppy disk and causes the display to return to the modify menu f Extra Code Table Modify Whenever the option of adding extra digits is selected in the route table assignment an assignment to the extra code tables is required This option allows the entry of up to 24 digits ina table which can be dialed out ahead of the number dialed by the caller This option is provided for use mainly for when the line to which the caller is being connected is using an OCC or SCC and requires that extra digits be dialed such as local number dialed and account code This option can also be used for access to a PBX line where it is necessary to dial a PBX access code or to tandem access a remote system s line s through a Tie line The following procedure explains modification of the extra code tables With the Modify Menu in the display depress 6 then CR RETURN Depress table number to be modified Then CR RETURN Now enter the number to be dialed ahead of the caller s number Available entries are digits 0 9 and the letter P for pause NOTES 1 if mistakes are made during entry
533. number to be entered Example 01 for Trunk 1 See Note 1 5 Dial the Trunk Group 1 8 the trunk is assigned to Example 4 for Trunk Group 4 See Notes 2 amp 4 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 3 TTT TT DISPLAY ofe JF J TOXT TXTXDY P R o e R A M e T r R u N k T R U N K e T __ T R u N KT e 0 1 ola T LT Rju N K o 2 ai xi 7 Foreach subsequent trunk to be assigned repeat steps 5 and 6 or depress TEL key to assign a specific trunk 8 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 104 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 K MCIION R EL Enter new trunk number Increment trunk number Enter each assignment B W Decrement trunk number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED 04 105 107 201 CPU levels NOTES 1 During step 4 any current Trunk Group assignment for the trunk number entered is displayed Duc e ooo Em 89 0 Ed 3 Pd Fd 14 Cow 2 When assigning trunks to Trunk Groups program changes do not
534. o allow or disallow SMDR output See Note 1 Depress ENTER key 6 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 74 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 0 2 05 6 2 8 x x es ess os MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED CPU levels NOTES 1 Instep 4 if L1 is SMDR output incoming calls is provided If L1 is off SMDR output for 2 incoming calls is not provided CL Cx D Ol Fa 23 24 296 hd fa 29 Gl 1 E E E E E E E B GENERAL INFORMATION SMDR INCOMING PRINT This area of the memory block is used to allow or disallow the SMDR output for incoming calls 1 1 1 4 1 ND 20293 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2A7 INTERNAL ALL CALL QPERATION 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F2 then F6 3 Depress F17 AND ee DISPLAY jo F Jefi jP RjO G R A M T 15 5 H 21111111 111 11 11 31311 2111111111 1111111 4 Depress L1 as required to allow or disallow the internal all call feature See Note 1 5 Depress ENTER key 6 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 76 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 K
535. o back on line 300 238 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE B W Decrements Initial History event number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY MUST 8E PROGRAMMED HAVE TO 8 PROGRAMMED 03 4 251 381 7 CPU EB3 or higher NOTES 1 During step 4 when the or B W key is depressed the Initial History event number is 861 ez is 8 1 incremented decremented 011 0191 1114 51 2121 18181 11111 Cz FW 1 BW DJ 02 8 131 0181 18181 111211 72 5 2 latest Initial History events can be a jeg mg GS 3 T1 T5 are Initial History codes History Code Initial History Description System hardware reset or a forced initialization has occured Automatic initialization due to system error has occurred E E E El l El E E F El There were Power Off conditions There were Main Program ROM replacements enhancements upgrades ete GENERAL INFORMATION CPU INITIAL HISTORY i This area of the memory block is used to refer to the CPU s Initial History 300 239 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 5B2 SYSTEM PROGRAM CHECK OPERATION
536. ode results in the menu display shown 100 32 TED OSEE SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS DOWN LOAD 1 AREA CODE TABLE 6 EXTRA CODE TABLE 2 WEEKLY SCHEDULE 7 OFFICE CODE TABLE DAILY SCHEDULE 8 HOME NPA CODE 10 ALL DATA 4 ROUTE ADVANCE 5 ROUTE TABLE ENTER MENU O AREA CODE TABLE DOWN LOAD START 7 OFFICE CODE TABLE DOWN LOAD START u AREA CODE TABLE DOWN LOAD START NORMAL END AREA CODE TABLE DOWN LOAD START ABNORMAL END LINE TROUBLE UP LOAD 1 AREA CODE TABLE 6 EXTRA CODE TABLE 2 WEEKLY SCHEDULE 7 OFFICE CODE TABLE 3DAILY SCHEDULE 8HOME NPA CODE 10 ALL DATA 4 ROUTE ADVANCE 5 ROUTE TABLE ENTER MENU NO O ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 At this time selection of one of the available table SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS numbers will result in the display shown Example for area code up load Depress 1 then CR RETURN AREA CODE TABLE UP LOAD START NOTES 1 The display shown is an example of area code data being up loaded from the LCR E into the OFFICE CODE TABLE UP LOAD START floppy disk The name of the table chosen will be shown in the display 2 Exceptions to note 1 are the office code table and all data up load selections These are shown in the All ALL DATA UP LOAD START Data Up Load Start display These two selections due BEHBBBBHEBEBH to their large memory requirements show darkened boxes to indicate the relative amount of
537. of FCC Rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when operated in a commercial environment Operation of this telephone system in a residential area is likely to cause interference which case the user at his or her own expense will be required to take whatever measures may be required to correct the interference 120 5 Hearing Aid Compatibility The Multiline Terminals provided for this telephone system are NOT hearing aid compatible FCC rules prohibit the use of nonhearing aid compatible telephones in the following locations 1 Any public or semi public location where coin operated or credit card telephones may be found 100 2 2 Elevators highways and tunnels automobile subway railroad or pedestrian where a person with impaired hearing might be isolated in an emergency 3 Places where telephones are specifically installed to alert emergency authorities such as fire police or medical assistance personnel 4 Hospital rooms residential health care facilities convalescent homes and prisons specifically where telephones are used for signaling life threatening or emergency situations if alternative signaling methods are not available 5 Workstations for hearing impaired personnel 6 Hotel motel apartment lobbies in stores where telephones are used by patrons to order merchandise in public transportation terminals where telephones are used to call taxis or to r
538. of any type interface circuit board into any interface slot This allows maximum utilization of the CCUs minimizing hardware costs USER PROGRAMMING CAPABILITY reduces installer time and involvement and allows the user to make any required changes while the system retains its versatility Each Multiline Terminal user can program such features as Ringing internal Voice or Tone Signaling Ringing Tone selection Station Speed Dial memories Background Music channel direct station selection assignment and direct feature access assignment The ETE 16K I Multiline Termina additionally provides the ability to program an 11 page directory offering button access to memories up to 110 used for Speed Dial direct station selection and direct feature access UNSUPERVISED CONFERENCE provides the ability for Multiline Terminal users to establish Conference call between two Central Office lines on one line key and to place the conference on hold and hang up while the Conference continues frecing their 100 14 Multiline Terminal for other uses The Conference may be re entered at any time by the Multiline Terminal user After a predetermined time interval an audible signal is provided to the Multiline Terminal as a reminder of the ongoing Unsupervised Conference Single line telephones can also perform this type of Conference call VIRTUAL EXTENSIONS are 48 software extensions available beyond the maximum of 80 station
539. onent DIP 1 730 1 side of the LCR E ETU must face to the right side as viewed from the front of the CCU as shown in Figure ON OFF 3 6 730 3 SWITCH SW1 SETTING 15 12 24 48 96 100 Prior to installation ensure that SW1 is set to the ON Fi Baud Rate position See Figure 720 1 and Figure 730 2 igure 730 3 Switch DIP 1 For Bau 700 4 Set switch to the proper position for the baud rate Switch DIP1 is normally set at a baud rate of 730 5 SWITCH SW2 SETTING When installing the LCR E ETU turn SW2 to the OFF position This will allow the insertion or removal of the LCR E ETU into the slot without powering down the CCU After installing the LCR E ETU in the CCU turn SW2 to the ON position When the LCR E ETU is installed without power applied to the CCU SW2 must be set to the ON position before applying power to the CCU See Figure 720 1 and Figure 730 4 ON OFF SW 2 BUSY IN OUT Figure 730 4 Busy In Out Switch SW2 730 6 ROUTING THE RS 232C CABLE Route the RS 232C connector ended cable down and to the right side of the CCU to avoid any interference with the insertion and removal of other ETUs See Figure 720 1 and Figure 730 1 730 7 REMOVING THE ACCESS PANEL Locate the access panel the longer of the two located on the right side of the CCU as viewed from the front of the CCU Loosen the screw then lift up and remove the panel See Figure 730 5 Figure 730 5 Right Side View
540. ontrol VOL 1 three RCA phono plugs J1 J2 J3 and two screw terminal blocks CN1 and CN2 is used to remove power from the when the ETU is removed or inserted without powering down the CCU LED green lit indicates that the ECR E is receiving power Phono plugs J2 and J3 are inputs of the BGM sources VOL 1 is used to adjust the audible level of the external tone ringer output 41 provides an uninterrupted ring tone For installing options see section 270 OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION One ECR E ETU can be installed in a system into any interface slot C VMI E The VMI E contains a switch SW1 and five LEDs LED 1 LED101 401 is used to remove power from the when the ETU is removed or inserted without powering down the CCU LED 1 green lit indicates that the VMI E ETU is receiving power LEDs 101 401 red lit indicate the status of circuits Each LED ON indicates its associated circuit in use One VMI E ETU can be installed in a system into any interface slot The VMI E ETU requires the support of an MFR EA ETU and an RSG E unit 240 7 SMDR E ETU The SMDR E ETU contains three switches an LED and an RS 232C connector ended cable ND 20292 CHAPTER2 JULY 1987 1 Switch 2 designated SW2 RESET is a slide switch used to reset the SMDR E ETU with interruption of all ongoing operation This switch is also used to remove power from the ETU w
541. or Rotary Reprogram lines for Reprogram as Rotary 1 E 3 Monitor line with test set and verify if system is sending digits correctly Digits sent correctly If lines are Replace and test If trouble persists increase the THEN duration in Memory 2 Replace MMC E and test If trouble persists Blocks 48 186 THEN 2 Kf lines are Rotary 3 Replace TSW E and test If trouble persists choose the 10 pps THEN Option in Memory Blocks 4B 1 amp 6 3 Check off hook CO line current 4 Perform second initilization and test If trouble persists THEN 5 Replace CPU EB 500 12 ND 30292 CHAPTER 5 SEPTEMBER 1987 D1 Multiline Terminal Function Problems All Multiline Terminals Goto Flow chart 2 No Check Memory Block 1E2 for Correct Station Assignment Affected 15 Assignment Correct No Yes Problem Y Replace defective Multiline Terminal Test Yes Send Multiline 2 Connect Multiline Terminal directly to and Test Problem soed Yes Replace station cable 2 Replace ESI E Problem No Solved Replace and test if trouble persists THEN Replace TSW E and test If trouble persists THEN Yes Send ESI E for Repair Perform 2nd Initial
542. or Trunks Not Installed Confirmation of Trunk Test For Trunks Installed Attendant Attendant MFR2 NORMAL Attendant DATA PATH BUSY Originator NO DATA 123 Data Path of Called Station is Busy At Station 123 No data Adaptor Installed No Data Path Available No DT and DR key Programmed Originator ND 20292 CHAPTER JULY 1987 DISPLAY LOCATION DEFINITION NOTREADY 123 Originator Data Adaptor or Data Terminal Equipment at Station 123 is Not Ready DATA TO 123 Originator Originating a Data Call DATA FROM 123 Receiving Station Receiving a Data Call DATA PATH TO 123 Originator During Data Switching MODEM BUSY Originator All Modems are Busy DATA END 121 Originator End Data Switching by Depressing either DT or DR key If Required Turn Off DTE DATA ERROR Error Indication DATA RESERVE 121 Originator Reservation for Outgoing Data Call DATA OFF Calling Called Stations End of Data Switching by ER Equipment Ready Signal Going Off DATA TO MODEM3 Originator Modem is Being Activated NOT READY MODEM3 Originator Modem is Not Ready DATA ONTO MODEM3 Originator During Data Switching with Outside Party via Modem NOTE LCD Displays shown in BOLD ITALIC in this chart FLASH on the terminals LCD SECTION 160 FEATURE ACCESS CODES NUMBERING PLAN 160 1 Codes
543. osition can be the RAA E unit The first ESI E installed in the lowest number module and interface slot is used to provide two programming positions The first two ports of the ESI E are assigned for programming positions These two programming positions are system attendants and are fixed in system software NOTE The first port must be associated with an ETE 16D 1 for the system to function properly The third programming position can be assigned to any interface port with an ESI E installed by either the first or second programming Multiline Terminal 220 3 ATTENDANT STATIONS maximum of 4 attendant positions can be installed system Attendant stations must be ETE 16D 1 Multiline Terminals supported by an ESI EA or ESI EB ETU The first two attendant positions are the first two programming positions These two positions are fixed in system software ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 The third and fourth attendant positions can only be assigned to the first ESI E ETU ports three and four attendant Multiline Terminal can operate in conjunction with up to two EDE 30 1 DSS BLF consoles and one CO Add On Module Each DSS BLF console and CO Add On Module requires a port supported by an ESI EA or ESI EB ETU maximum of six EDE 30 1 units can be installed per system of which a maximum of four can be assigned as CO Add On Modules one per attendant position No more than si
544. ots to detect which devices are installed it must be noted that this is only performed by the CPU E during initial powering up of the system or after a first initialization At this time all busy switches on all interface ETUs must be set to the ON position Thereafter if any device is installed and the system is not turned off or a first initialization is not performed you should inform the system by programming of the location and type of device added a Prior to inserting or removing an ETU into an interface slot as determined by the job specification make sure the busy switch SW1 on that ETU is in the OFF position b Insert the ETU into the interface slot 200 23 ND 20292 CHAPTER2 JULY 1987 Set the busy switch SW 1 on that ETU to the ON position ng ur Figure 240 8 CCU Layout Each basic interface ETU has busy switch SW1 a power LED Green and four LEDs red Setting the busy switch SWI to the ON position after inserting the ETU causes the power LED to light The four red LEDs indicate the status of circuits Each LED ON indicates that its associated circuit is inuse Referto Table 240 1 Interface ETU LED and Switch Reference A The COI E contains four switches which are designated SW101 to SW401 for the selection of trunk type Each switch is associated with a circuit When a loop start trunk is
545. ovided and is connected to the terminal block located at the left side of the ESE 32B 1 CCU A Remove the four mounting screws located at the top and bottom of the PSU slot in each CCU Place the screws aside for later PSU installation B Install a PSE AD 1 PSU into the PSU slot in each CCU as shown in Figure 250 1 making sure that its power switch is in the OFF position C Secure each PSU with four screws previously removed in step D Two cables are provided on each PSE AD 1 PSU One is a 3 pin connector ended AC OUT power cable the other is a 6 pin connector ended DC IN power cable Connect the AC OUT power cable to any of the AC connectors J6 J8 located immediately above its corresponding ESE 32B 1 CCU card slots See Figure 250 2 Connect each DC IN power cable of each PSU to the 6 pin 44 connector located immediately above its corresponding CCU See Figure 250 2 E Plug in the 3 prong AC Power Line Cord into the 117V AC receptacle and check the DC output voltages which can be read on the corresponding 6 pin connector J4 of each CCU in accordance with Figure 250 3 200 32 E EE oer BS Figure 250 2 Installing PSE AD 1 PSU The voltages for each PSU can be checked individually by first turning on the system AC switch and then the switches on each power supply CI n EDS Figure 250 3 Front View of 6 Pin Connector of PSE AD 1 an
546. p peads Surpasead ut pa103s 19quinu Jo 3181 3581 sso un paods 943 801889308 0 10124 pesso1dop 60 859208 perp peads 10 peurure1801d Kex SSA gquanbas paads 101918 Sut erp paeds 1 8 uou A peods au 841559298 10124 passaadap snu 859558 perp paeds 18024 fay 550 9 uou AM 1 0 943 ut days UY ALON paje e peads jo Aue e UO VIP 219222 YTT e ejnpoy 00 943 uo Pr ue 89242 e e nnoesuo SNOILVOIGNI GOT 1 1861 A Inf PHH4LdVHO 6505 901 OOF eurn 5 IUI JYI jt Se aures 293 ut 195 81 Z 00 8 uo Zurreedde 20 aq yo 5208 1471 SNV 148 081 12918 e npoy
547. p409 2148 UOY jueuiuditssy 000 AQEL 8 MOOT 4 155 AHONWSM 195 008 8 3814 000 91454 3148 906 o i V 91484 8 55 reroedg 5 5 3ueurusiissy quawudissy 4 1 Super jeuorsiay 914241 0132143524 191346 8 5 9ureN xung 008 8 55 0 2 6 ony 004 201 39 8155 jung juauusissy Juny uong juaunusissy 4 0 1 jung 6 349148155 1oqutnN jung 03 3ueurusitss y 38 14 3uauusissy dnoar 004 eur 01 4 qun SLNWLNOO 40 WISV L 5 NOLLVOIJIO3dS dor e m a o ot 98 390018 LNAWNDISSY 785 006 966 765 262 062 086 882 115 318101 passo 8 5 jueurudissy 01 WYS 1189 8155 pag
548. pability of storing up to 16 digits System Speed Dial numbers can be stored within a Station Speed Dial memory buffer of Multiline Terminals to increase this capacity Each memory location is programmed by the station user STEP CALL is a feature provided by the CPU EB ETU Step Calling allows station users who attempt an internal Transfer call and reach busy extension or call park location to call another station by dialing the last digit after you hear a busy or Call Waiting tone of the extension number you wish to step to provided both numbers called differ only buy the last signles digit This procedure can be used until an idle station or part location is found SPEED DIAL System provides eighty memory buffers available for usage system wide this complements the individual twenty memories available for each station Only the Attendant Positions can program these 80 memory locations These memory locations have an Override option for Code Restriction assignments in blocks When programmed for Tenant Service the system can 100 13 ND 20292 CHAPTER 1 JULY 1987 proportion the access to the eighty memory locations and Code Restriction on a per tenant basis TENANT SERVICE allows the system to be independently shared by up to three separate tenants Separate access to outside lines attendants System Speed Dial memories Night Chimes and Night Call Pickup can be provided E amp M TIE LINES are accommod
549. penis aut st aan 58918014 st qq 8 88918024 payased aq 2 paysed Kay aury 9uo UVY uo 592 92ua19jU07 T SALON SNOILVOIGNI Gal 3IdWVS s 21111111 SNOILVOIGNI 4 IdAVS 1861 PHAIdVHO 36202 0N 7 007 1011816 94 0 0 5 82 101 818 0 182 pajeroosse ay 8044 5 uodn eq ue aq 03 81182 pajeroosse ou ALON 943 252940 0 68 941 182 01 0 911 espusu gr 51481 559442 e 01810 61 02 SNOILVOIGNI 1 5 00 peSed pue 1ajsue1 81828 ploy 5 uorsuajxa 62 4 2 58 dn 4 aq 07 5 Sururooug 019835 Sure sem oym 3194 03 3181 03 951 e y 0013816 Jo Jaquinu y BIG
550. placed as soon as possible after the Low Battery LED illuminates The power switch must always be turned OFF while changing batteries 9307 PC 8231A MICRO DISK CONNECTION Make sure that the power supplies of both units are OFF when connecting the units together 930 7 1 Connection of the PC 8231A s Signal Connector The standard 8 pin signal connector is on the left side of the PC 8231A unit If a toroid ferrite ring is provided connect the end with the toroid to the Micro Disk Unit See Figure 930 11 UNIT Figure 930 11 8 Pin Connector 8231 900 9 ND 20292 CHAPTER 9 MARCH 1988 930 7 2 Connection to the PC 8300 After connecting one end of the 8 pin modular cable to the PC 8231A unit connect the other end to the connection marked FDD 5101 when using PC 8201A the back panel of the PC 8300 See Figure 930 12 Figure 930 12 8 Pin Connector PC 8300 930 7 3 Inserting the AC Power Pack Power to the Micro Disk Unit can be supplied from the AC pack included The AC power is installed by inserting the AC pack as shown in Figure 930 13 Be sure to insert the AC pack into the device until it clicks in place thus making sure that it will not pop out during use The inlet is usually covered by sliding cover Figure 930 13 AC Power Pack PC 8231A 930 8 OPERATING the 8231 MICRO DISK UNIT 930 8 1 Opening the PC 8231A The lid of the PC 8231A is opened by the slide lock butto
551. play will bring to the LCR Main Menu Below and in the following pages is provided an example of the display mode as applied to each table type selection a Area Code Table Display TENANTNO While in the Display Menu depress 1 then the CR RETURN key The display shown is provided AREA CODE TABLE DISPLAY Enter the Tenant number 1 3 desired then the CR TABLE RETURN key AREACODE O Enter the desired area code then depress the CR EAE CODE TABLE AREA CODE H 223 TABLE NAME WEEKLY TABLE NO 02 The content of the desired area code table is now displayed b Weekly Schedule Table Display NOTES 1 Use of the ESC key returns the display to the Display Menu 2 Use of the CR RETURN key causes the displayed area code to be incremented by one and displays the contents of the new table 3 Use of the cursor up key allows moving the cursor back to the table number position and changing it to a new number Depress CR RETURN to view the new table c Daily Schedule Table Display While in the Display Menu depress 3 then the CR RETURN key The display at right is provided DAILY SCHEDULE DISPLAY DAILY SCHEDULE TABLE O Enter the desired table number 00 63 then the CR RETURN key DAILY SCHEDULE DISPLAY DAILY SCHEDULE TABLE NO 01 0 3456 7 879 10 11 2 0
552. plays shown are typical of what may be seen during the clearing process The biocked offarea is replaced with the name of the selected table name Due to the large memory used in the office code table when it is cleared the display will show darkened cursor blocks to indicate the progress of the clearing process 9 At the end of the clearing process depress CR RETURN to get back to the System Data Clear Menu 3 Refer to the table of errors elsewhere in this chapter for further guidance if a problem is encountered 8 SYSTEM CONTROL MODE The LCR Main Menu provides an option to restart the LCR E This option is made available to allow resetting the LCR E without affecting the rest of the system in other words a CPU E reset is not necessary to reset the LCR E Under normal condit ions this option is not to be used use this option the following procedure is required With the LCR Main Menu in the display enter 10 then depress RETURN The display Shown is provided If no problem is encountered during the restarting process the display shown is provided If a problem is encountered during the restarting process the display shown is provided NOTE Once the restarting process is completed depress CR RETURN to get back to the LCR Main Menu 100 51 ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 198 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS PHASE EXECUTING 0 PHASE EXECUTING NORMAL END PHASE EXECUTING ABNORMAL END LINE TROU
553. port to be assigned Example Slot 2 Dial channel number 1 4 of COI port to be assigned Example 1 See Note 2 DISPLAY tolr F fe OIXT xx jPjRjo e R A M iMjo p E mi oloje rh 2 12 151 z 2 1 21 T T 2 12 1 2 elol i wit rh 21627 111 2 T Depress Li to 1 16 to set the desired parameters of the COI port Depress ENTER key See Note 3 Repeat steps 7 and 8 for all additional COI ports as required or go to step 3 to select a particular COI port Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 198 KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE SPER ne 47 TEL Enters new port number F W Forward Increments channel number CLEAR _________________ N nters each assignmen B W Backward Decrements channel number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT BEING PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED 42 481 486 487 LINE BUTTONS ti tee MULTIPLIER M 8 19110 11171113 69 115116 009 Multiplier M HP
554. power supply to the PC 8300 RAM so that your files stored the 8300 are saved It operates only when the power switch of the PC 8300 is turned off Figure 930 9 Backup Power Switch The Backup Power switch should be turned off only if you will not be using the PC 8300 for an extended period longer than one month in order to avoid the total discharge of the batteries and deterioration in performance The Backup Battery will save the files and store them internally for 7 days without any batteries in the battery pack and without an AC adaptor connected to the PC 8300 When the Backup Power switch is turned off all files stored in the PC 8300 will be lost Make sure that important files are saved onto an external storage device before you turn the Backup Power switch off Due to their rechargeable nature the NiCad backup battery has a total life span of approximately 2 1 2 years After that time you will probably need to take the PC 8300 to your NEC distributor for replacement since the internal cell will start to lose its ability to hold a charge 930 3 TURNING THE POWER ON To turn on the power of the PC 8300 for the first time or after an extended period of storage use the following procedure 1 Make sure the batteries are inserted properly or that the PC 8271A 01 AC adaptor is properly connected as outlined in section 930 1 2 Turnon the Backup Power switch on the bottom of the PC 8300 3 Turn on the pow
555. press CR RETURN to view the new table 700 47 ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 198 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS ROUTE ADVANCE DISPLAY ROUTE ADVANCE TABLE CI ROUTE ADVANCE DISPLAY ROUTE ADVANCE TABLE NO 04 1STROUTE TABLE NO 208 2NDROUTETABLE NO 209 3RDROUTETABLENO 210 ATH ROUTE TABLE NO 211 ROUTE TABLE DISPLAY TABLENO O ROUTE TABLE DISPLAY TABLE NO TRKACSSCODE 02 AREA CODE DEL ETR CODE ADD PFX ADD CHK SRV AREA CHK NO ADD CODE TBL 12 CHK OFC CODE TBL 127 CHK OFC CODE TBL 126 ND 20292 CHAPTER MARCH 1988 f Extra Code Table Display While in the Display Menu depress 6 then the CR RETURN key The following display is provided Enter the desired table number 00 15 then depress the CR RETURN key NOTES 1 Use of the ESC key returns to the Display Menu 2 If desired successive depressions of the CR RETURN key allows viewing of consecutive tables 3 Use of the cursor up key allows moving the cursor back to the table number position and changing it to a new number Then depress CR RETURN to view the new table 6 Office Code Table Display While in the Display Menu depress 7 then the CR RETURN key The display shown is provided Enter the Table number 000 127 desired then the CR RETURN key Enter the desired office code then depress the CR RETURN key The status of 50 office codes ineludi
556. press ENTER key See Note 2 6 0 0 3 2 1111 7 RepeatSteps 5 and 6 for all line keys to assigned on the selected device 8 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 28 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 KR ne ENTER Enter each assignment GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING IMEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO PROGRAMMED 165 166 1c7 162 168 o p qo se CPU EB or higher See Step 5 51 NOTES 1 After a device number has been entered line 1 keys L1 L5 will display the previous ring assignment of the selected row EE 2 Depressing the ENTER key will cause the display to increment to the next row of the selected device End 2 3 Gs 6 0118 El E El E El E E 25 E EL ELE E B B E E L 1 1 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 L 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i L 1 a 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 i 1 1 GENERAL INFORMATION ADD ON MODULE NIGHT i RING ASSIGNMENT Li This area of the memory block is used to assign Night Ringing to CO trunk appearances on the CO Add On Modules 1 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 101 PRIME RINGING LINE ASSIGNMENT or or
557. r if the VMI E ETU is added to an existing system into an interface slot previously occupied by a different type ETU it will be necessary to reassign the CCU interface 5106 using this memory block after the VMI E ETU has been installed 830 2 RECOMMENDED PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK 1C3 DSS BLF BUTTON ASSIGNMENT It is recommended that VMI E extension appearances be programmed onto the attendant s DSS BLF to permit easy access for calls and transfers to the Voice Mail equipment NOTE Before programming Memory Block 1 3 Memory Block 1C1 DSS BLF TO ATTENDANT ASSIGNMENT should already be programmed as any change made to this memory block will erase any previous assignments made in Memory Block 1C3 and will have to be reentered MEMORY BLOCK 2C4 VOICE MAIL HUNT GROUP ASSIGNMENT is used to assign up to four extension numbers to the Voice Mail hunt group After this is done when the Voice Mail Hunt Group Access Code Default 63 is dialed the system will hunt for the first idle extension within the hunt group MEMORY BLOCK 3 1 TELEPHONE NAME ASSIGNMENT can be used to assign name to each VMI E channel When Message Waiting displays are sent from a Voice Mail system this name will be included in the Message Display that is sent to any key telephone with a display Example MAIL Table 1 VMI E Signal Timing Parameters Memory Blocks 4B8 and 4B9 PARAMETER MINIMUM MAXIMUM DEFAULT MEMORY BLOCK
558. r before the system provides an SMDR report Time before a conference call placed in 300 sec 990 sec call park recalls Conference Park Recall MFR Timeout Maximum time MFR will remain on 99 line before the first and between each digit dialed by Single Line Telephone 300 254 Elapsed Call Timer Recall timing for a call back to the Exclusive Hold ND 20292 SEPTEMBER 1988 SECTION 350 FUNCTION TIMER CHART Contd MEMORY TIMING VALUE BLOCK DEFINITION Talk Start Timer Minimum time needed after dialing on 1sec 18 sec 99 sec a trunk to establish a trunk to trunk transfer Delayed Ringing Time Delay before CO ringing starts at 1 99 Line stations assigned delayed ringing Delayed Ringing Time Delay before Internal ringing 1 10 sec 99 Extension starts at stations assigned delayed ringing Voice Delay time before DTMF dial is sent to Automatic Dial Send the VMI ports Delay Announce Time Delay before Delay 99 sec Timeout Announcement stops and the trunk is released Automatic Maximum time before automatic 60 min 990 min Disconnect Timer disconnect of trunk to trunk connec tions DTMF Digit 4B 1 4B 6 Duration time for each digit dialed on Duration COD 4B 9 an outside line Trunk Hookflash 4B 1 4B 6 Durat
559. r higher NOTES 1 Default is deny LED off 8181 Ge 2188 i 3 a us Ga Cel 897 Cd Pd Ed J Ed Lal Cow 2 The amount of time the modem is reserved is programmable in Time Base Assignment 1 Om WEHHEEBHH E E El E El El b El E El GENERAL INFORMATION MODEM POOLING TERMINAL KEYBOARD i DIALING ASSIGNMENT 4 i This area of the memory biock is used to assign system wide modem pool access via computer terminal keyboard dialing This allows data users the ability to reserve modems and then dial out from computer i terminals instead of their stations L ND 30292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2B2 ALLOW FORWARD OVERRIDE OPERATION 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F2 then 3 Depress F12 See Note 1 4 Depress L1 to allow or deny forward override LILEDON Allow L1 LED OFF Deny 5 Depress ENTER key 6 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 86 M AnD DISPLAY tole Je INTET Ir fajm 21 LETT PTT PPT Pr rrr Ale wo Tolv efr LEE TT TT Pr rrr LITT TT TT er Ewoo CLEAR 2 1 Enter assignment GUIDE TO FEATURE PR
560. r to be redialed The number will be eliminated from memory when redialed Each Multiline Terminal within the Electra system can have at least one Save and Repeat key until the system limit of eighty Save and Repeat keys is reached SINGLE LINE TELEPHONES are used when cable distances exceed the allowed maximum length for Multiline Terminals see Chapter 2 specs The Electra MarkII provides all single line telephones access to most features available to the Multiline Terminals The system capacity for such telephones is seventy six which requires the support of up to four MFR EA ETUs and up to three RSG E Ringing Supply Generators and up to nineteen SLI E ETUs A system must contain at least one ESI E ETU and ETE 16D 1 Multiline Terminal for programming and call processing STATION CAMP ON allows a call to be transferrred to an extension even when it is busy If the Camp On is disallowed for any reason or goes unanswered for a preprogrammed length of time it will recall to the station that initiated the Camp On Camp On capabilities are controlled by station Class of Service No more than one Camp On per station is possible STATION LOCKOUT provides added call security by allowing any station user programmed thru Class of Service to electronically remove his station from service by dialing system lockout access code and then a private lockout code dialing these same codes again restores the station to serv
561. re The LCR feature provided with the Electra MarkII Digital Telephone System can select lines such as FX Foreign Exchange SCC Specialized Common Carrier Outward WATS Wide Area Telecommunications Service DDD Direct Distance Dial and Tie lines LCR routes the calls choosing the least expensive route based on the number dialed the time of day and the day of the week as previously programmed in the LCR package LCR cannot access CCSA Common Control Switching Arrangement lines or incoming only lines such as DID Direct Inward Dial or Inward WATS lines In addition the LCR feature cannot be used to make operator credit card international or uniform dialing calls Manually selecting a trunk defeats LCR SECTION 720 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 720 1 GENERAL The LCR E ETU is an option within the Electra system but equipment such as the portable computer PC 8300 which is required for programming must be locally provided 720 2 LCR E ETU The LCR E ETU is the Least Cost Routing Unit that consists of an 8 bit microprocessor a 256K ROM chip a 256K RAM chip clock generator circuit RS 232C interface and common memory circuit The LCR E contains three switches an LED and an RS232C connector ended ribbon cable See Figure 720 1 Switch 1 designated SW1 is used to connect backup battery to the LCR E memory This switch should be ND 20292 CHAPTER7 MARCH 1988 Figure 720 1 LCR E ETU Switch LED La
562. re installed in the system they can CABLE also operate as power failure telephones by cross connection on the MDF As an example to make a single line telephone ring on incoming calls to CO 3 during a power failure or brownout connections on the MDF are as follows also refer to Table 230 1 MODULAR i TERMINAL SLLEB SLT 1 TIP stars 1 Lm 1 RING Figure 230 3 View of Modular Terminal for Connection of Multiline Terminals DSS BLF For additional CO line connections to additional CO Add On Modules RAA E and SLT SLTs similar cross connections should be made B Only DTMF dial Single Line Telephones SLT NOTE SLTs used for Power Failure Transfer must Standard 2500 Type will be able to dial within the be supported by an SLI EB ETU 200 19 ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 Since all of the SLTs are equipped with dials the outside lines must ailow tone dialing if dialing during power failure is required STATION CABLE R RD MODULAR TERMINAL SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE Figure 230 4 Simplified Schematic Single Line Telephone Connection SECTION 240 CENTRAL CONTROL UNITS CCUs CONNECTION 240 1 WALL MOUNTING THE CCU A The ESE 32B 1 CCU is equipped with two wall mounting metal brackets These brackets must first be detached from the CCU to properly wall mount it B Unscrew the two screws located on the lower portion of the front pane
563. re made during data entry 2 data is entered into the floppy disk until the ESC key is depressed Atthe time that the ESC key is depressed the data is saved to the floppy disk and the display is returned to the Modify Menu e Route Table Modify The route table is the heart of the LCR programming The purpose of the other tables previously discussed is to allow the LCR E to reach a specific route table based on the area code dialed and either the time of day and day of week if used and or based on the available routes Each route table contains specific data which is used by the LCR E to determine not only which trunk access code will be used to select the trunk but also the manner in which the number is to be dialed The following steps are used to properly assign route tables 100 38 A AA Qui SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS ROUTE ADVANCE MODIFY ROUTE ADVANCE TABLE NO 2 ROUTE ADVANCE MODIFY ROUTE ADVANCE TABLE 20 15 ROUTE TABLE 2ND ROUTE TABLE NO Do 3RD ROUTE TABLE NO 4TH ROUTE TABLE NO ROUTE ADVANCE MODIFY ROUTE ADVANCE TABLE NO 20 ADVANCE MODIFY ROUTE ADVANCE TABLE NO 21 With the Modify Menu in the display depress 5 then CR RETURN The display at right will be provided The number of the route table to be modified is now entered followed by a CR RETURN Available route tables are 000 255 Th
564. re that the RAA is ON HOOK 2 Depress ESC once to get to the modem screen and wait a few seconds until OK appears on the screen 3 Depress ESC again and the program will prompt you with the following display lt MODEM gt AT help OK Calling another system Y N 4 Enter Y yes if calling another modem or N no if not a If you depress Y go back to step 3 and continue from there b If you depress N the prompt will indicate the following gt Exiting Raa Emulator Depress key to exit __ Upon depression of any key the modem connection is terminated and the computer boots MS DOS Voice 800 593 8000 NOTES 1 Anytime you depress on the PC whether in idle or program mode a SELF CHECK Gi display is received This verifies the modem and the RAA E are communicating 2 Anytime you depress ESC on the Computer whether in idle or program mode a CONNECT XXXX BAUD RATE CHOSEN RETURN display is received This verifies the modem and or PC and the RAA E are communicating 3 After SELF CHECK is performed depress RETURN to return to the programming screen Once you are in a memory block and a self check is performed an ALARM 1 is received if another function is attempted before RETURN is depressed 940 6 GENERAL PROGRAMMING NOTES In the above example entering information to the RAA E unit is done as follows type F1 depress RETURN to enter information to the RAA E unit
565. recommended blocks are the 66B50 type for termination of the CCU J cables and the 66M50 type for termination of the station cables The Intermediate Distribution Frame IDF requires only the 66M50 type blocks Both the MDF and the IDF utilize standard bridging clips for each type terminal block The bridging clips are used to mate the left half of the terminal block terminated cable run to the right half of the terminal block cross connection wire The bridging clips are also useful during trouble shooting to help isolate the cable runs and telephones from the central equipment and the Central Office Network from the system Refer to Figure 230 1 for a suggested MDF layout 230 6 CCU CABLES Each CCU comes equipped with three 50 pin female amphenol type connectors These connectors are designated Jl to J3 Since each CCU uses the same designations for the J connectors it is recommended that the MDF terminal blocks be labeled with the CCU number as well as the connector number for example 291 3J1 142 etc Refer to section 240 of this manual for CCU wall mounting 230 7 OUTSIDE LINES A The FCC authorized connector for the connection of CO lines is an RJ21X The CO lines will be connected in sequence within this termination block therefore the lines must be ordered in the appearance order best suited to the customer s usage B Table 230 1 provides complete information about the 50 position connector sho
566. ressed at the same time are used to delete an entry during the MODIFY mode Shown at right is a display when in the MODIFY mode Depressing CTRL X clears the entry in the display When the ESC key is depressed this cleared entry is saved onto the disk in the disk drive 6 Space Bar The Space Bar is used to select desired options when in the MODIFY mode The following examples indicate the various options selected by the Space Bar In Area Code Table Modify mode the Space Bar is used to select between WEEKLY and ROUTE ADVANCE Table assignment for the displayed Area Code Depressing it once selects WEEKLY Depressing the Space Bar again will select ROUTE ADVANCE 700 19 ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS SYSTEM DATA SAVING wee MODIFY 1 AREA CODE TABLE 6 EXTRA CODE TABLE 2 WEEKLY SCHEDULER 7 OFFICE CODE TABLE 8 HOME NPA CODE ENTER MENU NO AREA CODE TABLE MODIFY TENANTNO AREACODE 30 TABLE NAME WEEKLY TABLE NO 01 AREA S a TABLE MODIFY TENANTNO AREA CODE 200 TABLE NAME TABLE NO 1 CODE TABLE MODIFY TENANT NO ACODE 200 WEEKLY yore TABLE MODIFY 200 ROUTE ADVANCE ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS NOTES 1 If the entry is blank use of the Space Bar will display WEEKLY as the selected option 2 Repeated use of
567. ressure until access panel is cleared of the front lip at the same time apply pressure towards you at the rear of the pedestal shown as B until the access panel moves toward you D Remove the access panel and place it aside for later reinstallation E Locate the thirteen pin connector labeled as seen through the access view of the key telephone housing seat the DPA E unit into this connector using care securely insert the unit into the notched cavity refer to Figure 260 2 F Replace the access panel OR continue to install the ADA E unit DTA E unit or HFU E unit 260 4 ANCILLARY DEVICE ADAPTOR UNIT ADA E NOTE Installation in all Multiline Terminals except the ETE 6 1 A Unpiug the line cord at the RJ11C W then turn the Multiline Terminal upside down face down and locate the access panel on the bottom of the Multiline Terminal refer to Figure 260 1 B Slide the directory out of the way C Insert flat screwdriver blade into notched opening shown as and apply light upward pressure until access panel is cleared of the front lip at the same time apply pressure towards you at the rear of the pedestal shown as B until the access panel moves towards you D Remove the access panel and place it aside for later reinstallation E Locate the eight pin jack labeled ADA as seen through the access view of the Multiline Terminal housing just below is a four pin connector and jack labeled
568. rminals will display MSG and the quantity of messages requests for Call Backs and Voice Mail Messages sent to that station up to a maximum of 5 Multiline Terminals with LCD have the ability to select which message to respond to first by scrolling on hook dial digit 1 to scroll from message 1 to 5 the messages The message displayed shows the time the message was left the name of the person who left the message and the extension number of the station from which the caller left the message To return the call the station user dials the number indicated Once dialed the Message Waiting indicator changes i e LCD may have shown MSG3 after call to the calling station LED shows MSG2 The red LED MW on the ETE 6 1 is extinguished by the setting attendant when all messages are cleared NOTE Attendant manually resets the Messsage Waiting indication on the DSS BLF Console MICROPHONE CONTROL is provided to all Multiline Terminal users to allow muting of the station s microphone This ensures privacy during an incoming Voice Announcement or during a Handsfree conversation if equipped with the HFU E Unit MODEM POOLING allows the system user access to external switching of data it supports asynchronous half or full duplex calls at 300 or 1200 bps via the outside network Each the modems four maximum must be 212A compatible provide auto answer and must be supported by an SLI E port a Multiline Terminal wi
569. runk number to be assigned 01 40 Example Trunk 2 5 Depress L1 as required to allow or disallow Delay Announcement 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 1 7 Depress SPKR key to go back on line Jole Je J JE Llr jm T isjYis aly A NINTo u N C E ole i aly TA NIN o u N C E 2 T T T T T 1 300 112 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE PKR ON OFF Line EL Select trunk to be programmed W Increments item number NTER Enters each assignment B W Decremens trunk number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY SLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED 265 CPU EB3 or higher NOTES D Ge Ge 2 8 21 14 65 Cue c l Dee D Fal Cd F3 Ed 3 Md Ed C Fd Cow 1 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to increment to the next trunk number o amp E kl ELE k E E ELE E E EE E B poem 4 GENERAL INFORMATION DELAY ANNOUNCEMENT ASSIGNMENT 1 M i This area of memory block used to program the Delay Announcement feature for each
570. s D Station Feature E Station Assignment These sections defined by letters A through E are accessed by depressing Feature Access keys F6 to F10 respectively Once a memory block area and memory feature section has been chosen selection of Feature Access keys F11 to F20 are used to enter a particular memory feature item MEMORY MEMORY MEMORY FEATURE FEATURE BLOCK SECTION ITEM DESIGNATION lthrough5 A through E 1 through 10 through through F11 through FEATURE KEY F10 F20 300 2 EXE 28 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 SECTION 330 RESIDENT SYSTEM DEFAULT VALUES DEFAULT VALUES 6 Line Multiline Terminal Linekeys1 5 1 5 Line key 6 Primary extension 16 Line Multiline Terminal Line keys1 15 lines 1 15 Line key 16 Primary extension Ringing Assignment Day and Night Mode CO PBX lines 1 15 ring at attendants 1 and 2 DSS BLF Consoles 1 and 2 assigned to 1 1 DSS BLF to Attendant Assignment Attendants 1 and 2 respectively No other DSS BLF console assigned to any attendant BLF Terminal Assignment No ETE 16D Multiline Terminals assigned the BLF feature DSS Button Assignment DSS buttons 1 30 are assigned to stations 100 129 respectively when 30 or more stations are installed on DSS BLF consoles 1 and 2 With less than 30 stations installed the unused keys are assigned vacant DSS BLF Flexible Fun
571. s It is not necessary that the stations be of the same instrument type 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 1E7 TELEPHONE NUMBER CHANGE OPERATION AND DISPLAY 1 Go offline _ Je TO X TX XD 2 Depress F1 then F10 5 5 1 4 3 Depress F17 c ulA N e E 1 2 4 Dialstation number to be changed N B R 61 1 Example Station 104 tlele 1 0 4 2 2 2 5 Dial new station number being assigned 261 1 Example Station 304 Note 1 11111014111 1 113 0151 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 1 1 1 11 1 121212111 1 1 13141311 1 7 Repeat steps 4 to 6 for all additional changes 8 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 62 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 SPKR ON OFF Line EL Select station number to change F W Forward CLEAR ENTER Enter each number change GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY MUST 8E PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED 2 1 04 5 6 2 81 eva 02
572. s turned off is returned when power is turned back on 700 15 ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 750 5 3 Auto Start Setting The PC 8300 has an auto start feature which allows the computer to automatically load the LCR Main Menu program from the disk drive unit when the reset switch is used The following procedure describes the setting of the auto start feature to automatically load the LCR Main Menu program 1 With the PC 8300 main menu displayed depress the fel key Display shows 1983 05 01 14 22 13 Microsoft 1 TELCOM Load from 2 The computer is prompting for a file name to be loaded The file name desired is IPL DO Since the file is in the disk it is necessary to enter 1 prior to the file name At this time use the keyboard capital letters only and enter the following J JPL DO and depress the RETURN key to enter the data Display shows 1983 05 01 14 22 43 TEXT C Microsoft 1 TELCOM Load from 1 IPL DO 1983 05 01 14 28 13 C Microsoft 1 TELCOM 3 The computer now is prompting for the file name that the file will be stored in RAM Enter IPL DO and then depress the RETURN key to enter the data Display shows 14 29 04 TEXT 1983 05 01 C Microsoft 1 TELCOM as IPL DO Ready 4 Depress the RETURN key or the letter Y for yes Display shows 14 31 24 TEXT TELCOM C Microsoft 1 IPL DO 1983 05 01 Name List 12374 5 Using the cursor movement keys
573. s whether the communication between each terminal and its corresponding interface card is stable An erroneous PRW will also register when the terminal is unplugged E ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 2 4 Gs D 2 2 9 er 21 115 56 25 E mn oma pex Cw em Gl Fal E Fa 4 3 Cd B FI F E BI E E EE 1 i 1 300 245 ND 20292 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 585 SOFTWARE HARDWARE SLOT STATUS OPERATION AND DISPLAY 1 Gooffline 2 Depress F5 3 Depress F15 4 Dial module number of the slot to be referenced 1 4 Example Module 1 5 Dial slot number to be referenced 1 8 Example Slot 5 See Note 1 and 2 6 Depress SPKR key to go back on line jolejel fulifnfel OxT 1 p p oq TE 151 s tfo t s r A T UTST 7 151011 5 5 077 s r A r u sT iMlo p u t e 1 is u 1 1 Imoo 1 5 ul ivivivivi T 300 246 300 246 KEY FUNCTION OFF LINE SPKR ON OFF Line
574. said 22814 01 882220 erp puo2es 3419291 01 9Atsn ox uo 110 Sutoe q 74 sSutu UOT S 901 IYJ 19 SU YT 2861 PH3IdVHO 00 122 3425244 dn Juey e 3 9A19221 55948024 z Surperp Jaye 4 eq 38 22 HALON pasamsue Ayed oj a ngjeq oapoo sse oe etq 1182 uorsuejxo ue 4 auo 182 Sutarazes 938 18120 OL 1 LT OPP 7 007 4equinu uorsua xe y Surjerp aaye peutur1e3apaJd e snw 66 ALON 95910 16 8 18018 0 16 03 1 16 10 TVA jospueu 31 e 124 542841182 JO e 195 uorejs AUY 23105 16
575. scriptions In general commands from the main menu result in the display of second menu except for system control This menu is a listing of the available tables Programming is done on a per table basis 700 31 ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 1 Down Load Mode 9 Selection of down load mode results in the menu display at right At this time selection of one of the available table numbers will result in the following display Example for area code down load Depress 1 then CR RETURN NOTES 1 The display shown is an example of area code data being down loaded from the floppy disk into the LCR E The name of the table chosen will be shown in the display 2 Exceptions to note 1 are the office code table and all data down load selections These two selections due to their large memory requirements show darkened boxes to indicate the relative amount of data that has been transferred 3 If no problem is encountered during down load the display shown or one similar to it is provided Depression of the CR RETURN key is required to return to the down load menu 4 Ifa problem is encountered during down load the display shown or one similar to it is provided Depression of the CR RETURN key is required to return to the down load menu 5 It is recommended that the RS 232C cable between the LCR E ETU and the computer be checked prior to doing a down load or up load 2 Up Load Mode Selection of up load m
576. second attendant number 1 4 where calls are to overflow to Example Attendant 4 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 nje 5 5 LT 11 11 11111111 lA TIT 21111111111 altr low Altiri 10 2 A 11141111 Jolviejaie t ow 17131 1 44 7 Repeatsteps 5 and 6 for other attendants as required 8 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 136 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 un B W Decrements attendant number K NCTION N GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING IMEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED AD s 5 ____________ cpu ere Ea zs s 59 58 NOTES 1 During step 4 the display shows any previous L 1 assignment for the attendant to be set 2 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display 1 CG to increment to the next attendant number Dm 96 Lal Fal cm 3 d AG E GENERAL INFORMATION ATTENDANT OVERFLOW ASSIGNMENT i i This area the memory
577. selections These are shown at right These two selections due to their large memory requirements show darkened boxes to indicate the relative amount of data that has been transferred or verified 3 If no problem is encountered during verify the display shown or one similar to it is provided Depression of the CR RETURN key is required to return to the verify menu 4 Ifa problem is encountered during verify the display shown or one similar to it is provided Depression of the CR RETURN key is required to return to the verify menu 5 t is recommended that the RS 232C cable between the LCR E ETU and the computer be checked prior to performing a verify 4 Modify Mode The modify mode is used to make changes to the LCR data base in the floppy disk In this mode the programmer customizes the LCR program to accommodate the need of the system user With the LCR main menu displayed depress 4 and then CR RETURN The Modify program is now loaded from the floppy disk and the display shown is provided At this time the programmer is given the option to select which table is to be modified At any given time only one table type can be modified The following pages provide an example of each table as it is being modified and the associated displays provided by the computer Prior to actually making any program changes it is recommended that the programmer have a complete listing of all desired data clearly written down for easy ref
578. should not be added when the number is zo dialed out by the system 4 Selection of ADD tells the system to dial the digit 1 before it dials out the number dialed by the user This option is used when FX line that is selected requires 1 dialing 5 Selection of CHK check tells the LCR E to look in an office code table for the central office code dialed by the user to determine whether to dial the digit 1 before dialing the number dialed by the user It is required that an entry of an office code table number be made when this option is selected Example of Service Area Check ROUTE TABLE MODIFY SRV AREA CHK Depress Space Bar ROUTE TABLE MODIFY TABLE NO 100 d x kkk t SRV AREA OFC CODE TBL NOTES 1 When the entry is blank use of the Space Bar provides NO as the selected option 2 Repeated use of the Space Bar will cause the selected option to alternate between NO and CHK 3 Selection of NO tells the LCR E that no check of office code table is necessary This option is used when the number dialed by the user is being routed to 77 line which will not use an OCC Other Common Carrier This option can also be selected if the OCC has no limitation relative to office code dialed by the user 4 Selection of CHK check tells the LCR E to look in an office code table for the central office code which the user dialed to determine wheth
579. signment 288 Assignment All VMI ports are assigned for Voice DTMF automatic dial is not applied to any VMI port 289 LCR Bypass Assignment All trunk access code groups do not bypass LCR Recall Key for Tie Lines Extension dial tone Trunk to Trunk Group Assignment CO trunks are assigned to trunk group 1 All Tie lines are assigned to trunk group 2 Trunk Group to Tenant Assignment All trunk groups are assigned to tenant 1 Trunk Group to Access Code Group CO trunk groups are assigned access code 9 Trunk item code group 1 except for trunk group 2 which is assigned access code 8 Trunk item group 2 Voice Mail Hunt Group Assignment No extension number is assigned for voice mail hunt group Delay Announcement Assignment Not assigned Uniform Dial to Trunk Access Code Trunk access code group 2 Group Night Chime Assignment No Night Chime assigned to any trunk group External Ringing Control No External Ringing Control Relay assigned to any trunk group Relay 1 External Paging Zone 1 Fixed Relay 2 External Paging Zone 2 Fixed Relay 3 External Paging Zone 3 Fixed Relays 4 10 not assigned 207 209 Relay Assignment 2C10 Virtual Extension Assignment Virtual extensions 01 48 are assigned to extensions 200 247 201 Time Base Assignment I See Job Spec 201 this chapter 202 Time Base Assignment See Job Spec 2D2 this chapter
580. signment 3 Attendant Overflow Assignment 4 Attendant to Tenant Assignment 3B System 2 Feature 1 1 First Ring Pattern Assignment 2 Centrex Ringing Assignment 3 Forced Account Code Digit Assignment 4 RAA SLT Assignment 5 Station Hunting Pilot Number Assignment 6 Station to Hunt Group Assignment 7 Station Hunt Type Assignment 8 Station Hunt Group Assignment 9 Trunk Group to Line Pool Group Assignment 10 Line Pool Group Auto Extension Assignment 3C System Name Assignment 1 Telephone Name Assignment 2 Trunk Group Name Assignment PAGE 300 114 300 116 300 118 300 120 300 122 300 124 300 126 300 128 300 130 300 132 300 134 300 136 300 138 300 140 300 142 300 144 300 146 300 148 300 150 300 152 300 154 300 156 300 158 300 160 300 162 MEMORY ASSIGNMENT BLOCK 3D 4A 4B First Initialization Second Initialization Slot Initialization Terminal TEL DSS Initialization System Restriction Table 1 2 3 4 Regional Dialing Assignment 1 Dialing Assignment Rejection Code Assignment System Allow Deny Assignment Table Allow Deny Trunk Group to Code Table Assignment Table OCC Flag Assignment Table OCC Code Assignment Restriction Table Code Assignment Special Code Assignment System All Busy Restore Assignment System All Busy Out Assignment Card Mode A NA COLI Initialized Values Initial
581. single line telephone outside lines and the tone ringing circuit 270 5 Night Chime Night chime is available when the ECR E ETU is installed The ECR E ETU contains three relay contacts for assignment of night chime Night Chime is programmed on a Tenant basis These contacts can be accessed at the MDF on the J block labeling of these contacts EPC4A EPC4B through EPC6A EPC6B Refer to Table 230 1 Continous Ring Tone 480 606 Hz modulated by 16 Hz Continous Ring Tone 480 606 Hz modulated by 8 Hz 1285 Hz 0 5 sec ON 1024 Hz 0 5 sec ON 5 sec OFF SW2 Assignment Switch In Switch In Position 3 Position 4 The contacts will provide a closure during CO ring in the night mode to a locally provided amplifier speaker and tone source See Figure 270 4 270 8 Modem Pooling Connection 1 Equipment For modem pooling connection the following conditions must be complied with and the following equipment must also be made available The Electra MarkII system must provide Multiline Terminal with DTA E unit installed and a SLI E port to support each modem being installed B Multiline Terminals with DTA E units installed other than those connected to modems for data communication with outside DTE Data Terminal Equipment C For supporting the DTA E unit ESI E B ETUs are required to allow assignment of ESI E B and SLI E ports for modem use CPU E B ETUs are required The
582. sired Multiline Terminais are programmed or depress the TEL key to program a particular station 8 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 158 ND 20292 CHAPTERS SEPTEMBER 1988 PKR ON OFF Line TEL Select station to be assigned F W Forward Increment station number ENTER Entry to each station assigned B W Backward Decrement station number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING MEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT MAY PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO PROGRAMMED 052 5 087 251 5 is 55 29 Dem pes 3 fal CPU EB3 or higher NOTES 1 When programming appearences for a 6 button station L1 L5 are selected on the programming station 2 The primary extension of the specified TEL is always set as a Pool Auto Extension and cannot be changed LED always ON 3 Depressing the ENTER key causes the assignment to advance to the next station number 3 Cd ag 1 24 E FI E B B E E E GENERAL INFORMATION LINE POOL GROUP AUTO EXTENSION i ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block is used to assign Line Pool Group Auto Extensions PAEs at line key appearance of Multiline Terminals Primary extensions are automatically assigned t 300 159 ATTENDANT
583. sis Local Call Override Local call override can be assigned on a syster basis When it is programmed LCR does no apply to local calls on a system basis d LCR Bypass Should a station user find it necessary to bypass LCR the user can directly access a CO line via a CO line button A Single Line Telephone SLT or a Multiline Terminal without access to the CO network can be assigned LCR bypass on a trunk access code group basis via Memory Block 2B9 To assign LCR bypass line button 1 2 1 8 correspond to trunk access code group 2 8 respectively Any line button LED that is lit when the ENTER key is depressed assigns the associated trunk access code group to bypass LCR 2 System Station Speed Dial Consideration System Station speed dialing sometimes requires pause s between telephone numbers especially in cases using SCCs These pauses may cause the LCR E ETU not to Seize a least cost route because these pauses may be considered digits dialed Pauses should be programmed as part of extr codes in the SCC table when system or static speed dialing is programmed to use SCCs The system data is programmed as follows ND 20292 CHAPTER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 107 Class of Service OPERATION DISPLAY 1 Gooffline Depress and 016 1 1 1411 Tox a iela 2 Depress Fi then ro a n a t
584. ss L1 to L16 to set the desired pad parameters See Note 1 Corresponding LEDs go on or off accordingly 8 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 2 aL 15 5 2 9 Repeatsteps 4 thru 8 for all trunks associated with TLI E ETUs to be programmed or depress TEL to program a specific TLI E port 10 Depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 228 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 ON O De EL Selects port number F W port number LEAR ENTER Enters pad loss assignment be GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING PROGRAMMED MUST PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED 4E7 02 41251151 7 8 pc E elt ae etcetera is ue aos s ez 8 8 Fen Em 8881 4 E3 P3 Ed De 2 or higher NOTES i PadDefinitions Internal dB loss between Tie line and distant station External dB loss between Tie line and distant trunk Default 2dB for Internal and External 2 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to increment to the next channel or the first channel of the next slot with a TLI E installed 23 GENERAL INFORMATION TLI IV INITIALIZED VALUES i This area of the memory block is used to assign at
585. ss of 2 the number of stations installed G Ge Ce Cel 2 Extension number entered in step 5 cannot be already assigned to a port or to another VE uM Lal Fal Fal 3 Depressing the ENTER key will cause the display to increment the VE number 4 particular VE is busy programming for that tensi be t be d til th extension number cannot be done until the extension is idle 4 LJ Pd Cow 1 E E E E E El F El E E GENERAL INFORMATION VIRTUAL EXTENSION ASSIGNMENT 4 t This area of the memory block is used to assign Virtual Extension numbers The total number of Virtual Extensions is 48 which are extensions 200 247 in system default 1 1 t t J 300 123 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 2D1 TIME BASE ASSIGNMENT I OPERATION Gooffline Depressf2 thenF9 Depress 11 Depress line key associated with the item to be changed associated LED lights Example LK 8 Call Forward No Answer See Note 1 Dial count value to be entered 01 99 Example Time Count 02 for a total of 20 seconds See Note 3 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 Repeat steps 5 and 6 for all items required Depress the SPKR key to go back line AND DISPLAY JL Nfe Ix xD e 6 mjojoje 5 51 1
586. stalled working stations cannot be assigned Tandem Ports Maximum Tandem Ports 20 Tandem Port default 2 None Maximum Tandem Port Hunt Groups 8 Sv CMS 39 Virtual extensions cannot be assigned to a tandem port hunt group 7 During step 4 any current Tandem Port hunt group assigned for the Tandem Port chosen is displayed 8 Depressing the ENTER key causes the display to go to step 3 i This area of the memory block is used to assign software Tandem Ports into Hunt Groups When a tandem connection is being processed the system will search for an idle Phantom Tandem Port within the i corresponding Hunt Group i 037 2 5 81 A 881 x rs ix 258 CI C LJ OA F3 9 CAG Cae 300 233 ND 30292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 4 10 TRUNK GROUP TO TANDEM HUNT GROUP ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND DISPLAY l Gooffline 2 Depress F4 then F10 3 Depress F20 4 Enterthe Trunk Group number to be assigned 1 8 Example Trunk group 2 5 Enterthe Tandem Hunt Group number to be assigned to the chosen Trunk Group 1 8 Example Hunt Group2 See Note 1 6 Depress ENTER key See Note 2 Jof Je Ne ir irjam Mjo D E ET 02051
587. sures that a customer can always have access to the central office network even during a commercial power outage This feature requires the use of single line telephones supported by SLI EB ETUs If power fails to support the Electra CCUs the CO Tip and Ring are automatically transferred to the Tip and Ring of a preselected and cross connected single line telephone these SLTs may function in the system during normal operation or can be only for use during power failure PRIME LINE ASSIGNMENT simplifies the use of the Multiline Terminals further by providing automatic selection of a line key When a Multiline Terminal programmed for Prime Line Assignment goes off hook the assigned extension or outside line key is seized automatically This feature always seizes the line key when the line IDLE Variations of this feature are accomplished when the system is programmed for Prime Line pick up for incoming calls or the terminal is programmed for Ringing Line Preference and Prime Line PRIVACY ON ALL CALLS provides the secure knowledge that no one can listen to your ongoing conversation Only the person holding a conversation can allow another party to enter the conversation via Add On Conference All lines in the system are provided with complete Privacy PRIVATE LINES can be assigned via the Flexible Line Assignment feature Restriction assignments can be used to assure that a line is made private PROGRAMMING
588. t 300 68 4 Incoming Prime Line Pickup 300 70 5 Ist Digit Assignment 300 72 300 14 6 Incoming Print 300 74 300 16 7 Internal Call 300 76 8 Account Code Digit 300 78 300 18 9 Outgoing Code 300 80 12262 iction E 300 20 10 Tie Line Digit Restrictio 2B stem Feature 2 300 22 Modem Pooling Terminal Keyboard Dialing 300 84 300 24 2 Allow Forward Override 300 86 3 DIT Trunk to Tenant 300 26 Assignment 300 88 4 DIT ANA Assignment 300 90 300 28 5 LCR1 DialingAssignment 300 92 6 LCR Local Call Override Assignment 300 94 7 Modem Pool Assignments 300 96 300 30 8 VMI Assignment 300 98 300 32 9 LCR Bypass Assignment 300 100 300 34 10 Recall Key Operation for Tie Line 300 102 300 36 2C pen Group 300 38 Trunk to Trunk Group Assignment 300 104 300 40 2 Trunk Group to Tenant 300 42 Assignment 300 106 3 Trunk Group to Access 300 44 Code Group 300 108 4 Voice Mail Hunt Group 300 46 Assignment 300 110 5 Delay Announcement 300 48 Assignment 300 112 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY ASSIGNMENT BLOCK 8 Uniform Dial to Trunk Access Code Group 7 Night Chime Assignment 8 External Ringing Control Assignment 9 ECR Relay Assignment 10 Virtual Extension Assignment 2D System Time Base 1 Time Base Assignment I 2 Time Base Assignment II 3 Time Base Assignment III 2E 1 System Access Code Assignment System Feature Access Code List System Attendant 2 Attendant 3rd and 4th As
589. t of the drive Then simply remove the disk NOTE Never remove the micro floppy disk from the drive when the access indicator LED is on or before an open file is closed You may cause a read error and the data may be permanently damaged 930 8 4 Closing the PC 8231A To close the PC 8231A remove the micro floppy disk from the drive Turn the power to the PC 8231A off Liftthetop half of the unit Close the lid with one hand Lower the lid while gently pushing on it Lock the two halves together and push in the slide locks See Figure 930 17 CAUTION Make sure the PC 8231A is closed and secure before moving or transporting the unit 930 9 INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE for PC 8300 930 9 1 General Information It is important that you clearly understand the ways to boot your PC 8300 The two procedures very different they are used in different situations and produce very different results These two booting methods are called warm start and cold start respectively The usual method of turning on the power is called a warm start by which the PC 8300 is turned on without initializing clearing the file storage area the data in its RAM or the setting of the real time clock Any files previously created and stored in the RAM are still saved there ED C Lock the two halves together and push in the side locks Lower the lid while gently pushing on it Figure 930 17 Closing the Disk Drive 900 10
590. tailed call reports on the usage of the system Detailed call reports include number dialed time of initiated received call trunk number trunk group of call outgoing incoming transferred conferenced station number length of call and date printer or other peripheral device must be connected to the RS 232C connector from the SMDR E The time clock is protected against power loss by a mounted battery Data output specd range is from 300 to 4800 baud and is set by a switch mounted on the SMDR E ETU A maximum of 1 SMDR E ETU can be installed per system 19 ECR E ETU The ECR E ETU is the External Control Relay Unit that provides control circuits to access one or all three External Paging Zones If the locally provided amplifer is a bothway amplifier two way paging is available The ECR E ETU also provides circuitry for External Ringing applications and Night Chime control in the night mode The ECR E ETU also contains input jacks for two music sources to be used to supply Background Music via Multiline Terminal speakers maximum of 1 ECR E ETU can be installed per system 100 25 ND 20292 CHAPTER 1 JULY 1987 20 LCR ETU The LCR E ETU is the Least Cost Routing Unit that provides the user with the least costly available route when placing outside calls The real time clock is protected against power loss by a mounted battery Data output speed range is from 150 to 9600 baud and is set
591. tain specific requirements and precautions which if not followed will impair the reliability of the system 230 4 SITE SELECTION CONDITIONS The following conditions should be met at the site chosen for mounting the Central Control Unit CCU A The CCU is normally wall mounted to protect against accident or flooding Use of a 3 4 plywood backboard is recommended for this purpose B The CCU should not be located directly beneath pipes due to the possibility of leaks or condensation causing damage to the ELECTRA MARKII equipment C The area in which the CCU is to be located must be free of corrosive and inflammable gases excessive chemical or industrial dusts and other materials which could cause a hazard to personnel or to the proper functioning of the equipment D Heat and humidity must be within the limits provided in Section 220 of this manual E Although its virtually noiseless operation allows a wide selection of installation sites care should be taken that CCU s do not present a hazard to office traffic For purposes of economy a central location to minimize cabling is often used 230 5 MDF CONSTRUCTION The Main Distribution Frame MDF consists of two different types of standard quick connect terminal blocks which are to be mounted onto the 3 4 plywood 200 16 200 16 backboard For the sake of neatness and ease of access it is also recommended that the blocks be mounted on appropriate standoffs The
592. tains four identical circuits 10 serve up to four Multiline Terminals which can any mix of Multiline Terminals or DSS BLF Consoles CO Add On Modules A maximum of 20 ESLEA ETUs can be installed per system 13 ESI EB The ESI EB is the Electronic Station Interface Unit which includes the functions of the ESI EA ETU and supplies the Multiline Terminals with a DPA E 100 24 and or DTA E unit installed with the off hook announcement and or Data Communication features Each ESI EB ETU contains four identical circuits to serve up to four Multiline Terminals which can be any mix of Multiline Terminals or DSS BLF Consoles or CO Add On Modules NOTE The Data Switching feature has a direct impact on the Dual Path features system maximum and vice versa When a station requires both Dual Path and Data Switching it needs the use of three paths each ESI EB ETU contains 8 paths utilized by the four ports therefore removing the second path from the adjacent port Only ports one and three of the ESI EB ETU can have both features while ports two and four can have either feature if the adjacent port does not have both A maximum of 20 ESI EB ETUs can be installed per system 14 SLI EA ETU The SLI EA ETU is the Single Line Telephone Interface Unit which provides circuitry for loop status detection talk battery sending ringing signal from the RSG E unit to SLTs and voice service to SLTs Each SLI
593. tation chosen in step 3 See Note 2 LED ON green Ring All CPU levels LED Delayed Ring CPU EB3 or higher LED OFF No Ring CPU levels T To A v 0 TIT T TT 11 Depress ENTER key See Note 1 Repeat step 5 until all desired Multiline Terminals are programmed T 7 Tey Depressing F20 toggles the programming between day and night mode If more stations need programming depress F W or B W keys until desired station number is displayed then go to step 5 When ail Multiline Terminals have been Programmed for day and night mode ringing depress the SPKR key to go back on line 300 12 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 PKR ine EL Select station to be assigned F W Forward Increment station number CLEAR ENTER Entry to each station assigned B W Backward Decrement station number GUIDE TO FEATURE PROGRAMMING IMEMORY BLOCK BEING MEMORY BLOCK THAT MEMORY BLOCK THAT PROGRAMMED MUST BE PROGRAMMED HAVE TO BE PROGRAMMED AE a See Step 5 for CPU levels NOTES 1 Depressing the ENTER key causes the assignment to advance to the next station nr n Cm 51 Gel 0 2 When programming appearances for a 6 button Ead C station L1 L5 are selected on
594. tenuation levels to software controlled pads used in the Tie lines between the local station and a distant station or a distant trunk These loss levels are independent of and are additive to the loss levels controlled by switches located on the TLI cards 300 229 ND 20292 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 4E8 TLI V INITIALIZED VALUES Depress F4 then F10 Depress F18 OPERATION DISPLAY tofe fF ilr 220152 2 1 sitloir Dial CCU module number 1 4 where the TLI port to be programmed is located Example Module 1 Tale 2 1 151 folir jciui Dial slot number 1 8 where TLI port is to be programmed Example Slot 5 21 5 1 1 1 5 17 Dial TLI channel number 1 2 of TLI porttobe z E sT assigned iMIolp 1 151 5 Example Channel 1 Depress L1 to L12 to set the desired DTMF parameters of the selected TLI port See Note 1 Corresponding LED s go on or off accordingly i fale mloloja 5 21 17 Depress ENTER key See Note 2
595. tered during the printout process the display shown is provided HOME NPA CODE TABLE PRINT OUT START ABNORMAL END NOTES 1 In the example the blocked off area is replaced with the name of the table chosen 2 Refer to the table of errors elsewhere in this chapter for further guidance if a problem is encountered 3 Use of the ESC key returns the display to the LCR Main Menu from the Print Out Menu 7 SYSTEM DATA CLEAR When major changes to the floppy disk data are required the option is provided at the LCR Main Menu to clear out data on a table basis The following steps provide the procedures for using this option With the LCR Main Menu displayed depress 7 then SYSTEM DATA CLEAR i i ided REA CODE TABLE 6 EXTRA CODE TABLE CR RETURN The display shown is provided EKLY SCHEDULER 7 OFFICE CODE TABLE 8 HOME NPA CODE ROUTE TABLES NTER MENU NO O Enter the number of the table to be cleared and depress CR RETURN The example shows the AREA CODE TABLE DATACLEARSTART display for selection 1 area code table clear If no problem is encountered during the clearing AREA CODE TABLE DATA CLEAR START process the display shown is provided NORMAL END If a problem is encountered during the clearing process the display shown is provided AREA CODE TABLE DATA CLEAR START Depress CR RETURN key to go back to the System EOD UGERNOR A Data Clear Menu 700 50 NOTES 1 The dis
596. th LCD equipped with a DTA E unit and supported by an ESI EB ETU port system must also be equipped with a CPU EB ETU and an RSG E unit MULTIPLE TRUNK GROUPS allow custom fitting of the Electra MarklII s trunks to meet almost any customer s needs The system provides for the programming ability to assign up to 40 trunks into a maximum of eight trunk groups Each trunk group can be assigned a separate access dial code or can share the same dial access code MUSIC ON HOLD connects a locally provided music source to an outside party whenever a call is placed on any type of HOLD MUSIC ON HOLD can also be 14 D 20232 CHAPTER 1 JULY 1987 provided via the musie chip on the TSW E ETU This chip offers two different musica selections NIGHT CALL PICKUP functions when the system is placed in Night Mode by the attendant In the Night Mode stations are able to answer incoming outside calis by dialing the Night Call Pickup access code set by default as 60 or by depressing a programmed function button Tenant assignment and incoming restriction programming affect which calls can be answered When the system is equipped with an ECR E ETU it is capable of providing up to three distinct NIGHT CHIMES when in the Night Mode The ECR E ETU contains three relays that can be programmed to provide closures during incoming outside line ringing In Tenant systems each tenant has its own Night Chime relay NIGHT TRANSFER is a function
597. the cursor keys can be used to make corrections 2 Once the desired digits are properly displayed depressing the return key will enter the data into the computer s memory and increment the table number by one Depressing the return key will now allow programming of the next table Prior to depressing the return key a second time the programmer can enter a new table number to be modified When ail extra code tables are assigned correctly the use of the ESC key causes the data to be saved to the floppy disk and causes the display to return to the modify menu 700 42 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS EXTRA CODE TABLE MODIFY EXTRA CODE TABLE EXTRA CODE TABLE MODIFY EXTRA 11 2 O ND 20292 CHAPTER 7 MARCH 1988 g Office Code Table Modify SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS Whenever the option of either prefix check or service check is assigned in the route tables it is necessary to modify the office code tables for the LCR E to check and determine how the call is to be processed Note that 128 office code tables are made available and that these 128 tables are used for both prefix check and service area check Normally these tables are used for either one check or the other not both The following procedure shows how to modify the OFFICE CODE TABLE MODIFY office code tables as required With the Modify TABLE US Menu in the display depress
598. the Space Bar will cause the selected option to alternate between WEEKLY and ROUTE ADVANCE 3 Selection of WEEKLY tells the LCR E processor to go look in the weekly schedule tables to determine the time of day and then the route advance table which is to be referenced 4 Selection of ROUTE tells the LCR processor to immediately go to the route advance tables for further directions When in ROUTE TABLE MODIFY mode the use of the Space Bar makes the selection of the various options available for each line in the ROUTE TABLE MODIFY display except Table No and Trunk Access Code which are number entries Example for Area Code Delete ROUTE TABLE MODIFY aaa 0 NO 13 12 DEL 133 5 NOTES 1 When the entry is blank use of the Space Bar provides NO as the selected option 2 Repeated use of the Space Bar will cause the selected option to alternate between NO and DEL DELETE 3 Selection of NO tells the LCR E that the area ow code should not be deleted when the number is dialed 2 out the systern m 4 Selection of DEL tells the system to delete the area code when it dials out the number dialed by the user 100 20 rae aie ND 20292 CHAPTER MARCH 1988 SAMPLE LCD INDICATIONS Example of Extra Code Add ROUTE TABLE MODIFY SRV AREA CHK Depress Space Bar
599. the status of call progress The 5 bottom lines of the LCD are associated with the 10 programmable Feature Access keys A two color LED is also provided to each line key which can be assigned for outside lines extension lines Data Transmit and Data Receive DND or 5 amp Rfeatures This terminal requires twisted 2 pair cabling to the or the IDF 26 SINGLE LINE TELEPHONE Single line telephones can be 2500 type telephones or Dterm IIs and must be locally provided Only DTMF single line telephones are compatible with this system An MFR EA and RSG E unit and is either an SLI EA or an SLI EB are required for operation of single line telephones ND 20292 CHAPTER 1 JULY 1987 27 EDE 30 1 DSS BLF The EDE 30 1 DSS BLF is the Direct Station Selection Busy Lamp Field console that is equipped with 33 programmable non locking buttons 30 buttons are used to assign Direct Station Selection DSS or such features as Transfer paging attendant override Night Mode and Message Waiting buttons are for feature use only The first 30 buttons are provided with two color LEDs which indicate station status or Message Waiting Status Depressing the button assigned for M ssage Waiting changes the EDE 30 1 DSS BLF to a Message Waiting console maximum of 6 EDE 30 1 DSS BLF Consoles can be installed per system a maximum of 2 EDE 30 1 DSS BLF Consoles be associated with any attendant Multili
600. tic and requires proper grounding to protect unit and DTE connected to it Normally a DTE with RS 232C interface has its frame ground connected to earth ground Therefore ensure that the DTEs connected to DTA E units are properly connected to earth ground via conduit ground of its AC power cord 200 5 ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 Table 220 5 System Configuration Example DEVICE TYPE EQUIPMENT SLOT POSITION REMARKS _ _ _ Multiline Terminals with ETE 6 1TEL installed E installed ipped with Multiline Terminals with DTA b E and DPA E installed 7 or DTA E DPA E installed ut DSS BLF consoles CO Add On 4ESI EA Units Modules Single line telephones with 2SLI EB message wait lamp Single line telephones without 2SLI EA message wait lamp 1 1 interface slot DTMF Receiver Unit Central Control Unit Power Supply 7 interface slots 4 interface slots imde 01 Dunt 11 00 Mounted into Off Hook Announcement 7 7 DPA E Multiline Terminal Mounted into Data Switching 5 DTA E Multiline Terminal Mounted into Handsfree Unit 6 Multiline Terminal Ancillary Device Adapter 4ADA E Mounted into Multiline Terminal 1 install the RSG E unit in the CCU where all SLI E ETUs are installed or use supplementary RSG cable NOTE 2 Install all
601. to choose a particular carrier the table assigned must have the 3 digit OCC identification code entered This assignment allows only certain OCC codes to be used by restricted stations Code Numbers Parameters Each of the systems 32 tables contain eight entries fer digit entry Each item can hold an area code 3 digit and or office code 3 digits Area or office codes to be restricted are placed in deny tables Area codes or office codes to be allowed are placed in allow tables To simplify the understanding of the code restriction on the Electra MarkII system its discussion will be divided into the following sub sections 1 1 dialing area prefix dialing 2 Direct dialing area standard dialing 3 Equal Access OCC usage 4 Puerto Rico area type dialing Note Depending on area the Electra MarkII system is installed one of these four sub sections should apply 360 2 A 1 dialing area discussion of flow chart refer to flow chart Table 360 2 Step 1 First digit dialed Digit 0 disconnect station b Digit 1 allow second digit go to step 3 c Any digit 2 to 9 If digit is not a rejection code let user dial two more digits go to step 2 Step 2 Check last 3 digits dialed a Lowest possible table assigned to station which contains the three digit number as an office code entry is found 1 Table is allow allow user free dialing 2 Table is deny disconnect station b No table is found Check memory
602. ttery cartridge is recharging The recharging process is completed in approximately 48 hours The NiCad battery cartridge should have a full charge prior to using it for the first time The NiCad battery cartridge should be recharged as soon as possible after the low battery LED on the front of the PC 8300 illuminates Keep in mind that the NiCad battery cartridge may not reach its full potential until the unit has been used and recharged 2 or 3 times Once the NiCad battery cartridge can no longer hold a charge the entire cartridge must be replaced Careful handling of this cartridge is necessary for optimum performance The terminal connector portion of the cartridge should never be touched and the cartridge should never be dropped The cartridge should be stored in an area with low humidity The NiCad Battery Cartridge Life Span with battery fully charged is over 5 5 hours NOTE The use of any AC adaptor other than the PC 8271A 01 can cause serious damage to the NiCad battery cartridge 930 2 BACKUP POWER The Backup Power switch is located on the bottom of the PC 8300 See Figure 930 9 It must be turned on before you switch on the main power supply of the PC 8300 for the first time The switch is for the backup system that is powered by an internal NiCad battery in the PC 8300 Even when the main power supply of the PC 8300 is turned off the internal NiCad battery maintains a backup ND 20292 CHAPTER9 MARCH 1988
603. uivalent computer or MS DOS Basic for use with the NEC APC or equivalent computer The CP M DOS is available in one disk size 3 5 inches The MS DOS is available in one of two disk sizes 5 25 inches or 3 5 inches The CP M DOS disk contains the Disk Operating System and the RAA Host Program which is listed as file named ADMI DO The MS DOS disk does not contain a disk operating system it does contain a Communication Application Program and the RAA Host Program both listed in a file named COMLINK 910 2 PC 8300 PERSONAL COMPUTER The PC 8300 is an NEC portable laptop personal computer containing 128K ROM and 64K RAM it uses an 8085 microprocessor and CMOS components for low power consumption It comes equipped with an RS 232C serial I O port and a Centronics parallel ND 20292 CHAPTER 9 MARCH 1988 printer port When connected to the RAA E via modems the PC 8300 can be used to program the system from a remote location See Figure 910 1 A PC 8201A expanded to 64K RAM IBM XT IBM AT NEC APCIV or NEC Multispeed may be used instead of the PC 8300 910 3 PC 8231A MICRO FLOPPY DISK DRIVE The PC 8231A is an NEC micro floppy disk drive unit designed to work with NEC s PC 8300 and PC 8201A computers This disk drive unit uses a single 3 5 inch single sided double density 320K diskette It is not required when using the IBM compatible computers 910 4 8295 01 RS 232C CABLE NORMAL The NEC 8295 01
604. umber being assigned Example Station 104 5 Depress line button to be assigned Li L15 See Notes 1 and 2 6 Depress correct function key to select line type Coline JA siciNI iv ejui1jola Fit TATS TS NL 1 6 1 121 Extension LE Ix IT EIN IS JOIN TAISTSINE T Tre C T T4 crues or higher ITIRIAINISiM crues or nigner Irtetcletiviel T L3 LIK lA SiciNI 111 1 1110141 lan CPU levels 15 1 12121 1 levels All CPU leveis Data Trans mit F16 Data Rece ive F17 DONDE cs LIK lAlsiciN 111 1 1110141 levels jejo siriviirjoiNI 1111 or to make vacant CLEAR luk 5161 rie t 1 o 4 __ 7 For the line type selected in step 6 enter the assigned number CO line 01 40 Extension 100 899 NOTE Usable extension numbers Save amp Repeat 01 80 1000 8999 depend on feature access Line Pool Group 1 8 codes used in the system See Note 3 8 Depress ENTER key 9 Repeat steps 5 to 7 for all other assigned positions 10 If more stations need programming depress F W or B W until
605. umber dialed or Station Speed Dial Contents TRANSFER 213 CAMP 345 OVERRIDE 213 07 43 SEP 02 SUN INCORRECT CODE Originator 1326436 Originator MUSIC NBR Originator MUSIC 1 SET Originator EXT NUMBER Prompt for Station BGM Selection Confirmation of Station BGM Channel Prompt in Call Pickup Directed Originator Confirmation of Ringing Extension Call Transfer to 213 Originator Cailing Party Confirmation of Camp On Transfer to 345 Confirmation of Tone Override to 213 All Stations Clock Calendar Calling Party 12 31 NEIL A 201 Called Station Callback Request Message from 201 11 53 0 Station Message Waiting from CALLBACK SET Originator Confirmation of Automatic Callback CALLBACK DENIED Originator Denial of Automatic Callback MESSAGE SET 222 Originator Confirmation of Callback Request Set to 222 MESSAGE DENIED Originator Denial of Callback Request Attempt jl INTZONE 1 PAGE Originator with DSS BLF Internal Zone Paging INT ALL CALL Originator with DSS BLF Internal All Call 5 INT ALLZONE PAGE Originator with DSS BLF Internal All Zone Paging SPEAKER 2 PAGE Originator with DSS BLF External Speaker Paging ALLSPEAKER PAGE Originator with DSS BLF External Speaker Paging MSG2 Called Station Two Messages on Queue
606. ve ports can be busied out or put back into service To accomplish this function the following equipment is required a AtjobSite 1 CPU EB ETU 2 RAA E unit 3 ESI E one circuit for RAA E termination 4 Modem 212A compatible with auto answer 5 SLI E one circuit for Modem termination if required 6 RSG E unit if Modem terminates an SLI E ETU b Atthe Remote Location 1 Modem 2 NEC PC8300 Laptop Computer 3 NECPC8231A Floppy Disk Drive 4 RAA Host Disc 7 CPU E and CPU EB ETU The CPU E or CPU EB ETU is the Central Processing Unit and the heart of this system It provides overall control via the main processor 16 bit microprocessor by communicating with distributed processors mounted on the TSW E and ETUs The CPU E or CPU EB ETU must be installed in the ESE 32B 1 CCU 8 MMC E ETU The MMC E ETU is the Module Memory and Controller Unit required for each ESE 32E 1 CCU It controls data transmission between the CPU ETU and the interface cards installed in the ESE 32E 1 CCU in which the MMC E ETU is installed Data from and to both the CPU EB ETU and each interface card is temporarily stored in the memories ofthe MMC E ETU The ETU contains a 4 bit microprocessor 9 TSW E ETU The TSW E is the Time Division Switch Unit required for the ESE 32B 1CCU Additionally it supplies all the tones required in processing telephone calls and it also
607. vided Depress 01 Table for the 200 area code is filled CODE TABLE MODIFY TENANT NO 1 AREA CODE TABLE NAME EKLY 4 Example of Moving through a Table Moving through a table is done by depressing a CR RETURN When in a table depressing the CR RETURN enters the data into the computer and increments the specific item number being viewed If no data is displayed for a specific item within a table the data remains blank blank entry is shown by in the display In some 700 28 700 989 tables more than one item for example area codes may be available for display or modification In this case depression of the appropriate item number in the line which shows item number followed by CR RETURN will display the contents for that item Shown is the use of CR RETURN to increment the item number With Area Code Table Modify in the display as shown at right Depress CR RETURN key Depress CR RETURN again to display the contents See Notes below To return to the previous menu depress the ESC key NOTES 1 After the first carriage return above the cursor is positioned at the new item number line At this time a different item number may be chosen If this is done before the carriage return the data contents of the chosen item number will be displayed This option applies to modify mode only 2 The first CR RETURN above increments the item number T
608. vided for each dialing area listed These flow charts provide the reader with a clear step by step understanding of how each type of restriction is handled This is all the information needed to have a complete understanding of the Code Restriction Plan Each flow chart is provided with an outline explanation of the steps in the flow chart to further simplify the discussion JOB SPECIFICATION SHEETS Section 370 contains a sample of the job specification sheets These sheets contain all the system programming values and configurations required for an installation During the initial stages of system planning the job specification sheets are necessary for collecting information to enable an accurate costing and installation of an Electra MarklI system The customer information as collected by the salesperson or installation supervisor is recorded onto the job specification sheets The order of these sheets are presented in the logical order of the memory blocks as provided in Section 340 to make the system programming as easy and efficient as possible The first group of sheets are used for entering the station features line button assignments for Multiline Terminal and DSS BLF consoles as well as dialing restrictions and class of service as required by the customer are listed here The second group of sheets are for assigning system features assignment of trunk groups for specialized service and the assignment of system atte
609. wing pin number lead function running cable color and circuit designation C Ground start and or Loop start Loop dial DID 2 and 4 wire loop dial E amp M Tie lines type 1 and 5 can be connected to this system It is recommended that only twisted pair wiring be used to cross connect the lines from the RJ21X termination block to the MDF ND 20292 2 JULY 1987 Refer to Table 230 1 for proper connection identification 66B50 66M50 TELCO TYPE TYPE RJ21X M Figure 230 1 Typical Layout D HALF TAPPING or PARALLEL CONNECTIONS must not be used on outside lines connected to the Electra MarkII telephone system This practice generally results in system malfunctions on the outside lines E Table 230 1 includes termination of PT and PR designations for the Power Failure Transfer feature Any time a power failure or brownout occurs in the system central office Tip and Ring will be present at these terminals Cross connection between a CO tip T and ring R and an SLI EB ETUs PT and PR provides power failure transfer to a Single Line Telephone installed within the system 230 8 STATION EQUIPMENT When connecting Multiline Terminals DSS BLF consoles or CO Add On Modules to the MDF or IDF individually twisted two pair cabling must be used Refer to section 220 of this manual for specifications Table 230 1 for lead identifications and
610. x EDE 30 1 units CO Add On Module and or DSS BLF can be installed per System 220 4 DETERMINATION OF EQUIPMENT REQUIRED 1 Station Equipment Determine the type and the quantity of each station equipment being installed Types of station equipment available are as follows a ETE 6 1 TEL 6 line Multiline Terminal without LCD b ETE 6D 1 TEL 6 line Multiline Terminal with LCD c ETE 16D 1 TEL 16 line Multiline Terminal with LCD d 16 1 TEL 16 Line Multiline Terminal with directory LCD e Single Line Telephone without Message Wait Lamp f Single Line Telephone with Message Wait Lamp g EDE 30 1 DSS BLF console h EDE 30 1 CO Add On Module 2 Interface ETU To determine the quantity of required interface ETUS refer to Table 220 1 For your reference interface slot and port assignment numbers are shown in Figure 220 1 TABLE 220 2 shows the recommended quantities of ETUs The actual quantity for satisfactory service would vary depending on the amount of single line telephone modem pooling and voice mail traffic Figure 220 1 Interface Slot and Port Assignment Numbers 200 2 ND 20292 2 JULY 1987 Table 220 1 Number of Required Interface ETUs MAXIMUM ETUs CALCULATION PER SYSTEM 222421 Divide the number of CO PBX lines being used 4 Note 1 10 Note 7 4 Divide the number of Multiline Terminals CO Add On modules and DSS
611. xternal paging audio output level and impedence refer to Section 220 SPECIFICATIONS of this manual Lett Front view of ESE 328 1661 Figure 270 2 MOH Cable Shield Ground Views of the ESE 32B 1 CCU With a locally provided amplifier only one zone of paging and no background music the ECR E ETU is not required since the ECR E ETU is required to provide control of the external switching for applications with more than one zone of paging or background music When External Paging is answered by meet me answer the external paging audio circuit in the TSW and the control circuits the ECR E ETU are released to allow access for another page You should not connect the amplifier output directly to the ECR E ETU relay contacts Crosstalk between single and or outside lines and the paging circuit may occur 270 3 BACKGROUND MUSIC BGM Over External Speaker s Background music over external speaker s is available if the ECR E ETU is installed A BGM source an amplifier for BGM and external speaker s should be locally provided For connection information refer to Figure 270 3 B BGM Over Multiline Terminai Speakers Background music over the speaker of Multiline Terminals is available if the ECR E ETU is installed A maximum of two BGM sources can be connected to the phono jacks designated J2 and J3 provided on the ECR E ETU Shielded audio cable should be used for BGM audio connections For BGM sources
612. y to increment to the next station BLF 2 La E 3 each module maximum of 10 ETE 16D Multiline Terminals can be assigned the BLF feature however no more than 30 per system La E FIEL ELE E E i GENERAL INFORMATION BLF TERMINAL ASSIGNMENT i This area of the memory block allows or denys the station BLF Busy Lamp Field function onto specific ETE 16D Multiline Terminals Stations assigned indicate the station busy status via the LEDs i associated with function keys programmed for DSS ND 20293 CHAPTER3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 1C3 DSS BLF BUTTON ASSIGNMENT 10 11 12 DepressF13 Enterdevice number 1 6 forthe DSS BLF Forfeature assignment go to Step 8 Dialterminal virtual extension or station Depress L16 to enter feature mode See Note 2 and Feature and Station Appearance OPERATION lt AND gt DISPLAY Gooffline tofe fe J C XD TXTXT mojoj Depress 1 then To s s ET Ig 0 5 9151 TT 1 TT TT T LI 31515111 015151 IT iv aiclAiuir desired Example DSS 1 See Note 1 01515111 515 klei T 1 10141 hunting pilot number to be assigned Example Station 1
613. y DTR will not be ON 900 5 ND 20292 CHAPTER9 MARCH 1988 at the PC Communications Port COM PORT when the file is executed SECTION 930 PC8300 and PC 8231A INSTALLATION This section is written to provide a complete and comprehensive understanding of how to properly connect the 8300 portable computer and 8231 disk drive 930 1 PC 8300 POWER SUPPLY OPTIONS The PC 8300 has three main power source options AA batteries an optional AC adaptor rechargeable NiCad battery cartridge This section describes how to install each of these three power sources AA BATTERIES The 8300 can operate on four standard or alkaline AA batteries installed in the standard battery pack NiCad batteries cannot be used in the standard battery pack the optional NiCad battery cartridge is necessary if rechargable batteries are required Different types of batteries may be used in the main battery case The life span of different batteries will vary according to temperature and other conditions Alkaline Batteries Standard Batteries approximately 18 hours approximately 6 hours To install AA batteries follow these Steps 1 Turn the power switch to the OFF position refer to Figure 930 1 Figure 930 1 Power Switch Location 2 Place the PC 8300 face down on a level surface ensuring there is no pressure on the LCD 3 Placeone of your thumbs at point and the other thumb point B
614. y causes the display m to increment to the next code number fen Ce 3 3 Up to 2 OCC codes be set in each code table Ce TE 4 During step 6 the display may show any 72 current OCC code set to code 2 of the table x m chosen 3 Cd Ed d co LJ 23 Ho an i GENERAL INFORMATION TABLE OCC CODE ASSIGNMENT i i This area of the memory block is used to assign a maximum of 2 OCC codes to each code table This can force code restricted stations that are assigned tables with OCC codes to dial long distance calis on less expensive carriers 1 i i i i 1 300 187 ND 30392 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 3 9 RESTRICTION TABLE CODE ASSIGNMENT OPERATION AND Gooffline Depress F3 then F10 Depress F19 Dial table number to be assigned 01 32 Enter code number to be set 1 8 Example Code number 5 See Notes 1 and 2 Dial area code to be set Example Area code 516 Dial office code to be set Example Office code 777 Depress ENTER key See Note 3 DISPLAY LT INTE TXTX o e R A M is Y s R e s T r A B L E Ec T 0 111111 2 11111141 _ A s e N
615. y information on terminal equipment For any device j entered the memory block will display the station number DSS number port location and DSS BLE if one has been assigned No changes can be made in this memory block it is used for reference purposes only i i 1 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 MEMORY BLOCK 1E5 PORT INFORMATION OPERATION AND DISPLAY o r fe h xix PiRjojejRJA M 2 Depress Fi then F10 5 04 3 Depress 15 _ 4 Usedial pad and enter module number 1 4 where port is located Example Module 2 12 gt 11 5 Use dial pad and enter slot number 1 8 of chosen 11 1 0 module Example Slot 7 12 151 101 171 0 2 1514 10 1117 siri xt 6 Use dial pad and enter channel number 1 4 chosen slot Example Channel 3 See Note 1 7 Depressthe F W B W or TEL 4 keys to check any other ports desired 8 Depress SPKR key to go back on line 300 58 ND 20292 CHAPTER 3 SEPTEMBER 1988 G
616. y pressure towards you at the rear of the pedestal shown as B until the access panel moves toward you Remove the access panel discard or save for possible future use Figure 260 4 DTA E Unit D Before installing the DTA E unit its switches should be set for the proper assignment Refer to Table 260 2 The DTA E unit contains a 7 position DIP switch designated SW1 a slide switch designated SW2 and an 8 position DIP switch designated SW3 200 37 ND 20292 CHAPTER 2 JULY 1987 Table 260 2 DTA E Switch Assignment SWITCH SWITCH SWITCH INUMBER POSITION DESIGNATION FUNCTION SETTING DESCRIPTION DTR data DTR signal considered to be ON positive constantly terminal ready DTR signal considered to be ON only when actually present OFF from DTE RTS request to RTS signal considered to be ON constantly I a considered ON only when actually present from A EAE considered to be ON constantly Ps considered to be ON only when actually present from DTE TD Transmit BLU TD considered to be on constantly data TD considered to be on only when actually present from DTE PB Peripheral PB ring indicator signal from modem sent as DSR signal to PB ER busy modem when SW1 7 is set to the ON position ER Ehoriphersl signal from DTE sent DSR signal to DTE when SW1 7 ready is set to the ON position PR Polarity ON PB signal ring indic
617. yout set to the ON position to allow memory retention during power failure or brownout conditions Switch 2 designated SW2 is used to busy in out from the LCR E ETU allowing the ETU to be removed or inserted without powering down the system switch is 7 position dip switch used to select a baud rate in the range of 150 9600 This switch should normally be set to 4800 baud See Figure 720 2 DIP 1 CO 96 x 100 om 48 camm 24 conn 12 co 6 cong 3 com 1 5 ON OFF Figure 720 2 DIP 1 Baud Rate Switch LED green lights in conjunction with SW2 being in the ON position indicating that the LCR E ETU is receiving power A 25 pin RS 232C connector ended ribbon cable is provided to connect the PC 8300 portable computer which is used to enter data into the LCR E ETU memory A maximum of one LCR E ETU can be installed in a system into either OP1 OP2 or OP3 slots of any CCU 720 3 PORTABLE COMPUTER PC 8300 1 General The Electra Digital Telephone System uses the PC 8300 to program the LCR E ETU 2 Specifications For PC 8300 specifications refer to the operations manual provided with the PC 8300 3 Equipment Required The following equipment is required to install program and maintain the LCR E ETU 700 2 a PC 8300 b Floppy Disk Drive Unit PC 8231A PC 8298A FDD Cable included with the PC 8231A Floppy Disk Drive unit i d RS 232C Cable PC 8495A 01 e Paralle

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Rexel Standard L Folders  User Manual e-clear103 ND yag  Electrolux FH 64.1GD User's Manual  A User Guide to HyTech y 1 Introduction  Application example  Installation Operation Thermo Scientific ULT-80 & ULT-95  ZeroG Passive FAQs  取扱説明書  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file